PC-NRLF
PHILOSOPHY OF WDIfVlDUAL
GIFT OF
The Great
Psychological Crime
The Destructive Principle of Nature
In Individual Life
Edited by
FLORENCE HUNTLEY
Author of
"Harmonics of Evolution"
and
"The Dream Child"
HARMONIC SERIES
VOL. II
FIFTEENTH EDITION
CHICAGO, ILLS.
INDO-AMERICAN BOOK CO.
5707 So. Blvd.
1915
~BFf111
Copyright, 1902,
By Florence Huntley.
Published 1915
ADDRESSED
TO
THE PROGRESSIVE INTELLIGENCE OF THE AGE.
ClK Great pspcbological Crime
In three Pans
Modern Hypnotism
Spiritual Mediumship
Retributive Justice
PartT-moaernlfypnotUin
CHAPTERS
Psychological Crime I Page 7
New Definitions II " 8
Pertinent Admissions Ill " 11
What Is Hypnotism? IV ' 15
The Deadly Parallel V 23
Man and His Two Organisms VI " 88
Hypnotism and the Three Brains VII 43
Physiology and Pathology of Hypnotism VIII " 49
"Auto-Hypnotism" A Misnomer IX " 62
"Suggestion" A Lexicological Libel X " 68
Independent Suggestion A Fact XI " 72
Does Hypnotism Cure? XII " 77
A Violation of Natural Law ....XIII " 86
True Suggestion and Therapeutic Faith XIV 91
Post-Mortem Hypnotism XV " 107
What of the Hypnotist? XVI " 113
Pan TT-$piritual mediumsbip
CHAPTERS
A Risk and a Duty ', I 129
Other Definitions II " 132
Significant Admissions .Ill " 187
Facts Demonstrated IV " 143
Spiritual Mediumship Analyzed and Classified V *' 149
The Principle Involved VI " 161
'Automatic Physical Mediumship" Impossible VII " 178
CONTENTS
Neither a "Gift" Nor a "Power" VIII Page 197
The Destructive Principle in Operation IX ' 205
Mediumship and Morality X " 221
Mediumship and Martyrdom XI " 283
Mediumship and "Affinity" XII " 261
Mediumship and Emotionalism XIII " 256
Mediums and Their Motives XIV " 270
Mediumship and Insanity XV 278
Part ITT-KetrHwrtpe Justice
CHAPTERS
The Genesis of "Hell" : i 285
The Way of Death H 287
In Perspective HI 301
Individual Immortality IV ' 810
On What It Depends V " 813
Self-Control, the Application VI " 327
The Line of Despair and the Powers of Darkness VII " 380
The Law of Spiritual Gravity VIII " 885
Admonitions and Suggestions .IX " 349
Supplemeit theories oT "tbe Wist men"
The Genesis of Dogma, 391
Topics
Facts and Theories.
Differences and Distinctions.
Transmigration?
Metempsychosis.
Transubstantiation.
Reincarnation.
The Missing Link.
Evolution.
Conditional Immortality.
Inherent Immortality.
Psychical Reinvestiture.
The "Wages of Sin."
The "Second Death."
Individual Extinction.
Editor's Postscript 40X
C!K Great psychological Crime
Parti
Modern Hypnotism
CHAPTER I.
PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME.
I. A Psychological Crime is a crime against the intelli j
gent Soul or essential Entity of Man.
2. A Great Psychological Crime is such a crime against
the intelligent Soul of Man as deprives it of any of the
inalienable rights, privileges, benefits, powers or possibilities
with which God or Nature has invested it.
3. THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME is that crime
against the intelligent Soul or essential Entity of Man which
constitutes the central theme of this volume, wherein it is de-
fined, analyzed, illustrated and elucidated.
8 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER II.
N~EW DEFINITIONS.
A work of science or philosophy, to be of value, must be
free from ambiguity, and of the utmost exactness in its ter-
minology.
No more difficult task is laid upon a writer than that he
shall reach a satisfactory standard in either of these respects.
The most that will here be attempted is to approach such
a standard as closely as may be possible under all the cir-
cumstances, and then rely upon the intelligence and good
conscience of the reader to catch the real intent wherever
the expression or the terminology may prove to be at fault.
To accomplish the purpose of this work in the fullest
measure possible it is necessary that the exact meaning of
certain terms be specifically defined at the outset, as they
are hereinafter to be employed and understood. This is espe-
cially important, for the reason that through the indiscrimi-
nate manner in which writers have hitherto employed them
they have become involved in such ambiguity as to entirely
destroy their scientific value.
For the purpose of this work, therefore, special attention
is called to the following definitions:
HYPNOTIST. A person in the physical body who volun-
tarily controls the will, voluntary powers and sensory organ-
ism of another physically embodied person.
It will be observed that this definition has reference to a
certain relation existing between physically embodied persons
only; that is, between human beings. Attention is called to
this particular limitation, for the reason that upon it depends
an important distinction between a "hypnotist" and a "con-
trol," as the latter is defined in Part II of this volume.
SUBJECT. A physically embodied person whose will, vol-
untary powers and sensory organism are under the domina-
tion and subject to the control of a hypnotist.
HYPNOTISM. The process by and through which a hyp-
notist obtains, holds and exercises control of the will, volun-
NEW DEFINITIONS 9
tary powers and sensory organism of his subject. Also the
psychic relation which exists between the two parties during
the continuance of the hypnotic process.
HYPNOTIC ''SUGGESTION." A "suggestion" so-called
made by a hypnotist to his subject while the latter is under
the hypnotic control of the former.
INDEPENDENT SUGGESTION. A suggestion made by one
person to another while both are in full and complete control
of their own voluntary powers and rational faculties ; that is,
while neither is under hypnotic control. In this case each
person acts independently and of his own free will.
TELEPATHIC SUGGESTION. Independent suggestion made
by one person to another by mental processes alone, without
the aid of the usual physical means of communication.
As this term may be employed in contradistinction to the
term hypnotic "suggestion," it is important to note that tel-
epathic suggestion is independent, while hypnotic "suggestion"
is not.
MAGIC. The individual exercise and use of the natural
powers of the body, spirit and soul in controlling and apply-
ing the forces, activities and processes of Nature.
WHITE MAGIC. The right individual exercise and use of
the natural powers of the body, spirit and soul in controlling
and applying the forces, activities and processes of Nature in
such manner as to supplement and conform to Nature's Con-
structive Principle.
BLACK MAGIC. The wrong individual exercise and use
of the natural powers of the body, spirit and soul in con-
trolling and applying the forces, activities and processes of
Nature in such manner as to supplement and conform to
Nature's Destructive Principle.
In the framing of these definitions no attempt has been
made to conform to the specific limitations of any lexicog-
rapher or author. There is a good and valid reason for this
seeming repudiation of established authorities. It will be
found in the following brief explanation :
In the discussion and consideration of the particular sub-
jects in which these terms are of specific importance, writers,
10 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
more especially of the modern schools, seem to have become
confused. By reference to their writings it will be found
that the same term is often employed to express either a
diametrically opposite or a wholly different meaning. The
remarkable extent to which this ambiguous use of terms has
been carried in recent writings has done much to envelop the
whole subject of psychological and metaphysical study and
research in a dense cloud of mysticism.
The present intent, therefore, is to take these particular
words out from their environment of uncertainty and give
to them specific and definite meanings for the purposes of
this particular work. We are, therefore, not concerned with
the objections or criticisms which may, and very likely will,
be volunteered by other writers, nor does it appear either
necessary or desirable to enter the field of controversy for
the purpose of justifying the lexicology upon which these
definitions are based. It is sufficient if the reader alone shall
understand them. It is assumed that, whatever may be his
individual views upon the various phases of the subject to be
considered, he is nevertheless honest in his desire to under-
stand the exact meaning and intent of the writer.
In order that he may be successful in this undertaking,
he is therefore asked, for the purposes of this particular
work, to accept these definitions without qualification.
PERTINENT ADMISSIONS 11
CHAPTER III.
PERTINENT ADMISSIONS.
A judge before whom a cause is to be tried at court is
always pleased if opposing counsel will come together and
submit to him what is known in law as an agreed statement
of facts. This saves the time, labor and energy of the court
and counsel which would otherwise be consumed in impan-
eling a jury, examining witnesses, taking testimony, eliminat-
ing from the record that which is irrelevant, immaterial and
incompetent, and sifting out the facts which have a legitimate
and proper bearing upon the subject matter of the case under
consideration. This leaves nothing to be done but determine
what is the law that covers the particular facts agreed upon.
In the matter here to be adjudicated it is desirable, as
far as may be possible, that the reader occupy the position
of the court. Even though he may, perchance, be prejudiced
in favor of or against one side or the other, this fact will
not disqualify him, as it might in a trial at court. Indeed,
the ethics to be observed in the present instance are so free
from restrictions that he may, without offense or impropriety,
act as judge and opposing counsel at the same time.
In any event, it is here agreed in advance that whatever
may be his present convictions or prejudices, no motion will
be made for a change of venue nor appeal taken from his de-
cision. It is fair to assume that his honesty and love of
justice will prompt him to render his decision in strict con-
formity with the law and the facts, and this is all that could
be asked of the most open-minded and unbiased judge.
In accordance with the foregoing suggestions the follow-
ing admissions are offered as a part of the record upon which
the questions hereinafter raised are to be tried and deter-
mined. They are alleged by all hypnotists to be facts, and for
the purpose of avoiding all unnecessary controversy concern-
ing them it is preferred to here admit them as such. It then
but remains to determine the law applicable to these par-
ticular facts:
12 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
1. It is admitted that hypnotism is a fact.
2. It is admitted that there are numerous methods or
processes by means of which it is possible for a hypnotist to
obtain control of the will, voluntary powers and sensory
organism of his subject.
3. It is admitted that a hypnotist who thus has control
of his subject can, under certain conditions, produce a very
wide range of phenomena which are usually classified as
hypnotic.
4. It is admitted that through the effects of hypnotism
a subject may, for the time being, be made unconscious of
physical pain. This fact is known and quite generally ac-
knowledged. It has been often demonstrated in medical
schools, colleges, clinics and hospitals throughout the
country.
5. It is admitted that very painful surgical operations
may be performed upon hypnotized subjects without conscious
physical suffering. This has been demonstrated so often that
it has come to be quite generally known and acknowledged.
6. It is admitted that by hypnotic "suggestion," so-called,
a subject may be temporarily relieved from some physical
disabilities, and that some habits of long standing may be
thus temporarily overcome.
7. It is admitted that a very large percentage of men,
women and children everywhere might, under favorable con-
ditions therefor, be made subjects of hypnotic control.
8. It is admitted that a very large percentage of men,
women and children would be able, with instruction and
practice, to develop some degree of hypnotic power.
9. It is admitted that hypnotic power may be so used
as to command wealth, luxury, notoriety and the subserv-
iency of many people. This has been demonstrated all too
often, and the demonstrations still continue.
10. It is admitted that the practice of hypnotism is a
most fascinating diversion, and can be made to afford much
interest and amusement to those who are without conscience,
and those who are ignorant of the laws, principles, forces,
activities and processes involved.
-
PERTINENT ADMISSIONS 13
11. It is admitted that the mischievous and destructive
effects of hypnotic control do not generally manifest them-
selves at once to the observer nor to the subject himself.
12. It is admitted that there are some hypnotists who
are honest, and who would not knowingly and intentionally
engage in any practice which does violence to a primary
and fundamental law of individual life, growth and develop-
ment.
13. It is admitted that much has been written by stu-
dents, investigators, hypnotists and men of professional stand-
ing, on the general subject of hypnotism, which is at variance
with the position taken in this work.
The impression made by these admissions will very largely
depend upon the character of the intelligence to which they
are submitted, the nature and scope of his personal experi-
ences, and the measure, liberality and value of his educa-
tional training.
If he should chance to be a professional hypnotist, or a
sympathetic student of hypnotism, or a mere believer in the
merit of the hypnotic process, he might, perhaps, obtain the
impression that his position is not only admitted, but also
justified and approved. If so, he is asked to follow the sub-
ject matter through to the end before he renders his final
decision and judgment.
If a lawyer, or any other person acquainted with the logi-
cal determination of difficult problems, he cannot fail to see
that these admissions furnish the only substantial basis upon
which the errors, mistakes, fallacies and misconceptions of
hypnotism may be successfully disclosed and corrected.
Whoever the reader may be, by whatever scientific or
philosophic convictions he may be influenced, he cannot fail
to understand and appreciate the following facts, viz.:
1. There is no intention, desire nor disposition on the
part of the writer to deny, ignore, evade or minimize any
of the relevant and material facts which are in any manner
pertinent to the subject under consideration.
2. That an honest and earnest effort will be made to
deal with the subject in a fair and impartial manner, and
U THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
with courteous consideration for the sensibilities of all those
who may hold opinions, beliefs, convictions or prejudices at
variance with the results hereinafter obtained.
It is hoped that Part I of this volume will command the
especial attention and thoughtful consideration of physicians
and surgeons, hypnotists and hypnotic students and subjects,
investigators and students of psychic phenomena, and all
liberal minded and intelligent students and thinkers who are
not bound by the subtle power of scientific bigotry, dogmat-
ism, prejudice or personal interest.
WHAT IS HYPNOTISM? 15
CHAPTER IV.
WHAT Is HYPNOTISM?
Hypnotism is the process by and through which one per-
son called a hypnotist obtains, holds and exercises control
of the will, voluntary powers and sensory organism of an-
other person called a subject. It also includes the psychic
relation which exists between the two persons during the
continuance of the hypnotic process.
It is well understood in advance that this definition will
hardly meet the approval of every hypnotist or writer upon
the subject, for reasons which will become more apparent as
we proceed. In anticipation of the objections which are likely
to be offered against it a clear analysis of its exact meaning
will here be given. This is deemed advisable for the reason
that it is of first importance to fix in mind the exact scope,
as well as the expressed limitations of the definition, before
proceeding to a consideration of the subject in chief.
The definition involves the following propositions, viz.:
1. A hypnotist controls the Will (as well as the volun-
tary powers and sensory organism) of his subject during the
continuance of the hypnotic process.
2. Within the meaning of the definition hypnotism in-
volves a relationship between at least two persons.
3. One of these persons is in a state of subjection to the
Will of the other. Therefore one dominates or controls and
the other is dominated or controlled.
4. The limitations of the definition entirely exclude
what is commonly known as "Auto-Hypnotism," or "Self-
Hypnotism." This particular subject will be considered in
another chapter.
It will be observed from the foregoing analysis of the
definition that no attempt is here made to conform to any of
the generally accepted theories of hypnotism heretofore pro-
mulgated by our western writers and acknowledged authori-
ties. The reader is entitled to know the reason for this
seeming disregard of "authority" in a matter of such vital
16 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
importance. It is equally due the writer that he shall not be
subject to the charge of discourtesy in the treatment of his
theme.
In view of all the interests involved, the following brief
explanation would seem to be both pertinent and necessary:
1. "Hypnotism" is a word of comparatively modern ori-
gin. It was first employed by Dr. Braid, an eminent English
author and student of psychic phenomena. It seems to have
been adopted by him for the express purpose of marking a
distinction between his own theory and that of Mesmer, with
whom he disagreed.
Those who are familiar with the subject are already aware
that Mesmer advocated what is commonly known as the
"Magnetic" theory. He endeavored to establish as a scien-
tific fact that magnetism is at the basis of all phenomena
produced under the process which he invoked, and which
afterwards came to be known as "Mesmerism." All his
methods of operation, both in the matter of inducing the
Mesmeric sleep and in the production of psychic phenomena,
were made to conform to his theory of magnetism.
Dr. Braid, however, discovered that the condition of arti-
ficial sleep may be induced by simply causing the subject to
gaze steadily at a bright object, without employing any of
the magnetic methods of Mesmer. He therefore concluded
that Mesmer was mistaken in assuming that magnetism is at
the basis of the process, or, in fact, had anything to do with
it. In order to give to his own theory a name which should
properly distinguish it from the magnetic theory of Mesmer,
he adopted the term "Hypnotism." From that time to the
present the word has been in common use, and is now the
word most generally employed by all the leading authorities.
2. Since the time of Dr. Braid, however, a flood of light
has been thrown upon the subject by the investigations which
have been carried on by eminent men of science in both this
country and Europe. Many of the facts have been carefully
classified in the hope of discovering a fundamental principle
underlying all phenomena of a psychic nature.
Quite independently, however, it has been known by the
WHAT IS HYPNOTISM? 17
School of Natural Science for many centuries that all such
phenomena, under whatever name designated, naturally divide
themselves into two classes, upon what may be appropriately
termed the principle of causation.
The first of these two classes includes all such phenomena
which are produced while the will of the subject is under
control of an operator whom we will name, in accordance
with the definition, a hypnotist.
The second class is confined to those which occur inde-
pendently of hypnotic control.
The first class falls strictly within the meaning of the
definition at the head of this chapter, while the second is
entirely excluded. And this is the exact purpose of the defini-
tion.
The distinction is of the most vital importance. It goes
to the very essence of the subject, and involves a principle
which lies at the foundation of all ethics, as well as of life
itself.
The vital necessity for this distinction will be better under-
stood and more fully appreciated when it is recalled that our
modern writers and authorities generally seem to have over-
looked it entirely, or noted it in such manner as to suggest
its lack of importance.
3. The term "Hypnotism," by the indiscriminate manner
in which it has been employed, has been made to include
both classes of phenomena, as well as the various processes
by and through which they are produced. This entire lack of
scientific discrimination is more conspicuously noticeable in
the writings of our modern western authorities.
It must be apparent to every intelligent student whose
attention is called to it that such a lack of discrimination is
both unscientific and unfortunate. Indeed, the first prerequi-
site of all progressive work in the field of exact science is
a terminology free from ambiguity. Without this confusion
and chaos are inevitable.
A single illustration will be sufficient. Suppose, for in-
stance, that instead of the words "positive" and "negative,"
with meanings exactly opposite, our scientists had employed
18 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
but the one word "positive," to express either meaning or
both, what would have been the effect upon the science of
our age?
Or, suppose we employed to-day but a single term to
signify "fact," "fiction," "truth," "falsehood" ; is there anyone
who could possibly hold that such a substitution would be
admissible ?
Most assuredly not. Such a course would introduce into
our language confusion, ambiguity and contradiction to such
an extent as to make scientific expression an impossibility,
and destroy the foundation upon which rests all our progress
in both ethics and religion.
The logic of the situation is beyond all question. The
word "Hypnotism" cannot, with propriety, be employed to
define two separate, distinct and radically unlike processes.
Neither can it be made properly to cover two different classes
of phenomena which are the results of wholly different
causes. Any attempt to do so must necessarily result in still
further intensifying the mysticism in which this subject has
already become involved.
The question then arises as to the propriety of using the
word at all. That is to say, has it become so irrevocably in-
volved in uncertainty and confusion as to destroy its avail-
ability or usefulness as a scientific term in the future? This
is indeed an important question. Any view we may take of
it discovers difficulties in our way. We can scarcely hope
to avoid them entirely. Our only alternative, therefore, is
to overcome them as far as may be possible.
In the accomplishment of this result two different methods
of procedure suggest themselves, viz.:
1. With perfect consistency we might eliminate the word
entirely, upon the theory that its past promiscuous and un-
fortunate associations wholly unfit it for service in the
future. In this event, however, it would then become neces-
sary to invent or adopt other terms and give to them definite
scientific meanings. This is never desirable so long as it is
possible to avoid such a course.
2. On the other hand, we might continue to employ the
WHAT IS HYPNOTISM? 19
term, but in so doing limit its meaning in such manner and
to such extent as to divest it of all its present elements of
ambiguity and give to it an exact and scientific significance.
This latter method would appear to be the least objection-
able, all things duly considered, and has therefore been
adopted. The term will therefore be employed in this work
and its meaning will be limited to the process and the rela-
tion involved in the definition at the beginning of this chap-
ter. It is therefore important that special note be taken of
the limitations referred to. The value and importance of
this suggestion will soon become apparent.
It is a fact, with which every student who is at all
familiar with the literature of the subject is acquainted, that
the leading exponents of hypnotism are widely at variance
upon almost every essential phase of the subject. They dis-
agree in their methods of "inducing" the hypnotic state or
condition. They differ widely in their theories as to the
nature of the process in operation during the continuance of
the hypnotic state. They are at variance as to the forces'
employed in hypnotic processes. They cannot agree as to
the nature of the relation which exists between the hypnotist
and his subject during the continuance of the hypnotic state
or condition. They contradict each other in their efforts to
define the hypnotic process. And finally, they disagree as
to the natural results of hypnotism upon the subject.
Indeed, it would appear that they unanimously agree in
but a single phase of the subject, namely, in ignoring the
fundamental principle of individual life which underlies the
entire problem.
This statement of their inharmonious views and theories
upon the basic principles of the subject is not made in the
spirit of criticism. On the contrary, this general confusion
and conflict of opinion is interpreted as a most healthful in-
dication of future possibilities. It very strongly indicates the
spirit of independence in which each investigator has ap-
proached his subject, and the strength of purpose with which
he has made his investigations. It indicates that each one
has entered upon his task fearlessly, unfettered by profes-
20 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
sional ethics and free from the prejudices of conventional
thought. It is to be accepted as a guaranty that each has
studied such facts as he has been able to discover, and has
drawn his independent conclusions from them. If his deduc-
tions have been at variance with those of his fellows, he has
declared them nevertheless and has done his best to maintain
them.
In the midst of this general disagreement and the spirit
of controversy and criticism which it has developed, whoever
shall venture to enter the arena must be prepared to receive
or parry the blows and thrusts of many assailants. For, what-
ever attitude he may assume, it is safe to predict that he will
be compelled either to defend himself or retreat.
And so it is anticipated that the hosts who have broken
spears and javelins and lances over each other's heads in
the battle royal which they have waged among themselves
will declare an armistice for the express purpose of punish-
ing anyone who may venture to invade the field or enter the
lists from a new quarter.
In other words, it is here anticipated that the definition
of hypnotism at the beginning of this chapter will be re-
sented by almost every professional hypnotist and writer
upon the subject of hypnotism throughout the country who
shall give this work the courtesy of a thoughtful reading.
The limitations which have been set about the word, as it is
there defined, raise a vital issue with many of the leading
western authorities upon the subject. This issue is raised
with full knowledge of its importance, and with the delib-
erate purpose of pressing it to trial and final judgment before
the bar of the reader's best intelligence.
It is maintained by some of the leading authorities in our
own country, as well as in Europe, that the relation between
hypnotist and subject does not involve a question of either
domination on the part of the hypnotist or subjection on the
part of the subject. By these writers it is held that the will
and voluntary powers of the subject are never, at any time,
under control of the hypnotist.
The direct question to be considered, therefore, is whether
WHAT IS HYPNOTISM? 21
a hypnotist, under any circumstances, controls the will or
voluntary powers of his subject.
By reference back to the definition and to the analysis
which follows thereafter, it will be observed that there is no
uncertainty as to the position here taken. The purpose of
the definition is, in truth, to raise this issue as directly as
may be possible. For this reason it is here again declared
without qualification that a hypnotist does control the will
and voluntary powers of his subject during the continuance
of the hypnotic relation established between them. It is at
the same time admitted that this declaration raises a vital
issue which goes to the very essence of the subject under
consideration.
The importance of the issue here defined is such that its
presentation is reserved for another chapter.
22 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER V.
THE DEADLY PARALLEL.
Does a hypnotist control the will or voluntary powers of
his subject during the continuance of the hypnotic relation?
Upon the results of absolute, scientific demonstration it is
again declared that he does.
Moreover, in so far only as this is true does hypnotism
exist at any time. In just so far as the will or voluntary
power of the subject is dominated or controlled by the hypno-
tist, in just that degree is the process invoked and the rela-
tion established hypnotic in character. And conversely, in
just so far as the will or voluntary power of an individual
is under his own independent control, to that degree is he
free from hypnotic control.
As previously stated, the School of Natural Science has
demonstrated the truth of the foregoing declarations in such
manner as to leave not the least possible room for doubt or
uncertainty. It would therefore be entirely admissible to
rest the case upon their demonstration and throw the burden
of proof upon whomsoever may desire to controvert it.
This position is not only admissible, but would be equally
desirable if it were not for the possibility, as well as the
probability, that there may be interested parties who are not
prepared to accept the authority of this School as sufficient
or its demonstrations as scientifically conclusive. To such
as these other evidence would be necessary. For the benefit
of any who may, perchance, make such a demand, other evi-
dence will be furnished of such a character as to meet the
requirements of the most hostile opponent or incredulous
skeptic.
Under the law of evidence it is held that the "admissions
of a party against his own interests" are to be regarded as
evidence of the highest character. In practice such evidence
is generally considered to be as nearly conclusive as any
that can be adduced.
For illustration : Suppose a party is on trial charged with
THE DEADLY PARALLEL 23
the commission of some public offense. At the trial of the
case he is placed on the witness stand and of his own voli-
tion admits that the charge against him is true. In such case
his free and voluntary admission is held to be evidence of
the strongest possible character.
This is precisely the character of evidence to be intro-
duced upon the question here at issue. Various eminent hyp-
notists all over the world have gone upon the witness stand in
the trial of this question, and have there voluntarily offered
their testimony to the world for what it is worth. They have
testified from the standpoint of "parties in interest."
They have been publicly accused of the serious offense of
practicing a profession and invoking processes which in-
volve the control of the will or voluntary powers of their sub-
jects. If this accusation is sustained it means slavery of
the most unhappy character. The human soul and human
reason protest against slavery. Public conscience condemns
it. Every moral sentiment or lofty emotion resents it. There-
fore these men stand before the world charged with the
offense of practicing an art which has for its purpose the
enslavement of the souls of their fellow-men. But the crime
of which they stand accused before the bar of public con-
science is not that of mere physical slavery. It is the slavery
of the human soul.
It has been necessary for them to defend themselves. The
only defense possible in a case of this nature is a general
denial of the charge. This defense has been entered by
them, and the issue is therefore squarely joined. They deny
the charge. In other words, they plead "Not guilty." They
allege by way of defense that the processes of hypnotism do
not involve the control of the will or voluntary powers of
the subject in the least degree. This is the only possible de-
fense they could make without seriously jeopardizing their
cause at the very outset.
Unfortunately, however, for the position they have thus
assumed, and with equally good fortune for the cause of
truth, they have been compelled to make certain admissions
in their testimony which are fatal to their entire cause. It
24: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
is the purpose of this chapter to call attention to these fatal
admissions. It is hoped and believed that this may be done
in such manner as to avoid all offense to the sensibilities of
those who in good faith have advocated the cause of hypno-
tism. To do this the several witnesses will be allowed to tell
their stories in their own way, and the reader will be asked to
simply note the admissions as the case proceeds.
The first witness called is John Duncan Quackenbos,
M. D., Professor Emeritus of Columbia University, who is
also one of the principal defendants on trial. Prof. Quack-
enbos has for many years been considered one of the ablest
exponents of hypnotism in all its varied phases in this coun-
try. His reputation for both intelligence and honesty seems
to be above suspicion. His writings are among the acknowl-
edged authorities of our western world, and may be found
in our leading public and private libraries. His prominent
position as a public educator is one which entitles him to a
respectful hearing. His experience covers many years of
active practice and demonstration and has been of such a
character as to enable him to speak with as much assurance
as any defendant in the case. Indeed, his testimony may be
regarded as that of an expert, from his point of view.
It is due him, as well as his many students and friends
all over the country, to state that the moral tone of his writ-
ings is above reproach. No one can read his works without
a feeling of respect for the man himself, as well as for the
order of his intelligence. It is for this very reason, how-
ever, that his public utterances upon this question are all the
more dangerous.
His testimony, here to be presented, is embodied in a
work entitled ''Hypnotism in Mental and Moral Culture."
This is his most recent work, and therefore represents his
best knowledge and most mature judgment upon the question
at issue.
At page 268 he says :
"Will-power has nothing to do with hypnotic suggestion, neither
the will-power of the operator nor that of the subject. Paralysis of
the will, which is the bete noire of the popular mind, is inconceivable.
The mesmerizee (subject) is inspired or empowered, as the case may
THE DEADLY PARALLEL 25
be, and works out his own salvation in his own objective life with-
out conscious effort of any kind. . . . Above all, he is in no
degree subject to another Will."
This brief quotation from the concluding chapter of his
book is sufficient to clearly define his position upon the par-
ticular question here under consideration. It will be ob-
served that he unqualifiedly holds that a hypnotist does not
control the will or voluntary powers of his subject. It is for
this reason that he is made a party defendant. For the same
reason he is called as a witness in this case.
But while he is on the witness stand we have the right,
and it is not only our right but our duty as well, to carefully
weigh and consider all the testimony he has offered. In this
manner only shall we be able to do him full justice as "a
party in interest."
The opening sentence of his testimony is at page 3 of the
same work and reads as follows:
"Hypnotism, or hypnotic sleep, implies a mind condition in which
the mental action and the will-power of a sensitive subject are under
the control of an operator who has induced the state."
Compare this, his definition of hypnotism, with his subse-
quent declaration above quoted, that "will-power has nothing
to do with hypnotic suggestion, neither the will-power of the
operator nor that of the subject." Then lay it down by the
side of his further declaration that "above all, he (the subject)
is in no degree subject to another will." We are then led to
ask what could possibly induce any man of intelligence to
voluntarily place himself in so compromising and so equivocal
a position before an enlightened and truth-loving public.
The importance of these conflicting declarations entitles
us to set them in parallel columns for the purpose of more
careful analysis and more critical study. Here they are.
Examine them carefully:
Page 3.
"Hypnotism, or hypnotic sleep,
implies a mind condition in which
the mental action and the will-
power of a sensitive subject are
under the control of an operator
who has induced the state."
Page 268.
"Will-power has nothing to do
with hypnotic suggestion, neither
the will-power of the operator
nor that of the subject. * * *
Above all, he (the subject) is in
no degree subject to another will."
Again, we are constrained to ask what motive, or double
26 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
motive, could prompt any man of intelligence and moral
perception to thus freely and voluntarily impeach, discredit
and utterly destroy the value of his own testimony in a mat-
ter of such importance to himself as well as to the world in
general ?
To one whose life and work have made the study of the
human mind in all its activities, moods and motives a neces-
sity, there is but one answer, namely a conflict between ac-
knowledged truth and personal interest. This, however, does
not necessarily imply deliberate dishonesty nor intentional
deception, for the influence of personal interest is often so
powerful in its effect upon the intelligence as entirely to ob-
scure the application of the most exact and definite knowl-
edge.
When the author above quoted took his pen and proceeded
to deliver his message to the world he was full of his subject.
His long experience and study entitled him to feel that he
had acquired something of value to his fellow-men. The
spirit of truth and the honest desire to serve mankind prompted
him to write. With no particular thought of himself, nor
of the necessity for his subsequent vindication, justification
or defense, but with a clear consciousness of the truth alone,
based upon his own personal and repeated demonstrations, and
an untroubled conscience, the first words he penned were
these :
"Hypnotism, or hypnotic sleep, implies a mind condition in which
the mental action and the will-power of a sensitive subject are under
the control of an operator who has induced the state."
Upon the basis of this (his own definition of hypnotism),
which is exact, explicit and true as far as it goes, he then
proceeds for more than 250 pages to reiterate, elaborate, elu-
cidate and expound the subject of hypnotism in a clear and
forceful manner. But when he is almost ready to lay down
his pen and say, "It is finished," his attention is called to the
fact that the "popular mind" condemns the practice of hyp-
notism on the ground that it involves a "paralysis of the
will."
His intelligence at once recognizes the fact that "paraly-
THE DEADLY PARALLEL 27
sis of the will" is a most undesirable achievement. He is
therefore compelled, as an honest and intelligent gentleman,
to observe that the will and voluntary powers of every
intelligent individual constitute the very foundation of
his individual responsibility. He knows that individual
responsibility is the very corner stone of the entire social and
moral structure. It therefore occurs to him that any process,
practice or profession which involves a paralysis of the will
must be deemed a menace to the individual, and therefore in-
imical to the highest interests of society and morals.
He therefore feels that his profession and practice, as well
as the processes and forces he employs, are under the ban of
suspicion. For the time being he forgets the meaning of his
definition and realizes only that it is incumbent upon him
to defend himself and his profession from the accusing atti-
tude of the "popular mind."
He sees that there is but one method by which he can do
this. That is by an unqualified denial of the justice of pop-
ular sentiment and popular judgment. There is nothing left
for him to do but reverse them. It is then that he declares
with all the earnestness of an injured party that "Paralysis
of the will, which is the bete noire of the popular mind, is
inconceivable."
It is then that personal interest overrides the power of
acknowledged truth. For the time being his opening defini-
tion and all his work based thereon pass from his memory
and their meaning from his consciousness. With all his fac-
ulties and powers awake and actively engaged in an effort to
combat the "popular mind," he is, for the time being, utterly
oblivious to the fact that by his own admissions he stands
condemned. Then it is that he pens "The Deadly Parallel."
Had he been content to rest his case upon its merit, he
would have stood before the world a notable exception, and
must then have challenged the admiration of all honest and
intelligent men.
To fully appreciate the overwhelming manner in which
the testimony of this defendant must stand as his own most
powerful accuser, it is necessary to read his book through
28 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
from beginning to end. A few brief quotations, however,
will be sufficient to illustrate the complete manner in which
he has "turned state's evidence" in the case at issue.
At pages 5 and 6 he says:
"It has long been known that a human being can be thrown into
an artificial sleep, during which he sustains such a relation to an
operator who has induced it that he is sensitive only to what the
operator tells him he is sensitive to, and is wholly subject, so far as
his mental operations and physical actions are concerned, to the
volition of his hypnotist. A hypnotized person sees, hears, tastes,
smells and feels what the operator says that he sees, hears, tastes, smells
and feels and nothing else. For the time being his individuality is
surrendered to the person who has hypnotized him." .
Special attention is called to the admission herein con-
tained to the effect that the subject "is wholly subject, so
far as his mental operations and physical actions are con-
cerned, to the volition of his hypnotist." In this connection
also let it be remembered that "volition" is nothing more nor
less than the "active Will." Then note the parallel :
Page 5.
"He is wholly subject, so far
as his mental operations and phy-
Page 268.
"Above all, he is in no degree
subject to another will."
sical actions are concerned, to the
volition of his hypnotist."
Comment is unnecessary.
Again, at page u, after a most vivid portrayal of the
process by which he proceeds to obtain control of his sub-
ject, he says:
"And in a few moments a profound breath is taken, the lids
close, . . . and I know that I have been given possession of
that soul for such time as I may prescribe, to do with it what I will."
Once more we are compelled to note the parallel :
Page 268.
"Above all, he is in no degree
subject to another will."
Page u.
"I know that I have been given
possession of that soul for such a
time as I may prescribe to do
with it what I will."
And so we might proceed throughout his entire work, and
upon almost every page produce cumulative evidence of the
same general character. It is only when he finds it neces-
sary to meet the accusing attitude of the "popular mind"
that he turns from the logic of his own experiments and
demonstrations. But the "Deadly Parallel" has done its work.
THE DEADLY PARALLEL 29
Much more space and consideration have been given to
the testimony of this witness than would otherwise have
been done but for the following reasons :
i. He is a conspicuous educator of acknowledged ability
and a professor in one of the leading universities of the
country.
2.. He is a modern writer of the Occidental school, whose
interest in the subject under consideration has kept him
before the public mind in a most conspicuous manner.
3. So far as known to the writer he is a man of clean
moral life and excellent professional standing.
4. He stands as an acknowledged authority upon the
subject of hypnotism among his western contemporaries.
5. His long experience as a professional man, together
with his many years of active investigation and practice as
a hypnotist entitle him to speak with as much assurance
as any writer of his time who has written upon this subject.
6. His treatment of the subject under consideration is
identical in all its essential features with that of other leading
western authorities.
7. The fatal contradictions in which he has involved him-
self in his efforts to justify the practice of hypnotism are of
the same general nature as are those of every other authority
who has denied that the will or voluntary power of the sub-
ject is under control of his hypnotist.
8. He therefore stands as a typical defendant in this case,
possessing the highest character and attainments, and for
these reasons is in position to set up as strong a defense as
can be made.
With as much brevity as the importance of the subject will
admit, the testimony of other authorities will now be pre-
sented.
From a work entitled "Eastern Manners," by Jameson,
the following quotation concerning the effects of the "Evil
Eye" as he has chosen to designate the hypnotic gaze is
reproduced. He says :
"The first effect of the malignant glance is to deprive the indi-
viduals subject to it of the capability to exercise their will. They are
30 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
brought under the absolute control of the possessor of the 'Evil
Eye.'"
There can be no mistaking the meaning of this quotation.
It stands as another unqualified admission of the fact that
the hypnotist does control the will or voluntary powers of his
subject.
One of the most useful works of reference, perhaps, to
be found, covering this subject, is entitled "Private Instruc-
tions in the Science and Art of Organic Magnetism" by Miss
Chandos Leigh Hunt, of London, England. This is also a
comparatively recent publication. Its special value, in this
connection, is in the fact that the author has supplied us with
a literal reproduction of the separate and distinct methods or
processes employed by some fifty or more of the leading
hypnotists, from whose writings she quotes extensively.
As plainly as words can be employed in the expression of
intelligent ideas, these various authors have only described
their differing methods of reaching the same result. But
what is the result reached? It is nothing less than the sub-
jection of the will or voluntary powers of the subject to the
domination and control of the operator, whom we name the
"hypnotist."
In describing her own method of obtaining such control,
she leads to the point at which the subject becomes unable to
open his eyes, and then she says:
"Being unable to open them by his volition" (which is only another
way of saying that he no longer possesses the will or voluntary power
to do so), "open his eyes, . . . making him fix his eyes upon
yours, and draw him toward you by drawing-passes. He is now con-
ti oiled, and you may proceed at once to the production of experimental
phenomena."
Note the expression, "He is now controlled," etc. There
can be no possible mistake as to the meaning of these words.
They state the fact in all its simplicity and truth. He is in-
deed "controlled."
A little further on, at page 31, she says:
"When you are operating upon a subject, you must Will that he
cannot open his eyes," etc.
At page 32 she further says:
"The Magnetic-Will must be employed. . . . You will then
THE DEADLY PARALLEL 31
be able to draw him towards you, provided you fully express your
Witt," etc.
More than one hundred similar expressions may be found
in her "Instructions," each of which clearly and unqualifiedly
indicates but one fixed and definite purpose on the part of
the hypnotist, and that is to obtain control of the will or
voluntary powers of her subject. The process which she so
cleverly describes merely discloses the several objective steps
by which this one purpose is accomplished.
Dr. Gregory says:
"It is necessary to act with a cool, collected mind, and a firm
Will, while the patient (subject) is perfectly passive," etc.
It is also said of Dr. Darling:
"A very large proportion is found, on examination, to be more or
less subject to his Will. . . .In like manner he controls the
Will, so that the subject is compelled to perform a certain act," etc.
Professor Gregory says of Mr. Lewis:
"He adds certain gestures and passes, all of which are most deeply
imbued with that energetic concentration of the Will which I have
never seen so strongly developed," etc.
Captain James says:
"It is recommended that the operator should concentrate his ener-
gies, and earnestly Will" etc.
Kluge says:
"The Magnetist should make that pass with all the force and
continuance of Will, as if pressing strongly upon the patient," etc.
Baron Dupotet says:
"To establish the art of magnetizing, all then consists in recog-
nizing at first the properties (fixed and unalterable) of the Magnetic
agent, then all these wherewith we can ourselves invest it by the
imprint of our Will.
"Directing a continuously fixed look upon a subject with pre-
meditated intention, and after some minutes upon another person, it
is possible to cause, by strong Will, the subject to become furious
against that person.
"It is by the immaterial power of the soul that all these faculties
are brought into play; it is by this exorbitant Will that man possesses,
that he can violently enter, by the energy of his Will, into the soul
of another man, and install himself there. . . . The simple Will
can profoundly overthrow the physical, intellectual and moral organ-
ization of another man."
The following definition of hypnotism may be found in
Foster's Encyclopaedic Medical Dictionary:
"An abnormal state into which some persons may be thrown
... by the exercise of another person's Will; characterized by
32 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
suspension of the Will and consequent obedience to the prompting
of 'suggestions' from without."
Dr. James R. Cocke, of our own country, in his recent
work on the subject of hypnotism, at page 9, says:
"Briefly, then, hypnotism may be induced by impressing profoundly
the mentality through all the senses. The intellect, the reason, the
Will, the emotions, are all children of the senses."
Page 12:
"I had one man tell me that he did it all for amusement, and
that he was not in any way under my control, but I soon convinced
him of his mistake by hypnotizing him one day and telling him that
he had drunk a number of flies with his cup of coffee, for he im-
mediately vomited his whole breakfast/*
Page 13:
"I have recently made a very curious experiment in order to de-
termine whether a person paralysed by hypnotic suggestion would act
in the same way as he would if he were paralyzed from organic dis-
ease of the brain."
Italics supplied by the author.
Page 21 :
"The hypnotized subject will become physically blind at the op-
erator's Will."
Page 35 :
"The moralists who are careful of human dignity, and who are
preoccupied with the thought of such great possibilities of danger,
are in the right. They are right to condemn a practice which may
rob a man of his free will without the possibility of resistance on
his part; they would be a thousand times right if the remedy were
not side by side with the evil."
Particular attention is called to the admission that the
practice of hypnotism is one "which may rob a man of his
free will without the possibility of resistance on his part."
This confesses all that has been claimed thus far. The con-
cluding clause of the quotation which suggests that a remedy
is "side by side with the evil," involves an assumption, pure
and simple, which the following pages will fully demonstrate.
Dr. Luys, of the Charity Hospital of Paris, in his Clinical
Lectures, says:
"You can not only oblige this defenseless being (hypnotized sub-
ject), who is incapable of opposing the slightest resistance, to give
from hand to hand anything you choose, but you can also make him
sign a promise, draw up a bill of exchange, or any kind of agree-
ment. You can make him write an holographic will (which accord-
ing to the French law, would be valid), which he will hand over to
you, and of which he will never know the existence. He is ready
THE DEADLY PARALLEL 33
to fulfill the minutest legal formalities, and will do so with a calm,
serene and natural manner, which would deceive the most expert law
officers. The somnambulist will not hesitate either, you may be sure,
to make a denunciation, or bear false witness. They are, I repeat,
the passive instruments of your Will"
Prof. De Lawrence, in his recent work on "Hypnotism,"
says:
Page 77 :
"There is a way in which a shrewd hypnotist can succeed in putting
people under the influence who really do not care to be hypnotized."
Page 78:
"The author has, during his years of experience, discovered and
successfully used a method by which he has succeeded in hypnotizing
a great many people against their will, who had never been operated
on before."
Page 79:
"You can then proceed by a few well chosen suggestions to put
him dead asleep and induce somnambulism or trance in the regular
way. He will ever afterwards be your subject if you understand
your business in giving post-hypnotic suggestions."
To the same general effect the testimony of other witnesses
of equal professional standing might be continued indefinitely.
The writer here asserts, without the least fear of contradic-
tion, that there is not a single acknowledged authority on the
subject of hypnotism but will furnish evidence of the same
general tenor and effect as that here submitted.
The reader is asked to specially note this statement. It is
of the most vital importance for the reason that it makes
every hypnotist a witness against hypnotism. An exhaustive
research through the literature of the subject will establish the
truth of the declaration here made and fully justify the posi-
tion here taken.
It now remains to close the case with the testimony of wit-
nesses who are able to speak from a definite knowledge based
upon absolute personal experiences which are above and be-
yond the power of controversy. These witnesses are hyp-
notic subjects in whose behalf this work is presented to the
world. These are the most important of all the "parties
in interest" and are therefore entitled to be heard.
The first witness of this character is a colored boy of
twenty years who was the unhappy and unwilling victim of
34 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
one of the leading professional hypnotists of this country
whose name is familiar to almost every student of the subject.
It is a fact with which every professional hypnotist is
familiar, that the colored race is peculiarly susceptible to hyp-
notic influence. Colored people, both men and women, make
excellent subjects for experimental purposes.
The young man whose experience is offered in evidence,
lived in one of our southern cities. His first hypnotic experi-
ence was at a public entertainment given by the hypnotist
with whom he afterwards traveled. He was called to the
platform from the audience for the purpose of experimenta-
tion. He was assured that he would not be injured in any
way and that the process was entirely harmless. After much
persuasion, in which some of his friends joined, he finally
consented to go upon the platform and submit to the test. He
proved to be a most susceptible subject, and upon the second
or third trial was completely hypnotized. Under the hypnotic
spell he was made to furnish entertainment for his friends
and proved a valuable acquisition to his hypnotist.
A proposition was made to him the next day to travel and
submit to hypnotic tests whenever required. He refused to
go on any terms whatever. But he attended another enter-
tainment, and was again hypnotized. After that day he was
the helpless instrument of the man who had thus dethroned
his will. When the hypnotist left the city the colored boy
went with him. For the first few weeks he was kept under
hypnotic control much of the time in order to overcome his
lingering desire to return to his home and parents. For a
period of two years he was the helpless instrument under
the control of the relentless will of his hypnotist.
At last his mind gave way under the strain and he became
a raving maniac. In this condition he was carried to an asy-
lum, and, so far as the writer knows, is still an inmate of that
institution.
The next witness is a young man of Swedish parentage,
who was induced under similar circumstances to first submit
himself to a public test. He fell an easy victim to hypnotic
influences. In a similiar manner he was compelled to fol-
THE DEADLY PARALLEL 35
low the fortunes of an unscrupulous hypnotist and submit
himself to public tests whenever required.
The writer chanced to attend one of the public entertain-
ments at which this young man was subjected to the most
cruel and inhuman treatment it has ever been his misfortune
to witness. The next day, through an unexpected incident,
the writer and the young man were brought together under
conditions which made it possible to obtain the facts here
narrated.
The young man pleaded for help to break the spell which
bound him as the helpless slave of an unscrupulous master.
His story pictured each day as a living hell. Many times he
tried to run away and conceal himself. He had even tried to
commit suicide to escape the mental clutches of his tormentor.
Every effort for liberty only bound the chains of hypnotic in-
fluence more securely upon him.
As he told the story his face blanched with fear and his
body shook with suppressed agony. In his eyes was the look
of the hunted deer. He seemed to realize that his very soul
was slowly but surely being consumed by the strange power
which had overwhelmed all his voluntary faculties and
powers. He too became a mental wreck inside of eighteen
months from the time of his first hypnotic subjection, and
was abandoned by the man who had wrecked his life, but by
mere chance was found by relatives and cared for by them.
The third witness is a young and beautiful girl whose life
was full of brightness and promise until the fateful day
when she first submitted to the seductive charm of the hyp-
notic trance. She was exhibited for three days upon the
stage in her country town and then left home, friends and
loved ones to follow the man who had overthrown her
powers of resistance. Insanity and suicide ended the earthly
career of this beautiful girl, and her murderer is still per-
mitted to practice his black art upon others equally ignorant
and equally innocent.
These are but three of the many witnesses of this class
whose testimony is unanswerable. Comment is unnecessary.
These three speak for the multitudes. They do not theorize
36 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
nor speculate nor argue. They speak with absolute authority.
There is none who dares dispute them. They testify from a
personal experience. Their testimony is conclusive.
What hypnotic control has done for these three it will do
for as many more as submit to its influence under similar con-
ditions. The fact that it has overthrown the will and volun-
tary powers of but a single individual is sufficient to discredit
the testimony of all the so-called "authorities" whose obser-
vations and speculations have led them to declare that such
results are impossible or "inconceivable."
The reader is asked to note the fact that among all the
authorities who have arrayed themselves upon the defense,
not one is able to speak from the standpoint of exact and defi-
nite knowledge. Their testimony invariably takes the form
of argumentation or disputation. Not one is able to say, "I
know."
As a typical illustration, attention is called to the work of
Thomson Jay Hudson, LL. D., entitled "The Law of Psychic
Phenomena." This author devotes an entire chapter of
twenty closely written pages to the subject of "Hypnotism
and Crime." His purpose is to show, among other things,
the "utter impossibility of victimizing virtue and innocence
by means of hypnotism."
He takes the position that it is impossible for a hypnotist
to so far control the will of his subject as to compel him to do
that which he knows, or conscientiously believes to be wrong.
He then lays down a number of suppositions and with these
suppositions as a premise proceeds to an elaborate argument
in which he endeavors to sustain his position.
His argument is ingenious and interesting, from the stand-
point of mere speculation, but, after all, it is nothing but an
argument. Moreover, it is an argument which is entirely an-
swerable even from the basis of his own premises. Aside
from this, however, it cannot stand in the face of facts dem-
onstrated. Under the relentless logic of personal experience
and personal demonstration it must yield to the immutable
law of gravity and fall to the ground.
Let it be remembered that the definite purpose of this
THE DEADLY PARALLEL 37
chapter is to establish in the mind of the reader one funda-
mental fact, and one only, namely that a hypnotist does
control the will or voluntary powers of his subject during the
continuance of the hypnotic relation.
The establishment of this fact is here based upon three
distinct and separate lines of direct evidence either of which,
under all the rules for determining the value of testimony,
would be deemed sufficient in law, even though it stood alone
and unsupported. These three lines of evidence are as
follows :
1. The absolutely positive, definite and uncontroverted
testimony of the School of Natural Science, based upon the
most exact, personal and scientific demonstration.
2. The voluntary, public admissions of hypnotists them-
selves, whose profession, practice and personal interest have
together impelled them to take the witness stand in their own
defense. These admissions, upon examination, are found to
be of the most positive and unqualified character, and coming
as they do from the defendants on trial, must be regarded as
evidence of the most conclusive character.
3. The evidence of hypnotic subjects whose ruined lives
and shattered reason tell the story of the despotic master
and his helpless victim, with a force and pathos which punct-
ure every sophistry and silence all ridicule.
By the authority and sanction of Natural Science, by the
voluntary, public admissions of hypnotists themselves, by the
wrecked lives and dethrono4 reason of hypnotic subjects, and
finally, by the personal demonstrations and definite knowledge
of the writer, it is declared as an indisputable and a demon-
strable fact that a hypnotist does control the will and volun-
tary powers, as well as the sensory organism of his subject
during the continuance of the hypnotic relation.
In like manner it is again declared that hypnotism is the
process by and through which a hypnotist obtains, holds and
exercises control of the will, voluntary powers and sensory
organism of his subject, and only in s far as such control
exists is the process hypnotic.
38 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER VI.
MAN AND His Two ORGANISMS.
No adequate conception of the true nature of hypnosis is
possible until the threefold nature of man is understood and
appreciated as a scientific proposition. This subject has been
fully and carefully presented in "Harmonics of Evolution"
(Volume I, of this series), chapter III, to which the reader
is referred for full and complete data. The following extracts
from that work are here reproduced as the basis of our pres-
ent analysis.
Vol. I, p. 39, et seq. :
"Man is composed of body, spirit and soul. This means that man
has a physical body and a spiritual body which are controlled and
operated by the highest entity, the intelligent ego, the soul. The
physical body is composed of physical matter. The particles which
are coarse in texture move at a correspondingly low rate of vibratory
action. The physical body is provided with physical sensory organs.
Nature has conditioned these organs to receive and register the vibra-
tions of physical matter only. These vibrations are registered
upon the physical brain, through which instrument they become cog-
nizant to the intelligent soul. By aid of these organs the intelligent
ego or soul becomes cognizant of different external, physical objects,
elements and conditions. The recognition by the ego of these exter-
nal, physical objects, elements and conditions constitutes what we term
physical sensation. Each of the physical organs of sensation receives
and registers a different range of vibration.
"Through the operation of these several physical organs, each one
registering a different range of vibration, the intelligent ego is brought
into conscious relations with a very wide range of vibratory activity
of physical matter.
"It must now be clear that the physical sensory organs are adapted
to receive and register only the vibrations of physical matter. It
must also be clear that they are adapted to receive only a limited
range of physical vibrations.
"The spiritual body of a man is composed of 'spiritual material.'
That is, of matter much finer than the finest physical matter, and
moving at a higher rate of vibration than the finest particles of
physical matter moving at their highest possible rate. The spiritual
body permeates the physical and constitutes the model upon which
physical matter integrates. The spiritual body, like the physical, is
provided with five sensory organs. They are adapted to receive and
register vibrations of spiritual matter only; that is, of matter lying
upon the same plane of vibratory action as the spiritual body itself.
By the aid of these organs the intelligent ego becomes cognizant of
different external, spiritual objects, elements and conditions. The
MAN AND HIS TWO ORGANISMS 39
recognition by the ego of these objects, elements and conditions con-
stitutes what we term spiritual sensation. Each one of the spiritual
sensory organs receives and registers a different range of vibration.
"By use of these spiritual organs, each registering a different
range of vibratory activity upon the spiritual plane, the intelligence
or soul is brought into conscious relation with a very wide range
of vibrations of spiritual material.
"These spiritual organs register the vibrations of spiritual material
only. They are also limited in their capacity on the spiritual plane
in a manner analogous to the limitations of the physical senses.
"That which is important in this connection is the fact that the
spiritual sensory organs do not register the vibrations of physical
matter.
"It now becomes possible to conceive of two planes of matter, life
and intelligence, correlated yet separated by apparently impassable
barriers. This knowledge explains how matter upon one plane is
invisible and intangible to intelligence upon another. It explains how
sound on one plane is silence on the other; how the light of one
plane is darkness upon the other.
"The earth man is, therefore, the inhabitant and operator of two
distinct instruments for the uses of his intelligence. Each performs
functions peculiar to its own plane of matter. Neither body is more
than a mere vehicle for the uses of the operating ego. Both are
important. Both are indispensable to the soul seeking knowledge of
itself and its environment."
In the light of this analysis it would appear that Paul knew
what he was talking about when he declared to the Corin-
thians in such exact and unqualified terms that: "There is
a natural body, and there is a spiritual body." (I Cor., 15,
44.) It is also evident that Christ fully understood the rela-
tion of these two bodies to the third and highest element in
the triune nature of man when he asked the searching and
vital question: "For what shall it profit a man, if he shall
gain the whole world, and lose his own soul?" (Mark, 8,
36.)
From the foregoing analysis it will be understood that the
physical body is but a coarser duplicate of the spiritual, and
that each and every physical organ has its spiritual duplicate.
There is a spiritual brain as well as a physical brain. There
is a spiritual organ of sight as well as a physical one. There
are spiritual organs of touch, taste, smell and hearing, just
as there are physical organs of these several senses. In other
words, for each separate physical organ of the brain there is
a corresponding spiritual one. This being a scientific fact,
40 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
it will not be difficult to understand its natural corollary,
which is, that under given conditions the intelligent soul
which owns and operates these separate organisms may re-
ceive impressions through either set of its sensory organs.
But man in the physical body is generally so conditioned
that his intelligence operates far more consciously through the
physical organism than it does through the spiritual. Just
why this is true is not so much a matter of importance at this
time as the fact that it is one of the provisions of nature with
which science must deal in its solution of the question here
under consideration.
It is also a fact that wherever this condition obtains the
individual is concerned with and absorbed in the impressions
which reach his consciousness from the physical world only.
The action of the spiritual organism, however, is not entirely
suspended, as might be inferred. It is merely obscured or
covered up, as it were, by that condition of nature which
fixes the attention upon the physical plane.
But even in this condition the spiritual organism some-
times conveys its impressions in a dim way to the con-
sciousness of the individual, and when it does so we call
them "intuitions."
The following illustration may serve to present the facts
and the principle more clearly to mind:
Go into one of the large, steel manufacturing establish-
ments of the country while the machinery is in full operation
and there attempt to carry on a conversation with a person
twenty feet distant from you. However much you may both
exert yourselves you will be unable to hear a word he. says.
The noise of the machinery and the general confusion of the
factory will make it impossible. His voice is drowned in the
general uproar and fails to make a sufficiently strong impres-
sion upon your consciousness to be recognized with distinct-
ness. You are too busily engaged with the various and con-
flicting impressions made upon your consciousness by the
thunder, clang and turmoil of the factory.
But the sound of the voice is there, just the same. More
than this, it even makes an impression upon your sensory or-
MAN AND HIS TWO ORGANISMS 41
ganism. Why, then, do you not recognize the fact? It is
only because your consciousness is so preoccupied with the
more intense impressions of the louder noises of the fac-
tory, for the time being, that you fail to distinguish the sound
of the voice.
In a somewhat analogous manner the average man seems
to be shut out and away from all conscious touch with the
spiritual world. But this is only a seeming condition, for it
is not true in fact. He is merely so absorbed, for the time
being, in the more intense impressions which reach his con-
sciousness through the physical senses that the spiritual do not
impress themselves upon him with sufficient relative force to
be so identified or distinguished by him.
Carrying the illustration still further, it is an interesting
fact that a worker in the steel factory, in course of time,
trains his sense of hearing to distinguish the sound of the
human voice even in the midst of the din and blast of the
factory which at first made such a thing impossible. The
question naturally arises as to how he acquires this remark-
able power. The answer is simple.
It is necessary for him to communicate with his fellow
workmen in some manner. The only adequate means of com-
munication with which he is familiar is the sound of the hu-
man voice. In the midst of the noise of the factory, therefore,
he must still depend upon his sense of hearing and upon its
ability to distinguish the sound of the human voice. He un-
consciously begins a course of systematic training to accom-
plish the desired result. He may be, and generally is, wholly
ignorant of the law involved. But, "Necessity is the mother
of invention," and without knowing it he begins to train his
ear to the new condition of things.
His attention is constantly fixed upon the thing to be ac-
complished. His consciousness gradually responds. By the
continued exercise of his conscious faculties and powers he
slowly but surely learns to differentiate between the impres-
sions which the various noises make upon his consciousness.
In course of time and constant training his power of percep-
tion is intensified until the human j/oice once more distinctly
42 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
registers its impressions, and to his trained consciousness
stands out fully distinguishable from the general turmoil of
his environment. He has simply developed his power of at-
tention to the thing desired until his consciousness responds
to the new demands thus made upon it.
By a method which is somewhat analogous to this it is
possible for anyone who possesses the necessary Intelligence,
Courage and Perseverance and the right desire, together
with the time, opportunity and proper instruction, to accus-
tom his consciousness to take note of the impressions which
are being constantly registered upon it through the spiritual
sensory organs.
(It may not be out of place to here suggest that the devel-
opment of this subject, together with an exposition of the
laws, principles and processes involved, is reserved for an-
other volume of this series.)
But while man is in touch with his fellow man upon the
physical plane and with the plane of physical nature gener-
ally, his attention is absorbed upon that plane. He does not
feel the" necessity for employing other means or using other
channels of communication. In most instances he does not
even know that they exist. And so long as there is no abso-
lute necessity for the development of the finer senses he con-
tinues to be absorbed with those more familiar to him. Just
so long as his attention is thus confined to a plane of exist-
ence entirely below that of the spiritual his consciousness dis-
tinguishes nothing higher than the plane of his attention.
Other illustrations concerning the physically blind and
deaf might be given which would carry the principle still
further, but this is a digression which would distract atten-
tion from the distinct subject now under consideration.
HYPNOTISM AND THE THREE BRAINS 43
CHAPTER VII.
HYPNOTISM AND THE THREE BRAINS.
The threefold nature of man, body, spirit and soul, consti-
tutes the fundamental fact from which it is possible to ob-
tain a rational understanding of hypnotism in its physiological,
pathological and psychological aspects.
The physical brain is the primary physical organ of the
Soul or essential Intelligence. It is the central organic in-
strument by and through which the individual intelligence re-
ceives impressions from the outside world of physical nature.
It is also the physical instrument first employed by the in-
telligent soul in communicating its impressions, ideas and
thoughts to other intelligences.
Whatever affects the intelligent faculties, capacities and
powers of the soul from the purely physical plane is neces-
sarily related to the central physical organ of the soul the
physical brain.
Any adequate understanding of the physiological action of
hypnosis, therefore, calls for definite knowledge of the relation
of the hypnotic process to the physical brain itself. This
opens a broad subject of the most profound and absorbing
interest. Its complete exposition would require a volume in
itself. The purpose and limitations of this work, however,
forbid more than a very brief outline of the subject, leaving
the interested student to complete his purely physiological
studies by an examination of the standard works upon that
particular branch of the subject here under consideration.
The outline here given will nevertheless be sufficient, it is
hoped, to disclose some of the popular fallacies in which the
subject of hypnotism has become involved.
By the term brain, as here employed, is meant that part of
the central nervous organism which is inclosed within the
cavity of the human skull. This organ of the intelligence
is divided into three distinct parts. For the purpose of this
work these three distinct parts or general divisions consti-
44 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
tute three distinct and separate brains which, according to
scientific nomenclature, are designated as follows :
1. Medulla Oblongata. This, to the uninstructed ob-
server, would appear to be little more than the enlarged upper
end of the spinal cord. It lies just inside the opening through
which the spinal cord enters the skull at its base. It is some-
what in the form of a pyramid, and is about one and one-
fourth inches long by one inch broad at its broadest part,
It is continuous with the spinal cord below, and seems to be
nothing more than an extension of it. It is connected above
with both the other brains by a bridge of nervous tissues,
technically known as the Pons VaroliL
2. Cerebellum, or little brain. This brain occupies the
lower back portion of the skull cavity, somewhat back of the
Medulla. It is connected with the Medulla and also the upper
brain by the bridge above named.
3. Cerebrum, or great brain. This brain entirely fills all
the front and upper parts of the skull cavity and is known as
the intellectual brain. It is connected below with both the
other brains by the same bridge of nervous tissues above re-
ferred to.
Each of these three brains is divided into two parts, right
and left. In the Cerebrum and Cerebellum these two halves
are called hemispheres or lobes. For a full and complete de-
scription and illustration of these organs, together with special
information as to their anatomy and physiology, the reader is
referred to any standard, modern work on these subjects.
For the sake of easy reference the three brains will be
hereinafter designated in the order above mentioned, as the
primary, secondary and third brains, the Medulla being desig-
nated as the primary, the Cerebellum as the secondary and the
Cerebrum as the third brain.
This sequence is adopted for the reason that it repre-
sents the exact order in which Nature has evolved the animal
brain. That is to say, the lowest forms of animal life, such
for instance as the mollusk, have only the primary brain.
This is found to be but an enlarged terminal section of a cen-
HYPNOTISM AND THE THREE BRAINS 45
tral nerve cord. To this extent it is analogous to the central
nerve organism of man minus the second and third brains.
As might be anticipated, the intelligence manifested
through such a brain is of the lowest type and the most limited
in its scope and operation. It seems to be confined almost
entirely to the one line of activity which has to do with the
struggle for nutrition. Even here in this narrowly limited
field of operation, it seems to be little more than a reflex of
the purely physical demand for food. It seeks its nourishment
with little more evidence of an individualized intelligence than
is manifest in the sunflower when it turns its face to the sun-
light. It seems to operate almost as an automatic instrument
under the control of natural law, as if it were so impelled by
the great Universal Intelligence which lies back of all life.
Ascending the scale of animal life in the order of evolu-
tionary development, the second brain is slowly evolved. In
proportion as this fact is accomplished the individualizing of
intelligence is evidenced. The range of its activity is en-
larged. The number and nature of the animal demands in-
crease and become more and more complex. But still the
character of intelligence is such as to suggest that its opera-
tions are much more nearly a mere reflex of the operation of
natural law than the result of individual intelligence operating
independently.
Nature continues this process of brain evolution until the
third, or intellectual brain, makes its appearance in higher
forms of animal life. This third brain reaches its climax of
development in the highest type of human life. While there
are many species below the level of human life in which the
third brain is present in varying degrees of development, yet
in man it finds its highest proportional development. The
nascent or slumbering intelligence of the lower animal becomes
the wakeful, self-conscious, rational and voluntary power in
man.
These facts of physical science are of fundamental impor-
tance to a clear understanding of what occurs when a human
being is subjected to the blighting power of hypnotic control.
They will be more fully considered in that connection. A
46 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
further study of the anatomy and physiology of the three hu-
man brains would develop many other facts of interest and
value, but the limitations of this work exclude a more ex-
tended inquiry in this direction.
The science of phrenology is based on the hypothesis that
each faculty or capacity of the human mind manifests itself
through a special organ of the brain. This is evidenced in
so many different ways that it has come to be generally ac-
cepted as a scientific fact. It is upon this basis that the dif-
ferent sections of the human brain have been assigned to dif-
ferent mental characteristics and activities. While it is con-
ceded that phrenology is, as yet, very far from being an exact
science, it is nevertheless an undoubted fact that, in a general
sense, its groupings of the organs of the brain are correct.
Surgery has in recent years demonstrated the correctness
of the phrenological hypothesis. It has definitely traced the
action of various organs of the body to certain specific areas
in the cortex of the brain. It has even platted the surface of
the brain in such manner as to show what portions are directly
related in their action to the various organs of the body.
Following this line of suggestion it is a fact which science
has come to recognize, that those particular convolutions of
the third brain through which we exercise our perceptive
faculties and rational powers are located in the front portion
of the upper brain cavity just above and back of the eyes.
That is to say, the organs through which we perceive physical
form, size, weight, color, locality, number, order, events, time,
tune, language, causality and exercise the power of reason, all
lie within a comparatively small space mainly above and just
back of the eyes. These are the organs which give promi-
nence and elevation to the forehead of man as compared with
that of the animal.
It is important to note the fact that through the action of
these perceptive organs we come into intelligent and rational
touch with the outside or objective world. Because of this
these are also frequently, and very aptly, designated as the
"objective faculties" of the mind. It is through these that
Mr. Hudson's "Objective Mind" operates. Through these the
HYPNOTISM AND THE THREE BRAINS 4T
purely intellectual processes of the mind find expression.
When we observe a physical object, note its form, size, weight
and color, and then compare it with other objects with which
we are familiar, and reason upon its probable composition,
purpose and value, we are making use of our objective, per-
ceptive, and rational faculties and powers through these or-
gans.
That portion of the skull cavity just above and back of
these perceptive or objective organs of the mind is supposed
to contain the particular convolutions of the brain through
which the emotional nature of man mainly finds expression.
Those convolutions of the brain which occupy the posterior
portion of the third brain cavity are in some way related to
the physical appetites, passions and desires.
The chief function of the second or middle brain thus far
specifically identified by physical science is that of co-ordinat-
ing the motions of the physical body. By this is meant that
process by and through which the entire body, as a single
instrument, is brought under control of the individual will.
For instance : In the process of walking many individual
muscles are brought into action. The power of the will to so
co-ordinate the action of all the different muscles as to direct
the body, as a whole, in the desired manner, is referable to the
second brain.
Among the most important functions of the primary brain
(the Medulla), thus far fully identified by physical science,
attention is called to the following:
1. It acts as a conductor of both motor and sensory im-
pressions from all parts of the body.
2. It constitutes a reflex center for numerous special
nerves governing respiration, circulation, deglutition, the
voice, etc.
In view of that which follows, it is of special interest to
recall the historic fact that among the ancients the primary
brain, now known to science as the Medulla Oblongata, was
believed to be the seat of the soul. A study of the physiology
of hypnotism will disclose the interesting fact that this ancient
belief was not wholly without foundation.
48 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Although the foregoing is but a mere suggestion of the
anatomy and physiology of the human brain, all too brief and
incomplete, yet it may serve to furnish the foundation for a
more definite understanding of the physiological action of the
forces, activities and processes involved in the exercise of
hypnotic control.
PHYSIOLOGY OF HYPNOTISM 49
CHAPTER VIII.
THE PHYSIOLOGY AND PATHOLOGY OF HYPNOTISM.
It is important to bear in mind that there are all shades
and degrees of hypnosis, ranging from the lightest form of
hypnotic influence through all the deepening stages to the most
profound state of complete functional suspension of the phys-
ical organism.
In the incipient stages the subject appears to be almost
entirely conscious of all that is transpiring about him on the
physical plane. But as the state is intensified he gradually
loses control of his independent faculties and capacities as well
as his voluntary powers, and his impressions from the outside,
physical world about him. In the deeper state of complete
lethargy or catalepsy his consciousness is wholly out of touch
with his physical sensory organism. In this condition he be-
comes an automatic instrument under the control of the op-
erator's will.
What physiological transformation or psychic inversion
has occurred to produce this abnormal condition ?
Science has been able to demonstrate that the primary
physiological action of the hypnotic process is registered upon
the physical brain of the subject. Moreover, it operates upon
the physical brain in the reverse order of its evolutionary de-
velopment. That is to say, its first apparent effects are regis-
tered upon the third or intellectual brain, its deeper effects
upon the secondary brain and its final effects upon the primary
brain, or Medulla Oblongata.
More than this, it is also found that the process has its in-
ception in the extreme front portion of the third brain in the
region of the physical organs of perception. Thence, as the
hypnotic state deepens, it sweeps backward through the third
brain, downward through the second brain, and in its final
stages is communicated to the primary brain.
Every student of hypnotism is more or less familiar with
the data bearing upon this phase of the subject, and will rec-
50 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
ognize their meaning and value as they are presented in this
connection, as follows:
1. One of the most invariable manifestations which fol-
low the inception of the hypnotic process is the inability of
the subject to control the objective and perceptive faculties
of the mind. His physical sensory organism becomes con-
fused in its reports from the objective world of physical na-
ture. The subject begins to receive mixed and imperfect im-
pressions.
But when these impressions are analyzed they are found
to be a composite of those received through the physical sen-
sory organs from his physical environment, and those which
are produced by the mental impulses of the operator's will.
To these are also often added the results of imagination. This
clearly indicates that the hypnotic process interferes with the
natural action of those organs of the physical brain through
which the objective and perceptive faculties of the mind op-
erate.
2. As the hypnotic condition is intensified those convolu-
tions of the third brain which lie immediately above and back
of the eyes pass into a state of complete anaesthesia, or tem-
porary paralysis. As a natural result the voluntary percep-
tion of the objective, physical world is destroyed. Conscious-
ness is driven backward from the objective and rational plane.
The will of the operator comes into partial control of the
channels through which the consciousness of the subject is
reached upon the spiritual plane.
However remarkable this statement may appear to the un-
initiated, it is nevertheless susceptible of scientific demonstra-
tion. There are many collateral evidences of its truth with
which every student of the subject is already familiar
For illustration : When this stage of hypnosis has been at-
tained the operator is able to produce many and various effects
upon the consciousness of his subject by simple impulses of
his will. In the language of no less an authority than Prof.
John Duncan Quackenbos, of Columbia University, "He (the
hypnotized subject) is sensitive only to what the operator
tells him he is sensitive to, and is wholly subject, so far as
PHYSIOLOGY OF HYPNOTISM 51
his mental operations and physical actions are concerned, to
the volition of his hypnotist. He sees, hears, tastes, smells
and feels what the operator says that he sees, hears, tastes,
smells and feels and nothing else. For the time being, his
individuality is surrendered to the person who has hypnotized
him."
The operator, for instance, wishes the subject to obtain
the impression that he is giving him an apple to eat. Al-
though the physical eyes of the subject are wide open and ap-
parently looking straight at the object, instead of an apple
the operator hands him a piece of wood, or a book, or substi-
tutes any other object which happens to be handy. The sub-
ject invariably accepts whatever is given him under the impres-
sion that it is an apple, and unless restrained will proceed to
eat it, or endeavor to do so, and will manifest every evidence
of perfect satisfaction in the process. The physical sensory
organs being in a state of anaesthesia, or temporary paralysis,
convey no impression whatever to his consciousness. How,
then, does he receive the impression of the apple, if not
through the physical sensory organs?
The answer is that it is projected upon his consciousness
by the mental impulse of the hypnotist, through the spiritual
sensory organs of the subject. In this condition the spiritual
sensory organism of the subject is within the power and under
the domination and control of the operator's will, and as an
automatic instrument responds to its impulses.
One phase of this experiment might appear, at first view,
to contradict this statement. For instance, it will be observed
that the operator speaks to the subject just as he would do
if the subject were wide awake and in full possession of all
his physical senses. He tells him in spoken words which
anyone in the room might hear, that the object he presents
to him is an apple. The subject also acts just as he might
be expected to do if he had heard the spoken words through
the medium of his physical sensory organs of hearing. The
natural presumption, therefore, would be that he did so hear
them. Such, however, is not the case wherever hypnosis has
reached the stage here referred to.
52 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
A simple illustration will be sufficient to prove the accu-
racy of this statement. Let the subject's physical ears be
completely muffled in such manner as to entirely shut out all
physical sound of the operator's voice. Repeat the experiment
under these conditions and it will be found that the subject
will hear just the same and will obtain exactly the same im-
pression as before.
Or, reverse the process. Instead of muffling the sub-
ject's physical ears to shut off the physical sound of the opera-
tor's voice, let a dozen or more of the spectators present (or
a hundred for that matter) create all the noise and confusion
possible. Let them carry this to a point where it is impossi-
ble for anyone in the room to hear a word the operator says.
Under these conditions repeat the experiment. It will be
found that exactly the same results will obtain. The physical
noise which would otherwise drown the operator's voice will
have not the least effect upon the subject. He will seemingly
hear every word the operator says and will implicitly obey
his every command.
Or, again : When the hypnotist has acquired complete con-
trol of all the channels through which the consciousness of the
subject is approached, he may convey the same impression
without an audible word. In this case it is not even necessary
for him to present to the subject a physical object of any
kind. A simple impulse of the will is sufficient.
Every one who is at all familiar with the processes of tel-
epathy will understand how it is possible to convey an exact
impression, or thought, or impulse of the will, to the con-
sciousness of another quite independently of the physical
senses. Independent telepathy, however, must not be con-
fused with the hypnotic process, for it is no more related to
hypnotism than it is to the ordinary process of telegraphy.
It should be remembered that an impulse of the mind for-
mulated in a thought is a wholly different thing from the
words in which that thought is clothed. It requires the
spoken words to convey an exact thought from one mind to
another through the instrumentality of the physical auditory
nerve. In like manner, it requires the printed letters and
PHYSIOLOGY OF HYPNOTISM 53
words to convey the thought of a writer to the mind of his
reader through the agency of the physical optic nerve. Al-
though words are necessary in both instances, nevertheless, the
words themselves do not constitute the thought in either case.
They do not even constitute any part of the thought.
In the first instance they are merely a combination of phys-
ical sounds so arranged and modulated as to convey to the
listener's consciousness through his physical sense of hearing
the thought in the mind of the speaker. In the other they
are only a set of physical signs so arranged as to convey
the same thought from one mind to another through the phys-
ical sense of sight. In both cases they are simply used as
instruments or vehicles for carrying thoughts from one intel-
ligence to another.
Moreover, it is a scientific fact which anyone may demon-
strate in course of time, under proper instruction, that the
impulse of the human soul formulated into a definite thought
is a force. This force, under proper conditions, may be im-
pressed upon the consciousness of another intelligent soul
without the aid of words either spoken, written or printed.
This may be done without the use of the physical sensory or-
gans at all. It may be accomplished through spiritual agencies
exclusively. And the channels through which this may be
accomplished are the spiritual sensory organs which are an-
alogous to the physical sensory organs in both number and
character, except that they operate upon a higher plane of
refinement and vibratory activity.
This is precisely what occurs in that stage of hypnosis
above referred to. The physical sensory organism is, for the
time being, completely paralyzed. It conveys no impressions
whatever to the imprisoned consciousness of the subject. In
this condition his spiritual sensory organism becomes a mere
instrument under the control of the hypnotist's will. All
the channels of ingress to the subject's consciousness, there-
fore, are under control of the operator, who is, for the time
being, an absolute censor, possessing unlimited authority and
power. Complete fascination or enchantment of the sub-
ject's consciousness is the result. He sees nothing, hears
54 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
nothing, feels nothing; is, in fact, conscious of nothing what-
soever save the dominating presence and power of his hyp-
notist's will.
A careful study and analysis of this condition of the sub-
ject and of the relation which his consciousness sustains to
the will of the operator will reveal many of the seeming mys-
teries of hypnotic control.
For instance, the hypnotic subject in the deep lethargic
condition is insensible to physical pain. In this condition the
most painful surgical operations may be performed upon him
without the least indication of physical suffering.
What physiological action or condition is responsible for
this startling result? The answer is, paralysis of the physical
sensory organism, by means of which the channels of con-
sciousness upon the physical plane are entirely cut off.
The question has also been often asked by hypnotists them-
selves, why it is that in this condition the subject invariably
accepts without question every suggestion or impression com-
ing to his consciousness from the mind of the hypnotist.
Often the operator has been surprised to find that his unex-
pressed thoughts and impulses have been indelibly impressed
upon the consciousness of his subject. For instance, the
author above quoted, at page 269 of his recent work on hyp-
notism says:
"I have often been startled by having patients tell me days after
hypnotization of feelings and incentives to action of which I had said
nothing, but which I knew to be in the background of my conscious-
ness at the time of treatment."
It is worth while to pause and contemplate for a moment
what must have been the results had the impulses and in-
centives to action "in the background" of the operator's con-
sciousness at the time of treatment been of a vicious and
immoral character.
This phase of the subject will explain one of the most
common fallacies of hypnotists who claim to have made
many experiments which tend to show that a subject cannot
be impelled by hypnotic processes to commit a crime. The
experiments, when fully understood, prove the exact reverse
of the claim they make.
PHYSIOLOGY OF HYPNOTISM 65
For instance, the average experiment is something as
follows : The subject is first hypnotized. He is then strongly
impressed with the "suggestion" that a certain person in the
audience has deeply wronged him and deserves to be killed.
He is then given a knife and commanded to kill the person
so designated. He proceeds to carry out the command. He
even carries it to the point of stealthily approaching the vic-
tim and raising the knife over him. But he will not strike
the fatal blow. Why is this? Why does he stop at this
critical point in the experiment?
In the light of the facts above stated, the answer is simple.
The subject is impelled by the real motive and intention in
the mind of his hypnotist, and not by the spoken word of
command. In this condition and relation words mean noth-
ing to the subject, unless they convey the real intent of the
soul that projects them. In fact, the subject does not hear
the words of command at all. He receives only the conscious
intent of his hypnotist.
In other words, a hypnotist cannot possibly project a mur-
derous intent or impulse unless he actually feels it. He can-
not inspire his subject to commit a murder unless he has
murder in his own soul. As the author above quoted very
aptly expresses it, he cannot project the impulse of murder
upon his subject unless there is "in the background" of his
own consciousness the criminal impulse which inspires
murder.
In all the public so-called tests, such as the one above
suggested, the hypnotist does not intend that his subject shall
carry the experiment to the final act of murder. There is
"in the background" of his consciousness all the time the pro-
tecting reservation. The real intent in his soul is that the
subject shall carry the experiment to the very point where he
stops. He does not intend that he shall actually strike the
fatal blow. He could not inspire such an act unless he were
a murderer at heart and fully intended that his subject should
execute the murderous design in his own soul. The subject
is impelled by the real impulse in the soul of his hypnotist
and not by the spoken words of command.
56 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Let the operator once project the real murderous impulse
upon the consciousness of his subject under the conditions
named and murder will be the result in every instance.
The rationale of these wonderful results is not difficult to
understand in the light of the foregoing analysis. In his
normal state man depends upon his physical senses to furnish
him information as to his immediate physical environment.
In most instances he has not yet come to know that he has a
spiritual organism. It has never been called into action by
him in such manner as to identify it to his consciousness
as something apart from his physical. But as the physical
sensory organism yields to the paralyzing effects of the hyp-
notic process, the spiritual continues its activity to a certain
extent independently of the physical. This is true even in
the final stages of hypnosis. In this partial independence of
the spiritual organism it takes the place of the physical, for
the time being, in its relation to the consciousness of the
subject. For the time, therefore, it is the only channel through
which he receives impressions from without. Whatever he
receives through this channel, therefore, is as much a verity
to his consciousness as are the impressions which come to him
through the physical sensory organs in his normal condition,
and are accepted by him just as if they were of physical origin
and reached him through the physical sensory organism.
The impulses of the operator's will are as much a fact to
him in this condition of complete subjectivity as are the ob-
jects of Nature which impress the physical sensory organism
in his natural, waking condition. Every thought of the oper-
ator, every impulse of his will, is a thing, something which
makes its impress upon the subject's consciousness as defi-
nitely as do the tangible objects of Nature under other con-
ditions. Its integrity is no more a matter of doubt to him
in this state than is the sight of any physical object with
the physical eyes in his normal, waking condition.
In the state and condition here referred to the mind and
will of the hypnotist take the place of the physical world in
their relation to the consciousness of the subject. They, in
truth, constitute the only world with which the subject is, f$r
PHYSIOLOGY OF HYPNOTISM 67
the time being, in conscious touch. It is, therefore, not
strange but perfectly natural that "he sees, hears, tastes,
smells and feels what the operator says that he sees, hears,
tastes, smells and feels and nothing else."
The author just quoted unwittingly explains the reason
for this when he further says that "for the time being his
individuality is surrendered to the person who has hypnotized
him."
This is but another method of saying that the operator
has obtained absolute control of all the active channels
through which the conscious intelligence of the subject may
be reached and impressed. These channels are, for the time
being, the spiritual, sensory organs. The operator who con-
trols these channels is in position to impress upon the con-
sciousness of the subject whatever mental impulses he may
desire. He is likewise in position to enforce the execution
of his will through the same channels.
During the continuance of this relation his mind and will
are the sole governing factors in the conscious life of the sub-
ject. The only impulses the subject has, for good or ill, while
in this state are those which come to him from the will of
his hypnotist. He can no more disobey the will of the oper-
ator, during this relation, than he can disobey his own will
in his normal condition. This follows from the fact that the
only will he has during the continuance of the hypnotic rela-
tion, at this particular stage, is the will of the hypnotist to
whom "his individuality is surrendered."
3. The final stage of hypnosis to which reference need
here be made is one seldom successfully produced by our
western practitioners. It involves the complete suspension of
physical animation. In this state every function of the physi-
cal organism is wholly arrested. Even respiration ceases.
Circulation stops. The body, in some instances, becomes cold
and rigid. To every outward appearance physical death has
actually occurred.
In its physiological aspect complete functional suspension
of the physical organism has occurred. In its downward
sweep through the central nervous organism the hypnotic
58 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
process has at last overwhelmed the primary brain and the
involuntary or reflex centers of nervous energy. In this con-
dition the physical body is no longer an active part of the
individual.
Remarkable as this may all appear, those who have been
reckless enough to carry their experiments to this point have
been astonished to find that, notwithstanding this complete
suspension of all functional activity of the physical organism,
the subject is even more intently conscious of every thought,
intention and mental impulse of the hypnotist than he is dur-
ing any of the less profound states of hypnosis which pre-
cede this condition.
This has never been satisfactorily explained by the School
of Physical Science. Indeed, it does not seem to be con-
sistent with their purely materialistic view of the relation of
mind to matter. To those, however, who understand the
three-fold nature of man, consisting of physical body, spirit-
ual body and intelligent soul, there is a scientific explanation.
In proportion as the consciousness of the subject is acted
upon through the physical organism, his attention is absorbed
in the impressions made through those dominant channels,
and correspondingly diverted from all other impressions. But
as these physical organs are silenced and gradually paralyzed
by the power of hypnosis the impulses which reach his con-
sciousness through the spiritual sensory organism become
more and more distinct to him. The relatively stronger of the
two sets of impulses is the one which absorbs the attention
so long as its dominance continues.
When the final state of profound hypnosis above referred
to has been attained the physical world is entirely cut off
from the consciousness of the subject. All impressions from
that source cease. In this condition, therefore, there is noth-
ing to divert his attention from the impressions which now
reach him through the spiritual sensory organism alone.
But these channels of ingress to the imprisoned conscious-
ness of the subject are under control of the hypnotist. He
therefore commands the absolute and undivided attention Q*
his subject. Hence it is that in exact proportion as this state
PHYSIOLOGY OF HYPNOTISM 59
of hypnosis is attained the consciousness of the subject re-
sponds to the will of the operator, and his attention becomes
more and more completely riveted upon all that the hypnotist
conveys to him.
This will also explain why it is that the hypnotist can,
by a simple command or impulse of the will, waken his sub-
ject from even this profound condition of seeming physical
death. His ability to thus waken his subject is at all times
commensurate with the degree of control he is able to ex-
ercise over him. If, perchance, in the condition above re-
ferred to, some accident should occur to break the control of
the hypnotist, the physical death of the subject would in-
stantly follow. For, at this stage of hypnosis, the operator's
will is the only power in existence that holds the two organ-
isms together.
In this state of complete functional suspension of the
physical organism it is even possible for the operator to force
a complete temporary separation of the two organisms, and
by the power of his will alone unite them again. In such
case he is able to send the temporarily liberated spiritual body
and soul of his subject to distant points and there enforce
implicit obedience to his commands within certain well de-
fined limitations. He may thus obtain definite information
concerning matters at a distance of which he is at the time
entirely ignorant.
Before passing to the consideration of another phase of
the subject attention is here called to the interesting and
significant fact that the three human brains correspond to the
triune nature of man, body, spirit and soul. The action of
hypnosis upon the three physical brains has a corresponding
correlative effect upon the three sides of his triune nature.
This phase of the subject will be more fully considered in
subsequent chapters.
From the foregoing exposition of the subject, the physi-
ological action of hypnosis, in so far as it has been here con-
sidered, may be very briefly summarized as follows:
i. Hypnosis acts both directly and indirectly upon the
central nervous organism, the three physical brains.
60 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
2. Its action upon this central nervous organism produces
anaesthesia and paralysis.
3. Its effects upon the central nervous organism are first
registered upon that part of the third or intellectual brain
through which the objective and perceptive faculties of the
mind operate.
4. In its progressive action hypnosis proceeds from this
point backward through the third brain, downward through
the second brain, and finally through the primary brain, until
all parts of the physical nervous organism are brought under
its complete control.
5. Its impelling force is the will of the hypnotist.
It will be observed that consideration of the subject has
been strictly confined thus far to such physiological action of
the hypnotic process as may become apparent to everyone
who has either experienced its results or been in position
to observe them.
The more deeply scientific subject of the cellular action
of hypnosis has been purposely omitted for the following rea-
sons:
1. Its consideration leads directly into the field of tech-
nical scientific treatment.
2. Such treatment of the subject at this time could ap-
peal to none but those few scientists who happen to be
directly interested in the technical study of psychic phenomena.
It would, in all human probability, require a century, through
this channel, to bring the matter to the attention of the great
world of humanity that needs to know the simpler facts and
principles for self-protection.
3. The purpose of this work is to reduce the subject to
its simplest possible form. By so doing it is hoped to bring
it within the easy comprehension as well as the personal in-
terest of every man, woman and child who shall be able to
read and understand the simplest expression of the English
language.
Professional hypnotism has progressed to the point where
it has become a most serious menace to individuals and to
society. In one form or another it now threatens almost every
PHYSIOLOGY OF HYPNOTISM 61
home within the limits of our country. The dangers which
lurk beneath the murky folds of its black mantle are many
and threatening. They are fascinating and seductive. They
present themselves in every charming disguise to mislead the
innocent and deceive the thoughtful.
It is hoped that this work, in its simplicity, directness
and freedom from all technicality, may carry into many
homes the needed warning, together with a practical under-
standing of the principles and processes involved.
THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER IX.
"AUTO-HYPNOTISM" A MISNOMER.
There is no such thing as "Auto-Hypnotism/'
The term is a misnomer. "Auto" means "Self," and
"Auto-Hypnotism," therefore, means, in its literal significa-
tion, "Self-Hypnotism."
This would convey the impression that it is possible for
an individual to hypnotize himself. This, in fact, seems to
be the impression which those who employ the term intend
to convey. It is, at any rate, the impression which the term
conveys to the world, and it is the impression the public in
general has obtained.
Self-Hypnotism, or "Auto-Hypnotism," however, is a
scientific impossibility.
Those who are responsible for injecting this term into
the scientific nomenclature of the age undoubtedly felt them-
selves justified in so doing. But this does not alter the fact
that the term is an improper and misleading one, and is re-
sponsible for having introduced into the scientific analysis of
hypnotism a fiction pure and simple. It does not obliterate
the further fact that this particular term has only served to
add to the confusion already existing, and has wholly failed
to advance the interests of science or education.
There is no desire nor intention to deny, evade nor ignore
any of the facts upon which the writers and authorities have
come to feel themselves justified in employing the term. It
is, indeed, a well-known fact which has been often demon-
strated, long before this particular term was ever employed,
that it is possible for an individual to throw himself into a
condition of artificial sleep, somewhat analogous to somnam-
bulism. It is this self-induced, artificial sleep that has been
improperly designated "Auto-Hypnotism."
This, however, is not hypnotism in any form.
A simple illustration will be sufficient to make the proper
distinction clearly apparent. For the purpose of this illus-
tration, let it be supposed that A is the owner and possessor
" AUTO-HYPNOTISM " A MISNOMER 63
of a magnificent jewel. Its value to him exceeds that of all
his other material possessions combined. But it is his, and
no matter what its intrinsic value may be, he therefore has
the power, if not the right, to risk it or dispose of it as he
will. He may even recklessly throw it away, and no one
dares interfere.
Following a whim of his nature, he determines to try an
experiment with this jewel to determine, in his own mind,
whether or not there are burglars in the neighborhood. It is
a hazardous experiment, so far as his possession of the jewel
is concerned, and one which few men in their right minds
would indulge. But it possesses the merit of affording a very
effectual and satisfactory test as to the question to be deter-
mined.
Before retiring for the night he takes this precious jewel
from its safety-deposit vault, unwraps it and places it in a
conspicuous place in the middle of the table. He then moves
the table near the front door, where it will be the first object
seen on entering. He unlocks the door, so that anyone who
will may open it, and then retires to a distant part of the
house and deliberately goes to sleep.
But what is the meaning of this strange and abnormal pro-
ceeding? Only this, that A has simply opened the way to a
most easy and successful burglary, nothing more. He has
prepared a most tempting situation which will surely induce
the first unscrupulous individual who learns of it to enter
his home and commit a crime against the laws of the land.
But it is just possible that he may sleep soundly through-
out the night and waken to find that his jewel remains undis-
turbed. If so, he would seem to be justified in assuming that
his premises have not been invaded by burglars during the
night. At least, no burglary has thus far been committed. His
property is still there. This, however, would appear to be
the result of his good luck rather than that of his good sense.
But he repeats the experiment the following night, and
upon waking the next morning finds that his jewel is gone.
During the night, while sleep has encompassed him and shut
his consciousness away from the objective plane of the physi-
64 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
cal world, someone has entered his home and taken unlawful
possession of his property. In other words, a crime has been
committed. The name by which this particular crime is known
to law is "Burglary."
It will be observed that so long as no second party en-
tered upon the scene the crime of burglary could not be com-
mitted. That is to say, it is a moral, legal and scientific im-
possibility for a man to commit this particular crime against
himself.
To accomplish the crime of burglary it is necessary-
1. That there be at least two parties to the transaction.
2. That one of these enter upon the premises of the other.
3. That the party so entering take unlawful possession of
personal property which does not belong to him, or which
belongs to the owner of the invaded premises.
In like manner, the individual who throws himself into
the artificial sleep which writers and authorities have erro-
neously designated "Auto-Hypnotism" has done nothing more
than create conditions which make hypnotism an easy pos-
sibility.
He may, perchance, put himself in this unnatural condi-
tion and waken again without having come in touch with a
hypnotist at all. In such case hypnosis, in its proper sense,
does not occur. Why? Because no outside party has en-
tered the domain of his individual life and taken possession
of that which belongs to the occupant and rightful owner.
That is to say, no intruder or trespasser has entered the temple
of the soul and deprived the sleeper of his precious jewel
the power of self-control.
But let him repeat the foolish experiment often enough
and the inviting conditions will sooner or later attract the
attention of some passing hypnotist, who will thereupon enter
and complete the process of hypnotism by taking possession
and control of his will, voluntary powers and sensory or-
ganism.
Reverting once more to the definition of hypnotism, it
will be observed that it involves elements and conditions which
" AUTO-HYPNOTISM " A MISNOMER 65
are strangely and significantly analogous to those involved in
the crime of burglary. That is to say:
1. There must be at least two parties to the transaction.
2. One of these must enter the temple of the other, as it
were.
3. The one so entering must take unlawful possession of
that which of right belongs to the other party.
The interesting analogy between these two processes
might, with value and propriety, be carried much further.
But it is only intended at this point to suggest the one funda-
mental fact, that they both involve the commission of a wrong
by one person against another. Both, therefore, involve a
violation of law, for which offense there are corresponding
penalties which must be inflicted upon the culprit.
The individual who thus throws himself into the artificial
sleep above referred to invites thereby many results and con-
ditions of which he is generally ignorant. Among others, he
makes it easily possible for any one of the following results
to obtain:
1. He may, unless interfered with, thus withdraw his
consciousness from the objective plane of physical nature
and in a perfectly conscious manner through the medium of
his spiritual sensory organs see, hear and observe whatever
may occur upon the spiritual plane within the range of spirit-
ual vision, hearing and observation. His waking memory
of all he has thus observed and experienced will be commen-
surate with the extent to which his consciousness still occu-
pies and continues to register through the third physical brain.
If the objective faculties alone are asleep upon the physical
plane, all that part of the third brain lying back of and above
the organs of perception is awake and active, and the waking
memory will be clear and distinct.
2. But he may go still further and withdraw all con-
sciousness from the third physical brain. In this event he
brings back to his waking consciousness no remembrance of
what he may have seen, heard or observed through the me-
dium of his spiritual sensory organs. To him it has been
66 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
but a sound and dreamless sleep, often followed by the most
intense nervous headache.
3. In either of the above named conditions the door is
wide open to the hypnotist, from either plane of life, who
may chance to pass that way. If it be a physically embodied
hypnotist, he may enter the domain of the sleeper's soul and
take undisputed possession and control of the will, volun-
tary powers and sensory organism of his subject, without the
least possible resistance or opposition. In this event the sleeper
becomes a hypnotic subject under the control of his hypno-
tizer, and can be made to produce such phenomena as the
operator would be able to "suggest" or command if he had
obtained his control in the ordinary way.
4. But it should never be forgotten that there are physi-
cally disembodied hypnotists as well as those yet in the physi-
cal body. Those physically disembodied intelligences, com-
monly known and designated as "spirits," represent all kinds
and classes of individuals. The lower the type the more closely
they approach the plane of the purely physical. This law of
spiritual gravity will be fully developed in Part III of this
volume.
The ignorant and the vicious upon the spiritual side of
life generally seek to attach themselves to earth's conditions as
closely as may be possible. There are perfectly natural reasons
for this desire, as well as for the efforts they put forth to ac-
complish its realization. Such an one as this is ever watchful
for an opportunity to fasten itself upon one who is yet in
the physical body.
The individual who enters into the artificial and abnormal
sleep mistakenly named "Auto-Hypnosis" opens the door of
his inmost life to these spiritual intelligences as well as to the
hypnotist upon the physical plane. If his abnormal condition
is observed and understood by an unscrupulous or ignorant
intelligence on the spiritual side of life, such spiritual intelli-
gence may, without the least difficulty, take possession and
control of the sleeper's will, voluntary powers and sensory
organism, precisely as the hypnotist might do from the physi-
cal plane.
" AUTO-HYPNOTISM " A MISNOMER 67
In this event the sleeper becomes a "trance medium," in
the possession of a "spiritual control."
5. If such "control" refuse to release its victim, or if he
should be unable to do so (which is quite possible among
ignorant controls), the case is pronounced "insanity" by phy-
sicians of the regular schools. In this event the "Auto-Hyp-
notist" is sent to an asylum for the insane, where he is likely
to remain until physical death comes to his release.
The conditions which follow physical death under these
circumstances will be fully considered in Part III of this
volume.
68 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER X.
"SUGGESTION" A LEXICOLOGICAL LIBEL.
The term "Suggestion" has been so cruelly and unfairly
dealt with in recent years that the spirit of fair play demands
its immediate and unconditional vindication.
According to the best lexicological authorities the word
means :
1. To introduce indirectly to the thoughts.
2. To propose with diffidence or modesty. To hint. To
intimate.
3. To seduce. To tempt, etc.
This last definition is rare, and by some of the authori-
ties is now considered obsolete.
It is safe to say that in its most common acceptation the
word is intended to mean "a deferential method of calling
the attention of one person to the subject matter in the mind
of another and inviting favorable consideration of the same."
For some reason, quite inconceivable at this time, the word
has become inseparably connected and associated in thought
with the subject of hypnotism. By a sort of tacit agreement
or understanding, as it were, among writers and students gen-
erally, it has come to include almost, if not quite, all the
means and methods by and through which a hypnotist im-
presses his own thoughts, impulses, desires and will upon the
consciousness of his subject.
But it must be borne constantly in mind that in exact pro-
portion to the depth or intensity of the hypnotic state the
hypnotist controls the will, voluntary powers and sensory or-
ganism of his subject. Under these conditions the subject, to
the extent that hypnosis exists, is deprived of the power of
independent choice, without which the word "Suggestion" is
entirely meaningless to him.
Indeed, every thought, every impression, every impulse of
the will projected by a hypnotist upon the consciousness of
his subject during the hypnotic relation has, just as far as
the hypnotic process is able to carry it, the force and binding
^SUGGESTIONSA LEXICOLOGICAL LIBEL 69
effect of a definite and inviolable command. It is not pre-
sented to the subject for his consideration as an independent,
self-conscious and rational intelligence possessing discretion-
ary powers. It is not submitted to the rational judgment of
the subject at all. It is not offered upon the theory that it
may possibly be rejected. On the other hand, it is forced
upon him under conditions which, according to the laws of
Nature, make its rejection an impossibility.
And yet, notwithstanding all this, it is called "Sugges-
tion" by learned men who are wise enough to instantly dis-
cover many a less conspicuous error.
It does not require a high degree of intelligence to under-
stand that when one man fires a bullet into the brain of an-
other he does not simply offer it as a "suggestion" to be
taken under advisement and possibly returned with thanks.
He projects it there to stay, regardless of the desires of the
other party, because he has both the power and the will to
do so. The law of Nature, bound up in the explosive power
of the powder back of it, is inexorable. No matter if he ac-
company the discharge of the weapon with the most polite
and gracious "suggestion" possible, this cannot reduce the
force of the charge, slacken the speed of the bullet, reduce its
penetrating power, nor lessen its destructive effects. In other
words, it cannot modify the results in the slightest degree.
Under the conditions named he sets in motion a process by
means of a power which, when once applied, produces an in-
evitable result.
It should not require the mind of a scientist to understand
and appreciate the impropriety, as well as the absurdity, of
calling this "Suggestion."
And yet, in essence, the term "Suggestion" defines, with
as much scientific exactness and literary acuteness, the
process by which one man lodges a bullet in the brain of an-
other by the use of a revolver, as it does the process by which
a hypnotist lodges an impression in the consciousness of his
subject by an impulse of his will. It is therefore just as
fitting, proper and scientifically correct to assert that a man
mav "suggest" a bullet into the brain of his fellow by the
70 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
aid of a gun as that a hypnotist employs "Suggestion" as any
part of the process by and through which he impresses his
thoughts, impulses, desires and will upon the consciousness
of his subject.
It would seem that the foregoing illustration should be
sufficient to make clear the fact that the term "Suggestion" is
but another fiction which has found its way into the literature
of hypnotism in contravention of all the rules of lexicology
and in direct opposition to the interests of science. The con-
summate skill and subtlety with which the professional hypno-
tist appropriates and plays upon this word has artfully suc-
ceeded in blinding the eyes of the public to the noxious pro-
cesses and destructive principles which lie back of it.
To thus blacken the reputation of a good, wholesome and
altogether useful word by purposely associating it with a
process so completely at variance with its true spirit and in-
tent is a character of libel which true science cannot afford
to countenance nor encourage. There should be some legiti-
mate method, it would seem, by which this worthy and esti-
mable word might be rescued and restored at once to its
original status of respectability and consistency.
This, however, is a difficult undertaking. It is an equally
hazardous one. Writers and students have become so familiar
with the term in its relation to the hypnotic process that any
attempt to introduce a substitute would be deemed an imperti-
nence and an altogether unwarranted interference, even though
one might easily be found possessing all the elements of ac-
knowledged consistency and scientific exactness.
For this and other reasons no effort will here be made to
eliminate or supplant the term Hypnotic-"Suggestion." On
the other hand, with a mental reservation and protest, it will
be recognized and accepted as an unpleasant necessity for the
present.
Hypnotic-" Suggestion," for the purposes of this work, has
therefore been defined as: "A suggestion made by a hypno-
tist to his subject while the latter is under the hypnotic con-
trol of the former."
Let it be distinctly understood, however, that the word
"SUGGESTION" A LEXICOLOGICAL LIBEL 71
"Suggestion" in this connection, and wherever else it may
be connected with the hypnotic process, is always equivalent
to "Irresistible Impulse," or "Imperative Command," in just
so far as the hypnotic relation exists at the time and under the
conditions referred to.
It is anticipated, however, that as science becomes ac-
quainted with the nature and effects of the hypnotic process
the term "Command" will naturally supersede the term "Sug-
gestion." And thus a terminology will ultimately be adopted
which will convey to the world a definite and accurate under-
standing of the difference between voluntary and involun-
tary processes, between independent and subjective states of
being, and between responsible and irresponsible conditions of
individual intelligence.
72 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER XI.
INDEPENDENT SUGGESTION A FACT.
There is such a thing as true suggestion.
There is a process which, by all the rules of both science
and language, is justly entitled to that designation. This,
however, is as different from Hypnotic-"Suggestion" as lib-
erty is different from bondage, or as light is different from
darkness, or as truth is different from falsehood.
For the important purpose of distinguishing true sugges-
tion from its counterfeit, Hypnotic-"Suggestion," the genu-
ine has been designated as "Independent Suggestion."
Independent Suggestion, accurately defined, may be said
to be a suggestion made by one person to another while each
is in full and undisputed control of all his independent, self-
conscious and rational faculties, capacities and powers. That
is to say, while neither is under hypnotic control. In this
case each party acts independently of the other, and of his
own free will and accord.
It will therefore be observed that Independent Suggestion
differs from Hypnotic-" Suggestion" in the following par-
ticulars :
i. That neither party is under hypnotic control.
2,. That each is in undisputed possession and control
of all his own independent, self-conscious and rational facul-
ties, capacities and powers.
3. That each applies his own individual intelligence to
the subject matter under consideration and accepts the sug-
gestion or rejects it, as the case may be, in accordance with
his own independent judgment, and of his own free choice.
4. That each one is at all times individually responsible
for having made his own decision as well as for the results
of his own actions in accordance therewith.
But men of science have come to know that there are at
least two very different and distinct methods by which an In-
dependent Suggestion may be conveyed by one person to
another, viz.:
INDEPENDENT SUGGESTION A FACT 73
1. By the usual means and channels of communication
upon the purely physical plane, such as the voice, the facial
expression, gesticulation, by written or printed words, signs,
characters and symbols, as well as by telephone, telegraph and
other mechanical means and methods.
2. By mental processes alone.
For the purpose of indicating this important distinction
and firmly fixing it in mind, the term "Telepathic Sugges-
tion" has been employed.
Telepathic Suggestion has already been defined as an In-
dependent Suggestion conveyed by one person to another by
mental processes alone, without the aid of the usual physical
means of communication.
The following illustrations may serve to make the neces-
sary distinctions still more clearly and impressively apparent:
1. HYPNOTIO"SUGGESTION." Let it be supposed that A
undertakes to convey a Hypnotic-"Suggestion" to B. In
order to accomplish the de-sired result he must invoke a
process and a power which will first paralyze B's physical
sensory organism and deprive him of the power of individual
self-control. Through this method A obtains complete con-
trol of all the channels by and through which the conscious-
ness of B may be impressed.
In this relation A becomes absolute master, and B be-
comes a helpless automatic instrument under the operation
and control of his will. When this relation of operator and
instrument has been fully established between them, A con-
veys to B what hypnotists are pleased to designate as a "Sug-
gestion," but which, under all the conditions and circum-
stances, is, in the very nature of things, equivalent to an irre-
sistible impulse or an imperative command. By the law of
relationship thus established, B has no alternative but to obey
just as far as the hypnotic process is invoked. And this is
called Hypnotic-" Suggestion."
2. INDEPENDENT SUGGESTION. Suppose that A, who is
friendly to B, discovers what he believes to be an excellent
opportunity for B to make a safe and profitable investment.
Moved by the impulse of friendship, he goes to B and care-
74 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
fully lays before him all the facts at his command bearing
upon the subject, and then suggests that B follow up the
inquiry and look into the matter for himself.
A, having thus kindly and deferentially called B's atten-
tion to the matter and invited his favorable consideration of
the same, feels that his mission of friendship has been fully
performed. He therefore goes his way and leaves B to in-
vestigate the matter for himself and accept or reject his sug-
gestion in accordance with the dictates of his own free and
independent judgment.
And this is Independent Suggestion, conveyed by the
usual physical means of communication.
3. TELEPATHIC SUGGESTION. Let it be supposed that A
desires to acquaint B with the fact that he is perplexed and
needs B's counsel and assistance. A desires to communicate
the fact to B telepathically. He therefore goes to fiis room,
where everything is quiet and nothing is likely to divert his
attention. He places himself in a position and condition of
complete physical relaxation, and then intently fixes his mind
on B, charging it all the while with the earnest desire that B
call and see him at once. At the same instant B obtains the
impression that A is in distress and desires to see him. He
immediately responds to the impulse and accordingly calls
on A.
And this is Telepathic Suggestion. That is to say, it is
Independent Suggestion by mental processes alone, without
the aid of the usual physical means of communication.
It will now be observed that the various processes involved
in the foregoing illustrations mark a radical distinction be-
tween what is known as Hypnotic-"Suggestion" and true, or
Independent Suggestion. This distinction is of vital im-
portance to a definite understanding of the real principle in-
volved.
The complete failure of modern writers and authorities to
appreciate and carefully note this vital distinction is respon-
sible for a very large percentage of the confusion and error
which have crept into the recent literature of the subject,
INDEPENDENT SUGGESTIONA FACT 75
and through this channel into the minds of students, investi-
gators and the public in general.
Constant association of the word "Suggestion" with the
thought of hypnotism, with hypnotic processes and hypnotic
experiments, has invested it with a meaning which, so far
as the facts are concerned, is purely fictitious and wholly mis-
leading. Whenever and wherever a hypnotist employs the
term "Suggestion" the student is either led or permitted to
infer that it means Hypnotic-"Suggestion." In fact, in the
language of the hypnotist, the word has come to be but a
synonym of hypnotism.
But the distinction between this and Independent Sugges-
tion is fundamental and must be kept constantly in mind.
Otherwise the student will inevitably find himself in the midst
of a bewildering maze of contradiction and inconsistency.
This is more especially true in the department of Suggestive
Therapeutics. In this fruitful field of interest and inquiry
writers and authorities have either ignored the distinction
entirely or have noted it in such manner as to convey the
impression that it is of little or no importance.
And yet it is safe to assert that in all the literature of
hypnotism wherever the word "Suggestion" appears it should
in the very largest number of instances be preceded by the
word "Independent." For it is a fact which none but the
professional hypnotist and the misinformed proselyte will
deny, that the genuine therapeutic results of Suggestion which
have been advertised to the world have been the results of
Independent Suggestion and not those of Hypnotic-" Sugges-
tion."
Nevertheless, from the fact that those who have charged
themselves with the task of reporting the results to the world
fail to differentiate between the kinds of Suggestion em-
ployed, the credulous inquirer is permitted and even encour-
aged to attribute the gross results to the alleged or supposed
magical power of hypnotism and Hypnotic-" Suggestion."
Under these conditions it is not strange that in the name
and under the guise of "Hypnotism" and Hypnotic-"Sugges-
tion" a thousand beneficent results have been wrought which
76 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
are no more related to hypnotism, in fact, than they are to
the Monroe Doctrine or the Clayton-Bulwer Treaty.
No more subtle error could be devised than that which is
couched and concealed in the word "Suggestion" as it is em-
ployed in connection with Hypnotism and the Hypnotic Pro-
cess. Upon the basis of this most ingenious device and fas-
cinating fiction even men of science have been misled, just as
government experts have often been deceived, for the time
being, by artfully designed and skillfully executed counter-
feit currency.
But just as there are infallible tests for discovering the
most perfect counterfeit coins and currency, so there are un-
erring and indisputable methods and means of determining
counterfeit "Suggestion" from the genuine and true. In like
manner there are equally unquestionable methods of deter-
mining the exact results of Hypnotic-"Suggestion," as com-
pared with those of Independent Suggestion.
These are subjects which will command further attention.
DOES HYPNOTISM CURE? 77
CHAPTER XII.
DOES HYPNOTISM CURE?
The chief claims which the advocates of hypnotism set
up in justification of the hypnotic process are based upon its
alleged value as a therapeutic agent. For instance, they claim :
1. That hypnosis may be employed as an anaesthetic in
surgery.
2. That through the agency of Hypnotic-" Suggestion"
diseases of various kinds may be cured.
3. That by means of the hypnotic process vicious habits
may be overcome and evil tendencies counteracted.
4. It has even been claimed by some that through the
beneficent action of Hypnotic-' 'Suggestion" mental and moral
powers may be developed.
As evidence in substantiation of these by no means in-
significant claims, professional hypnotists throughout the
country report a large number of cases such as the following:
i. A sufferer from insomnia has taken treatment from
the regular physician and has tried all sorts of remedies in
vain. He finally appeals to the hypnotist, who undertakes
the case. After a number of trials the patient is placed
in the hypnotic trance. While in this state of complete hyp-
notic control the operator "suggests" that the difficulty will
soon pass away and that the patient will immediately begin
to grow better. Before awakening him from the hypnotic
sleep the hypnotist strongly impresses him with tlie further
"suggestion" that he will sleep soundly all through the fol-
lowing night, and will waken the next morning much re-
freshed and invigorated. He is then wakened from the hyp-
notic trance and permitted to go his way, with the injunction
to report the following day.
Cases of a similar nature are reported where a single treat-
ment of this nature seems to have relieved the difficulty, for
the time being. But if it should prove that a single Hypnotic
subjection is not sufficient, the operation is repeated, with such
variations as the particular operator may deem advisable, until
78 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
relief is either obtained or the case proves to be one which
is beyond the range of the hypnotic process.
2. A clinical case is in course of preparation for the am-
putation of a limb. The patient is placed upon the operating
table. But instead of administering the usual physical anaes-
thetics of ether and chloroform, a hypnotist is called in. He
finally succeeds in placing the patient under complete hypnotic
control and inducing the deep, lethargic, trance condition.
While in this state the operation is successfully performed.
After the surgeon has fully completed his work and everything
is in readiness, the hypnotist gives the word of command and
the patient wakens from the hypnotic trance without having
been conscious of any physicial suffering whatsoever. There
is not even the usual nausea which so often follows the ad-
ministration of physical anaesthetics.
3. Through convivial associations an individual acquires
the habit of drink. He yields to its seductive influence until
the appetite becomes stronger than his desire to overcome it.
Various antidotes and substitutes are tried, but without avail.
Change of climate and association is suggested and tried with
the same result. The habit still remains. It appears to be a
hopeless case. But the hypnotist is at last called in. He em-
ploys the hypnotic process. Under the influence of Hypnotic-
''Suggestion" he finally succeeds in overcoming the craving
for drink. The patient goes his way, and it may be that both
patient and hypnotist are under the impression that a "cure"
has been effected.
In each of these cases the hypnotist flatters himself that he
has done a good work. He therefore feels himself entirely
justified in recommending hypnotism and Hypnotic-" Sugges-
tion" to all those who suffer from like conditions. The ob-
jective facts alone, thus far observed, would appear to sus-
tain his position. He therefore places himself upon the same
ethical platform with the regularly schooled physician and
challenges the world to successfully refute his claim.
He calls our attention to the admitted fact that the regular
physician and surgeon employ physical anaesthetics every day
in a wide variety of cases and think nothing of so doing. Bv
DOES HYPNOTISM CURE? 79
this process they also induce what is recognized as an arti-
ficial sleep or trance condition, which, in many respects, re-
sembles the condition of hypnotic trance.
Physicians and surgeons justify themselves upon humani-
tarian grounds, and we do not think of questioning their right
nor their wisdom in so doing. To the superficial observer
the results of the two methods are identical. He cannot under-
stand why one of these methods should be commended and
the other condemned. Nor can it be wondered at that the
proposition is one which perplexes him. For indeed it is one
which has perplexed the scientist and the metaphysician as
well as the casual observer.
In thus basing his justification and advocacy of hypno-
tism upon its alleged value as a therapeutic agent, the hypno-
tist has chosen the strongest possible ground upon which to
support his claims, and therefore the strongest position in
which to entrench himself. He is fortified behind a strong
breastwork of objective facts and conditions which, to the
average student, would seem to be impregnable.
In order to give him the benefit of every possible doubt
which his genius may be able to lodge in the minds of the
innocent and the unsophisticated, and thus put into his hands
every defensive weapon of which it is possible for him to
avail himself, a number of sweeping admissions have already
been made a part of this work. By these admissions it is
intended to show that in so far as the purely physical facts
reported are concerned, there is no material controversy. In
other words, it is here intended to admit all the objective facts
upon which the professional hypnotist attempts to justify the
employment of the hypnotic process for therapeutic purposes.
Having thus admitted the hypnotist's alleged basis of
physical facts to be true, for the express purpose of avoiding
unnecessary controversy over irrelevant and immaterial mat-
ter, it only remains to be determined why his conclusions,
based upon these alleged physical facts, are not equally true.
If his conclusions are incorrect it is due to him as well as to
the public in general that the error be pointed out and the
80 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
truth made plain. It is the purpose of this work to accom-
plish this task, if it be possible.
Referring again to the hypothetical cases above outlined,
let it be assumed that the facts therein stated are the only
facts which appear in each particular case. It is impossible
for the average individual to doubt the objective evidences of
his own physical senses. The results seem to speak for them-
selves. Any attempt to discredit them would seem to be
gratuitous as well as unwarranted and unjust. In the one
case a surgical operation is successfully performed under hyp-
notic anaesthesia without conscious physical suffering of any
kind. In another the debilitated condition of the nervous
organism indicated by insomnia is seemingly relieved. In
the third a degrading habit is seemingly overcome and a de-
structive appetite controlled.
These being the specific objects sought to be acomplished,
it would appear, from a surface view of the matter at least,
that the remedy has proved itself entirely adequate and the
process invoked both salutary and commendable. It is quite
possible, and even probable, that the physical scientist of the
conventional school would so declare.
If these facts which thus appear upon the surface were,
indeed, the only facts entitled to the consideration of the in-
quirer, and the results which appear to the objective vision
of the observer from the published reports were truly the
only results thereby accomplished, it would then seem quite
impossible to find a legitimate excuse for criticising the hyp-
notist or protesting against the hypnotic process by and
through which these seemingly beneficent results were accom-
plished. In other words, if that which appears upon the sur-
face reports of all these assumed "cures" embodied all the
material facts to be considered, it would be difficult to imagine
a good and sufficient reason why the hypnotist should not be
commended for his work and the hypnotic process fully ap-
proved upon its merits.
But it has been strongly intimated that there are other
facts than those which appear in the published reports of
these experiments. If this be true, then it is manifestly un-
DOES HYPNOTISM CURE? 81
fair to judge either the hypnotist or the hypnotic process
solely upon the objective facts thus reported. No problem
can be solved with absolute certainty until all the facts are
taken into account. The true scientist never feels himself
justified in drawing a final conclusion upon any subject under
his consideration, and holding that conclusion to be scientific,
until he is certain that all the facts are before him bearing
upon that particular question. Even then he must be sure
that he has given to each separate fact the full measure of
value and importance to which it is entitled before he can
hope to reach a just and accurate judgment.
It is indeed true, as above suggested, that there are other
material facts concerning hypnotism and the hypnotic process
than those which come to the attention of the public, or that
of the student through the voluntary and unverified reports
of the professional hypnotist who, it will be admitted, has a
personal interest to conserve thereby. Such of these addi-
tional facts as have been gathered and classified in such man-
ner as to be most readily understood, will be presented for
consideration in the following order:
i. It has been found by the School of Natural Science
that out of each one hundred reported hypnotic "cures" at
least sixty-three are in no sense whatever entitled to be so
classified. The subsequent history of these cases discloses
the startling fact that the hypnotic process has only suc-
ceeded in hoodwinking the patient, and concealing the mani-
festation of the disease from the objective vision for a brief
period.
In due course of time, however (in the majority of in-
stances not exceeding eighteen months), the same disease has
"returned" and made its presence fully manifest.
It would seem that the most enthusiastic advocate of the
subjective method of treatment, even, unless he be deliber-
ately dishonest, would frankly admit that in al! such instances
the hypnotic process is in no sense remedial or curative. The
most extravagant claim that could be made for it, based upon
its therapeutic value, would be to the effect that it is, per-
haps, a temporary palliative. But it would scarcely be en-
82 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
titled to even that designation in the accepted meaning of the
term as it is used by men of medical science in their refer-
ence to disease. It might, however, very appropriately be
considered a "palliative" in the sense that it is a "cover" or
"cloak" under which to conceal the true condition of the
patient from both himself and the world.
2,. Out of the same number of cases it is found that in
twenty-four of the sixty-three the same disease "returns" in
a more aggravated form than that in which it manifests itself
prior to the hypnotic treatment.
This fact would appear to strongly indicate that in all
such cases the hypnotic process has acted as an anaesthetic
pure and simple. The sum total of its results is disclosed in
the fact that the patient has been made insensible to and un-
conscious of his true condition for a time. In other words,
he has been deceived or misled for a brief period, during
which the disease has been permitted to continue its destruc-
tive ravages under the protecting cover of hypnotism, without
check or hindrance.
There are many instances where an anaesthetic is desir-
able, and upon broad, humanitarian grounds would be deemed
entirely justifiable. But certainly this claim cannot be suc-
cessfully maintained in the cases above referred to. The
physician and the surgeon limit their use of physical anaes-
thetics to the temporary relief of unendurable pain or suffer-
ing. They at no time employ these agencies for the purpose
of concealment or deception. It is also true that when the
physician or the surgeon administers anaesthetics he accom-
panies their use with remedial agencies intended to correct,
restore and cure. He does not leave the disease to pursue
its work of destruction unmolested.
In the cases here referred to it must be apparent to every
student who has followed the subject to this point that hypno-
tism is only a fatal blind that deceives both the patient and
the public, as well as the hypnotist himself, concerning the
actual conditions. In all such cases as these it only furnishes
disease a convenient cloak under which to complete its deadly
work without likelihood of discovery or interruption until it
DOES HYPNOTISM CURE? 83
is too late. Certainly this use of hypnotism cannot be justified
upon any ground that appeals to human reason, nor upon
any which conscience approves.
3. It is also found that in a considerable number of cases,
outside of those included in the two classes above referred to,
there are equally just grounds for questioning the therapeutic
value of the hypnotic process.
For illustration: It is found that other forms of disease
than those for which the hypnotic treatment is given soon
develop. A case of hysteria is "cured," only to develop epi-
lepsy. A "cure" of stammering is effected, and soon there-
after nervous twitching of the mouth and face develops. A
patient is "cured" of the cocaine habit and immediately there-
after develops cancer of the stomach. A case of rheumatism
is "cured," and within a short time thereafter blood poison
develops.
It would seem that in all such cases the process is one
of transformation only. The only change effected is in the
form of the disease, and not in its substantial essence. There
is certainly no ground here upon which to base a claim of
therapeutic value.
4. In a certain number of the last named class of cases
the transformation is clearly and unmistakably one of an in-
jurious or detrimental character, and therefore destructive in
its effects.
5. There is yet another class of cases not included in any
of those above referred to. And here a wholly different ele-
ment enters into the proposition. It is found, for instance,
that insanity seems to be a natural sequel of the hypnotic
process. The gravity of this statement is fully appreciated.
It is not made lightly, nor without the most unqualified and
conclusive evidence back of it.
This subject has been studied quite independently of its
relation to the subject of therapeutics. It is found that among
hypnotic subjects of all classes, including those who become
such for experimental purposes and for entertainment and
amusement, as well as for the treatment of disease, a fraction
over nine per cent, develop insanity in its various forms and
84 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
phases. For the sake of perfect fairness it is proper to state
that a certain percentage of the cases of this character results
from the practice of hypnotism for other than therapeutic
purposes.
The record, however, is especially significant and valuable
from a therapeutic standpoint, in that it demonstrates beyond
all question that hypnotism practiced without destructive in-
tent is nevertheless destructive in its effects. This, perhaps,
is as nearly a fair test of its therapeutic value as it is possible
to apply upon the plane of its purely physical aspect.
To obtain an adequate understanding of the percentage of
insanity from this cause the following illustration may be of
value: On the basis of nine per cent, the city of Chicago
would furnish about 180,000 insane to be cared for i'f hypno-
tism were practiced upon the entire community instead of
our recognized systems of medicine. The city of New York
would produce about 300,000, and the city of London about
450,000.
The various forms of insanity which follow from this
cause also furnish food for much serious reflection. But it is
impossible to consider this phase of the subject at sufficient
length, in this connection, to develop its specific value and
importance. The significance of this phase of the subject
will be more fully appreciated as the general theme is further
developed.
The foregoing are some of the additional facts of physi-
cal nature which must be taken into account in arriving at a
correct solution of the problem under consideration. There
are yet other purely physical facts which might be added to
strongly supplement the position taken in this work. But,
viewing the subject now in the light of the facts already in
evidence, it would appear that we are justly entitled, upon
physical grounds alone, to ask the question in all seriousness,
"Does hypnotism cure?"
The data here furnished is such as to fall entirely within
the limitations of physical science. They are therefore within
DOES HYPNOTISM CURE? 85
the range of actual demonstration whenever physical science
shall come to regard the subject as of sufficient importance
to command its attention and consideration.
Since the foregoing was written there comes to this country direct
irom Berlin, Germany, under date of January 29, 1903, the following
cable dispatch, which is especially significant and pertinent in this con-
nection :
"The commission of experts in mental diseases appointed by the
Ministry of Education to investigate the healing value of hypnotism
reports that it is essentially worthless. The commission, which is
composed of Professor Mendel and Drs. Gock, Munter and Aschenoorn,
was appointed during the faith-healing excitement here a year ago.
The report declares hypnotism cannot produce organic changes nor
cure epilepsy nor hysteria."
86 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER XIII.
A VIOLATION OF NATURAL LAW.
On the plane of physical nature there are certain addi-
tional facts concerning the hypnotic process which the scien-
tist, the physician, the professional hypnotist and the hyp-
notic subject all alike recognize and admit.
The value of these additional facts to the individual will
depend very largely upon the particular relation in which
they are considered. They are essential, however, and there-
fore should not be overlooked nor ignored by those who are
seriously endeavoring to reach a just conclusion as to the
real nature and true meaning of hypnosis in all its different
bearings.
As briefly and concisely as may be possible a few of these
supplementary facts will be presented for consideration in
the following order:
I. The advocates of hypnotism, of all grades and schools,
find it necessary to admit that the hypnotic relation is "ab-
normal." It is, in truth, recognized and admitted by all who
have given the subject proper consideration to be a relation
which Nature does not, of her own accord, establish or main-
tain between individuals. It is therefore clearly a relation
which Nature does not contemplate.
In other words, it is a relation into which the individuals,
of their own accord, enter without the sanction of Nature.
It would seem that this of itself should be sufficient to con-
demn its practice either as a therapeutic agent or for any
other purpose.
As evidence of the general recognition of this important
fact by the established authorities, Webster defines the hyp-
notic relation as one which is "characterized by unnatural or
morbid sleep."
According to the Encyclopaedia Britannica, "Hypnotism
may be regarded as a condition in which the part of the
nervous apparatus associated with conscious perception is
thrown out of gear."
A VIOLATION OF NATURAL LAW 87
Foster's Encyclopaedic Medical Dictionary informs us that
hypnotism is "an abnormal state," etc.
Even Prof. John Duncan Quackenbos, of Columbia Uni-
versity, admits that it is an "artificial sleep," etc.
Indeed, it is equally true that every acknowledged author-
ity in existence might be quoted in recognition of the funda-
mental fact that hypnotism and the hypnotic relation are
"abnormal" and "unnatural."
The conclusion follows with irresistible logic that what-
ever is found to be unnatural is necessarily without the sanc-
tion or approval of Nature. That which is outside the sanc-
tion and approval of Nature is necessarily hostile to Nature's
purpose and therefore contrary to natural law. That is to
say, it is contrary to Nature's Constructive Principle.
Materia Medica, both prophylactic and therapeutic, is
based upon its strict conformity to Nature's Constructive
Principle. In its prophylactic aspect it is intended to supple-
ment Nature in her constructive effort to preserve health
and prevent disease. In its therapeutic branch the underlying
purpose is to supplement Nature's Constructive Process in
the restoration of health and the cure of disease.
The true physician bases his entire success in the cure of
disease upon his knowledge of natural law and his ability to
conform thereto. His study of diagnostics is solely for the
purpose of acquiring the ability to accurately distinguish be-
tween the "normal" and the "abnormal." Having acquired
this knowledge, his success in the practice of his profession
is commensurate with his ability to eliminate the "abnormal"
and restore the "normal." The basis of all his work, there-
fore, is the operation of normal or natural constructive pro-
cesses.
It is, indeed, difficult to understand how it is possible to
effect a cure upon any other principle. And yet the hypno-
tist, by a process which he admits in advance to be "abnor-
mal" or "unnatural," declares his ability to thereby produce
a "normal" or "natural" condition or result.
Expressed in a slightly different form, he would lead us
to believe that by the application of a process which he ad-
88 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
mils to be destructive he is able to produce constructive re-
sults. By a process which is admitted to be unhealthy he
proposes to produce healthy results.
Even if the facts were not all against him, his proposi-
tion, stripped of its mysticism, is one which violates all the
rules of logic and offends every principle of rational intelli-
gence.
2. Another important fact is with equal unanimity ad-
mitted by scientists, professional hypnotists and acknowl-
edged authorities of all the different . schools, and is known
by the hypnotic subject to be true beyond all possible ques-
tion. It is this that Nature has erected certain barriers and
safeguards around every individual intelligence which must
be broken down or overcome before it is possible to suc-
cessfully establish the hypnotic relation.
This is evidenced :
(a) By the fact that the hypnotist finds himself unable
to hypnotize any and every person he meets. If there
were no natural barriers between him and his victim he
would be able to enter into the hypnotic relation with every
person upon whom he desired to exercise his hypnotic pow-
ers. This, however, is not the case. He finds that he is able
to exercise his powers upon only such as prove to be suscep-
tible. These are, generally speaking, those who are known
as the relatively negative types.
(b) It is evidenced by the further fact that the hypno-
tist finds himself unable to hypnotize a subject the first time
he tries, as a general rule. He finds that even among those
who prove to be susceptible to his power, it requires much
more time and vastly greater effort on his part the first at-
tempt than it does the second. It requires more time and
greater effort the second attempt than it does the third, and
so on.
In other words, at each succeeding repetition of the hyp-
notic subjection the process becomes easier for the hypnotist.
And in due time, if the process be repeated sufficiently often
upon the same subject, a point is reached where all the bar-
riers and safeguards which Nature has erected are overcome
A VIOLATION OF NATURAL LAW 89
and swept away, and it requires but an impulse of the will
to bring his subject under complete hypnotic subjection and
control.
In order that these scientific demonstrations may not be
mistaken for the mere naked assertions of the writer, the fol-
lowing quotation from the Encyclopaedia Britannica, Vol. XV,
p. 278, will be of special interest:
"Certain persons are more readily hypnotized than others, and it has
been observed that, once the condition has been successfully induced,
it can be more easily induced a second time, a third time more easily
than a second, and so on until the patient may be so pliant to the
will of the operator that a fixed look, or a wave of the hand, may
throw him at once into the condition. Such are the general facts,"
etc.
It will be found that the authorities unanimously agree
with the unqualified declarations of the writer just quoted.
Further time and space will not be consumed, therefore, upon
this particular proposition. It is important, however, to bear
in mind the far-reaching significance of all this.
It means that around every individualized intelligent soul
Nature, or the great God of the Universe, has erected certain
barriers and safeguards to protect him from the unscrupu-
lous encroachments of all those who would otherwise tres-
pass upon his individual rights. It also means that the hypno-
tist, before he can practice his destructive art upon a fellow
creature, must first batter down, overwhelm and destroy this
natural fortress of the human soul which stands between him
and his intended victim.
3. But there is a natural corollary of all this which is
of still more vital importance, because it concerns the status
of the subject himself, in whose behalf the best intelligence
of the age is earnestly invoked.
It is found that in exact proportion as the hypnotist gains
ease and facility in the exercise of his power of control, his
subject loses the power of resistance and the power of self-
control. At the first sitting the subject finds that he is easily
able to withstand the volitional assaults of the operator. It
even becomes necessary for him to put himself in a negative
or passive attitude of mind and body, and thus become a vol-
90 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
untary accessory or accomplice with the hypnotist in his ef-
fort to obtain control.
But the second time he finds that the operator does not
seem to require his assistance or co-operation to the same
extent. The subject falls into the hypnotic state without any
particular effort on his own part. The third attempt he be-
comes conscious of the fact that he not only enters into the
hypnotic relation still more easily than before, but that his
power of resistance to the hypnotic influence is being under-
mined and destroyed. At the fourth experiment he is made
to realize the horrible fact that his power of resistance is
still more rapidly waning, and that with equal pace he is losing
the power of self-control.
This progressive condition continues, with each succeed-
ing subjection, until a point is at last reached where all power
of resistance is gone from him. In other words, it is but a
matter of time when all the barriers and safeguards which
Nature has so carefully and so wisely erected about his in-
dividual intelligence as a fortress of defense against the
vicious assaults of his fellow men have been overcome and
destroyed.
At this point he finds himself uncovered and alone in the
presence of the enemy, without means of defense, a helpless
victim in the power and under the control of a merciless con-
queror. He is bound soul and body by an irresistible bond
more relentless and powerful than the felon's shackles. He
finds himself at last stripped of every valuable possession of
the human soul, and powerless to control a single one of the
primary faculties, capacities or powers of his being with
which God or Nature originally invested him as an individ-
ualized, intelligent entity. He has become but an automaton,
a plaything, a bankrupt, a lost soul. He has entered upon
THE WAY OF DEATH.
TRUE SUGGESTION AND FAITH 91
CHAPTER XIV.
TRUE SUGGESTION AND THERAPEUTIC FAITH.
The influence of the mind upon the condition of the physi-
cal body is one of the most patent, potent and unmistakable
pathological and physiological facts of all Nature.
So conspicuously obvious has this become in recent years
that it is to-day the primary and fundamental factor in almost
if not quite every system which has for its purpose the pre-
vention or the cure of disease.
Of such far-reaching and vital importance to humanity
is the principle involved in this proposition that it would
seem to be not only expedient but of special value to every
individual to have it firmly fixed in memory.
No more available method of accomplishing this desirable
result presents itself than that of briefly identifying the prin-
ciple as it exists and manifests itself in some of the leading
systems with which the general public is more or less fa-
miliar at the present time. For that purpose the following
brief analyses are here presented for thoughtful considera-
tion :
1. CURE BY PRAYER. Viewed from the standpoint of the
patient, the attitude of mind in this case is that of asking
a favor with full confidence that it will be granted. In the
sense that Faith is the intuitive perception of that which both
reason and conscience approve, the basis of this system is
Faith.
The act of prayer is but a means to an end. It is the
active process by and through which therapeutic Faith, or
curative Faith, or a healing Faith (whichever may be deemed
the most appropriate name for it), is established in the mind
and consciousness of the individual. Prayer is the means.
Faith is the end. And it is true that in thousands of cases
a cure is the result.
2. MIND CURE. This system is based upon the hypoth-
esis that all diseased conditions of the physical body are
but reflex conditions and results of abnormal mental states.
92 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
In this view of disease it will be readily understood that its
cure is entirely dependent upon a restoration of the mind
to its normal status or condition.
Whatever means or methods may be employed to that
end are supposed to restore the mind of the patient to its
condition or state of normality. The patient is, 'in this case
also, himself a working factor in the process of restoration.
He is led to believe that the process invoked is having the
desired effect and that his mental state is improving. He
grows brighter, happier and more hopeful. Through the
subtle alchemy of the soul his unbelief is slowly but surely
transmuted into an abounding Faith. He learns to believe
that he possesses the power within himself to eradicate dis-
ease and establish the harmony of health.
Through the mysterious power of this wonderful thera-
peutic agent health is finally restored. And thus it is that
many cures are wrought. It is not only useless but foolish
to deny them. It is far better to frankly admit the fact and
then seek to discover the scientific basis or principle upon
which it is founded.
3. CHRISTIAN SCIENCE. This system is founded upon
the negative proposition that there is no such thing as matter,
coupled with the affirmation that mind is the only reality, or
that "all is mind." From this basis it is logically held that
disease is but a conception of the mind concerning matter
which has no existence in fact. It therefore follows that dis-
ease itself does not exist in reality. Being but a mental con-
cept of a material untruth, its banishment from the mind is
all that is necessary to a condition of perfect health.
The patient is given these fundamental propositions from
which to proceed. He is instructed as to the proper formulas
by and through which to rid himself of all false mental con-
cepts. He is taught first the formula of negation by which
he is to persistently deny the existence of disease. Coupled
with this, and as a supplementary process, he learns the for-
mula of affirmation by which he is to bring the mind to a
full acquiescence in the proposition that "all is good."
He is instructed as to the necessity of keeping these fun-
TRUE SUGGESTION AND FAITH 93
damental propositions constantly in mind and allowing noth-
ing whatever to disturb his confidence in their literal truth.
His mind thus becomes active in a process which ultimately
brings him to believe in the truth of the formula.
At last his Faith in the soundness of this strange logic
is fully established. However remarkable and seemingly "un-
scientific" may be the process by which this is accomplished,
the result is nevertheless achieved. And in all sincerity and
truth it can be said that his Faith hath made him whole. It
is folly to deny it. It is equally foolish to try to ignore it.
The evidences are too many to leave any just ground for
doubt in the mind of the unprejudiced. It is a fact with
which science must deal if it would discover the principle
which underlies the process by which these wonderful results
are accomplished.
4. MIRACLE CURES. It is a matter of common report
that the Catholic Church has established certain mystic shrines
where "miraculous" cures are wrought.
Those who visit these shrines in the hope of relief are
led to believe that each shrine is presided over by some saintly
intelligence from on high who possesses not only the power
but also the will to cure all those who approach in the spirit
of humility, piety and unbounded Faith.
The possibilities of the miraculous appeal to the human
mind in proportion to its susceptibility to superstitious mys-
ticism. The traditions of the church are filled with wonder-
ful legends of miraculous interventions in behalf of those
who unequivocally acknowledge its authority.
Through the instrumentality of these mythological narra-
tives the credulous and the superstitious are led to approach
these sacred places with an unbounded Faith that God, or
Christ, or the Blessed Virgin, or some saintly, spiritual po-
tentate of the church will take pity on them and relieve them
of all their infirmities. Their Faith being thus established,
many are indeed and in truth cured, and go their way with
praises and thanksgiving and exceeding great joy, fully con-
vinced that a miracle has been wrought.
5. THE BREAD PILL. This is a system or method which,
94 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
perhaps, has to its credit a larger number of bona fide cures
than any other mental or psychic process now employed in
common practice. It is often resorted to by the most skilful
and intelligent physicians of the regular schools. The re-
sults are often truly marvelous. The process may be fully
understood and appreciated from the following illustration
of the manner in which the good-natured and intelligent coun-
try doctor has often employed it, as follows:
He is called to the bedside of a patient who is suffering,
let us say, from nervous debility and insomnia. With a
dignified bearing and professional air, he feels the pulse,
looks at the tongue, inquires into the history of the case,
and makes a careful and thorough examination and diagnosis
of the case, although his professional eye discovers the true
condition at the first glance.
With a wise and knowing nod and an outward manner of
perfect assurance and confidence in himself, he gravely in-
forms the sufferer that he must have sleep and perfect relax-
ation for a number of hours. The patient knows this even
better than the physician does, and he therefore feels that the
man of medicine understands his business. The first step in
the process is thus nicely accomplished. His confidence has
been gained. The physician, well knowing the superior value
of natural sleep in all such instances, hesitates to administer
a narcotic or soporific. But he makes believe that he has a
perfectly harmless drug that is a never failing remedy in all
such cases. He goes to the cupboard ostensibly for a spoon
but while there he carefully prepares a good sized bread
pill. He then informs his patient, with all the professional
unction and emphasis necessary to carry absolute conviction
with the statement, that in twenty minutes from the time it
enters the stomach this wonderful drug will produce abso-
lute physical and nervous relaxation and natural sleep for
twelve hours thereafter, and that he will waken fully re-
freshed and on the way to rapid and complete recovery.
The innocent bolus of bread, charged with this therapeu-
tic suggestion, is then administered to the credulous patient
and with perfect fidelity to its trust, in twenty minutes it
TRUE SUGGESTION AND FAITH 95
brings the promised relaxation and sleep. The wonderful
drug has done its work. The good doctor gently steals away
into the darkness of the night and reserves a knowing smile
until he is out of sight. He pardons himself for this little
deception and congratulates himself upon once more having
demonstrated the wonderful and mysterious power of mind
over matter.
The secret of this formula also is Faith. Every move,
every look, every lineament and expression of the physician
has betrayed his comprehensive knowledge and understand-
ing of the case and disclosed unlimited confidence in his abil-
ity to effect a speedy cure. This all communicates itself to
the mind and consciousness of the patient who, in this nervous
condition, is intently sensitive to every detail that has a bear-
ing upon the case. This is all rapidly transmuted into con-
fidence and thence into Faith, first, in the physician, and next,
in the magical power of his wonderful medicine to bring the
desired relief. His "Faith is well founded," for it is the
faith which bears upon its wings the healing balm of peace
and life.
This is but a single illustration. The same principle,
however, is employed in an almost unlimited variety of ways
by the intelligent physician. In thousands of instances the
medical fraternity daily employ similar means and methods in
all kinds of cases, with results which are often almost unbe-
lievable by those who have not actually witnessed them.
As previously suggested, hypnotists throughout the country
have so played upon the word "Suggestion" as to convey the
idea that the process above outlined is only one of the many
forms of Hypnotic-"Suggestion." Even physicians them-
selves have not always carefully distinguished between this
method of suggestion and its counterfeit which is employed
in the hypnotic process. The distinction, however, is funda-
mental. The processes are in no way related and must not
be confused.
There are numerous other mental processes by which
disease is treated and cures effected. It would seem unneces-
sary to go into fuller details for the reason that those here
96 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
outlined are sufficient to develop the principle under considera-
tion. A critical analysis of these five different systems or
methods of curing disease cannot fail to establish the substan-
tial and essential fact that in so far as the patient himself be-
comes an active factor in the curative process the therapeutic
agent employed is one and the same. The remedial power in
each and every instance is Faith. Not only this, it is literally
the same kind of Faith, namely, Faith of the patient himself
that a cure will be effected.
The widely divergent methods or formulas employed by
the various schools and cults to accomplish the same result,
are likely to confuse the mind of the student in the future as
they have done in the past, concerning the real curative prin-
ciple employed. But a careful analysis will disclose the fact
that they all work to the same end, namely, the establishment
of a therapeutic Faith in the mind of the patient. The only
real differences are in the distinctive methods or processes by
which this end is accomplished.
A simple illustration will serve to bring the underlying
principle more clearly into view:
Let it be supposed, for instance, that the particular thing
to be accomplished by a given individual is the lifting of a
2,000 pound stone from the earth a distance of three feet to
its intended place upon the foundation wall of a building.
The individual charged with the accomplishment of this task
may succeed by any one of the following methods :
1. He may employ the services of ten men, each of whom
can lift 200 pounds from the ground to the required height.
By applying their hands directly to the burden and uniting
their strength in a common effort they will thus be able to
lift it into place.
2. By the aid of jack-screws he may be able to accom-
plish the task alone in course of time.
3. Or, he may employ a derrick, and by the application of
steam, gas, electricity, or horse power, he may perform the
same task in half the time.
In fact, he may, if he is a thoroughly skilled mechanic, ac-
complish the same result by the application of something like
TRUE SUGGESTION AND FAITH 97
720 different combinations of the six so-called "Mechanical
Powers" the lever, the inclined plane, the wheel and axle,
the screw, the pulley, and the wedge.
If the casual observer, however, were asked to define the
principle back of all these various processes, he would very
likely be confused. If he were the skilled mechanic and fully
acquainted with all the physical means and methods of ap-
plying mechanical power he would very likely define the prin-
ciple from the standpoint of pure mechanics. In this event
he would name such of the six mechanical powers as might
be employed in each particular method, and would insist that
he had thus defined the principle involved.
But in the final analysis there is an active, moving princi-
ple back of all these which he has entirely overlooked, namely,
the independent, self-conscious and rational volition of the
man who utilizes these various processes and so applies them
as to accomplish the desired result. All these various me-
chanical processes and appliances are but so many different
instruments, by means of which his intelligence is enabled to
produce one and the same result.
In like manner, the first method of cure above named, de-
velops a therapeutic Faith by the lever of prayer. The second
accomplishes the same result by the inclined plane of reason.
The third employs the wheel of negation and the axle of af-
firmation. The fourth resorts to the jack-screw of supersti-
tion. The fifth relies upon the pulley of suggestion and the
wedge of wisdom. But they all accomplish identically the
same result, namely, the establishment of an abounding Faith.
And this is the therapeutic principle involved, so far as the
patient himself is an active factor in the curative process.
As there are some 720 different combinations in which the
known mechanical powers may be employed to produce a given
result, so it would seem that there is an almost unlimited
number of means and methods by which therapeutic Faith
may be established in the minds of patients. This suggestion
may, perhaps, be of value to those who have allowed them-
selves to fall into the unfortunate error of assuming that
98 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
there is but one method of producing conditions which will
cure disease.
Inasmuch as one or more of the schools or systems above
referred to, as well as numerous other metaphysical systems
not here mentioned, profess to represent the Christ Science,
or the particular method supposed by them to have been em-
ployed by Christ in the cure of disease, it may not be deemed
improper to offer a simple suggestion which would seem
to have a special relevancy in this connection.
It is reported, for instance, in the book of St. Luke (17,
12 to 19) that as Jesus was on his way to Jerusalem he was
met by ten lepers, who lifted up their voices and said:
"Jesus, Master, have mercy on us." Jesus directed them to
go and show themselves to the priests, and as they went
they were cleansed. One of the number, a Samaritan, turned
back, fell on his face at Jesus' feet and gave him thanks.
Jesus told him to arise and go his way, and then said to him
by way of explanation: "Thy faith hath made thee whole."
In the book of St. Mark (6, 25 to 34) is also told the story
of the woman who touched his garment and was instantly
healed. When she, in like manner, fell down before him,
he said to her in exactly the same words: "Daughter, thy
faith hath made thee whole."
Again we read (Mark, 10, 46 to 52) of the blind man who
besought him that he might receive his sight. When he
had been healed Jesus said to him also, in the same significant
words: "Thy faith hath made thee whole."
The suggestion which it is here desired to offer for con-
sideration by all those who profess to employ Christ's method
in the art of healing disease, is merely this:
Can it be possible that Christ, knew what he was talking
about when he made these several statements? If so, he
either told the truth or a deliberate falsehood when he said
to each one of these grateful souls: "Thy faith hath made
thee whole." If he told a falsehood in these several in-
stances, then his testimony must be held to be entirely unre-
liable in all other respects, in which event we have no key
TRUE SUGGESTION AND FAITH 99
whatever by which to unlock the mystery of this man's won-
derful power over disease.
On the other hand, if he really knew what he was talking
about, and told the truth in each of these several instances,
then it is clear that he has stated the facts in unmistakable
terms. He said to each of these grateful beneficiaries : "Thy
Faith hath made thee whole." If this is the statement of
a truth, then Faith is the therapeutic agent by and through
which all these particular cures were wrought. More than
this, it was the Faith of the patient himself in every case, for
he said: "Thy Faith," etc.
According to the requirements of this simple method there
seems to be nothing which lays upon suffering humanity the
impossible burden of thinking matter out of existence as a
prerequisite to physical health. It does not appear from the
record of these cases that any of these sufferers denied the
existence of matter. It does not appear that they even denied
the existence of disease. It is not in evidence that they were
compelled to affirm that "All is good." In fact, if the re-
ports be true, it would seem that they failed to conform to any
of the prescribed formulas which are deemed essential by cer-
tain of our modern metaphysical healers who profess to prac-
tice Christ's methods. And yet, they were cured. More-
over, they were cured instantly. And in order that each
might know the secret by which his marvelous cure was
wrought, Christ said again and again : "Thy Faith hath made
thee whole."
In the light of all we know today concerning the cure of
disease by suggestion, and in view of his own unequivocal
statement, does it not seem possible that when the Master
said : "Thy faith hath made thee whole," he crystallized into
definite form a great fundamental principle which underlies
all systems of metaphysical healing wherein the efforts of the
patient himself are a potential factor?
Such is indeed the case. It could not be stated more
clearly. It cannot be expressed more simply. It will never
be declared with greater scientific exactness. It is just pos-
sible, however, that our modern method of expressing the
100 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
same truth will bring it more definitely within the range of
our scientific comprehension. With that thought in view,
the following statement of the therapeutic principle here re-
ferred to may have a possible value :
The relation of the mind to the physical body is such that
every mental state or condition has its reflex expression in
the physical organism. Just why this is so is a proposition
which might lead to endless discussion with fruitless results.
But perhaps one of the best known and most frequently
demonstrated facts of medical science is comprised in the state-
ment that the state of the patient's mind is a potent factor
which must be taken into account in the treatment and cure of
disease of all kinds. The regular practitioner who is in daily
and hourly touch with the suffering will fully understand the
meaning of this proposition, for it embodies a fact with which
he is compelled to deal in every case he is called to attend.
He knows that fear, anger, worry, anxiety, sorrow, gloom,
doubt, despair, unhappiness and excitement of every kind
and degree, are destructive mental conditions which have a
tendency to produce disease, and when so produced to aggra-
vate and accelerate its destructive action upon the physical
body.
He likewise knows that courage, brightness, cheerfulness,
freedom from care, with perseverance, determination, hope
and Faith are all mighty factors to supplement Nature's Con-
structive Principle in the restoration and conservation of
health and life.
And again, there are many specific diseases which are
unquestionably due entirely to mental causes. Wherever this
condition obtains it is entirely within the power of the pa-
tient to heal himself by purely mental processes, if he but un-
derstand the principle involved and the method of its appli-
cation.
In just so far as the mental state, condition or attitude
of the patient is or may become a salutary factor at all in the
therapeutic process, it is based upon three constituent mental
elements, viz :
i. The desire to be well.
TRUE SUGGESTION AND FAITH. . _l<tt
2. The will to become well.
3. An abounding and unwavering Faith that the agencies
employed will make him well.
These are conditions which are practically indispensable
to recovery even where the disease or injury may be one
which requires the application of other than purely mental or
physical remedies. Every physician or surgeon who has
given any attention to the psychology of his profession will
appreciate the accuracy of this statement.
And here again, it will be observed that Faith is the
ultimate condition or state of mind to be attained. All things
else are but means to an end, and Faith is that end.
It is now possible to make clear something of the extent
to which the term "Suggestion" has been abused and libeled
by those who are responsible for having inducted it into the
literature of hypnotism and associated it with the hypnotic
process.
It will be conceded that in all the various metaphysical
processes of healing above referred to suggestion plays an
important part. In fact, it may as well be admitted that
suggestion constitutes the mechanical device speaking in
terms of physical nature by means of which the mind of
the patient is slowly but surely lifted from the destructive
level of fear and distrust to the exalted plane of constructive
Faith. It is the lever, so to speak, by which the mind of the
patient is lifted out of the dirt of doubt and despair and set
in its rightful place in the constructive wall of therapeutic
Faith. It is therefore a most potent factor in the curative
process.
As already stated, however, the term has become so inti-
mately and inseparably identified and associated with the pro-
fessional hypnotist and with the language and literature of
hypnotism that to the average mind it conveys but one mean-
ing. Wherever it is employed in a therapeutic sense it has
come to be understood as Hypnotic-"Suggestion."
Indeed, recent writers have gone so far as to attribute all
the results of the various metaphysical systems of healing to
Hypnotic-"Snggestion." The injustice and the rank fallacy
102 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
of tnis will now be apparent. The character of suggestion
by means of which the mental healer, the Christian Scientist,
or the good doctor with his harmless bread pill, establishes
a therapeutic Faith in the mind of his patient is as far re-
moved from Hypnotic-" Suggestion" as truth is from false-
hood.
Thus it is that under the name of "Suggestion" thou-
sands of the most wonderful cures have been accredited to
hypnotism which are no more related to the hypnotic process
than they are to the tides of the ocean or the Arctic Circle.
They are, in fact, the results of true therapeutic suggestion
which is always and under all conditions and circumstances
"Independent Suggestion" in some form.
While it is not within the province of this particular vol-
ume to elaborate the subject of therapeutic suggestion in
particular, nor therapeutics in general, it may nevertheless
not be amiss to here present the following specific facts, and
state that, in Vol. Ill, of this Series, the subject will be
more fully covered:
1. The only true and legitimate therapeutic suggestion
is Independent Suggestion.
2. Hypnotic-" Suggestion" is in no legitimate sense ther-
apeutic in its action, but, on the contrary, is destructive in
its essential nature.
3. There is not a single result claimed for hypnotism or
for Hypnotic-"Suggestion" which cannot be accomplished by
legitimate therapeutic agencies that do not in the slightest de-
gree interfere with the patient's unimpaired control of all
his independent, self-conscious and rational faculties, capaci-
ties and powers. The breadth of this statement is fully un-
derstood and appreciated. It is not idly made. Its truth will
be made plain to those who follow the subject to its con-
clusion.
4. While it is true that all the various schools of meta-
physical healing employ suggestion as a therapeutic agent,
it may be said in all sincerity and truth and without preju-
dice that not one of them makes use of it in an intelligent
and purposeful manner.
TRUE SUGGESTION AND FAITH 103
By this is meant that the metaphysical healer, generally
speaking, does not know that suggestion has anything what-
ever to do with the process he employs. He attributes his
cures to other agencies entirely. Even if told that he em-
ploys suggestion as the basic principle of his curative process
he would doubtless be offended, for he is not aware of the
fact that he employs this agency.
On the other hand, he knows that he does not intend to
do so. It is therefore perfectly natural for him to attribute
his cures to whatever agency he may have had in mind, even
though entirely imaginary on his part. This, however, does
not alter the fact that he does employ suggestion, and em-
ploys it success fuly as far as he goes.
But it will be observed that inasmuch as he makes use
of it unconsciously and unintentionally, this is neither an in-
telligent nor a purposeful application of the principle in-
volved. It follows that the therapeutic results of all these
various metaphysical systems are meager as compared with
those which might otherwise obtain if the underlying prin-
ciple were fully understood by the operator and intelligently
applied.
5. The intelligent physician who, by means of suggestion,
stimulates the mind of his patient to a therapeutic Faith in
the healing properties and powers of his medicines, makes a
far more intelligent and purposeful application of sugges-
tion, as far as he goes, than does the metaphysical healer.
For it will be seen that the physician understands the prin-
ciple involved and applies it in such manner as to obtain
direct and specific results. In this manner many a drug of
indifferent medicinal value has, through the senses of sight,
smell, touch and taste, been made by the subtle intelligence
of the physician to carry to the consciousness of the patient
a powerful suggestion of life and health. Many a cure has
thus been wrought by the aid of mental suggestion where
physical remedies alone might have failed.
But there is an exact and thoroughly scientific method of
applying therapeutic suggestion, with which even the intelli-
gent physician is not yet fully conversant. It is rationally
104 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
intelligent, entirely purposeful, and thoroughly truthful in
every detail, and when fully understood must commend itself
to the thoughtful consideration of the medical fraternity as a
powerful supplementary factor in the treatment and cure of
disease.
The development of this subject, however, lies wholly
outside the limitations and purposes of this particular volume,
and must therefore be reserved for future consideration.
6. Thus far but a single phase of the subject of true
therapeutic suggestion has been considered, namely, that part
which the patient himself plays in the therapeutic process. It
must not be inferred from this, however, that suggestion is
the only curative agency in Nature, nor that it is by any
means the most important or salutary in its effects.
It will be remembered that our primary purpose has
been to expose to view some of the fallacies of hypnotism and
Hypnotic-"Suggestion." To accomplish this result it has
been necessary to clearly differentiate between what is right-
fully entitled to be known as Hypnotic-"Suggestion" and
what has here been defined as true therapeutic suggestion.
Having done this, our real task has been accomplished.
Lest there may be some, however, who might otherwise
obtain an exaggerated or erroneous impression as to the rela-
tive merit and value of true therapeutic suggestion, it would
seem proper to here state more explicitly that the therapeutic
agencies of Nature are both numerous and potent.
In the order of Nature they divide themselves into three
distinct and separate classes according to the planes of their
activity. That is to say, they are classified as Physical, Spir-
itual and Psychical. Those that are purely physical act di-
rectly upon the physical organism of man. Those that are
spiritual in like manner act directly upon his spiritual or-
ganism, and those that are wholly psychical act directly upon
the soul or intelligence.
Therapeutic suggestion falls under the third class here
named. It is entirely psychic in its nature and action. But
it must not be understood that suggestion is the only psychic
agency of a therapeutic nature. Neither is it the most po-
TRUE SUGGESTION AND FAITH 105
tent. It is but one of the many agencies which Nature has
placed within the reach of human intelligence by and through
which man may establish and maintain harmony in the three-
fold relationship of his being. This constitutes health. This
means the cure of disease. This is the ultimate goal of ther-
apeutics.
Physical remedies, within the limits of their therapeutic
powers, accomplish this result by direct action upon the phys-
ical organism. Spiritual remedies accomplish the same re-
sult through their action upon the spiritual organism.
Psychic remedies, in like manner, reach the same end through
their direct action upon man's essential being, the soul, or
intelligence.
Thus, it will be observed, there are three distinct and sep-
arate keys to the temple of health. One of these unlocks the
outer gate which leads to the great broad court of physical
Nature. Another unlocks the middle door, which leads to
the inner court of spiritual Nature. The third unlocks the
secret door to the inner sanctuary, the Holy of Holies.
According to our practical western way of looking at
things, the owner of a splendid three-story residence would
be considered very foolish, to say the least, if he should lock
the doors leading to the second and third stories and then
deliberately throw away the keys. By so doing he would
only confine himself to the inconveniences and disadvantages
of an ordinary flat, and deliberately deny himself and family
the facilities, advantages and comforts to which they are of
right entitled, and upon which he must still continue to pay
taxes.
No less foolish is the man who would lock any of the
doors of his being through which the true therapeutic agen-
cies of Nature may enter and come to his relief in the hour
of his extremity.
Flooding the basement of a three-story residence will
never put out a fire in the garret nor on the roof. Turning
a hose on the roof is not likely to stop a fire in the cellar.
And yet these are the methods too often employed in the
treatment of disease.
106 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
The narrow-minded and conventional dogmatist of the
purely materialistic schools confines his operations chiefly to
the ground floor and basement. In a fair percentage of cases
he is successful. Why? Because a very large percentage of
disease is of purely physical origin and comes from an over-
heated furnace, so to speak.
The spiritual magnetic healer operates almost exclusively
in the second story, although he does not always know it.
He, too, reports many "put outs." Why is this? Merely be-
cause the fires of disease with which he is dealing happen to
be of spiritual origin. They therefore yield to spiritual agen-
cies.
The mental healer and the Christian Scientist confine
their operations entirely to the third story and the garret.
And they also conquer many fires of disease. Lightning and
falling embers usually catch in the roof. In all such cases
these good people happen to be in exactly the right locality.
This is because many diseases are of purely psychic or men-
tal origin. They therefore yield to the higher treatment.
But the ideal fireman is he who is able to quickly and
accurately locate a blaze and apply the proper extinguisher,
no matter whether the fire be in the basement or on the roof.
In like manner the ideal physician is the man who is able
1. To quickly and accurately diagnose a disease and
determine its exact location, nature and origin.
2. To apply the remedy that will reach the seat of dis-
ease most directly, whether it be of physical, spiritual or
psychical origin.
The pioneers of the medical profession are to-day ap-
proaching this happy consummation. When they shall have
fully attained the high position here suggested they will
command the unlimited confidence of their fellow-men, but
not before. Then and then only will they be entitled to the
name of "Great Physicians."
POST-MORTEM HYPNOTISM 107
CHAPTER XV.
POST-MORTEM HYPNOTISM.
Up to this point the subject of hypnotism has been viewed
from the standpoint of physical Nature entirely. But there
is yet another, a higher and more comprehensive position from
which to examine it.
If the facts thus far taken into account leave in the mind
a possible doubt as to the destructive character of the hyp-
notic process that doubt will be dissolved by the added light of
the higher science.
It has come to be pretty generally conceded, even by men
of physical science, that the physical body of man is but an
instrument of the intelligent soul which inhabits and oper-
ates it. It is, perhaps, not so generally understood and ac-
knowledged that this intelligent entity, the soul, continues
to exist independently of the physical body after the transi-
tion called death.
Such, however, is the case. This is one of the demon-
strated facts of Natural Science, to which reference has al-
ready been made. This, therefore, is the primary and funda-
mental fact which must be taken into account in the final
determination of the merits or demerits of hypnosis as a
therapeutic agent.
Those who are prepared to accept the fact of a life after
physical death, even tentatively, will not hesitate to enter-
tain, upon the same basis, its natural corollary, which is that
whatever affects the essential individual, the intelligent en-
tity, the soul, is of vastly greater importance to him than
is that which affects only the temporary physical instrument
of that intelligent soul, the physical body.
Natural Science has not only demonstrated with abso-
lute certainty the continuity of life after physical death. It
has done much more than this. Among other things, it has
studied this subject of hypnotism and Hypnotic-" Suggestion"
from the same high plane and point of vantage. It has an-
alyzed the process and carefully noted the results Irom the
108 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
planes of spiritual and psychical Nature. The facts of Nat-
ural Science, therefore, which bear upon this subject from
the plane of man's essential being, the soul, must also be
accorded their full measure of value and importance in the
final solution of the great problem.
These are the facts which physical science has thus far
almost entirely ignored. These are the facts to which the
professional hypnotist never refers. These are the essential
facts upon which alone the intelligent student must depend
in his final analysis. These, in truth, are the facts upon
which the cause of hypnotism and the professional hypnotist
must ultimately stand or fall.
Strange as the term may sound to the unaccustomed ear,
and unsubstantial as the idea may appear to the average
reader, the one primary and fundamental fact upon which
all other facts depend for their correct reading is, that there
is a "Post-Mortem" view of this question which cannot be
ignored by those who love the truth, nor by those who desire
to guard themselves and their loved ones from the insidious
dangers which menace them under the seductive guise and
fascinating names of "Hypnotism" and Hypnotic-"Sugges-
tion."
For it is a fact that the school of the higher science has
followed the hypnotist and his subject into the realm of spir-
itual life which has been designated by the school of physical
science as the "Unknowable." It has there gathered many ad-
ditional facts of Nature which it is able to definitely formu-
late and present with unqualified assurance. Among those
additional facts which have a specific bearing upon the sub-
ject under consideration the following are of particular im-
portance :
1. Hypnotism, in its essential nature, is a subjective,
psychic process.
2. Its most direct and essential results are related to
and registered upon the soul, rather than upon the physical
body.
3. As might readily be anticipated, therefore, physical
death does not necessarily break, destroy, counteract nor even
POST-MORTEM HYPNOTISM 109
mitigate the hypnotic relation when the same has been fully
entered into and established upon the physical plane.
A suggestive hint of this important, underlying fact may
be obtained from a simple experiment which is already fa-
miliar to both hypnotists and students everywhere.
For instance, it is a well-known fact, fully established by
oft-repeated demonstrations, to which hypnotists of all
grades, kinds and schools will testify, that a "suggestion" or
command given to a subject while he is in a state of profound
hypnosis, to be executed or performed at some future time
(commonly designated as a post-hypnotic suggestion), will
be obeyed with absolute fidelity at the time and place and
in the exact manner prescribed.
That is to say, an Hypnotic-" Suggestion" may be given
to-day to be executed by the subject a week, a month, a year,
or even ten years hence, and when the time comes the com-
mand will be executed with perfect fidelity, even though the
subject and the operator may at the time be thousands of
miles apart, and the hypnotist may have forgotten the inci-
dent entirely.
In order that this statement shall not be misinterpreted
as an idle or meaningless assertion, the following carefully
worded statement is here quoted from the recent work of
Prof. De Lawrence, fully sustaining every assertion made.
He says:
"Suggest to a subject while he is sound asleep that in eight weeks
he will mail you a letter with a blank piece of note paper inside, and
during the intervening period you may yourself forget the occurrence,
but, in exactly eight weeks, he will carry out the suggestion."
Quoting still further from the same work:
"Suggest to a subject that in ninety days from a given date he will
come to your house with his coat on inside out, and he will most
certainly do so."
The deep and ominous importance of all this will be bet-
ter understood and appreciated when the further fact is
known that, after a subject in a state of profound hypnosis
has thus been given a command to be executed at a future
date, and is then awakened, he retains no memory or knowl-
edge of what has occurred during the hypnotic sleep. He
110 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
has no knowledge that he has been charged with the execu-
tion of a command or "suggestion" of any kind. He imme-
diately goes about his own affairs in a manner which would
lead the most acute detective or the most learned psycholo-
gist to infer that he is entirely free from all hypnotic influ-
ence and in a perfectly normal condition. No one, in fact,
would ever suspect that his consciousness has been irrevo-
cably impressed with a "suggestion" which he is bound to
execute when the time comes. He not only conducts him-
self after the manner of a free moral agent in full posses-
sion of all his rational faculties, capacities and powers, but if
questioned on the subject would undoubtedly assert and main-
tain with strenuous vigor his perfect freedom from all hyp-
notic influence or control.
Notwithstanding all this, when the appointed time arrives
for the execution of the post-Hypnotic-" Suggestion" or com-
mand, he goes and does the thing "suggested" or commanded
to be done, with absolute obedience and with the utmost
fidelity to every detail. Moreover, the perfectly natural man-
ner in which he conducts himself through it all would lead
any intelligent observer, who did not know the facts, to infer
that he was impelled by his own independent, self-conscious
and rational volition. Even the subject himself is under the
impression that this is so.
But the fact remains that he is simply executing a "sug-
gestion" or command which was given him weeks, months,
or perhaps years before while he was in a profound hypnotic
sleep of which he has no knowledge or remembrance whatever.
Ask him why he does the particular thing commanded to be
done, and in all probability he cannot tell you. Pressed for
an explanation of the motive which impelled him, he will
tell you that he simply felt an impulse to go and do that par-
ticular thing, and that he did it in obedience to the impulse
without stopping to reason upon it or anticipate the results
which might follow.
Thus it has come to be known as a scientific fact that
the hypnotic relation, once established, continues indefinitely.
Not only this, it continues even though the hypnotist may
POST-MORTEM HYPNOTISM 111
have entirely forgotten both the subject and the incident in
the meantime. It continues though the subject be wholly
unconscious of the fact. It continues regardless of the will,
wish, memory or knowledge of either party, or of both. It
continues though the parties be separated as far as the oppo-
site poles of the earth. It continues without regard to time,
place, distance or physical environment. It continues, in
fact, unbroken and unabated until both shall come to recog-
nize the law they have thus violated and shall, of their own
volition, unite in a mutual effort to restore themselves to a
normal relation. Even then it often becomes a labor of years
on the part of both to return again to the condition of inde-
pendence from which they started.
With these established facts in mind, those who know
that there is a life beyond the grave, as well as those who
honestly believe that there is such a life, will readily under-
stand and appreciate the horrible truth that even physical
death is, of itself, no barrier to the operation of this subtle
and mysterious power when once the hypnotic relation has
been fully entered into.
For this is but another demonstration of the seemingly
universal continuity of natural law. Every law of individual
life upon the plane of physical Nature has its correlation upon
the spiritual planes of being. They are, indeed, but the same
laws running through all the varied phases and conditions of
Nature. The laws of spiritual life are but an extension or
continuation of the laws of life upon the physical plane. Or,
perhaps, more accurately speaking, the laws of physical life
are but an extension or continuation of the laws of life upon
the spiritual planes.
As a natural sequel of all this, it has been found that in
every instance where the hypnotist survives his subject upon
the physical plane the disembodied subject is still irrevocably
bound by the same immutable and inexorable law which
bound him upon earth. He is thus bound regardless of his
own will or desire. He is so bound notwithstanding the
physically embodied hypnotist may be entirely ignorant of
the fact and quite unconscious of the bond. This strange
112 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
bondage continues throughout the lifetime of the hypnotist,
and during this period, however long or short it may be,
the subject is known upon the spiritual planes of life as an
"earth-bound" soul.
And what could better define his real condition? He is,
indeed, "earth-bound," in the most exact and literal meaning
of the term. He is compelled by the subtle and overwhelm-
ing power of that mysterious force to walk the paths of earth
in expiation of his offense against the primary and funda-
mental law of individual being.
Not only this, in an agony of protest born of suffering
and repentance, he is compelled to dog the footsteps of his
self-appointed human master through all the varied scenes
and experiences of that master's earthly career. He is com-
pelled by this law of association to look upon his hypnotist
in all the deformity of his perverted and distorted human
nature. Added to all this, he is bound by that mysterious
bond to stand in mute and helpless agony and see the chains
of abject servitude forged about the souls of other victims.
And so the narration of actual, known results and con-
ditions might be continued, until the brain is weary and the
heart is sick, but the cry of the soul rings louder still that
the end is not yet.
The final reckoning is reserved for that time which can-
not be avoided, when physical nature and human flesh shall
no longer conceal the truths of the soul.
In that hour when the hypnotist shall stand face to face
with his subject upon the lowest plane of spiritual life and
both shall come to recognize the immutable and inexorable
law of individual responsibility, this is the real beginning
of mutual retribution.
For they stand together upon the path which leads into
2'HE WAY OF DEATH.
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST? 113
CHAPTER XVI.
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST?
There are hypnotists and hypnotists.
Their number is rapidly increasing. Hypnotic "Schools,"
"Institutes" and "Colleges" are springing up on every hand
to teach the art of hypnotizing. Their advertisements appear
in almost every issue of our leading journals and periodicals
all over the world. Their so-called "graduates" are carrying
the practice of their art into all the walks of life.
Even our school children, mere boys and girls, have caught
the inspiration. In childish innocence and youthful ignor-
ance, they are permitted to amuse themselves with hypnotic
experiments, the results of which are wholly unknown to
them.
The hypnotist is thus making his impress upon society
in such manner as to warrant a definite and searching in-
quiry into his motives and purposes as well as his status as
a member of society.
What, then, of the hypnotist? What of his moral status?
In order to arrive at a just conclusion and be able to answer
these questions fully and satisfactorily and without preju-
dice, it is necessary to study the subject from the standpoint
of motive and intent. We judge men much more by their
motives and intentions than by the actual results of their
actions. We prefer to be so judged ourselves, especially when
we know that our motives and intentions are just.
We may, indeed, fully intend to do a noble and generous
act, only to find when we come to look upon the results that
it was a grievous and unhappy mistake. We may even plan
a deliberate wrong, only to find that the results are, after all,
just and beneficent. From the ethical point of view, how-
ever, we must in both instances be judged by the motive and
intent by which we were actuated.
In the analysis which follows, therefore, we are not study-
ing results alone. We are, on the contrary, analyzing motives
and intentions. The final results of hypnotism upon both
1U THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the hypnotist and his subject will be more fully considered
in Part III of this volume.
Ethically or morally considered, hypnotists naturally di-
vide themselves into three distinct and separate classes, viz.:
1. Those whose motives and intentions are good.
2. Those whose motives and intentions are indifferent.
3. Those whose motives and intentions are bad.
Remembering at all times that the actual results accom-
plished do not necessarily correspond with nor furnish a
proper index of the motives and intentions back of them, a
brief consideration of these three classes of hypnotists, in
the order suggested, cannot fail to be both interesting and in-
structive.
In the class with those whose motives and intentions are
both good and pure and in every other way commendable we
have:
1. The scientist.
2. The physician.
The chief motive which inspires the scientist is the accu-
mulation of exact and definite knowledge. We all admit the
value of knowledge. We recognize its transcendent impor-
tance in every department of individual life. It is at the
very foundation of all our progress. It determines the status
of nations as well as that of individuals. Upon it we build
our ethical standards. By it we measure the value and the
virtue of all religions.
So deeply important, in fact, is exact and definite knowl-
edge to the life and well being of all men, that we are in-
clined to look with forbearance and toleration upon whatever
means or methods men may employ in their pursuit of it.
For instance, we look with horror and righteous indigna-
tion upon the wanton cruelty of brutal men toward innocent
and helpless animals and birds. But we pause and view
with something akin to sympathetic complacency the mur-
derous act of the vivisectionist as he opens the skull of an
innocent and helpless dog and removes its sleeping brain.
Why? Because we know that he is in search of knowledge.
We see him close the opened skull over the now vacant brain
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST? 115
cavity and with cold-blooded patience study the actions of
his victim in the hope of determining some undiscovered
function of the brain. We see him again and again subject
the same helpless animal to the relentless tyranny of his will.
We watch him cut away section after section of its brain,
and after each operation watch without the least indication
of sympathy or feeling for some new development which" may
possibly give him a clue to the mystery of individual being.
Why? Because we know that he is in search of knowledge.
We permit him to carry the dead bodies of our fellow
men and women into his laboratory and there cut them into
a thousand pieces in order that he may study the most com-
plex and wonderful organism that Nature has yet evolved.
We permit him to override every sentiment and defy every
established convention of society just because we know that
he is in search of knowledge. We know that he is searching
for that which may be of specific value to us and to all men.
No matter how many or how great are the crimes he com*
mits against the laws of Nature, we are impelled to ignore
them, so long as they are committed in the name of science.
No matter what individual suffering or sorrow may follow
in his footsteps, we are wont to condone his offenses in the
name of science and evolution. Whatever may be the cost to
individual life, the work of the scientist goes on and we
tacitly forgive him for the desolation and the havoc he has
wrought, for the laws he has broken, for the crimes he has
committed, and for the wrongs he has perpetrated. Why?
Because we understand the motive that inspires him and we
call it good.
But however lenient we may be, however ready to forgive
and forget, there is yet a law that is higher than the caprices
of men, a law which is above and beyond their sanctions or
their confutations, and to this law the scientist and the sci-
olist alike must render an individual accounting.
The position of the scientist before this higher law, how-
ever, is not the subject of present consideration. We are
now concerned only with his ethical or moral status in the
sight of men, and we find that, according to their imperfect
116 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
standards, his motives and intentions are unimpeachable.
Although he may practice the processes of hypnotism upon a
thousand subjects, and thereby become a party to the viola-
tion of a primary and fundamental law of individual being,
the law of individual responsibility, yet by the laws and the
standards of men he stands acquitted, because his motives and
intentions are in accord with our ethical ideas and moral con-
ceptions. He is a hunter for truth and a searcher for knowl-
edge, and therefore, from the standpoint of ethics, we permit
him to pass unchallenged.
As with the scientist, so with the physician. His mission
is with the suffering. As we see him in his daily battle with
the destructive agencies of Nature, and know that his heart
is filled with sympathy for those who look to him for help in
the hour of their extremity, we are ready to sanction what-
ever means he may employ in his efforts to heal the sick, re-
lieve the suffering, comfort the sorrowing and stay the hand
of death. We know that whatever agencies he may employ
his motives and intentions are above and beyond suspicion or
reproach from our human understanding.
It is a fact that to-day some of our leading physicians
and surgeons are employing hypnotism and Hypnotic-" Sug-
gestion" to some extent as an accompaniment of their ma-
teria medica. They have found that in certain cases of a
neurotic character they have been able to produce temporary
anaesthesia. They have not gone beyond this simple fact
as a general thing. For their specific and immediate purposes
it would seem to be unnecessary. They are chiefly concerned
with disease in its purely objective expression upon the physi-
cal plane. Whatever will produce a seemingly desirable re-
sult is therefore generally deemed both expedient and pro-
fessionally admissible.
Comparatively few physicians have thus far made a study
of hypnotism from its psychological aspect. The few who
have done so find that the profession in general is not pre-
pared for its exposition from that standpoint. It is confi-
dently believed, however, that the time is not far distant when
materia medica and psychology will be recognized as con-
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST? 117
comitant factors in all true therapeutic processes. When
that time shall come, whether it be in the near or remote
future, the medical profession will become the most powerful
agency in existence for the protection of society against the
destructive practice of all subjective psychic processes.
It is the earnest hope of the School of Natural Science
that it may be able to so far interest the leading representa-
tives of the medical profession as to lay before them in scien-
tific form a full and complete exposition of its own experi-
ments and demonstrations in this intensely interesting and
important field of scientific research. It is believed that if
but this much can be accomplished it will undoubtedly open
the way for an intelligent, sympathetic and purposeful co-op-
eration in the development of medical science which cannot
fail of the most salutary and beneficent results.
It is conceded that the physician who resorts to hypnotism
as a final possible agency for the relief of suffering humanity
is inspired by a most worthy and noble purpose, entirely re-
gardless of the results accomplished. Measuring his deeds,
therefore, not by their results, but by his motives and inten-
tions, all society is ready to accord to him an ethical status
above and beyond reproach or criticism.
The actual results of the physician's use of hypnotism in
his practice are not under consideration at this time. Our
present inquiry is confined entirely to the question of ethics,
leaving the scientific analysis and exposition of .the subject
for a distinct and separate study.
It is now in order to briefly consider the second general
class, namely, those hypnotists whose motives and intentions
are neither good nor bad, but are properly classified under
the head of "Indifferent." In this general group may be
found :
1. The social entertainer.
2. The practical joker.
3. The chronic experimenter.
The first of these, the social entertainer, generally speak-
ing, has in mind nothing more beneficent and commendable
118 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
than the mere passing of a pleasant hour, and nothing more
malevolent than the gratification of his own vanity.
The second, the practical joker, intends neither good nor
ill, as a general rule, but seeks only to gratify his sense of
amusement at the harmless expense of his friends.
The third, the chronic experimenter, is moved almost en-
tirely by the desire to satisfy his sense of the curious and
the mysterious. He has, in reality, neither good nor evil in
his mind, and thinks little or nothing of the results in so
far as they may affect others. He cares for neither the ad-
vancement of science on the one hand nor the alleviation of
human suffering on the other.
Judged, therefore, by their motives and intentions alone,
and from the purely ethical views of men, there is in the
attitude of these three classes of hypnotists little to condemn
and practically nothing to commend. Their position is in-
deed one which may be fittingly designated as morally indif-
ferent.
Passing to the third general class, it is found that those
hypnotists whose motives and intentions are unquestionably
bad naturally group themselves into three distinct classes, as
follows :
1. Those who practice hypnotism as a profession or
business, and depend upon such practice for their financial
support.
2. Those who employ it as a means of power whereby
to achieve their individual ambitions in life and gratify their
desire for a personal popularity before the world.
3. Those who use it as a subtle means and method
whereby to commit unusual crimes in such manner as to
avoid detection and evade the just penalties of the law.
In the first instance the impelling motive is money, in the
second power and popularity, and in the third self-gratifica-
tion and conquest. The first, therefore, represents the grati-
fication of greed, the second means the gratification of vanity,
and the third stands for the gratification of the baser appe-
tites, evil passions and criminal desires.
Every student of the subject will be able to call to mind
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST? 119
one or more fitting representatives of the first class, whose
ruling motive is money and all that money means to the
sordid and avaricious. Such an one may, for a valuable con-
sideration in the form of a ticket to the "show," be seen
upon the public platform with his subjects ranged about him.
In the presence of the multitudes who have paid their money
for the spectator's privileges, he gives a weird and revolting
exhibition of all the varied hypnotic "experiments" known to
the "profession." He is permitted to subject the minds and
mental powers of children, boys and girls, and men and women
of all ages and stations of life, to his own hypnotic domina-
tion and thus convert them into mere automatic machines,
under the autocratic power and control of his will. He thus
fulfils his part of the contract by furnishing the promised
"entertainment" and in return pockets the gate receipts and
passes on to fill other engagements.
We all enjoy entertainment. The more mysterious and
uncanny it can be made to appear to most of us the better we
enjoy it, and the more liberally we are willing to pay for it.
To a large majority of people hypnotic phenomena are suffi-
ciently mysterious and wonderful to afford unusual interest
and amusement. For this reason the average professional
hypnotist finds the field of hypnotic entertainment a most
fruitful one, and he understands the methods of advertising
necessary to insure him a rich harvest.
This type of intelligence is the one most generally seen
at the heads of the numerous hypnotic "Schools," "Colleges"
and "Institutes" throughout the country. These shrewd and
enterprising individuals have been quick to analyze the com-
mon weaknesses of men and take advantage of the credulity
and cupidity of their natures. They have made an exhaustive
study of the ways, means and arts by and through which the
average man may be induced to part with his money. They
have proved themselves to be high-class adepts in the fas-
cinating art of playing upon the sordid and selfish strings of
human nature.
As an evidence of the unique and fetching methods em-
ployed by them to attract the attention and secure the patron-
120 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
age of the ignorant, the selfish, the vain, the ambitious, the
unscrupulous, the conscienceless and the criminal classes of
society, by an appeal to all the baser elements of the most
vicious side of human nature, the following quotations bear
eloquent testimony. They are taken verbatim from books,
pamphlets, circulars and other advertising matter but re-
cently scattered broadcast throughout the land.
Such advertisements as these are being distributed daily
by these so-called hypnotic schools, colleges and institutes,
and by hundreds of individual hypnotists in almost every
leading city in the United States, and many such even come
to us from European countries. Read them carefully and
analyze the motives which inspire them. Study the character
of the Muse which could inspire the declarations and prom-
ises they contain, and then prophesy the moral character of
the men who inspire them and the men and women who most
readily respond to them:
QUOTATION i.
"Of the large number of students who order my Course of Les-
sons in Hypnotism I found that very many had a sensible and practical
end in view. They wanted to make money. Instead of dabbling in
hypnotism for mere pastime, it was their wise resolve to make hyp-
notism pay, and this by the very speedy and excellent plan of launch-
ing out as hypnotic entertainers. ... I have treated the subject
as one would any other money-making enterprise. . . . The more
hypnotists there are earning fame and independence, the more people
there are who will want to buy my instructions. ... In other
WOrds, IT PAYS ME."
What could better illustrate the spirit of reckless de-
pravity than the cold-blooded manner in which this advertiser
offers, for the sum of five dollars, to put into the hands of
anyone who applies a course of "Lessons" which will enable
him to exercise upon and over his fellow men a power of
whose actual results the purchaser is entirely ignorant?
This certainly represents the spirit of commercialism gone
mad. Moral considerations do not enter into the proposition
at any point. It is a mere matter of money nothing more,
nothing less.
QUOTATION 2.
"I fully explain my celebrated instantaneous method, by which you
can hypnotize as quick as a flash.
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST? 121
"I tell you how to bring your subjects completely under your con-
trol.
"I tell you how to compel them to obey your slightest wish.
"I teach you how to fasten the eyes, hands and feet of a subject at
the word of command.
"I teach you how your subject's will may be brought in direct
subjection to your own.
"I tell you how his will may be placed in abeyance, and how his
mental operations may be directed by you.
"I tell you how to control your subjects without speaking to them.
"I expose the vanity of persons who maintain that they cannot be
hypnotized.
"I show you how the subject obeys the hypnotist as a locomotive
does the manipulations of the driver.
"I tell you how to direct your subject's thoughts into any channel
desired, and how to compel him to execute any command.
"I tell you how to hypnotize at a distance.
"I tell you how you can compel a person to be at a certain place at
a specified time.
"I tell you how to give your subjects commands and suggestions
that they will be obliged to carry out months and even years after the
command has been given.
"I tell you how to control your subjects instantly.
"I tell you how it is possible to hypnotize a person who is in a
natural sleep, who will waken the next morning without knowing that
he has been hypnotized, and will be compelled to carry out any com-
mand that has been given him while in the trance.
"I tell you how to walk up to a person anywhere and hypnotize him
instantly by a simple wave of the hand or a glance of the eye.
"I explain to you how a hypnotist feels when he begins to taste
the sweets of power.
"I teach you how to paralyze a subject as instantly and completely
as a knockout blow.
"I give you special hints for impressing the public with your won-
derful and mysterious powers.
"I tell you how hypnotism can be used in ordinary business tran-
sactions to the great advantage of the operator.
"I give you information that will prevent other people from hyp-
notizing you. This secret is priceless and should be understood by all
hypnotists."
In conclusion, this remarkable genius reminds the credu-
lous public that his "Lessons in Hypnotism" are the only
benefits for which he makes any charge. For the altogether
insignificant sum of $5 any person who may choose to apply
provided he accompanies his application with the necessary
$5 will receive "by return mail" the "Lessons," together
with an "Elaborate Diploma " (in advance), fifty "Profes-
122 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
sional Cards" free of cost, and a few other articles of mer-
chandise supposed to be of enormous value.
To obtain a clear understanding of the true significance of
all this, it becomes necessary to study the motives and pur-
poses back of it, and the passions, impulses and desires of
human nature to which he appeals. With that end in view
the following suggestions are of special importance and
should be kept constantly in mind:
1. The advertisement itself is a work of art. It is ac-
companied by some fifty or more artistic cuts and designs,
showing the hypnotist and his subjects in various postures, all
of which exhibit the hypnotist as the imperious master and
his subjects as the helpless, automatic instruments of his will.
2. This most interesting and attractive advertisement is
distributed through the United States Mails to all parts of
the country and to all classes of society without regard to
age, sex or other condition.
3. No precautions of any kind whatever are taken by the
advertiser, nor by the United States Postal authorities, to
prevent this literature from going directly into the hands of
the most vicious and criminal classes of society.
4. A careful study and analysis of the foregoing quota-
tions will entirely convince any intelligent student that their
author has made a deliberate and most powerful appeal to all
that is avaricious, base, ignoble, vicious, unprincipled, vile,
immoral, unconscionable, infamous and criminal in depraved
human nature.
5. Not a single virtuous impulse, moral sentiment, noble
purpose nor worthy motive is invoked or inspired.
6. The self-confessed motive in the mind of the hypno-
tist is money. He makes of his supposed knowledge a matter
of merchandise. He offers it for sale to whomsoever he can
induce to pay the price. It matters not to him what use may
be made of the power he offers to confer upon those who
yield to his solicitations. For the sum of $5 he guarantees
to invest every purchaser of his "Lessons" with the power to
conquer the will and enslave the souls of men, women and
children, and suggests to him that he may then gratify his
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST? 123
baser appetites, passions, desires and purposes without the
possibility of interference or opposition.
He promises to tell his prospective "students" how to
use hypnotism in ordinary business transactions "to the great
advantage of the operator." Properly translated, tHis means
that for the small sum of $5 this self-exalted adept in the
mystery of Black Magic will invest anyone who applies with
the power to hypnotize a business man and take a deliberate
and mean advantage of him in a business way, or even pick
his pockets without opposition or likelihood of discovery.
A perfectly fair and reasonable interpretation of the great
offer this malefactor of the human race places before an
innocent and unsuspecting public, by aid of the government
postal service, is as follows:
"For the sum of five good and lawful dollars, whenever the same
shall be received by me, I hereby covenant and agree with the party
of the second part, whoever he may be, and entirely regardless of
his motives, purposes, personal reputation or moral character, that I
will invest him with a power which will enable him:
"i. To exercise absolute control over the will and voluntary pow-
ers of his fellow-men without their power of resistance.
"2. To overcome the rational intelligence of business men and de-
prive them of their money and their property without due process of
law, but in such manner as to overcome all opposition and defy the
powers of the most experienced detectives.
"3. To so influence a court and jury as to obtain from them any
verdict he may desire, the law and the evidence to the contrary not-
withstanding.
"4. To obtain swift and terrible revenge upon his enemies, by the
aid of hypnotized subjects, who are obliged to carry out his every
command, even to the commission of murder, and who will even
suffer the extreme penalties of the law without ever disclosing the real
culprit.
"5. To fascinate innocent girls and virtuous women and lead them
into paths of wickedness and shame.
"6. To debauch little children without likelihood of discovery by
their unsuspecting parents.
"7. ^ To gratify every carnal appetite, passion and desire whenever
and with whomsoever he wills, and inspire the commission of every
crime known to the laws of God or men, but in such manner as to
entirely disarm suspicion, or fasten the guilt upon his helpless sub-
jects."
All this and as much more as the mind can imagine is
clearly and forcibly suggested by the inducements held out
124 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
through this and other equally vicious advertisements to pros-
pective students and would-be hypnotists.
With these simple facts in evidence the ethical quality of
the hypnotist's motives and intentions becomes clearly ap-
parent. His purposes are vicious, his intentions are dishon-
est, his motives are immoral and his actions, which fully con-
form thereto, are inimical to the rights, duties, privileges,
obligations, responsibilities, and best interests of society in
general and each and every individual in particular.
All this, and even more, is fully confessed by the last
paragraph of the advertisement above quoted. For, this ad-
vertiser says, "I give you information that will prevent other
people from hypnotizing you. This secret is priceless and
should be understood by all hypnotists."
By this one sentence alone the dishonesty and criminality
of the scheme stand revealed in all their hideous proportions.
Note the declaration that "this secret is priceless and should
be understood by all hypnotists." What secret? The secret
"that will prevent other people from hypnotizing you." But
why is it so vitally important to be able to "prevent other
people from hypnotizing you"? If hypnotism is the inno-
cent, harmless and beneficent process claimed, why is it of
such vital importance that it should not be used on hypnotists
themselves? Why is it that the one "priceless secret" out of
the many he offers for sale is that which enables the hypnotist
to "prevent other people from hypnotizing you"?
He wisely refrains from taking the public into his confi-
dence on this important point, but this is not because he is
ignorant of the answer. He knows full well the vital prin-
ciple involved. He knows it just as every honest and intelli-
gent student must know it when he has analyzed the subject
in the light of the indisputable facts of science and of human
experience. He knows that it is because the one "priceless"
possession of every honest and intelligent soul is the power
of self-control, and the inalienable right of self-conscious-
ness at all times and under all conditions except such as
Nature herself has prescribed.
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST? 125
He frankly confesses to his prospective students that the
power of self-control is the one power above all others most
valuable and important to the individual. And yet, upon the
same page he guarantees to instruct his students in the art
of grand larceny until they shall be able to successfully steal
this one "priceless" possession from their fellow men, women
and children wherever they go.
Perhaps the most astounding feature of all this is the fact
that the hypnotist accompanies his offer with the autographic
recommendation and enthusiastic approval of reputable physi-
cians, surgeons, lawyers, bankers, politicians and business and
professional men of education whose acuteness of intelligence
would readily detect dishonesty and fraud in any other pro-
fession or line of business, and who would not intentionally
become parties to deliberate crime.
There is but one natural inference, namely, that this man
of mystery and mighty powers has gone about and hypnotized
these good people, "with a wave of the hand or a glance of
the eye," got their signatures while they were under the
spell of his mysterious power, and then permitted them to
awaken in blissful ignorance of the fact that their names
are now being used as a means of defrauding other equally
innocent people all over the country.
The further interesting fact that the United States Gov-
ernment has assisted him in the advertisement of his nefa-
rious business might very reasonably support the theory that
even the government of a great nation is not exempt from
the hypnotic possibilities of this "Wild and Woolly Wizard
of the West." For, it is generally understood that the U. S.
Postal authorities intend to exclude from the U. S. Mails
all fraudulent and immoral literature, and severely punish all
those who violate its laws, rules and regulations in relation
thereto.
But this particular man of mysteries and money is not
alone in his profession. Indeed, he represents but a type of
the professional hypnotist whose motives and inspiration are
money and the luxuries money can buy. The writer has
126 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
before him the literature and advertising matter of so-called
schools, institutes and colleges of hypnotism from all parts of
the country. Similar advertisements may be found in the
leading newspapers and periodicals of all the principal cities
throughout the United States.
Most of these offer to instruct their students by cor-
respondence. Their instructions consist, for the most part,
of a series of "Lessons by Mail," for which the regular fee
in every instance must be paid in advance. The prices for
these various courses of lessons range all the way from
$5 to $100. Their promises and guaranties are in substance
the same, and their "Lessons" cover practically the same sub-
ject matter. The only material difference is in the prices
charged.
Some of these institutions are incorporated under state
laws, and for this reason command a confidence which this
implied sanction of the state carries with it. But their under-
lying motives and purposes are identical with those of the
professional hypnotist everywhere. That is to say, they are
in the business for money and money alone. The character
of their advertisements, assertions, guaranties and promises
betrays an utter absence of moral considerations of every kind
whatsoever.
Of the three classes of hypnotists whose motives and in-
tentions are bad, consideration has thus far been confined to
the first, namely, the professional hypnotist who makes of his
profession and practice a mere matter of merchandise. The
two remaining classes include:
1. The vainly and unscrupulously ambitious.
2. The criminal.
These require but a passing notice, inasmuch as they are
but a natural outgrowth and logical result of the first. Moved
only by the base and evil passions of human nature, they
naturally seek the shortest, safest and surest road which will
lead them to the accomplishment of their wicked and shame-
less desires.
These are they who are naturally the first to respond to
WHAT OF THE HYPNOTIST? 127
the alluring promises and tempting guaranties contained in
such advertisements as are daily flashed before their depraved
imaginations by professional hypnotists of the first class above
designated. They find it consistent with their nefarious pur-
poses to obtain their knowledge of hypnotism in the least
conspicuous manner possible. For, unlike the first class,
their success in the field of hypnotism and hypnotic practice
is commensurate with their ability to conceal their knowledge
and practice of it from public view. Like their fitting com-
panions in crime the thief, the burglar, the ravisher and
the murderer they work under cover of darkness as far as
possible. Hence it is that they almost entirely escape public
attention and are thus enabled to exercise the subtle and ir-
resistible power of Black Magic without even so much as
a fear of detection.
This is not a mere fancy picture nor an idle dream. It is
a deplorable fact. Not only this, it is a fact which is slowly
but surely forcing itself upon the attention of the thoughtful
and intelligent students of psychology, and will find ample
verification just as soon as the public conscience is fully
awakened and adequate methods are adopted for its public
demonstration and exposition.
A vital problem with which society must sooner or later
deal in this connection is that of locating responsibility for
the endless chain of destructive results which are here but
dimly and imperfectly suggested.
In the solution of this problem one important fact must
not be overlooked nor omitted. This fact is fundamental,
namely, that it is the professional hypnotist, moved by the
unscrupulous desire for money, who has inspired all these
various classes of individuals with the desire for hypnotic
power. Through the medium of his artful advertisements he
has played upon every vicious passion, propensity and desire
of human nature in the hope of touching in each individual
the mystic chord of sympathy that will open to him a ple-
thoric purse.
It is here that the initial evil will be found. All others
128 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
grow out of it as naturally as vibratory activity is related
to the law of motion and number. It is here then that the
principle of retributive justice which is but a limited appli-
cation of the great universal law of compensation fixes the
primary responsibility for the evil consequences of hypnotism
and hypnotic practices.
Cbe Great Pspcbological Crime
Partn
Spiritual Mediumship
CHAPTER I.
A RISK AND A DUTY.
The writer approaches this branch of his subject with a
due appreciation of the unusual, extraordinary and "extra
scientific" nature of the facts he is called upon to record.
No man who has been carefully grounded in the facts and
methods of physical science and for many years schooled in
the principles of law and the rules of evidence, is eager to
invoke or invite for himself a reputation for charlatanry,
empiricism, falsehood or insanity. And yet, this is the risk
every man must assume who approaches the world with a
work of any kind which transcends the generally accepted
scientific dogmas of his time.
It would seem to be clear, therefore, that no man however
unusual may have been his instruction, study, personal experi-
ences and demonstrations would voluntarily enter upon so
difficult and unpropitious an undertaking unless he were fully
persuaded that the knowledge he has acquired is of greater
value to the world than his own personal reputation. Even
then he might well hesitate lest the world be unprepared to
receive the knowledge for the presentation of which he has
made the sacrifice.
129
130 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Indeed, if the following statement of facts were going be-
fore a convocation of physical scientists of the present conven-
tional type for final and irrevocable judgment, it is doubtful
if it would be either prepared or submitted during the present
generation. To do so would certainly be a useless mistake.
For, upon the intelligence of such a body of men, recognizing
as scientific nothing which transcends the purely physical in
Nature, it could produce at the present time but one result.
This could afford little comfort or satisfaction to the writer
and even less to the thousands of honest, sane and intelligent
men and women all over the world who would thereby stand
condemned.
Fortunately, however, for the cause of truth, there have
come to be in this day and generation many besides the writer
who know from their own personal experiences that some, at
least, of the statements of fact hereinafter made are true.
Indeed, some of these facts have been personally demon-
strated by intelligent and honest men and women everywhere.
Others have been demonstrated by only the few, but their
demonstrations are none the less absolute and conclusive.
Of the many who are today able to demonstrate some one
or more of the facts hereinafter stated, very few have deemed
it expedient or wise to take the world at large into their con-
fidence. Others who are inclined to be more independent of
the judgments and prejudices of their fellow-men have learned
from a bitter experience that their reputations for honesty,
as well as sanity, depend upon their ability and inclination to
conceal the facts from their neighbors, their nearest friends,
and oftentimes from members of their own families.
Others who have been strongly moved by the altruistic
spirit have defied the established scientific and religious dog-
mas of the time and have endeavored to give to the world the
benefit of their personal experiences and demonstrations. As a
penalty for their indiscretion they have been rudely wakened
from their altruistic dreams to find themselves carefully labeled
and catalogued under the general heading of "Cranks."
fo all these, as well as to many other honest and intelli-
gent men and women who have learned the folly of fixing
A RISK AND A DUTY 131
arbitrary limits for the possibilities of human knowledge and
achievement, it may be an inspiration of strength and possi-
ble comfort to see in cold type an unequivocal statement of
such facts as Natural Science has demonstrated with abso-
lute certainty concerning the great problem of individual life
and individual destiny.
The following pages are devoted to a presentation of such
of these facts as are pertinent to the general subject under
consideration.
Fully recognizing in the undertaking both a risk and a
duty, the writer has elected to assume the risk and, to the
best of his ability, discharge the duty which his knowledge
imposes upon him.
132 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER II.
OTHER DEFINITIONS.
Perhaps there is no task more difficult for the conscientious
scientist to perform than that of accurate publication.
Some one has said that : "Speech is but broken light upon
the depths of the unspoken." It is believed that nowhere is
the truth of this saying more vividly apparent than in the
scientific literature of the age.
When the scientist discovers a fact or a principle of Nature
which is new to him he usually experiences little difficulty in
properly classifying it and so fixing it in mind as to be able to
identify it with facility and certainty thereafter. But when
he takes upon himself the labor of giving it to the world he
often finds that the language with which the great unscien-
tific world is acquainted does not contain a single term in which
it can be accurately expressed. He is then put to the difficult
and intricate task of studying words and combinations of
words and often, as a last resort, coining new words, until
he discovers or formulates some new term or combination that
will convey his meaning with all its proper colors and shad-
ings.
But this coloring and shading process is the work of the
artist, and it would appear that scientists, as a general rule,
are indifferent artists. In no department of scientific labor
does this fact appear with greater conspicuity than it does in
the literature of psychical research.
The very nature of the subject, and the almost unlimited
field it covers, call for the most delicate and subtle distinc-
tions and differentiations. This demands a terminology
which is not only free from all ambiguity, but one which
cannot, by the most clever devices of resourceful and unprin-
cipled intelligence, be tortured and twisted into meanings at
variance with the intentions of the writer.
If the language and literature of Hypnotism are defective
in this respect, even more fatally so are the language and lit-
erature of modern Spiritualism in general and of "Medium-
OTHER DEFINITIONS 133
ship" in particular. These subjects have been publicly; ex-
pounded by men and women in all the varied walks of life.
The learned and the ignorant, the honest and the dishonest,
the true and the false, the wise and the foolish, have all given
their contributions to the world for what they are worth.
They have written from every conceivable standpoint. Their
writings are inspired by almost every imaginable motive. It is
not strange, therefore, that contradiction and confusion con-
stitute the most prolific result of the vast and almost unlimited
energy thus expended.
Among those whose motives are above suspicion the chief
difficulty appears to be due to a lack of uniformity in the
terminology employed. For instance one writer seems to
regard a "Spiritualist" as something wholly different from a
"Spiritist," and then forthwith proceeds to use the terms
synonymously. In like manner, he seems to see a vital dif-
ference between "Spiritualism" and "Spiritism," and almost
before he has finished expounding the difference he is em-
ploying the terms interchangeably.
One writer defines a "Spiritualist" to be, "Anyone who be-
lieves in a life after physical death." It is plain to be seen
that this would include the Methodist, the Presbyterian, the
Catholic and all Christians, as well as nearly all mankind, in
fact, for there is not a religious sect of any kind but believes
in a life after physical death. It is therefore manifestly ap-
parent that such a definition is entirely too broad and com-
prehensive.
Another defines the "Spiritualist" to be "One who believes
that there is not only a life after physical death, but that it
is possible for those in the physical body to communicate with
those in the spiritual life." But there are a number of relig-
ious sects that believe all this. It is therefore clear that the
definition is ambiguous.
To avoid this sort of embarrassment and difficulty in the
present instance, as far as may be possible, the following ad-
ditional definitions are here presented as a substantial basis
from which to examine the subject of "Spiritual Medium-
ship" according to the plan and purpose of this work. It is
134 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
suggested that a careful study of their specific limitations
will serve to avoid all cause for misunderstanding or uncer-
tainty as to the particular sense in which the following terms
are hereinafter employed:
CONTROL: A spiritually embodied person who voluntarily
controls the will, voluntary powers and sensory organism of
a person in the physical body.
Special attention is called to the distinction here made
between a control and a hypnotist. The hypnotist is in the
physical body while the control is in the spiritual only. The
one is a human being while the other is a spiritual intelligence.
The hypnotist operates from the plane of the earth while the
control operates from the spiritual plane. The hypnotist is
a physically embodied person while the control is a physically
disembodied person. The hypnotist is a human being while
the control is an ex-human being.
MEDIUM : A physically embodied person whose will, vol-
untary powers and sensory organism are subject to the will
or domination of a spiritual control.
It will also be observed that the distinctive difference be-
tween a medium and a hypnotic subject lies in the fact that
the medium is under the control of a spiritual intelligence,
while the subject is under the control of a physically em-
bodied intelligence.
MEDIUMSHIP: The process by and through which a spir-
itual control obtains, holds and exercises control of the will,
voluntary powers and sensory organism of a medium. Also
the relation which exists between the two intelligences during
the mediumistic process.
SPIRITUALIST: One who accepts mediumship as a legiti-
mate and proper method and process by and through which
to obtain communications between those in the spiritual life
and those in the physical.
SPIRITUALISM : That particular school, cult, religion,
philosophy or metaphysical system which is founded upon its
acceptance of mediumship as a legitimate and proper method
and process by and through which to establish and maintain
OTHER DEFINITIONS 135
personal communication between those in the spiritual life
and those in the physical.
Special attention is called to the sharply defined limitations
of the last two definitions. It will be observed that they pur-
posely exclude all those who do not accept, believe in, and
sanction the process and the practice of mediumship.
There are, indeed, coming to be a good many intelligent
investigators of psychic phenomena who do not in the least
question the fact of spirit communication through medium-
istic processes, but who thoroughly disapprove and even con-
demn the method or process by which these communications
are obtained. In other words, while they admit that medium-
ship is a fact, they do not approve of it as a method or prac-
tice.
Such as these are not here classed as "Spiritualists."
Neither is any philosophy, science or religion which con-
demns mediumship called "Spiritualism."
It is of the utmost importance to fix these distinctions in
mind before passing to the consideration of the general sub-
ject of Spiritual Mediumship.
SPIRITUAL ORGANISM : The spiritual body of an indi-
vidual, with all its various organs and organic parts, by and
through which the intelligent soul manifests itself upon the
spiritual planes of life.
THE SOUL: The intelligent ego, entity, or essential being
which inhabits and operates both the physical body and the
spiritual body, and manifests itself through them.
It is well understood that from a theosophical as well as
from a theological standpoint this definition of the soul is
open to criticism. No attempt will be made to defend it
against objections from either of these quarters, other than to
state the simple fact that neither theosophy nor theology could
reasonably be asked or expected to assume any responsibility
whatever for the manner in which the term is employed in
this work.
In truth, these definitions, like those contained in Part I,
of this volume, have been formulated without special reference
to any acknowledged exoteric authority. So far as the gen-
136 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
eral public is concerned, therefore, the writer desires to assume
all responsibility for their present promulgation.
It would seem quite possible and even probable that there
may be learned critics who would be inclined to challenge
the accuracy of some or perhaps all of these definitions. If
so, it is their privilege to formulate others which will better
express their own preconceived ideas whenever they shall
feel an irresistible impulse to take the public into their con-
fidence.
All that is claimed for these definitions, at this time, is
the simple fact that they are in strict conformity with the
knowledge thus far acquired by the writer and his colaborers
in the School of Natural Science concerning the subjects cov-
ered by them, and that wherever the terms so defined appear
in this work and in subsequent works of this Series, they are
to be strictly interpreted as here indicated.
SIGNIFICANT ADMISSIONS 137
CHAPTER III.
SIGNIFICANT ADMISSIONS.
Physical science, broadly speaking, is inclined to challenge
the claims of Spiritualism. The substantial basis of this
challenge is, that the evidence produced by the spiritualist
does not amount to scientific demonstration. Volumes have
been written of a controversial nature upon this subject, both
pro and con, but the case is still pending in the moot court.
A few eminent specialists such as Alfred Russell Wallace,
Sir William Crookes, Dr. Hare, Professor Hodges and others,
are notable dissenters from the ranks of physical science.
These eminent scientific gentlemen concede that at least two
of the most important claims of Spiritualism have been scien-
tifically established, viz. :
1. That there is a life after physical death.
2. That through the process generally known and desig-
nated as Spiritual Mediumship, definite lines of communica-
tion have been established between those yet in the physical
body and those who have passed the crisis known as physical
death.
Those who have followed the controversy to any consid-
erable length are doubtless already painfully aware of the
fact that it opens to the disputants an almost limitless field
of polemics. While the perspective thus afforded is eminent-
ly pleasing to the controversialist, it is equally unsatisfactory
to the general student of the subject who is in search of defi-
nite knowledge.
Inasmuch as this particular work proceeds from the plane
of Natural Science, its purpose is didactic rather than discur-
sive or controversial. For the purpose, therefore, of elim-
inating from the subject as much irrelevant and immaterial
matter as may be possible, and thus reaching by the most
direct route the real issues under consideration, attention is
called to the following significant admissions:
1. It is admitted that Mediumship is a fact.
2. It is admitted that there is a life after what is known as
138 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
physical death. That is to say, physical death does not anni-
hilate the essential part of our being, the intelligent soul.
3. It is admitted that after dissolution of the physical
body the intelligence, ego, soul or individual entity continues
to inhabit a spiritual body.
4. It is admitted that an individual who has passed into
the spiritual life may, under certain conditions, come into
direct contact with those who are still in the physical body,
and may even control the will, voluntary powers and sensory
organisms of such physically embodied persons as may be
susceptible to such influence, and use them as mediums.
5. It is admitted that by and through such control a me-
dium may be made unconscious, or may be made to produce
genuine psychic phenomena of a wide range and variety.
6. It is admitted that as a result of such control genuine
communications may be had between individuals in the phys-
ical body and those in the spiritual.
7. It is admitted that communications thus obtained have
brought comfort to sorrowing men and women whose loved
ones have gone before them through the transition called
physical death.
8. It is admitted that by and through the process of
mediumship a certain amount of information has been com-
municated by those in the spiritual life to those in the phys-
ical, concerning the life beyond the grave.
9. It is admitted that modern Spiritualism is the natural
and logical outgrowth of Mediumship, and that it has done
something during the last fifty years to open the way to an
unprejudiced examination of psychic phenomena, and that
such an examination must necessarily result in benefit to
those -who possess the intelligence to understand and appre-
ciate the results in all their bearings.
10. It is admitted that there are some honest mediums
who are conscientiously endeavoring to serve their fellow
men and women who are in doubt or perplexity concerning
the fact of a life beyond the grave.
11. It is admitted that there are some honest spirit con-
trols who are endeavoring to render a beneficent service to the
SIGNIFICANT ADMISSIONS 139
world by controlling mediums and using them as instruments
by and through which to bring tidings from the spirit life
to the friends they have left behind.
12. It is admitted that the mischievous and destructive
effects of mediumship do not, as a general rule, begin to man-
ifest themselves at once to the medium nor to the casual ob-
server.
13- It is admitted that much has been written by stu-
dents, mediums, controls, spiritualists, and investigators gen-
erally, concerning the subject of mediumship, at variance
with the position taken in this work.
It will be observed that these admissions cover a wide
field of hitherto disputed territory. Their purpose is two-
fold, viz. :
1. To give to Spiritualism and Mediumship the full
benefit of every possible doubt which rational and fair-minded
intelligence may be able to suggest.
2. Having thus admitted every material claim set up by
the most enthusiastic advocate of mediumship, it is designed
to remove all these mooted questions from the field of our
present consideration.
This course is practicable only for the reason that from
the standpoint of Natural Science all these disputed questions
are of such secondary and indifferent importance as to be,
for the most part, irrelevant and immaterial in the light of the
known scientific results.
In other words, the position from which the subject is to
be here considered entirely transcends the objective view of
all these matters and deals with the principle of Nature
which lies back of the factitious phenomena of mediumship.
The general effect of these admissions upon the mind of
the reader will depend somewhat upon the position from
which he views the subject under consideration.
For instance, if he should be a medium or a spiritualist,
or a sympathetic student of spiritualistic philosophy and phe-
nomena, it is not difficult to understand how he might be led
to conclude that his claims are not only admitted, but that his
position and conclusions are fully approved. If so, however,
140 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
he is asked to suspend judgment and maintain an open and
unbiased mind until he has carefully examined the subject
from the position of Natural Science.
If a physical scientist of the school of conventional mate-
rialism, it would seem that his most natural impulse might be
to close the book at once in a sort of scientific disgust, under
the well defined impression that its author is either a knave,
a fool, a subject of insanity, or a total stranger to science and
to scientific methods and requirements. If so, however, he too
is asked to so far master his impulse as to follow the subject
to its logical and legitimate conclusion.
If a minister of the Gospel, an honest and conscientious
member of any church, or a consistent believer in any of the
religious creeds of Christendom, his first impression might
reasonably be one of doubt or disapproval as to the effect of
such sweeping admissions upon the basis of his religious
faith. If so, he is asked to put aside his doubts for the pres-
ent and withhold his disapproval until he has heard the case
through to the end. It would be manifestly unfair for him
to draw his conclusions and render his judgment upon but
a small percentage of the material facts in the case.
If he should be one who, for any reason, may be bitterly
prejudiced against spiritualism or mediumship, he might be
inclined to take alarm lest these comprehensive admissions
prove fatal to his position and prove that his prejudices are
without foundation in fact. If so, he is asked to calm his
fears and patiently and carefully analyze the principle which
underlies these admissions.
And finally, if, perchance, he should be a broad minded
man of intelligence, unfettered by religious, scientific or phil-
osophic dogmatism, free from the blighting influence of con-
ventionalism, bigotry, prejudice and superstition, and suffi-
ciently interested in the subject to give it his thoughtful con-
sideration, he will not need admonitions of any kind. He
will patiently follow the exposition through to its conclusion
and reserve his judgment until all the facts are before him
and the law which underlies them has been made plain.
Prophetic reference has already been made to the possible
SIGNIFICANT ADMISSIONS 141
attitude of the physical materialist of the conventional type,
and it has been suggested that he might be inclined to repu-
diate the foregoing admissions, or the major part of them at
least, upon the scientific ground that the subject matter in-
volved in them has not been proved. From the standpoint
of physical science his point would be well taken. This is es-
pecially true for the reason that the subject matter covered
by these admissions is very largely outside the limitations
within which the conventional school of physical science has
been and is at the present time operating.
Because of this fact, which common fairness compels us
to recognize, it is not to be expected nor even hoped that the
physical scientist, generally speaking, will find in a work of
this scope and character material for serious consideration or
for scientific investigation according to and within the limits
of his own conventional school.
Indeed, it will be esteemed an unexpected compliment of
the highest character if any acknowledged authority within
that splendid aggregation of intelligent and earnest workers
shall feel himself justified in devoting the time and thought
necessary to a careful and critical reading of this volume.
It is most gratifying, however, to observe that the pio-
neers of physical science are coming very close to the border
line of the psychical in their researches and investigation. A
few in the front rank have actually reached it, and it is confi-
dently believed that within a comparatively short time these
few will be able to lead the many over into the broader field
of Natural Science.
This is a consummation devoutly to be sought. But until
that time shall come the less conspicuous intelligences within
the body of that school must not be expected to enter with
any degree of enthusiasm upon the investigation and study
of subjects which are supposed to lie outside the present lim-
itations and legitimate scope and purpose of their empirical
system.
For the immediate present, therefore, this department of
the work is addressed more especially to the intelligent con-
sideration of spiritualists, mediums, students and investiga-
142 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
tors of mediumship and psychic phenomena, intelligent
Christians of all creeds and sects, and to all those who are
likely to fall under the fascinating spell of the seance or fall
a victim to the subtle mysticism which surrounds the great
and inspiring problem of the continuity of individual life.
FACTS DEMONSTRATED 143
CHAPTER IV.
FACTS DEMONSTRATED.
In the preceding chapter certain admissions have been
made which, to the minds of many, may appear extraordi-
nary, unscientific, unwarranted, and therefore unfortunate
for the cause of truth.
It will be clear that if these admissions should concede
that which is false and should thereby introduce falsehood
into the record of facts upon which this work is based, there
could be no assurance whatever that the results obtained are
reliable. In other words, a court cannot be expected to ren-
der a correct judgment upon a false statement of facts.
It is an accepted rule of logic that if a premise be false,
any conclusion based upon the assumption of its truth must
be regarded as unreliable. It should, to say the least, be re-
gardec as unscientific.
The purpose of this chapter, therefore, is briefly and con-
cisely to state the demonstrated facts of Natural Science
upon which the admissions referred to are founded. They
are as follows:
1. All physical matter, both inorganic and organic, inte-
grates conjointly with a finer ethereal or spiritual pattern,
in such manner as to constitute what may properly be termed
a double material entity.
No attempt will be made here to account for this phe-
nomenon of Nature. It simply exists as one of the established
facts with which Natural Science is compelled to deal. As
such it forms an important link in the chain which connects
the two correlated worlds of matter, motion, number, life and
intelligence.
2. In the kingdom of inorganic matter these two bodies
appear to be more equally dependent, one upon the other,
than are the duplicate bodies of organic matter. This is
more fully explained by the facts which follow .
3. The integration of a physical stone conjointly with
its finer ethereal pattern is of such a character that upon the
THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
sudden and forced disintegration and dissolution of the
physical stone its finer ethereal body, or duplicate, remains
intact for a comparatively brief period of time.
4. In due course of time, however, the ethereal body of
the stone also disintegrates, dissolves, and to every appear-
ance returns to its original elements.
5. During the time it remains intact this ethereal body
of the stone is visible with perfect distinctness to one whose
sense of sight is keen enough to observe it.
6. In the vegetable kingdom the two material bodies
do not manifest the same degree of mutual dependence, one
upon the other, as in the mineral kingdom. The meaning of
this will be more clearly apparent in the light of the following
facts.
7. Upon the sudden disintegration and dissolution of the
physical body of an oak tree its ethereal duplicate persists
intact for a much longer period than does the ethereal body
of the stone.
8. But in due course of time the ethereal tree also dis-
integrates, dissolves, disappears from the spiritual plane of
the vegetable kingdom, and to every appearance is resolved
back into its original elements.
9. In the animal kingdom the independence of the spir-
itual body from the physical, in its power of continuity, is
very markedly increased. This fact will be more fully ex-
plained by the next paragraph.
10. At the period of physical dissolution of an animal
it is clear (to one who is able to observe the transition) that
the spiritual body carries with it (or accompanies) the ani-
mating principle of the animal entity. This is evidenced by
the fact that during its existence as a spiritual organism it
appears to possess all the natural faculties and intelligent ca-
pacities and powers which belong to the animal entity.
11. The animal, however, in due course of time, disap-
pears from the spiritual plane of the animal kingdom.
12. It does not reappear (at least in identical or dis-
tinguishable form) upon any of the spiritual planes of life
which are distinctively related to this particular planet. What
FACTS DEMONSTRATED U5
becomes of it? The answer to this question is reserved for
another chapter.
13. In the kingdom of man the transition we call
physical death is even more clearly a mere incident in the life
of the soul. This seems to be especially emphasized by the
further facts hereinafter stated.
14. At the moment of physical dissolution of a man,
woman or child, the spiritual body separates from the physi-
cal in a manner which appears to be identical with the sepa-
ration of the two bodies of the animal at its physical death.
15. The animating principle of the double organic en-
tity accompanies (or is accompanied by) the spiritual organ-
ism only, when physical death occurs, and in this respect the
process of dissolution corresponds, to all appearances, with
that of the animal.
16. The spiritual man, woman or child persists intact
upon the spiritual planes of life for an indefinite period of
time after physical dissolution, as does the animal (with the
exceptions hereinafter noted).
17. Men, women and children upon the spiritual planes
of life appear to possess all the natural faculties and intelli-
gent capacities and powers with which they were invested at
and prior to the time of physical dissolution. In this respect
also they appear to acknowledge the same law which governs
the animal.
1 8. But men, women and children, in the course of the
ages, disappear from the lowest plane of the kingdom of spir-
itual man, and yet not always in a manner which is identical
with the disappearance of the animal from the spiritual plane
of animal life.
19. In other words, man disappears from the lowest
plane of his spiritual life in either of two different manners
and by two distinctly opposite methods or processes.
20. That is to say, under the constructive principle and
process of evolution, growth, development and progress, he
disappears from the lowest plane of spiritual life, only to
appear upon the next higher, inhabiting a finer spiritual or-
ganism, clothed in richer splendor, and in possession of all
146 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the natural faculties and intelligent capacities and powers
with which he was invested at the time of the transition, and
with the same individuality. He is fully conscious of the
transition and is able at will to reappear upon the lower plane
through which he has passed, and manifest himself to those
who have known him there. In an analogous manner he is
able to pass on to higher planes of spirituality and life.
21. But under the operation of the opposite principle and
process of destruction, or devolution, man also disappears
from the lowest plane of his spiritual life in a manner which
corresponds, in every essential particular, with the disappear-
ance of the animal.
22. In this latter instance he does not reappear (at least
in identical or distinguishable form) upon any of the higher
planes of spiritual life which are distinctively related to this
particular planet.
23. In the spiritual life man's ability to persist and ad-
vance from lower to higher planes of existence is commen-
surate with his own independent control of all his individual
faculties, capacities and powers, and in response to his inde-
pendent, self-conscious and rational volition and desire to so
persist and advance.
24. He obtains this control of his individual faculties,
capacities and powers only in accordance with his own inde-
pendent, self-conscious and rational desire and will, and
through honest, intelligent, courageous and persistent per-
sonal effort, in conformity with Nature's Constructive Prin-
ciple.
25. But in the spiritual life, as in the physical, man may
fail, neglect or refuse to make the effort necessary to obtain
or exercise control of his individual faculties, capacities and
powers. Or, once having acquired such control, he may de-
liberately surrender it to other intelligences, provided he can
find those who are willing to assume the responsibility. Or
he may knowingly and intentionally prostitute his powers to
dishonest and vicious purposes.
26. In every such instance he is proceeding in conformity
FACTS DEMONSTRATED 147
with Nature's Destructive Principle, and must pay the penalty
which Nature exacts therefor. The inevitable result is retro-
gression, involving a corresponding forfeiture of the power of
self-control.
27. This retrograde movement of spiritual life, if per-
sisted in, ultimately leads to man's disappearance from the
lowest plane of his spiritual life, in the manner and under the
principle and process referred to in paragraphs numbered 21
and 22, above.
In closing this chapter the reader is asked to bear in mind
that herein we have been dealing with established facts only.
These facts have been demonstrated with as much scientific
exactness and certainty as has the physical fact that by the
action of electricity light may be produced, power generated
and messages transmitted.
Furthermore, it is entirely within the ability of every in-
dividual who possesses the necessary Intelligence, Courage
and Perseverance to prove the truth of every statement herein
contained, provided he also has the necessary time, place and
environment for study under proper and efficient instruction.
Let it be also distinctly understood that the process by and
through which these demonstrations may be accomplished with
perfect safety and the most intense satisfaction to the indi-
vidual is neither hypnotic nor mediumistic, nor in any other
manner of a subjective nature.
It will doubtless be observed that the writer speaks with
unqualified assurance as to the facts stated. The question
naturally arises, "How does he know these things?"
For the partial satisfaction of those to whom a definite
answer would be deemed of special interest or value, the
author is at liberty to here state that at a future time and
in another volume of this Series he hopes to be able to pub-
lish a detailed account of his own personal experiences, studies
and demonstrations, together with the nature of his instruc-
tion during the twenty years he has been engaged in acquiring
the knowledge which enables him to speak with uncondi-
tional assurance.
148 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
To enter upon the presentation of these matters at the
present time would only serve to divert attention from the
specific and more important purposes of this volume and en-
tirely transcend its legitimate and proper limitations.
SPIRITUAL MEDIUMSHIP 149
CHAPTER V.
SPIRITUAL MEDIUMSHIP ANALYZED AND CLASSIFIED.
Mediumship is the process by and through which a spir-
itual intelligence obtains, holds and exercises control of the
will, voluntary powers and sensory organism of a medium. It
also includes the relation which exists between the two indi-
vidual intelligences during the continuance of the mediumistic
process.
A comparison of this definition with that of hypnotism, in
Part I, discloses the fact that mediumship is nothing more
and nothing less than spiritual hypnotism. It is, indeed, the
hypnotization of a physically embodied individual by a spirit-
ually embodied intelligence.
It is well known that there are a good many mediums who
will be inclined, at first thought, to challenge the accuracy
of the foregoing definition upon the ground that it does not
correspond with their own experiences. If their claim be
true, then it is clear that the definition is defective. On the
other hand, if the definition be correct, then it is equally clear
that those mediums who object to it are simply mistaken in
the assumption that it fails to define their particular forms
of mediumship. In other words, they are mistaken in the
character of their mediumship or in the principle which un-
derlies the mediumistic process.
In either event it becomes necessary to carefully examine
and test the accuracy of the definition before proceeding to a
consideration of the subject in chief. For this reason it is of
the utmost importance to fix in mind clearly and definitely the
underlying principle upon which the definition is founded.
This principle may be stated in its simplest and briefest
form as follows:
Mediumship is a subjective, psychic process.
Like hypnotism, mediumship involves at least two intelli-
gences. One of these, however, is a spiritual intelligence,
while the other is in the physical body. The spiritual intelli-
gence dominates and controls the will, voluntary powers and
150 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
sensory organism of the medium. The medium, being thus
under the domination and control of the outside, spiritual in-
telligence, is therefore in a subjective condition and relation
to the exact extent that such control exists.
That is to say, in just so far as a physically embodied in-
dividual is subject to the domination and control of outside
spiritual intelligences, in just that far the process involved
and the relation thus established are mediumistic and there-
fore subjective.
The corollary of this proposition is equally true, namely:
to the extent that a physically embodied individual is free
from the domination and control of outside, spiritual intelli-
gences, to precisely this extent, the relation between them is in-
dependent and therefore not mediumistic nor subjective.
It must be remembered that mediumship, like hypnotism,
involves all shades and degrees of control, from the mildest
form of impressional subjection to the deepest and most pro-
found state of lethargic or trance control. This is a funda-
mental fact of primary importance. It is a fact well known
to all those who have given the subject of mediumship their
intelligent consideration. To none is it known more defi-
nitely than to mediums themselves.
Notwithstanding this fact, however, this variation in the
degree of control undoubtedly constitutes one of the most
prolific sources of error and misunderstanding on the part
of mediums concerning the real principle involved in medium-
ship and the mediumistic process. There is a perfectly valid
and natural reason for this. The rationale of all this error
and misunderstanding will become perfectly apparent when
the various forms and degrees of mediumship are fully un-
derstood. For this purpose the following classification and
analysis are of special importance:
I. IMPRESSIONAL MEDIUMSHIP. Under this form of sub-
jection the medium never becomes unconscious of his physi-
cal environment to any noticeable degree. On the other
hand, he is usually left almost entirely free from what is com-
monly known and designated as "control." This general
SPIRITUAL MEDIUMSHIP 151
form of mediumship may, for convenience, be very properly
subdivided into:
1. CONSCIOUS IMPRESSIONAL MEDIUMSHIP. In this
case the medium is not only conscious of his physical environ-
ment, but is also consciously aware of the fact that he is in
touch with outside, spiritual intelligences, although he is un-
able to either see or hear them. He comes into such close re-
lation to them, in fact, that they are able to control his men-
tal operations to a considerable extent. There are many
mediums of this class throughout the country, and every stu-
dent of the subject who has given this phase of it attention
will be able to call to mind a number of such with whom he
has come into an acquaintance.
Even where the medium is admitted to be both honest and
intelligent, it is found that this form of mediumship cannot
be relied upon with any degree of assurance or certainty. This
unreliability arises from the fact that mediums of this class
are unable to differentiate accurately between their own in-
dependent thoughts and those which are impressed upon them
from without.
2. UNCONSCIOUS IMPRESSIONAL MEDIUMSHIP. Under
this form of subjection the medium is entirely unaware of the
fact that he is in touch with outside, spiritual intelligences
who are able to control him. Their control over him is of so
subtle a character that he does not recognize it as a power
independent of himself. Of this class the following may be
taken as typical examples :
(a) SO-CALLED "INSPIRATIONAL SPEAKERS." Such an
individual as this goes before his audience wholly unprepared.
He depends entirely upon "the inspiration of the moment/'
When he faces his audience he waits an instant for the "in-
spiration" to take possession of him. When this occurs his
whole manner changes. His entire physical body becomes
animated. His face takes on an expression of exaltation and
rapturous enthusiasm. Although conscious of what is pass-
ing about him upon the physical plane, and fully aware, at
the moment, of all he is saying, yet the instant his address
is finished his manner changes again even more markedly
152 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
than at the beginning. There comes an expression of lassi-
tude, a depression of spirit, a physical exhaustion, a general
inertia of the entire being. In many instances sleep is an im-
mediate necessity. It is not infrequently the case that the
substance of the speaker's address, lecture or sermon, as the
case may be, soon passes from his memory entirely, or is re-
called with great difficulty. Mediums of this character, when
not under control, are often exceedingly impulsive, or moody,
and are generally of a highly wrought, nervous temperament.
All these symptoms serve to distinguish the impressional
medium from the genuine inspirational speaker, who, by the
exercise of his own independent powers, rises to the level of
his "inspiration."
(b) EMOTIONAL INSANITY. This is the name which the
medical fraternity have given to certain phases of uncon-
scious, impressional mediumship. Cases of this nature are
found in our insane asylums all over the country. They make
up a considerable percentage of the so-called insane all over
the world. In such cases the medium may gradually settle
into a state of melancholy, or become violently hysterical at
times, or obtain the impression that he is going to die, or that
he is going to fail in business, or that some terrible disaster is
impending.
Such an individual is likely to prophesy all manner of
things, fully believing they will surely come true at the ap-
pointed time. If he should be of the devoutly religious type,
he not infrequently receives the impression that God has com-
manded him to do some extraordinary thing, such as offer up
one of his children as a propitiatory sacrifice, and unless re-
strained will carry out the command with religious fervor
and enthusiasm. Many instances of this nature have oc-
curred in this country within the memory of the present gen-
eration. These prophetic and mandatory impressions come
to him without his bidding, and, being ignorant of their nature
or source, he accepts them as true. If he but knew whence
they come, he might be able to guard against them, but in
the absence of such knowledge on his part he becomes a vic-
tim of these impressions and is locked up with the insane.
SPIRITUAL MEDIUMSHIP 153
Mediums of the sub-classes just named, so long as the
process does not carry them beyond the semi-condition here
indicated, are quick to deny that they are under the control
of outside intelligences. Their position in this regard is per-
fectly consistent, from their point of view, for they are en-
tirely ignorant of the presence or domination of these outside
intelligences. Their ignorance, however, does not alter the
facts any more than the ignorance of the Catholic Church in
the days of the Spanish Inquisition altered the fact that the
earth moves round the sun.
II. MUSCULAR MEDIUMSHIP. This general form of
mediumship manifests itself in a wide variety of phenomena.
Typical illustrations of this general class are as follows:
1. THE OUIJA BOARD. This consists of a smoothly pol-
ished surface from fifteen to eighteen inches wide by twenty
to twenty-four inches long, on which the letters of the alpha-
bet are printed in semi-circular arrangement. Upon this
smooth surface a small triangular board with three legs is
placed. This is known as the "Otiija." Its legs are usually
tipped with some kind of soft cloth to facilitate their easy
movement over the smooth surface upon which the letters
are printed.
The hand of the medium is placed upon the Ouija and
allowed to rest lightly upon the tips of the fingers and thumb.
The medium then places himself in as negative or passive a
condition of mind as possible and awaits developments. Soon
the Ouija begins to move about over the smooth surface. It
moves from letter to letter of the alphabet, thus spelling out
words and sentences with great facility. In this manner
authentic messages from spiritual intelligences have been and
may be received.
2. AUTOMATIC WRITING. This is but the same process
extended. Instead of using the board, a pencil is placed in
the fingers of the medium's hand, and the hand is then allowed
to rest in a natural position for writing upon a slate or sheet
of paper, as the case may be. The same negative or passive
condition of mind is then assumed by the medium and his
154: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
hand is thus resigned, as it were, to the control of such spir-
itual intelligences as may be present and able to use it.
It may be of interest to note the fact that Mr. W. T.
Stead, editor of the London Review of Reviews, informs his
readers that his "Letters from Julia" were received in this
manner through the automatic control of his own hand.
In both these characters of mediumship the medium almost
invariably labors under the impression that he is entirely free
from mental domination or control, and that the action of the
hand in writing and spelling out the words is wholly auto-
matic. Mr. Stead evidently takes this view of the subject, for
in his prefatory explanation he says:
"The hand apparently writes of itself, the person to whom
the hand belongs having no knowledge of what it is about to
write. It is a very familiar and simple form of mediumship,
which in no way impairs the writer's faculties or places his
personality under the control of any other intelligence."
(Letters from Julia, p. viii.)
It is true that in many instances the hand of such a me-
dium writes words and sentences of which the medium has
no anticipatory knowledge whatever, so far as he is con-
sciously aware. He often does not know what his hand has
written until he sees the written message or follows mentally
the movements of his fingers as they write it out. These
facts, which are fully admitted, would seem, upon their face,
strongly to bear out the general impression among mediums
that this form of mediumship is wholly automatic and does
not affect the mind of the medium at all.
Such, however, is not the case. Those who entertain such
an idea are cruelly deceived. The demonstration of this fact
is scientifically conclusive and will be further considered in a
subsequent chapter.
There are many other manifestations of muscular medium-
ship which might be mentioned, but these illustrations appear
sufficient to develop the principle which underlies them all.
The principle itself is reserved for consideration further on.
III. NEUROTIC MEDIUMSHIP. The process involved in
this general form of mediumship acts more directly upon the
SPIRITUAL MEDIUMSHIP 155
nervous organism of the medium. Its phenomena cover a
wide range and it manifests itself in many different forms.
For the purpose of identification the following illustrations
are here presented.
1. CLAIRVOYANCE. Under this form of mediumship spir-
itual intelligences who understand the process are able to con-
trol the nervous organism of the eye through which impres-
sions are conveyed to the consciousness of the medium. By
this method of operation they are able to impress upon the
consciousness of the medium whatever picture or image they
may desire.
Or, they may, in a higher form of clairvoyance, produce
a condition which opens, for the time being, a direct channel
between the spiritual world and the consciousness of the
medium. In this latter case the medium unconsciously em-
ploys the spiritual sensory organs of sight. He thus sees
whatever there is to be seen upon the spiritual plane within
the immediate range of his spiritual vision.
2. CLAIRAUDIENCE. This process is identical with that
of clairvoyance, except that it is applied to the nervous organ-
ism of the ear instead of the eye. In this case the medium
hears whatever the controlling intelligences desire that he
shall hear, and nothing else.
Or, if the process be carried far enough, a direct channel
may be opened between the spiritual plane and the conscious-
ness of the medium, through the organ of hearing. In this
latter case the medium hears whatever there is to be heard
upon the spiritual plane within the range of his spiritual
hearing.
3. TOUCH, TASTE AND SMELL. In precisely the same
manner the remaining senses may be used by spiritual intelli-
gences to convey impressions to the consciousness of the
medium. Wherever this occurs he may, for the time being,
enjoy the sense of spiritual touch, taste and smell, as well as
those of sight and hearing.
4. DELUSIONAL INSANITY. Certain forms of so-called
"Delusional Insanity" also fall under this form of neurotic
mediumship. Inasmuch as the subject of mediumistic insan^
156 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
ity will be fully treated in a separate chapter, further refer-
ence to this particular branch of the subject is unnecessary at
this time.
IV. TRANCE MEDIUMSHIP. The manifestations of trance
mediumship are those which usually attract the largest amount
of public attention. This is chiefly because they are of a more
exaggerated and mysterious character, and for this reason ap-
peal with added force to our human sense of curiosity. The
phenomena of trance mediumship are many and varied.
Those, however, which are most familiar to the general public
may be designated as follows:
1. SPEAKING MEDIUMSHIP. Under this form of control
the medium, generally speaking, is thrown into the deep,
lethargic trance. Wherever this occurs he is entirely uncon-
scious of what transpires during the trance condition. The
dominating intelligences take complete control of his volun-
tary physical organism and employ it as an instrument for
the expression of their own thoughts and desires. Through
this absolute subjection of the will and voluntary powers of
the medium the controlling spiritual intelligences are able to
use his vocal organs at will. Almost every student or inves-
tigator of the subject who reads this volume will be able to
recall one or more mediums of this class. There are very
many such throughout the country.
2. MATERIALIZING MEDIUMSHIP. Under this form of
control the medium is first thrown into a state of profound
trance. Spiritual intelligences who understand the process
then employ the vital and magnetic properties, forces and en-
ergies of the medium's physical and spiritual organisms, in
conjunction with outside elemental conditions, in such man-
ner as to produce the phenomena of so-called "Materializa-
tion."
A partial understanding of this process may be obtained
from the following brief statement:
(a) Every living, human, physical organism is a natural
generator of animal magnetism and vital energy. In this re-
spect it is closely analogous to an electric dynamo.
(b) During the physically negative or passive hours of
SPIRITUAL MEDIUMSHIP 157
sleep this human dynamo is constantly engaged in generating
the necessary magnetism and vital energy with which to pro-
pel the machinery of the physical body during the waking
hours of the day. The moment an individual wakens from
sleep he begins to draw upon this accumulated supply and
continues to do so until sleep once more locks the doors of
the storehouse and prevents further escape.
(c) Under proper conditions animal magnetism is faintly
visible to the physical eye. This fact may be demonstrated
by anyone who will observe the following suggestions :
Arrange a perfectly black background so that an individ-
ual may stand in front of it with plenty of margin on all
sides of his figure. Then, in the twilight of the evening, have
a strong, healthy man take a position within four to six feet
in front of this background. Take a position yourself at a
distance of twenty to forty feet from him so that his form
will be outlined upon the dark background.
Now let your eyes rest steadily upon his form for a few
moments, while your attention is directed to the line of its
limitations upon the dark background. In a short time you
will begin to see a faint radiation of light surrounding the
form. The longer you look the more distinct it will become,
until the form will appear to be almost illumined with an
aura of radiating light. This is animal magnetism and vital
energy and is constantly expended in this manner by the phys-
ical body during the waking condition of every individual.
(d) It requires but a very small amount of attenuated,
physical matter added to this physical magnetism to bring the
compound clearly within the range of physical vision.
(e) While the medium is in the deep, lethargic, trance
state the physical body is in a negative or passive condi-
tion. In this condition it generates animal magnetism very
rapidly.
(f) While the physical body of the medium is in this
negative condition spiritual forces may be so applied, by those
who understand the process, as to draw off its animal magnet-
ism and vital energy as rapidly as they are generated.
(g) The liberated animal magnetism of a medium may
158 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
be controlled by the action of the will of one who understands
the process by which this is accomplished. This proposition
may be doubted by the uninformed, but it is nevertheless true,
and may be demonstrated with absolute certainty, as ex-
plained in a subsequent chapter.
(h) When the medium is in a state of deep trance the
spiritual controls who understand the process of materializa-
tion withdraw from the physical body of the medium all the
animal magnetism and vital energy possible. To this they are
able to add a sufficient amount of attenuated matter drawn
from the surrounding elements to bring the whole compound
within the range of physical vision. With this magnetic com-
pound they are able to envelop a spiritual form and thus bring
it within the physical view of the sitters. This constitutes
what is known as "Materialization," as it is usually witnessed
in the materializing seance.
There is another process, however, entirely free from sub-
jective conditions, by which a much more perfect materializa-
tion is achieved. This, however, has nothing to do with me-
diumship, and its further consideration is therefore out of
place at this time.
Spiritual controls who understand materialization are also
able to use the medium's physical body as a "fashion form,"
so to speak, and invest it with this materializing substance in
such manner as to transfigure or transform it into the repre-
sentation of many different personalities. This sort of imper-
sonation is often practiced by unscrupulous spiritual controls,
who find it less difficult than complete materialization.
This is a species of dishonesty, however, which has often
resulted in great embarrassment to the medium, as well as to
the unscrupulous controls who practice this species of decep-
tion. It has resulted in the "expose" of a number of inno-
cent mediums and cast suspicion upon their honesty, as well
as upon the authenticity of all materializing phenomena.
3. OBSESSION. This is another well defined form of
trance control. It is known to the medical profession and to
the public in general as insanity. For this reason it will be
further considered under the general head of insanity.
SPIRITUAL MEDIUMSHIP 159
There are other forms of trance mediumship which might
be mentioned, but the classes here designated will be sufficient
to enable the intelligent student to understand the principle
underlying them all, as this principle will be hereinafter de-
veloped.
V. INDEPENDENT SLATE WRITING. This form of medi-
umship is of a composite nature and therefore does not fall
entirely under any one of the general classes hereinbefore
mentioned. It combines the elements of a number of them.
In this case the medium may be either conscious or uncon-
scious, according to the intelligence of the spiritual controls
using him. Two slates are bound together securely, some-
times with a small piece of pencil between them, but quite
frequently without. Sometimes the medium touches the top or
edge of the upper slate with the tips of his fingers. Other
times the slates are left untouched by anyone until the mes-
sage is completed. While the slates thus lie in full view of
the sitter messages are written upon their two inside sur-
faces, or upon a sheet of paper where paper is placed between
the slates before binding them together.
There are numerous variations upon the particular method
here outlined, but these variations do not alter the essential
process employed in the production of the messages.
VI. TRUMPET SPEAKING. This is another form of me-
diumship which does not fall entirely under any one of the
general classes above defined. It is also of a composite nature,
involving elements of two or more of the simpler forms.
In this character of mediumship the medium and the sit-
ters usually sit in darkness around a table or in a circle. A
speaking trumpet is placed upon the table or within the cir-
cle for the use of the controls. When the conditions are
right the spiritual intelligences are able to lift this trumpet
from the table, place it to the ear of a sitter and whisper or
speak audibly through it so that the sitter may hear with per-
fect distinctness. Much doubt has been expressed by scien-
tific thinkers as to the possibility of this sort of communica-
tion. It is nevertheless a fact that genuine communications
are thus received from those upon the spirit side of life.
160 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
VII. SPIRITUAL TATTOO WRITING. This is one of the
most interesting and unique forms of mediumship thus far
developed. It is also, perhaps, about the only one for which
physical scientists have thus far found no explanation which is
entirely satisfactory to themselves, upon a purely physical
basis.
The medium in this case, with rare exceptions, is an in-
fant from one to three months old. The process employed by
the controlling spiritual intelligences acts upon the circulatory
system of the medium, and to this extent involves a control
of the involuntary functions of the physical body.
By this control of the circulation of the medium his skin
may be flushed to a deep scarlet or made perfectly white, as
the blood is either forced to the surface or withdrawn from
it, at the will of the controlling intelligences. By their ability
to thus control the circulation of the medium they are able
to outline upon its body scarlet pictures or letters upon a
white background, or white pictures and letters upon a scarlet
background, with great facility.
By this method written messages .nay ue made to appear
upon the surface of the medium's body. Messages of this
character have been received even explaining the process by
which these communications are transmitted. This form of
mediumship, however, is rare.
Other methods of applying mediumistic control in the
transmission of spiritual messages might be mentioned, but
for the most part they are but variations upon those here out-
lined. It will, indeed, not be difficult, in the light of the fore-
going illustrations, to understand that these various forms
of mediumship may be combined into an almost unlimited
number of composite forms and variations.
While this is true, it will nevertheless be found, upon care-
ful examination, that the principle which underlies these dis-
tinct forms of mediumship here outlined covers the entire
field of mediumistic control. For the purpose of this work,
therefore, it would seem unnecessary to pursue this branch
of the subject further.
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 161
CHAPTER VI.
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED.
The phenomena of mediumship are admitted.
Mediumship is a scientifically demonstrated fact.
The various forms of mediumship outlined in the preced-
ing chapter are also facts which have been demonstrated with
absolute certainty. There is no controversy, therefore, be-
tween Natural Science and Spiritualism, in so far as the ob-
jective facts of mediumship are concerned.
But back of every fact of Nature there is a principle to
which that fact is related, and to which it must be referred
for its proper interpretation and meaning. Back of medium-
ship, therefore, is a principle of Nature to which the fact
itself must be referred. Back of every form of mediumship
there is, with equal certainty, a governing principle which
must be considered before science is justified in approving or
condemning the practice of mediumship or the process in-
volved.
Ethically considered, there are but two fundamental prin-
ciples in Nature. In their relation to individual life the one
is constructive, or what we are accustomed to regard as
"normal," and the other destructive, or "abnormal." Every
fact of Nature, whether scientific, philosophic, political, re-
ligious or otherwise, aligns itself as a direct result of one or
the other of these two fundamental principles in operation.
The great problem of individual life, therefore, is that of
identifying these two principles in their relation to the ob-
jective facts of Nature, so that we may be able to conform
to the one and avoid the other. The degree of accuracy we
manifest in the solution of this problem, and in conforming
to the Constructive Principle of Nature, measures the po-
tency and value of individual life.
What, then, is the principle at the foundation of medium-
ship? Is it hypnotic? Does it involve the same character of
subjection? In other words, is the process constructive or
destructive ?
162 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Every individual who is in search of knowledge as a
means of individual improvement is entitled not only to ask
these searching questions, but also to demand an intelligent
and unequivocal answer from whomsoever is in position to
speak with authority concerning the principle involved.
Upon this subject, as well as upon that of hypnotism,
Natural Science is in position to speak with absolute scientific
exactness and certainty. Without equivocation or mental
reservation, the answer to each of these pertinent questions
is an unqualified affirmative. Mediumship is hypnotic. It
involves the same character of subjection as hypnotism. The
process is therefore destructive. These facts being estab-
lished, it follows with irresistible logic that the mediumistic
process is inimical to individual life and to the well being of
society in general.
But the simple statement of a scientifically demonstrated
fact, unfortunately, does not always carry conviction to the
mind of the layman nor to that of the student. It is quite
possible, and perhaps probable, that among the great multi-
tude of intelligent people who call themselves Spiritualists
there may be those who will question the accuracy of the fore-
going statements. If so, there is but one ground upon which
such a doubt can rest, namely, that in so far as these par-
ticular individuals are concerned, the alleged facts have not
been personally proved.
In all candor and fairness it is admitted that such a posi-
tion is not entirely unreasonable. For it is a fact which every
scientist is compelled to admit, that absolute scientific demon-
stration can be made in but two ways, viz. :
i. By the individual himself.
2,. By some one else in his presence, under such condi-
tions that he may personally witness and test the demonstra-
tion.
But these are conditions which transcend the possibilities
of publication in any form. No matter how many or how
important are the facts a writer may have personally demon-
strated in the field of exact science, it is impossible for him
to re-demonstrate them to the world by mere publication
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 163
alone. When he comes to the task of conveying his knowl-
edge to another in this form he finds that the only instru-
ments at his command are his pen, ink, paper and words.
The laboratory, with all its chemicals, essences, materials and
appliances, must be put aside. All the instruments of actual
demonstration thereby become utterly useless in this branch
of his work. The most he can do, and all that he can do,
is to state the demonstrated facts of science, as far as he
knows them, in as clear and unequivocal terms as possible,
and thereby shift the burden of responsibility which his
knowledge imposes to the shoulders of his readers.
But the reader occupies a very different position. The
problem presented to him does not deprive him of his power
of election. It is entirely competent for him to choose his
line of action in accordance with any one of the following
propositions :
1. He may proceed at once to demonstrate the fact for
himself, provided the time, opportunity and facilities for so
doing are at his command.
2. He may have the demonstration made for him by one
who understands the principle and the process involved, un-
der such conditions as shall satisfy the demands of his own
intelligence, and thus dissolve his doubts.
3. He may tentatively accept the fact stated, upon the in-
ternal evidences of its truth, without actual demonstration, and
shape his life in accordance therewith until such time as actual
demonstration may be accomplished.
4. He may reject the fact entirely, and thereupon suffer
the penalty which Nature imposes for a violation of the prin=
ciple which lies back of the fact.
The problem under immediate consideration, therefore, is
that of stating as clearly as may be possible the fundamental
principle which underlies mediumship and the mediumistic
process. This has already been done in the briefest possible
manner. It would therefore be entirely admissible to rest the
case upon the simple and unqualified statement of facts, and
thereby shift the burden of responsibility upon whomsoever
164: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
may elect to deny them. This is, indeed, the course inva-
riably pursued by science, and it is entirely just.
But the purpose of this particular work is something more
than that of the cold scientist. The desire is to accomplish
something more than merely to state the facts of science. It
is the hope, if possible, to present them so clearly, so ex-
plicitly, so earnestly, and withal so simply as to command the
thoughtful consideration of every individual whose eyes may
chance to rest upon these pages.
It is, in truth, earnestly desired that the principle which
lies back of the facts may be so presented as not only to chal-
lenge attention and elicit inquiry, but also carry conviction
of its unqualified verity to the consciousness of every one who
shall follow the subject to its legitimate conclusion.
To that end attention is first called to certain significant
facts which are already familiar to those who have given the
subject of hypnotism and mediumship more than passing con-
sideration, or who are acquainted with the literature bearing
upon these themes.
Some of the facts here referred to are as follows :
1. Hypnotism involves a relationship between at least
two individuals. Mediumship does the same thing.
2. A hypnotist controls the will and voluntary powers of
his subject. A spiritual control does the same thing to his
medium.
3. In the development of hypnosis the subject is re-
quired to place himself in a negative or passive condition and
surrender himself to the will of his hypnotist. The medium
is required to do the same thing and surrender himself to the
will of his controls.
4. After hypnotic control is fully established the subject
becomes a mere instrument for the execution of the hypnotist's
will. After mediumship has been fully established the me-
dium sustains the same relation to his control.
5. In the development of hypnotic control the process
becomes easier for the dominating intelligence (the hypnotist)
at each succeeding subjection. The same is literally true in
the development of mediumship.
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 165
6. In exact ratio as a hypnotist gains ease and facility in
the establishment of hypnotic control, the subject loses his
own power of resistance. A medium loses the power of re-
sistance to the will of his controls under the same conditions
and in exactly the same ratio.
7. In the development of hypnotism, where the sittings
are frequent and persistent, a point is soon reached where all
of Nature's barriers for the protection of individual intelli-
gence are swept away, and the subject becomes a helpless in-
strument, bound under a bondage of the soul by an irresist-
ible bond which he alone, without the consent and co-opera-
tion of his hypnotist, can never break. In the development of
mediumship the same conditions obtain on the part of the
medium.
8. As far as the phenomena of hypnotism have been thus
far developed they are identical with the phenomena of medi-
umship. It is a notable fact, however, that up to the present
time mediumship has produced a greater variety of phenom-
ena than hypnotism, and some which hypnotism has not thus
far been able to duplicate.
9. The physiology of mediumship is found to be identi-
cal with that of hypnotism. The action of the mediumistic
process upon the three brains and nervous organism of the
medium is identical with that of the hypnotic process upon
those of the hypnotic subject.
(For a more complete exposition of this branch of the
subject, see Part I, Chapter VII, et seq.)
There is just one particular and one only in which medi-
umship and hypnotism may be said to differ. It has been
scientifically demonstrated, however, that this difference per-
tains only to the method of establishing the relation and not
to the process involved in the relation after it has been once
established. The importance of this distinction will appear
more vividly to those who are acquainted with the essential
difference between mesmerism and hypnotism.
For the benefit of those who may not be familiar with the
subject the following brief explanation will be of value:
i. As far back as the history of civilization carries the
166 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
modern intelligence it has been known that every human,
physical organism is the generator of a subtle fluid which has
come to be known and designated as "animal magnetism."
It has been scientifically demonstrated that this magnetic
fluid is susceptible to mental domination and control in. its
action. Mesmerism was founded upon a partial understand-
ing of these facts. Mesmer employed animal magnetism as
the foundation of all his work. He made it the basis of ob-
taining control of his subjects, and fully believed that its
action was in some way intimately connected with all the
phenomena growing out of the relation thereby established.
He obtained control of his subjects by making magnetic
passes over them from the head downward, and at the same
time gazing intently in their eyes until the mesmeric sleep
was thus induced.
Mesmer, however, made the mistake of assuming that the
somnambulic sleep cannot be induced by any other means or
methods.
2. Dr. Braid, who adopted the term "Hypnotism," de-
monstrated that the somnambulic sleep may be induced with-
out the use of magnetic passes or other means that supported
the magnetic theory. He therefore assumed that Mesmer
was wholly in error, and that animal magnetism had nothing
to do with the process under any circumstances or conditions
whatever.
And here Dr. Braid made his fundamental error.
Since the time of these pioneers in the field of psychical
research two prominent schools have grown up, each of which
has exercised and still exercises a strong influence upon the
literature of the subject. Both of these are supposed to be
schools of "Hypnotism," as this term is distinguished from
"Mesmerism." Both apparently intend to employ non-
magnetic methods and processes for inducing the hypnotic
state, although they differ very radically in their theories
concerning the value and effect of "Suggestion" in the hyp-
notic process.
One of these two schools was founded by Charcot, and is
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 167
known as the Paris School. The other was founded by Lie-
bault, and has come to be known as the Nancy School.
The single point of importance to be noted here is the
fact that mesmerism involves the use of animal magnetism in
the process of obtaining control of a subject, while hypnotism
(strictly speaking) does not.
Mediumship, as will be observed from what follows, is
essentially mesmeric, in that animal magnetism constitutes a
strong and important factor in the process of obtaining con-
trol. It is in this particular that it differs from hypnotism
pure and simple, as the latter is distinguished from mesmer-
ism. The one is magnetic in its inception and the other is
non-magnetic.
It must not be understood from this, however, that all so-
called hypnotic processes (as they have been heretofore known
and designated) are non-magnetic. Indeed, much that is now
known as hypnotic is, in truth, mesmeric. The reason for this
confusion will be readily understood in the light of the fol-
lowing illustration:
An operator who calls himself a "hypnotist' 5 (and who
would be very deeply offended with the designation of "mes-
merist") assumes that there is no such thing as animal mag-
netism, and that "suggestion" alone is at the foundation of
the hypnotic process. Acting upon this supposition, he pro-
ceeds to its exemplification. To induce the hypnotic sleep he
takes his subject by the hand, looks him squarely in the eyes
with a fixed and steady gaze, all the while strongly "suggest-
ing" the idea of sleep.
Slowly but surely the subject yields to the superior influ-
ence and is finally brought under complete subjection and
control. Perchance the operator is a disciple of the Nancy
School of hypnotism. If so, he assumes, and therefore al-
leges, that the results are due solely to the power of "sug-
gestion." And in this assumption lies his error. For it is a
fact that those who are in position to study the action of
animal magnetism and the laws which control it know, that
the eyes and the hands of an operator are Nature's most pow-
168 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
erful and open channels for the transmission of the magnetic
fluid.
Just as it is impossible to bring the positive and negative
poles of a magnetic battery together without thereby generat-
ing a current of magnetism, so it is equally impossible for
an operator who is in a positive mental attitude to lay his
hand upon a subject while the latter is in a negative mental
condition without thereby transmitting at once to the subject
a strong current of animal magnetism. In like manner it is
equally impossible for one who is mentally active to look into
the eyes of one who is mentally passive without thereby trans-
mitting to him through the channel of the eyes a strong cur-
rent of animal magnetism.
In other words, one who employs either hands or eyes in
the process of inducing the somnambulic sleep or the sub-
jective condition is in truth much more a mesmerist than a
hypnotist, in the strict meanings of those terms.
Natural Science is therefore in position to declare and
does so declare upon the basis of actual demonstration that a
fundamental error exists in the assumption of the Nancy
School. The same error, in a slightly different form, is at
the basis of the Paris School. For this reason the data thus
far accumulated by the various schools of so-called hypno-
tism are wholly unreliable, in that they assume to entirely ex-
clude animal magnetism from the process of inducing the
state known to them as hypnotic.
Only those who follow literally the method of Dr. Braid,
and employ exclusively mechanical means and methods of
inducing the subjective condition, are strictly entitled to the
designation of "Hypnotists" in the sense here indicated,
whereby hypnotism is distinguished from mesmerism. The
Paris School undoubtedly intends to do this, but there is
much evidence to show that this intent is not carried out in
actual practice.
A careful analytical study of the subject from the stand-
point of science develops the following interesting and sig-
nificant facts:
i. As far as hypnotism goes its phenomena are identical
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 169
With those of mesmerism. But the phenomena of hypnotism
(in the strict sense of that term as here used) are limited to
a narrower range than are those of mesmerism.
2. Mesmerism, therefore, includes hypnotism and some-
thing more. There are certain manifestations which writers
are wont to designate as "The Higher Phenomena" such,
for instance, as clairvoyance, clairaudience and telepathy
quite common to mesmerism, but rarely if ever the results of
strictly non-magnetic hypnotism.
3. The phenomena of mediumship are identical, with
those of hypnotism, as far as hypnotism goes. They are also
identical with those of mesmerism, as far as mesmerism goes.
But mediumship covers a distinctly wider range of phenom-
ena than both hypnotism and mesmerism combined. For in-
stance, materialization, trumpet speaking, tattoo writing and
various other phenomena are common to mediumship, but en-
tirely transcend the limitations of both hypnotism and mes-
merism.
4. Mediumship is therefore hypnotism. But it is hyp-
notism with something added. It is also mesmerism. But
it is mesmerism with something added. It is hypnotism plus
mesmerism plus something else. The something else is found
by science to be the action of independent, spiritual intelli-
gences operating from the spiritual plane of activity.
5. The results of these three schools are also identical in
so far as the relation established between operator and sub-
ject is concerned. That is to say, hypnotism establishes a re-
lation which enables the hypnotist to control the will, volun-
tary powers and sensory organism of his subject, within cer-
tain limitations. Mesmerism establishes a relation (by a dif-
ferent method only), which enables the mesmerist to do the
same thing. Mediumship establishes a relation which enables
spiritual intelligences to accomplish precisely the same results.
6. The differences in the range and variety of phenomena
under these three systems are due entirely to the varying de-
grees of knowledge on the part of the operators and to the
facilities at their command. That is to say, the mesmerist who
employs animal magnetism intelligently from the physical
170 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
plane is in possession of an added facility for the production
of phenomena, not possessed by the hypnotist who endeavors
to exclude animal magnetism from the process. The spiritual
intelligences who employ both animal and spiritual magnet-
ism possess added facilities for the production of phenomena
over both the hypnotist and the mesmerist. Spiritual intelli-
gences work intelligently from a higher plane of activity.
A broader and more comprehensive view of this subject
may be obtained from a critical analysis of the institution
known to spiritualists and mediums as the "Developing
Circle." The importance of the subject is such that a brief
study of the mediumistic process from this standpoint can-
not fail to be both interesting and beneficial. To that end
the following illustration is here presented:
The proper number of individuals organize themselves
into what is known as a "Developing Circle" for the purpose
of developing into mediums as many of their number as may
be possible. Assuming that they are under the guidance and
direction of spiritual intelligences who are familiar with the
conduct of such enterprises, they receive, in substance, the
following specific instructions from their spiritual guides :
I. Agree upon a regular evening and meet as often as
once each week, always on the same evenings of the week.
Fix a definite hour for sitting, and begin each sitting promptly
at the moment agreed upon. If you ask why this exceeding
promptness, it is only necessary to remind you that this is as
much for our benefit as it is for yours. We who are upon
the spiritual plane are as busy as you who are upon the phys-
ical. We have duties to perform and obligations to discharge
analogous to your own. The performance of these duties and
the discharge of these obligations require both time and labor
here as they do there. We upon the spiritual plane must
therefore accommodate ourselves to these sittings, just as you
upon the physical plane must do. In order that we may so
arrange as to be with you and do the developing work, we
must know in advance just when the meetings will be held,
so that other duties and obligations may not interfere. Inas-
much as we do all the work, while you have only to meet and
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 171
give us the opportunity, it is not asking too much to insist that
you meet at a definite and regular time and begin your sittings
promptly at the moment agreed upon, so as to consume as
little of our time unnecessarily as possible.
2. Select a definite room in which to hold your sittings
and always meet in the same room. There is a very exact
and scientific reason for this instruction, which, briefly ex-
plained, is as follows:
Animal magnetism is an important factor in the develop-
ment of mediumship. In order to accomplish rapid results
and waste neither time nor energy, the room in which the sit-
tings are held must become thoroughly magnetized with the
animal magnetism of the physical sitters and the spiritual
magnetism of the controlling intelligences. This requires
time. The first six or seven sittings are often required to cre-
ate a sufficiently strong magnetic atmosphere in which to
work with effect. But a room once thoroughly magnetized
remains charged for many days. If the sittings are held in a
different room each time all this work of magnetization is
lost. The time and energy necessary for the actual develop-
ing work must be spent at each sitting in creating a new mag-
netic atmosphere and environment. Therefore hold your sit-
tings in the same room.
3. Until development is well advanced hold all your sit-
tings as nearly as possible in absolute darkness. Why? Be-
cause the development of mediumship is a purely negative
process on the part of the medium. Darkness is the nega-
tive pole of light. It is a necessary part of the environment
and condition in which to work upon a "negative." Just as
the photographer must have a "dark room" in which to "de-
velop a negative," so must we have a "dark r<5om" in which
to "develop our negative" (the medium). In the midst of
darkness physical vision is cut off. In* proportion as the ob-
jective physical world is removed from the individual con-
sciousness the mind becomes introspective and passive. As
the mind becomes passive the whole condition of the indi-
vidual becomes negative. The object of the sitter should be
to attain as nearly as possible a state of absolute negation. In
172 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
so doing he assists to "develop a negative" instrument for the
accomplishment of our purposes. Darkness strongly con-
tributes to that end. Therefore sit in darkness.
4. Dismiss from your thoughts, while you sit, every dis-
turbing suggestion, and bring your minds into as perfect ac-
cord as possible. Nothing contributes to this result more than
soft, sweet music. Music is exclusively a vibratory process.
Those who sit under the spell of the same music are uncon-
sciously brought into the same state and condition of vibratory
activity as far as music may influence them. To obtain the
most powerful results, however, the sitters should never be
performers. They should take no part in the production of
the music. To do so requires a certain amount of thought
and effort on the part of the performer. Both thought and
effort are active processes, however, and are therefore in-
imical to the negative condition necessary to the development
of mediumistic control. For these reasons, among others,
the music should be furnished by those who are not members
of the developing circle.
5. When you sit arrange yourselves in a circle in such
manner that those of you who are of the negative type or tend-
ency shall alternate with those of you who are of the posi-
tive type. Sit with your feet slightly separated and resting
squarely on the floor. Join your hands in such manner that
the right hand of each sitter shall rest upon the left hand of
his next neighbor. When the hands are so joined either rest
them upon your knees in an easy position, or lay them upon a
circular table, whichever you prefer. The purpose in keeping
the feet slightly separated is to throw the full force of the
current through the hands and thence into the brains of the
sitters, where it must be centered and employed in the devel-
oping process.
6. When you have fully conformed to all these instruc-
tions then sit quietly, resign yourselves to us without fear,
hostility, doubt or protest of any kind, and wait. We will do
the rest. But we cannot develop a medium at a single sitting.
Give us time. Be patient and wait. Do not ask questions.
Do not even think, if you can prevent it, but simply wait.
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 173
Assuming that a circle has been completed in conformity
to these instructions, a strong current of animal magnetism
flows from hand to hand of the sitters, always from right to
left about the circle. The law of magnetism is that (except
when under control of the will) it flows from the left hand;
that is to say, from right to left about the circle. Scarcely a
circle is ever thus formed, but one or more of the sitters, and
oftentimes all of them, will be able to feel the magnetic cur-
rent with perfect distinctness.
One who possesses the power of independent, spiritual
vision is able under these conditions to observe with wonder-
ful distinctness the strong, luminous current of magnetism as
it courses in an endless chain about the circle. And to such
an one the following most interesting phenomena are dis-
tinctly apparent:
This current of magnetic light makes a complete chain
about the circle. But it appears to make the physical nerve
centers its depots, relay stations or storehouses of energy.
The unbroken stream of magnetic light passes from hand to
hand and thence along the arm, forming a great, round, lumi-
nous cord. From each armpit this luminous rope spreads out
into a fanlike form until it connects with the central nerve
cord of the spinal column. Thence it converges at the base
of the brain, from which point it illumines the entire skull
with an intense brilliancy. Thus each head in the circle be-
comes a center of magnetic energy and to the eye of the in-
dependent clairvoyant appears like a great round ball of radi-
ating light.
In this position and under these conditions the sitters sur-
render themselves unreservedly to the will of their (to them)
invisible controls and await with calm complacency the re-
sults of the "developing" process.
It is now the privilege of one who is able to speak from
personal observation to explain this "developing" process as
it is conducted by spiritual intelligences who are known and
aptly designated as "controls."
The "controlling band" as they designate themselves and
are familiarly known to mediums in particular and to spirit-
174 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
ualists in general are generally under the guiding direction
and supervision of some one intelligence usually selected by
them from among their number for that purpose.
. When the sitters are in prop'er position and condition for
work the controlling band usually arrange themselves in a
larger circle, enclosing them in such manner that the joined
hands of the controls rest directly upon the heads of the sit-
ters. In this position their hands meet at the several maga-
zines, or depots of magnetic energy, immediately over the
nerve centers. This enables the spiritual intelligences to vol-
untarily control and manipulate the magnetic current with the
most perfect facility. In this relation they are able to center
the full force of the current upon any one of the sitters they
may desire.
They now proceed to their preliminary experimentation.
The directing control selects from the sitters the individual
who appears to him most likely to become an easy subject.
He directs his assistants to turn the magnetic current upon
the brain of this particular sitter, in such manner that it shall
pass through the three brains in the inverse order of their
evolutionary development. That is to say, the current is
applied to the sitter's forehead in such manner as to pass
directly through the objective organs of the third brain, which
lie immediately above and back of the eyes. Thence it is
caused to sweep backward and downward through the second-
ary and primary brains in the order named.
The exact part which this magnetic current plays in the
controlling process depends somewhat upon the particular
form of mediumship sought to be developed. For instance, let
it be supposed that the experiment is for the purpose of devel-
oping trance control. In this case the current is surcharged
with the "suggestion" of submission and sleep. If the sit-
ter should prove to be a tractable subject the effect upon him
will soon become distinctly apparent. A sense of drowsiness
creeps into the brain. He begins to lose control of his ob-
jective faculties, and then of his nervous and muscular or-
ganism. His hands and arms begin to quiver and tremble
as if charged with a strong current of electricity. In many
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 175
instances violent muscular spasms and involuntary contor-
tions follow, as if the sitter were in a death struggle with a
powerful and merciless enemy.
This is due to the resistance which Nature interposes as a
protecting shield between every individual intelligence and
those destructive forces with which individual intelligence is
compelled to do battle in its struggle for an independent ex-
istence. It represents the natural protest of individual intelli-
gence against the surrender of its inalienable right and power
of self-control. Under these conditions, however, Nature's
protecting interposition and the individual's intelligent pro-
test are alike unavailing.
Gradually the muscular contortions cease. The tension
of the nervous organism relaxes. The head falls upon the
breast. The body settles into a reclining position, and pro-
found trance ensues. But the magnetic current is still per-
mitted to course through his already paralyzed brain. Upon
this vital current the controlling intelligence is able to ride
into the inmost consciousness of the sleeping subject, as it
were, and there voluntarily assume control of the will, volun-
tary powers and sensory organism of the subject.
This relation once established, the imprisoned soul is but
an automatic instrument under the will of the intelligent con-
trol. By and through this control over the will and voluntary
powers of the medium a spiritual intelligence is able to use
the physical body of the medium as if it were his own. Every
impulse of his will is executed by the physical organism of
the medium with absolute fidelity. He may speak, laugh, sing
or cry through the vocal organs of the medium, or write
through his hand, or perform any other act he may desire, by
controlling the medium's will and voluntary powers.
When deep, trance control has been once established it
may be passed from one spiritual intelligence to another with-
out in the least disturbing the trance condition. Even those
of the sitters who are unable to witness the process from
the plane of spiritual vision are nevertheless able to detect
from the expression, tone, manner, gesture and language of
the medium when these changes occur. A single medium in
176 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
this condition has been known to pass under the successive
control of more than a hundred different spiritual intelligences
in a single evening, and in so doing clearly identify to the
sitters that number of distinct and recognizable personalities.
Hypnotists who understand the process may, in like manner,
pass the control of their subjects from one operator to another
without disturbing the trance condition.
In one instance which came under the personal observa-
tion of the writer a boy of six years was the medium. During
a single hour, while under trance control, this infant spoke
fluently nine distinct and different languages, with eight of
which he was unfamiliar, and six of which he had never
heard spoken. The writer was the only person out of the
fourteen present on that occasion who, from the physical side,
was able to observe the process upon the spiritual plane. He
desires to state here, for what it may be worth to the indi-
vidual reader, that he not only witnessed this process, but
that in every instance the spiritual control thus speaking
through the medium appeared to him to represent the nation-
ality of the language spoken, with one exception, and that
among the parties present on the physical plane but four dis-
tinct nationalities were represented.
In order that his position shall not be misunderstood nor
his motives misinterpreted, the writer desires to state at this
time, in the most explicit terms possible:
That he is not a medium.
That he never has been a medium.
That he never has been hypnotized.
That he never has been mesmerized.
That he never has been a subject of psychic control in any
form, degree or manner whatsoever.
That notwithstanding these facts he has developed the
ability to exercise his spiritual sensory organism independ-
ently, self-consciously and voluntarily, at any time.
That the method by which this power has been acquired
and the process involved in its exercise are as different from
those of mediumship, mesmerism and hypnotism as the prin-
THE PRINCIPLE INVOLVED 177
ciple of affirmation is different from that of negation, or as
construction is different from destruction.
That under competent instruction any man of equal in-
telligence, courage and perseverance, and a right motive, may
accomplish the same results, provided he have the time, oppor-
tunity and facilities for carrying on the work.
From this unreserved statement of facts it will be ob-
served that the declarations hereinbefore made concerning the
subject of mediumship are not mere idle fancies, nor ingenious
theories, nor interesting speculations, nor clever beliefs, nor
doubtful hypotheses, nor elaborate arguments; but the re-
sults of a definite, personal knowledge of the facts stated.
Briefly summarizing, the mediumistic process is, for all
practical purposes, identical with that of mesmerism and hyp-
notism, with the exceptions noted. This process is, under all
conditions and circumstances, a subjective, psychic process.
This is true regardless of the form of mediumship established,
the character of phenomena presented, or the degree of con-
trol exercised.
The principle back of this process is the Destructive Prin-
ciple of Nature in Individual Life.
178 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER VII.
"AUTOMATIC, PHYSICAL MEDIUMSHIP" IMPOSSIBLE.
Mediumship without mental domination is a scientific im-
possibility. Those who comfort themselves with any hope,
theory or belief at variance with this fact are cruelly deceived.
It is well known in advance that there are not a few in-
telligent individuals who hold that certain forms of medium-
ship do not affect the mind or mental faculties and powers of
the medium at all. Strange as it may appear, many of these
are mediums.
Let it be distinctly understood that no question is here
raised as to the perfect honesty and good faith of those who
have heretofore promulgated such a theory. It is respect-
fully submitted, however, that their perfect integrity is not
sufficient to convert an erroneous theory into a fact of science.
Neither should they be permitted, out of mere courtesy, to
substitute such a theory in lieu of a fact which science has
conclusively demonstrated times almost without number. To
do so would be deliberately to reverse the process by which
intellectual development and moral progress are achieved.
Who does this turns his face from the light of truth, and
of his own free choice descends from the mountain-side of
actual knowledge into the valley and the shadow of ignor-
ance, superstition and dogmatism. But this is not the order
of our age.
And yet the honest convictions of every medium are en-
titled to respectful consideration in all matters wherein he is
an interested party. It is also true that no one is more vitally
interested in the mediumistic process than the medium him-
self. Inasmuch as he alone is the individual most deeply and
directly concerned, it is not so strange, after all, that he
should honestly believe himself in position to know more
about the facts than anyone else.
Just here, however, is perhaps the most subtle error with
which science has to deal.
To the individual who is not entirely familiar with the
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP " 179
exact process involved in mediumship, the medium appears
to be the only party who is qualified to speak with absolute
certainty; that is, from the standpoint of personal experience.
The great world of unscientific intelligence would undoubt-
edly be inclined to accept this as a self-evident proposition.
But the scientist who understands both the principle and the
process back of mediumship knows that the medium, of all
men, is the individual least qualified to speak with certainty
concerning what actually occurs during the time he is sub-
jected to mediumistic control.
The following illustrations cannot fail to make this fact
perfectly apparent:
I. It becomes necessary for a patient to undergo an op-
eration for appendicitis. When everything is in readiness he
is placed upon the operating table. But before the surgeon
will undertake so delicate and dangerous an operation he in-
sists that the patient submit to the administration of the usual
physical anaesthetic. When this has been done and the pa-
tient's active consciousness is safely and securely locked in
the arms of Morpheus, the skillful surgeon takes his knife,
cuts his way to the seat of trouble and deftly removes the
diseased organ. When the wound has been properly dressed
the patient is removed and the surgeon goes his way. After
the effects of the anaesthetic have been dissipated the patient
wakens to find himself snugly tucked away in bed with no-
body present but the nurse.
To all objective appearances the patient has been through
a very intense "personal experience." And herein is where
the casual observer who is unacquainted with the nature and
effects of a physical anaesthetic would invariably be deceived
by objective appearances. Let him but ask the patient and
he will find that this was not a "personal experience" at all.
The patient, in fact, was wholly unconscious of what oc-
curred, and but for the assurance of those who were present
and consciously witnessed the operation, he would never sus-
pect that he had been deprived of that seemingly non-essen-
tial organ known as the "appendix."
But suppose the anaesthetic had produced only partial un-
180 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
consciousness. In that event the degree of his consciousness
would measure the degree to which he might be able to ren-
der an accurate account of what occurred. In like manner,
the degree to which he was under the influence of anaesthetics
would measure the degree to which he would be unable to
render an accurate report of what occurred. In other words,
it is a "personal experience," to the degree of his wakeful con-
sciousness, but no further. To the degree that he is uncon-
scious it is not a "personal experience," and to this degree
his statements concerning the occurrence are without value
from the standpoint of science.
Again, suppose that instead of administering a physical
anaesthetic a hypnotist had been called in and the patient had
been placed under hypnotic control in a state of deep, lethargic
trance, and the operation had been performed under these con-
ditions. The results would have been identical in so far as
the consciousness of the patient is concerned. In the deep
lethargic condition obtained he would be wholly unconscious
of all that occurred. In this event if he should assume to
report upon the case his report would be held entirely value-
less for all scientific purposes.
On the other hand, if he were partially conscious during
the progress of the operation, he might be able to render a
partial report of the case only. The degree of his wakeful
consciousness would determine the degree to which it was in
reality a "personal experience" to him, and to this degree only
could he speak with assurance. Strictly speaking, even this
would give to his report greater value than that to which it is
properly entitled; for it is a fact that in all semi-conscious
conditions of the mind the imagination is more or less active
and often produces upon the consciousness impressions even
more vivid and substantial than do the actual passing events
themselves. In all such cases the individual is more than
likely to report his imaginings as actual facts.
In other words, hypnotism is a subjective, psychic process,
and it has been scientifically demonstrated that to the degree
a subject is under control of his hypnotist he is unconscious
of what occurs as a result of the hypnotic process.
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP " 181
And finally, suppose the same patient had been operated
on while under trance mediumistic control. The results would
have been the same so far as his knowledge of passing events
is concerned.
Mediumship is also a subjective, psychic process. To the
degree a medium is under control of spiritual intelligences to
precisely that degree he is unconscious of that control. For
the same reason he is unconscious of the process involved
in the mediumistic relation and therefore unable to report
accurately upon it from the standpoint of his own independ-
ent intelligence.
An excellent illustration of the principle under considera-
tion is to be found in the case of the trance speaking medium.
While under trance control he will speak fluently for hours
and when restored to consciousness will have no knowledge
whatever of anything he has said. Every investigator of this
branch of the subject knows with what eagerness such a me-
dium will ask the sitters to repeat to him all that has been
said by him while under control, and how it all appears to
come to him as entirely new matter.
This brings us to the question over which so many intelli-
gent students have stumbled, namely: Is there any form of
mediumship which does not involve mental domination and
control? In other words, is there such thing as purely physi-
cal mediumship?
The answer to both these questions is an unqualified nega-
tive. There are no such forms of mediumship. Whoever
undertakes by a personal experience to demonstrate that such
forms of mediumship do exist will find, if he persists long
enough, the unhappy verification of the truth here declared.
Many have already done so, but have learned the truth at a
cruel and needless sacrifice, after it was too late to guard
themselves from the inevitable results.
Perhaps none of the many forms of mediumship has con-
tributed more to the popular errors concerning this subject
than that known as the "Ouija Board," unless perhaps it may
be the "Planchette" the "Psychagraph," or "Automatic Writ-
ing." Nor is this to be wondered at when the facts are
182 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
known. Indeed, some of the brightest minds of both this
country and Europe have fallen into error concerning the
principle involved in these seemingly simple and harmless
processes.
But inasmuch as the facts are definitely known, it would
seem possible to so state them as to divest the subject of its
mysticism and open the way to an intelligent understanding
of the subject from its purely scientific standpoint.
For this purpose a brief analytical study of the process by
which so-called "automatic writing" is acomplished will be of
special value.
Under this form of mediumship the medium places a pen-
cil in his hand, rests his hand upon a slate or piece of paper
in position to write, assumes a negative or passive mental
condition or attitude, and then quietly awaits results. He is
conscious of all that is passing about him upon the physical
plane, and so far as he knows is in full possession of all his
mental faculties and powers.
But while he thus sits with his mind possibly in a contem-
plative mood, perchance thinking of some subject entirely
foreign to that of the mediumistic process, suddenly his hand
begins to move. To his surprise, it may be, he observes it
write sentence after sentence upon a subject matter with
which he is entirely unfamiliar. At first the process appears
to be slow and labored, but as the sitting progresses the hand
moves with greater assurance and facility, just as if the op-
erator were constantly obtaining better control of the instru-
ment. "
In the case of a beginner, the following conditions almost
invariably obtain :
1. The medium is absolutely positive that his hand moves
automatically. That is to say, he is not conscious that its
movements are in the slightest degree responsive to his own
volition.
2. He has no conscious, anticipatory knowledge of what
his hand is going to write.
3. He may be consciously thinking upon a subject entirely
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP " 183
foreign to that with which the operating intelligence is con-
cerned.
4. The message written by his hand under these condi-
tions may, and often does, contain information clearly beyond
the range of his conscious intelligence or knowledge.
All these facts naturally go to convince him that what-
ever the process may be it is one which does not, in the least,
interfere with his own control of all his mental faculties and
powers. In other words, he is ready to declare that his mind
is entirely free from domination or control of any and every
kind. And from the standpoint of his own conscious, per-
sonal experience his conclusion would appear to be entirely
justified. Herein, however, lies the subtle error.
It must not be forgotten that mediumship, like hypnotism,
is a subjective, psychic process. Its primary, motive power
is the soul or intelligence of the dominating control. Those
intelligent acts of the physical organism of an individual
which are the results of the mediumistic process, are but
reflex activities resulting from the action of one mind or in-
telligence upon another.
Nature has constituted each individual intelligence the
motive power by which to operate the voluntary processes of
his own organism. Through this motive power alone can
those organs of the physical body which respond to the will
be intelligently set in motion. The intelligence which seeks
to control the movements of any voluntary organ of another
intelligent individual can do so only by controlling the motive
power by which its owner operates it. In other words, the
spiritual intelligence which controls the hand of a medium
does so only by controlling the motive power by which the
medium himself controls it when acting independently, namely,
the will.
But the medium insists that such action of the hand is the
result of a purely automatic, physical process. He does this
because he is not conscious of any act of will on his part.
In short, he maintains that it is impossible for him to act
voluntarily without being conscious that the act performed is
responsive to his own will.
184 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
It is just here that the mind becomes diverted from the
real principle involved in the mediumistic process. The acts
of the medium's hand in what is known as automatic writing,
considered from the standpoint of the primary impulse which
inspires them, are not the results of his own volition. On the
contrary, they are the results of an outside will acting upon
his own and through this channel upon the nervous organism
which controls the muscles of the hand.
The primary, volitional impulse, therefore, is that of the
controlling intelligence and not that of the medium. This is
precisely the reason the medium is not conscious of any re-
lation between the acts of his hand and the impulses of his
own will. His will acts automatically under the impulse of
another will. And because its action is automatic he is un-
conscious of it.
There is a simple experiment, familiar to many students
of psychology, by which the proposition here under considera-
tion may be fully demonstrated. For illustration:
Let it be supposed that half a dozen or more individuals
have met for the purpose of experimentation. They select
from their number one whom we will designate as "A." This
individual retires from the room and beyond the range of sight
or hearing, so that he shall have no knowledge of what oc-
curs during his absence. Those who remain agree among
themselves that upon his return they will mentally compel
him to perform some specific and definite physical act; say,
for instance, that of placing his left hand squarely upon the
top of his own head.
When all is agreed upon, A is brought into the room blind-
folded so that he shall obtain no visible suggestion from any-
one as to the act agreed upon. He is asked to assume a nega-
tive or passive condition of mind and offer no opposition to
whatever impulses may move him. His companions thereupon
form a circle about him and fix their minds upon his own.
They center all the power of their combined wills upon his
own, constantly and intently willing all the while that he
shall perform the particular act agreed upon.
In every instance, where the conditions are right, after a
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP " 185
few moments of silent willing, A will slowly raise his left
hand and lay it squarely upon his own head.
The most interesting part of this experiment is in the fact
that when asked as to the motive or impulse which prompted
him to perform that particular act, he will almost invariably
say:
1. That he was not conscious of any motive or impulse
of his own mind or will whatever.
2. That his hand appeared to him to move of its own
accord, just as if impelled by a power entirely independent of
himself.
If it were not for the prearranged conditions the subject
in this case would almost invariably insist, just as the medium
does, that the act of his hand was purely automatic, and that
his mind and will were absolutely free from domination or
control of any kind. Nevertheless, the facts are all against
him, for here is a purely mental process, known to be such by
all the parties thereto. Will power alone was the force em-
ployed. Furthermore, this is a process which may be veri-
fied in many different ways to be the action of mind upon
mind.
With this simple illustration clearly in mind, it now be-
comes possible to state the principle more clearly in the fol-
lowing terms:
1. In proportion as the will of the medium becomes
subject to the domination and control of outside, spiritual
intelligences it loses the power of self-control.
2. In proportion as a medium loses the power of self-con-
trol his own will becomes an automatic instrument under the
domination and control of outside, spiritual intelligences.
3. In proportion as the will of a medium becomes auto-
matic in its action under the domination and control of spirit-
ual intelligences, the medium himself becomes unconscious
of the relation of his own will to those acts which are the re-
sults of the automatic process.
In other words, when the medium's hand writes in the
manner above indicated, it is his will that acts automatically,
and not his hand. His hand acts only for the reason, and
186 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
to the extent, that his will responds automatically to the will
of his spiritual controls.
The hypnotic subject and the medium are alike uncon-
scious of all automatic impulses of their own wills. To the
medium, therefore, his hand seems to act automatically merely
because he is not conscious of the action of his automatic will
to which it responds. It appears to be moved by an outside,
independent impulse or force merely because the automatic
action of his own will does not translate itself to his conscious-
ness at all.
At this point, however, the following question obtrudes it-
self and demands an intelligent and responsive answer:
If it be true that the hand of a medium cannot be moved
by psychic process, except by controlling the will of its owner,
how is it possible for spiritual controls to move inanimate ob-
jects such as chairs, tables, and various other articles of fur-
niture which have no will to be controlled or acted upon?
To one who is not entirely familiar with the nature, action
and office of animal magnetism in the economy of the human
organism, it would appear that this question is unanswerable.
But to one who fully understands the subject from the stand-
point of personal demonstration the question almost answers
itself.
As stated in a previous chapter, every living, human or-
ganism is a natural generator of animal magnetism. The
magnetic energy thus generated by it is under the domination
and control of the will of the owner and inhabitant of that
organism. Just why this is so may, perhaps, never be fully
understood until man has fathomed the action and the pur-
poses of Creative Intelligence. All that is known concerning
it at the present time is that it is simply a fact which has been
often demonstrated with scientific certainty.
This magnetic energy is an important factor in the process
by and through which the will of every intelligent, living,
human being maintains and exercises control over the volun-
tary, nervous and muscular organisms. He is able to move
his own hand solely because of his ability to control the mag-
netic forces which play through and upon it. His hand
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP " 187
moves in response to his will only because through the control
of his own magnetic energy he is able to register the impulses
of his will upon the nervous organism which operates the
muscles of the hand.
He is unable to control the action of the muscular organism
of another individual's hand (by purely mental processes)
only because he cannot control the magnetic forces which play
through and upon it. And he is unable to control these mag-
netic forces only because they are already, by the immutable
decree of nature, under the control of another will than his,
namely, the will of the owner of the organism which generates
them.
When spiritual intelligences undertake to control the hand
of a human being they find that the only process by which
this can be done is by controlling the magnetic forces of that
individual's physical organism. But nature, without consult-
ing mankind, has given to each and every intelligent individ-
ual, dominion and power over the magnetic forces of his own
physical body. They must therefore divest him of that power
before they can apply it to the control of his hand, or that
of any other organ under his voluntary control. This can be
accomplished only by controlling that in the individual which
has dominion and power over his magnetic forces, namely,
his will.
In the case of inanimate objects, such as chairs and tables,
there is no internal will to be considered, and nothing inter-
nal to be overcome and conquered. In other words, there
is nothing to interfere with the direct application of the mag-
netic energy of the medium to the object from without.
There are no natural barriers to be overcome save those in-
volved in making the necessary magnetic conditions.
The following illustration of an oft repeated demonstra-
tion will serve to emphasize the principle under consideration :
When magnetic conditions have been established which
enable the controlling, spiritual intelligences to move a table,
let a two hundred pound man, who is not a medium nor in
the least mediumistically inclined, stand upon it. Then ask
the spiritual intelligences to lift both the table and the man, if
188 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
possible. It will be found that the table with its two hundred
pound weight upon it will rise from the floor with as much
apparent ease and facility as if the table alone were being
lifted.
After this has been done then ask the controlling intelli-
gences to lift the man alone without the table. It will be
found that they cannot move him in the least, nor will he be
able to feel the slightest impulse of force applied to him.
Now let the same individual sit at the same table. Place
a small pencil in his hand and then ask the spiritual intelli-
gences to use his hand in the writing of a message. It will
be found that they are entirely unable to move his hand or a
single muscle of it, even though they are able to move the
table under it weighing many times as much.
Now let him lay the pencil down and then ask the con-
trolling intelligences to use it alone in the writing of the mes*
sage. Instantly the pencil will get up in obedience to the re-
quest and proceed to the acomplishment of its task with per-
fect apparent ease and facility.
Again the question presents itself : Why can the spiritual
intelligences lift the table with a two hundred pound man on
it, when they cannot lift the man alone whose weight is
much less? The answer will now appear comparatively sim-
ple. It is because they are able to apply the magnetic forces
of the medium upon which they must depend, to the inani-
mate substance of the table without having first to overcome
an intelligent and independent will within it. But the human
body is completely insulated, as it were, with an aura of ani^
nial magnetism which is under the control of its owner and in-
habitant (so long as he is not under mental domination and
control), while this is not the case with the body of the table.
Why can they not lift the non-mecliumistic man alone?
The answer to this question also is now simplified. It is
because he alone is master of the magnetic forces which act
through and upon his own physical body. In order to turn
these forces back upon him in such manner as to apply them to
the lifting of his physical body they must first neutralize his
own control over them. But they cannot control these forces
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP " 189
except by controlling that within him which has dominion
and power over them, namely, his will. But he is not a me-
dium, nor subject to mediumistic subjection or control. They,
therefore, cannot control his will. Hence they cannot control
his magnetic forces. Hence they cannot lift his body.
For the same reason they cannot move his hand with the
pencil in it, while they can easily move the pencil alone. To
move the hand they must be able to control the magnetic
forces which play through and upon it. To do this, however,
they must control that within him which controls these
forces, namely, his will. But he is not a medium. There-
fore they cannot control his will. Hence they cannot move
his hand.
Again : Try these same experiments, substituting one of
the mediums present in place of the non-mediumistic man.
It will be found that the spiritual intelligences can lift the
table and the medium together, or they can lift the medium
alone. They can move the medium's hand with the pencil
in it, or they can move the pencil alone.
This is only because they are able to control the will of
the medium and through this the magnetic forces and ener-
gies of his body. These forces, once under control by them,
may be applied to the hand of the medium or to an inanimate
object with equal effect. And so it is, that even the moving
of a table by psychic means involves the control of some in-
telligent individual's will to such a degree that his magnetic
forces and energies may be diverted to that end.
Experiments of a similar nature almost without number
have been made. And every experiment along these lines
only serves to emphasize the fact that there is no such thing
as automatic, physical mediumship. In other words, there is
no form of mediumship which does not act upon the mind of
the medium to a greater or less degree. Those who are now
or have been cultivating any of these supposedly automatic
processes, will be interested to know that there are certain
other familiar facts which are both pertinent and full of grave
significance in this connection.
For illustration : There is not an instance on record where
190 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
a medium has pursued this line of investigation and practice
regularly and persistently without sooner or later coming to
know for himself that the process is one which does act upon
the mind. Those who, at the beginning of their investiga-
tions, have most vehemently protested against the fact, have
been among the first to demonstrate its truth. These demon-
strations, to be sure, have in most instances been of a most
unhappy nature, but none the less absolute and convincing on
that acount.
By way of illustration, the writer desires to narrate briefly
in this connection a few of the many incidents of a similar na-
ture which have come under his personal observation. Some
of these have touched very closely the inner circle of his
closest personal friendships, and for this reason the names of
the parties herein referred to will be omitted. The particular
incidents to which reference is here made are as follows:
i. In a small town somewhat west of the city of Chicago,
a few years ago, lived a family by the name of C . This
family consisted of father, mother and only son. The father
was near sixty years of age, the mother perhaps four years
younger, and the son twenty-seven. They were an intelli-
gent and unusually happy family, bound together by the
closest ties of affection. They were all consistent and hon-
ored members of the Methodist Episcopal church and active
workers in the cause of religion, although by no means of the
emotional or hysterical type.
The son, who had been the life and the idol of the home,
was suddenly stricken with fever and after a short illness
died. This came as a heavy blow to the father and mother
who remained to mourn his loss. They were indeed discon-
solate in their loneliness and grief. Even their religion seemed
to have lost its meaning in the presence of such a sorrow.
It so happened that among their nearest neighbors was a
family of spiritualists at whose home seances and circles were
often held. Under these conditions it will, perhaps, not ap-
pear strange that the bereaved father and mother seemed to
forget the dogmas and conventionalities of their church and
turned, for the time being, to spiritualism in the hope of there
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP " 191
finding a way of bridging the gulf between them and their
boy.
Here it was that they learned something of the various
forms of mediumship. Here they learned of the "Ouija
Board." Here it was that through this simple instrument
they learned to believe that their son was with them daily and
only waiting to talk with them as often as they would give
him the opportunity.
The Ouija Board appealed to them because it appeared
to be so simple and so entirely harmless. The process ap-
peared to them to be one which in no way affected the mind
or intelligence of the medium. Not yet feeling that they cared
to be known as spiritualists, they determined to carry on their
further investigations alone. To carry out this idea they ob-
tained an Ouija of their own, and began a series of sittings
at their own home where they could carry on the investiga-
tion without embarrassments of any kind.
Their efforts were rewarded with immediate success, for
at the first sitting the instrument worked quite freely and with
results which, to them, were far beyond their most sanguine
expectations. Messages of affectionate greeting, of assur-
ance, admonition and instruction, were received, from which
they seemed to recognize the identity of their son's intelli-
gence, and naturally they were very happy.
The writer, being a personal friend of the family, inci-
dentally learned of these proceedings, and, anticipating the
results, made an effort to dissuade them from further sittings
and investigations along this particular line. With that pur-
pose in mind he endeavored to present to them the facts and
principles involved in the process by which the Ouija Board
is operated. Nothing, however, could convince them that the
process, whatever it might be, was in the least injurious, or
that it acted upon the mind in the slightest possible degree,
or that it could under any circumstances involve dangerous,
disastrous or unhappy results.
To every such statement or suggestion they replied by
simply quoting their own personal experiences. Who could
doubt these? They spoke for themselves. No harm had thus
192 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
far been done. Their minds were entirely free from all dom-
ination or control. If the process were one which acted
upon the mind, who should know that fact so quickly and so
surely as they? Since they could not feel the slightest mental
influence, this, to them, was conclusive evidence that none
existed and that the process was indeed what it appeared to
be, a purely automatic, physical process.
But time passed. As anticipated, in the course of a few
short weeks, sitting an hour each evening, they both found
that they could begin to anticipate the messages mentally, in
advance of the Ouija. This was, to them, a great triumph,
for it indicated that in a very short time they would be able
to dispense with the clumsy instrument and communicate
freely and directly by mental processes alone. And in this
they were not deceived, as the sequel will show.
Within a few days thereafter Mr. C began to hear
voices very distinctly. His wife developed the same experi-
ence a few days later. From that time forward rest and
peace vanished from their earthly home forever. These
voices continued to talk to them at all hours of both day and
night. When one ceased another took up the strain and con-
tinued until superseded by others still. Life became a torture.
Neither rest nor sleep was possible for a moment.
Then it was that the awful truth dawned upon them.
The seemingly innocent and harmless process of the Ouija
Board was, after all, a process which opens the way to the
enslavement of the soul. It had opened a door which they
knew not how to close again. They had become helpless vic-
tims of their own ignorance and folly.
That which had meant to them the realization of their
fondest and happiest dreams had now become a torturing
menace to health, to reason and to life itself. The voices
which at first had been loving and tender and sweet, and full
of comfort, encouragement and hope, now filled their ears
with nothing but the most vicious, profane, vulgar and vile
epithets known to the English language. Every attempt to
silence them or to shut them out or drive them away only in-
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP " 193
creased the torrent of verbal filth beyond the limits of human
language to express.
When they could bear the strain no longer Mr. C
consulted the family physician. He was promptly pronounced
insane and was immediately committed to the state insane
asylum, where he died inside of eight months from the date
of his first sitting with the innocent and harmless Ouija
Board.
The wife lived but a few months longer and died an in-
mate of the same asylum.
Had the attending physician correctly diagnosed these
cases and then applied a natural remedy (for there are such
remedies within the limits of materia medica) these poor, un-
fortunate sufferers would have been relieved with absolute
certainty. They were not insane.
2. During the year 1897, and for several years prior
thereto, the writer was closely associated with one of the
leading business men of Chicago, who, for the purposes of
this narrative, will be referred to as Mr. F.
This gentleman's father had been a prominent figure and
influence in the rebuilding of the city after the great fire, and
was for a number of years one of its prominent judicial offi-
cers. He was undoubtedly a man of superior intelligence and
moral character. The son was deeply attached to him by an
affection which was as admirable as it is rare among men of
strong individuality.
But the father died. His death, coming as it did without
warning, was a great shock to the son. This event, perhaps,
more than any other in all his experience up to this time, led
Mr. F., the son, to seriously contemplate the question of
death and the problem of a life beyond the grave. Although
a thorough skeptic concerning the question of a future life,
he nevertheless followed the course pursued by so many oth-
ers whom death has separated from loved ones, and began
an investigation of spiritualism and mediumship.
After the usual experiences of the intelligent investigator,
he succeeded in convincing himself that any form of medium-
ship which affects the mind of the medium or subjects his
194 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
mental faculties and powers to the domination and control of
outside intelligences is, to say the least, undesirable. He could
not harmonize this idea of mental domination and control
with those of independence and individual responsibility. He
therefore consistently refused to sit for development along
these lines.
But in the course of his investigations he learned to know
something of the Ouija Board. After studying its action
as best he could, he finally became convinced that the process
is purely physical and entirely automatic. Having reached
this conclusion he at once began a series of sittings with the
instrument, and to his great satisfaction, found that it would
write for him quite readily. Through this process he was
soon convinced that he was in direct touch and communica-
tion with his father. This was, for the time being, a great
comfort to him.
But one evening during the progress of these sittings,
after having received a number of messages purporting to
come from his father and other intelligences he had come to
know by other names, his sister, who usually sat with him,
was called away for a moment and left him sitting alone with
his hand upon the Ouija. Suddenly, and without an instant's
warning, a great, horrifying wave of mysterious influence
swept over him. So intense, so horrible, and yet so irresisti-
ble was it that he found himself rapidly sinking into a state
of unconsciousness.
Dimly realizing that he was under the spell of some evil
influence, he summoned all his powers of resistance and by
one mighty effort succeeded in throwing the Ouija across the
room and springing to his feet. For the instant this act ap-
peared to free him from the dreadful influence and he began
rapidly walking the floor. But soon thereafter the same ex-
perience was repeated. As he walked he felt himself again
slipping from his mental moorings into a state of unconscious-
ness. By another heroic effort he succeeded in again throw-
ing off the spell for a little time.
By this time he was fully aware that, whatever the process
employed might be, it was an attempt on the part of some evil
" AUTOMATIC MEDIUMSHIP n 195
influence to obtain complete control of his intelligence. Seiz-
ing his hat he rushed from the room and into the street, hop-
ing thereby to break the line of connection which had enabled
such an influence to approach him. This also failed. Again
and again the attack was renewed. Fortunately, however,
he is a man of strong will and splendid courage, and although
many times carried almost to the verge of complete uncon-
sciousness, he continued to defend himself with all the power
and intelligence at his command.
It was indeed a battle royal while it lasted and Mr. F.
finally triumphed. But the disastrous effects were plainly
visible in every lineament of his features when he appeared
at the office ready for work the following day.
Fortunately for Mr. F. this experience proved of great
value. It completely shattered all his theories concerning the
process involved in the operation of the Ouija Board, and
cured him of all desire to experiment further along that line.
So far as the writer knows he has entirely abandoned all sub-
jective methods of inquiry and accepted his experience at its
true value.
But the sequel of this incident is of peculiar interest. It
has been ascertained since that this vicious and determined at-
tack was made by one who, in physical life, had conceived the
idea that Mr. F. was responsible for some fancied injury
which had never been condoned. The attack, therefore, was
made in the spirit of revenge, and had it been entirely success-
ful would have sent its victim to the state insane asylum, where
he would, in all human probability, have spent the balance of
his life.
This one experience of itself is full of valuable suggestions,
and to those who are not hopelessly bound in the chains of
mental slavery it contains many important lessons.
Other experiences of a similar nature, almost without
number, might be presented covering every phase of so-called
automatic, physical mediumship. But these would merely
serve as cumulative evidence of the law of mediumship which
is so clearly disclosed by the illustrations already submitted.
196 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Further time and space will therefore not be consumed on this
branch of the subject.
It only remains to close this chapter with a restatement of
the fundamental fact that there is no such thing as medium-
ship free from mental domination and control. Whoever
may be induced to undertake the development of any form of
mediumship whatsoever, upon the theory that it does not af-
fect the mind, is cruelly deceived. Caveat!
NEITHER A "GIFT" NOR A "POWER" 197
CHAPTER VIII.
NEITHER A "GIFT" NOR A "POWER."
To the popular mind there is no fallacy so subtle or so
difficult of detection as that which is carelessly concealed be-
neath the noble exterior of an innocent and gracious word
misapplied.
Hypnotists have misapplied the otherwise harmless word
"Suggestion," and by so doing have filled the popular mind
with the impression that hypnosis is nothing more harmful
than a sort of patent process by which one individual may
pump valuable thoughts and ideas into the mind of another.
It will, in all probability, require at least a generation to
fully expose this fallacy and in its stead fix in the public mind
a clear understanding of the fact that the word "suggestion,"
wherever and whenever it is employed in connection with the
hypnotic process, is a misnomer. It will doubtless require
another to repair the injury that has already followed and is
yet to follow as a direct result of this simple but subtle fallacy.
And all this is merely because the word "suggestion" is,
in itself, a good, gracious and virtuous word whose excellent
qualities stand out in such bold relief as to overshadow all
things else and entirely conceal from the unsuspecting intelli-
gence the destructive principle of nature which underlies the
hypnotic process.
In like manner there are, perhaps, no three words in the
English language which, in themselves, are more entirely
harmless and free from obloquy, when properly employed,
than those which follow, viz. :
1. "GIFT." This word, when properly employed, is de-
fined as "Anything given or bestowed," or "A special talent,"
etc. Its most usual synonyms are, "Present, donation, bene-
faction, boon, endowment, talent, faculty," etc. From these
it will be seen at once that the term carries with it a distinct
suggestion of good and nothing but good.
2. "POWER/' A proper definition of this word, when
correctly employed, would be, "Ability to act. The exercise
198 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
of a faculty. The employment of strength. The exercise
of any kind of control, influence, domination or sway. Men-
tal or moral ability to act," etc. Its usual and acknowledged
synonyms are " Potency, might, force, strength, ability, capac-
ity, capability," etc. When applied to the individual who is
supposed to possess it, therefore, it conveys the distinct idea
of merit, worth, desirability, value and individual power, all
of which are good.
3. "DEVELOPMENT." In its common acceptation this
word means "A gradual unfolding. A formative process by
natural growth. Improvement by natural processes," etc.
The word carries with it in its general use the unmistakable
suggestion of progression and improvement by natural pro-
cesses. In other words, it is associated with the constructive
side of nature's evolutionary processes.
So numerously and conspicuously do these excellent quali-
ties cluster about and so tenaciously do they cling to the mere
words themselves that it seems almost impossible to under-
stand how they could ever be employed to conceal a fallacy
or befog the intelligence.
Such, however, is the case. To these simple, innocent,
worthy and meritorious words misapplied, more, perhaps,
than to any other single cause, the public is indebted for its
widespread misconception of the fundamental principle at
the basis of mediumship.
When the medium honestly and conscientiously speaks of
his mediumship as a "gift," the credulous, the unthinking and
the unscientific take for granted that he uses the word in its
usual and legitimate sense. They, therefore, are led to as-
sume that he is the possessor of "a special talent/' or that
he has been the recipient of a "beneficent endowment" which
God or Nature bestows upon only a select and favored few.
There are doubtless many mediums who honestly look upon
their mediumship in precisely this light. The writer has met
a number who maintain that attitude.
But what are the facts? Mediumship is a subjective pro-
cess on the part of the medium, and is so admitted. There
are no exceptions. It is a dominating process on the part of
NEITHER A "GIFT" NOR A "POWER" 199
his controls, and is so admitted. There are no exceptions.
Any process which establishes a different relation than this is
not mediumistic. Mediumship, in fact, is possible only in
proportion as the medium becomes an instrument under the
domination and control of outside, spiritual intelligences.
But he becomes such an instrument only in just so far as he
surrenders himself, body and soul, to the domination of his
controls. That is to say, in exact proportion as outside intel-
ligences control him and convert him into a medium they rob
him of his power of self-control.
From the standpoint of the recipient, therefore, medium-
ship represents nothing whatever in the nature of a "gift" to
the medium. On the contrary, it represents only a loss of in-
dividual power. Instead of being the recipient of a valuable
"gift," the medium is robbed of his most valuable possession,
the power of independent, self-conscious and rational volition
upon which the power of self-control depends. Mediumship
from the standpoint of the medium is, in fact, a purely nega-
tive proposition. It is a self-surrender and not a "gift." If
gift in any sense, it is a gift from the medium instead of a
gift to him.
It is true that the negative quality of mind and soul which
forms the basis of mediumship may be and often is transmitted
by heredity to some extent. In so far as this is true, in any
given case, it may be said to represent a natural condition. In
other words, to that extent it comes to the individual without
effort on his part. And it is just possible that this is the
reason mediums themselves have come to regard their medi-
umistic tendencies as "gifts of nature."
However this may be, it must not be forgotten that insan-
ity is also very often a "gift" in precisely the same sense. In
like manner drunkenness and licentiousness may become
"gifts." In precisely the same sense rheumatism, scrofula,
cancer, consumption and various other ills and misfortunes
are very often "gifts of nature." In the sense that these things
are "gifts," however, they are those of which no man is
proud, and they do not fall within the accepted meaning of
the term at all. They are in no sense benefactions. They are
200 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
not generous gratuities. They are not valuable endowments.
On the other hand, they represent only human frailties and
natural weaknesses. They stand for the absence of health,
strength, virtue and individual power. We therefore do not
call them "gifts." They are, in truth, but robberies.
When it comes to be generally known among the people
that mediumship is only a negative quality as well as a nega-
tive quantity, and that it represents the absence of all that is
desirable in individual life, mediums will cease to call it a
"gift." It will then be given a name in accord with the facts.
It will come to be known for what it is in reality a depriva-
tion, a robbery, a weakness, a detriment, a deterioration, a ret-
rogression, a degeneracy, a devolution.
In like manner, mediums are wont to speak of their me-
diumistic "powers." Although this is done honestly in many
instances and without intent to deceive, nevertheless it is mis-
leading. It conveys to the casual student, the credulous and
the unsophisticated, the unmistakable impression that medium-
ship really gives to the medium added powers. It conveys
the idea that it makes him stronger in himself, gives him in-
dependent control over new forces and processes in Nature,
and adds to his individual ability, efficiency and strength. It
conveys all this, whereas, the exact reverse is true.
Every medium of intelligence knows and admits that in
exact proportion as he becomes a medium he surrenders the
power of self-control. In precisely the same proportion he
becomes subject to the domination and control of outside in-
telligences. It is true that in one view of the subject the me-
diumistic process involves the development of "powers," but
not those on the part of the medium. All the "power" it de-
velops is on the part of the dominating, spiritual controls.
Moreover, the power which the controls thus acquire is that
power which enables them to rob the medium of his own
natural and rightful power of self-control.
The truth of all this is demonstrated in every phase of me-
diumship. From the beginning to the end the mediumistic
process involves a continued loss of power on the part of the
NEITHER A " GIFT " NOR A " POWER " 201
medium, and a corresponding acquisition of power on the
part of his controls.
This strange and ingenious misuse of terms which is so
apparent in spiritualistic literature involves an error so subtle
that even mediums themselves appear to have become con-
fused as to the principle back of the mediumistic process.
As an illustration, they often speak of clairvoyance as if
it were a definite power possessed by the medium, whereas
the exact reverse is true. The fallacy is so patent to those
who understand the subjective process back of mediumship
that to them it needs no explanation. But the great multi-
tude who have relied upon the accuracy of the terminology
employed, rather than upon a demonstration of the principle
at the foundation of the mediumistic process, have been in the
past and will continue to be in the future, grievously misled.
It is especially important that they too should understand the
true principle for the purpose of self -protection.
For the benefit of those who may not have personally
demonstrated the error for themselves, the following facts,
which are familiar to every medium, are here presented for
careful consideration:
1. An individual who has become clairvoyant through
the subjective process of mediumship does not see clairvoy-
antly whenever he so desires any more than does the hypnotic
subject.
2. He is not able, as many suppose, to open his spiritual
eyes at will and see whatever there is to be seen upon the
spiritual plane about him.
3. On the contrary, he sees clairvoyantly, just as the hyp-
notic subject does, only when conditions are made for him
by his controls.
4. Moreover, he sees only those things which his controls
desire him to see and which they actually place before his
spiritual vision.
5. His spiritual vision comes to him without his knowl-
edge of the process involved. It comes without an effort on
his part. It comes and goes regardless of his own efforts or
his own will. It is something over which he has no control
202 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
whatever. He may desire with all his soul to see. He may
exert every power at his command to accomplish that desire.
But his own volition unaided is without avail. His spiritual
vision, so long as subjective methods and processes are em-
ployed, will remain closed until it is opened for him by his
controlling, spiritual intelligences.
A vision is flashed before his eyes. He sees it for an in-
stant and it is gone. The more he tries to see it the more
quickly it evades him. Let him exert every power of his being
to follow it. He cannot do it. In spite of all his individual
efforts it passes from him. In other words, his psychic vision
opens and closes regardless of his individual will or wish.
It takes possession of him and departs from him in defiance
of all his own powers. He is its plaything and not its master.
It controls him. He does not control it. All the powers in-
volved in the process are upon him and not within him.
The very attitude he assumes betrays the fact that his
clairvoyance is anything but a "power" of his own. When
he desires to see things upon the spiritual plane he places him-
self in a negative or passive condition of both body and mind,
and then what does he do? Simply waits. For what? For
his controls to do the rest. Without their co-operation he is
helpless. He can no more open his spiritual vision of his
own volition than he can change the course of the stars. He
must await the pleasure of his controls. Unless they choose
to make conditions for him he will remain spiritually blind
until death shall remove the scales from his eyes.
And yet, he calls his clairvoyance a "power," thereby pro-
jecting the suggestion that it is a power which he controls,
whereas, it is a power which controls him and to which he is
only a subject. By this gross misapplication of the word he
inevitably conveys to the uninformed the mistaken impression
that it is something over which he has perfect command and
individual control. He thus erroneously leads them to believe
that it is something which he can exercise at will. And thus
they are deceived. In like manner the world in general has
been deceived and is still deceived concerning many of the
NEITHER A "GIFT" NOR A "POWER" 203
most important facts of mediumship and the mediumistic pro-
cess.
With precisely the same degree of consistency it may be
said that insanity is a "power," or that paralysis and impotency
are "powers," or that weakness, helplessness and bondage are
"powers."
Mediumistic "development" is often spoken of in the same
manner. The word is used in such manner as to convey the
impression that mediumship is the result of a process of indi-
vidual self-development. It is, however, the exact reverse
of this. The medium does not develop himself. He is de-
veloped. That is to say, all the developing work is done by
his controls and not by the medium himself. He is devel-
oped in precisely the same sense that a patient is developed
under the influence of an anaesthetic. That is to say, he is
"developed" into a condition of subjectivity which, to pre-
cisely the degree it exists, marks the surrender of his individ-
ual and independent powers.
Attention is here called to an exceedingly important dis-
tinction, viz. : While mediumship is at all times and under all
conditions and circumstances a subjective process and in-
variably results in a surrender and sacrifice of individual
powers on the part of the medium, this does not mean that all
psychical development is mediumistic. On the contrary, quite
the reverse is true.
There is, in fact, a method of development which, when
once accomplished, enables the individual to come into as con-
scious relation to his spiritual environment as he is to his
physical environment. He sees clairvoyantly whenever he
desires to do so, and when he opens his spiritual eyes he sees
whatever there is to be seen upon the spiritual planes within
the range of his vision. He hears clairaudiently whenever
he wills to do so, and when he thus exercises his spiritual
sense of hearing he hears whatever there is to be heard upon
the spiritual planes within the range of his hearing. He is
able to communicate with those upon the spiritual side of life
as freely and as voluntarily as he does with those upon the
physical plane.
204: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Spiritual intelligences have no control over him whatever,
nor any of his faculties, capacities or voluntary powers. He
is absolutely independent in the exercise of his sensory organ-
ism. In other words, he is an independent psychic in every
sense of the term. He is in every sense a natural "develop-
ment," and at every progressive step along the way he ac-
quires definite and specific "powers."
He occupies the position of a Master, while the medium
occupies that of the subject or slave. The one is indepen-
dent, the other dependent. The one possesses specific and
definite "powers," the other is robbed of the powers with
which Nature originally invested him. The one is an active,
intelligent factor, the other a passive instrument. The one
is a responsible, individual intelligence, the other an irrespon-
sible automaton to the extent he becomes a subject of medium-
istic processes.
The purpose and limitations of this volume forbid any
presentation at this time of the rational method of indepen-
dent, spiritual self-development here referred to. This sub-
ject, however, will be fully covered in another volume of this
series.
Briefly recapitulating:
1. Mediumship, from the position of the medium, is
neither a "gift" nor a "power." It is the antithesis of both.
2. From the standpoint of the medium, it is not a "de-
velopment." It is a progressive suppression, retrogression
and degeneracy.
3. In the light of the known facts of science the words
"gift," "power" and "development," whenever and wherever
applied to the state or condition of the medium, are misno-
mers.
4. To the inversion and misuse of these terms in their re-
lation to the mediumistic process is due a very large proportion
of the confusion and misunderstanding on the part of the
public in general concerning the principle back of mediumship
and the subjective process.
MEDIUMSHIP DESTRUCTIVE 205
CHAPTER IX.
THE DESTRUCTIVE PRINCIPLE IN MEDIUMSHIP.
Perhaps the one error most difficult to dislodge from the
human mind and consciousness is that which is bound up in
a comforting belief.
It needs but a glance at the pages of history to discover
that throughout the ages the great body of humanity has ex-
pended vastly more energy in hugging its delusions and cher-
ishing its beliefs than in its search for truth.
The cause of this interesting phenomenon of the human
intellect lies deeply imbedded in the very texture of our es-
sential nature. The pathway of the soul which leads to hu-
man happiness, or to the goal of human ambitions, is both
steep and rugged and beset with many dangers. Each indi-
vidual who travels this way is forever in search of congenial
fellowship. He is ready to accept as a friend and cherish as
a companion whatever brings to him courage, faith, hope or
comfort. He is ever ready to let down the outer gates and
open wide the inner doors of the soul to admit even a delu-
sion, if it be but a friendly one, or a mere belief, if it brings
comfort; and when once admitted he stands ready to defend
it against all the world, truth included.
Human intelligence does not confine itself to the study of
logic, nor to the art of reasoning from acknowledged premises
to legitimate conclusions. If it did so it would discover many
things in Nature of which it has thus far never dared to even
dream. Consistency is a jewel so precious and so rare that
it is possessed by only the few. While we all know and freely
acknowledge that truth is better than falsehood or error,
nevertheless, when we have once come into possession of that
which to us is a comfort or an inspiration to faith, hope or
happiness, even though it be a delusion or a fallacy, it is a
part of our human nature to cling to it with all our strength
and all our might lest some one shall wrest it from us and de-
prive us of the pleasure it has afforded.
To many a lonely and anxious soul spiritual mediumship
206 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
has been the open door through which the dove of peace has
entered with its olive leaf of glad tidings from beyond the
dark and troubled waters. It is not strange, therefore, that
those who, through this open door, have watched for the
coming of the winged messenger of hope, should bar the ap-
proach of those who would forever close it against them.
For such as these, however, there is a greater comfort
than the mere leaf of hope in the beak of a fleeting dove.
There is yet another and a higher door from which you your-,
self may pass beyond the restless tide and for yourself behold
the tree of life from which that leaf was plucked.
The purpose of this work, therefore, is not to condemn
those who have sought knowledge of the life that lies beyond
the dark shadow of physical death, nor yet to inveigh against
mediums as the instruments by and through which this knowl-
edge has been transmitted.
Let it be remembered that all the material claims of spir*
itualism are admitted in advance. Not only this, they have
been fully verified by scientific demonstration. The question
before us, therefore, is not as to the fact of mediumship it-
self, nor the genuineness of its phenomena. It is solely and
entirely a question of principle.
Those who view this subject from the standpoint of per-
sonal interest appear to take for granted that merely because
mediumship has given to the world that which the world has
desired, that is, definite assurance of a future life, the principle
and the process involved in mediumship are therefore neces-
sarily right. At first view this assumption would appear to
be justified.
If mediumship involved no other results than that of
giving to the world knowledge of a life beyond the grave,
this volume never would have been written. But such is not
the case. It involves vastly more than the mere question of
another life. Its results are therefore complex. Its merits
must be determined by all the results which flow from it, and
not by a single or isolated result which may represent but a
mere fraction of the great aggregate of which it is but a part.
MEDIUMSHIP DESTRUCTIVE 207
It will help to clear the mind for a more perfect understand-
ing of the subject if we first arrive at a satisfactory solution of
the following question, viz. :
Is it possible for any given result which, in itself, is desir-
able and beneficent, to follow, as the natural sequence of a
process which is indefensibly wrong, immoral and injurious?
A complete answer will be found in the following illustra-
tions :
1. A gentleman desires to educate his son for the minis-
try. This is a desire which is admittedly worthy. To ac-
complish this worthy result requires money. He knows that
upon the death of his own mother he will fall heir to a for-
tune which would enable him to accomplish the fulfillment of
his worthy desire. He therefore plans and successfully ac-
complishes his mother's death. The fortune is received. His
son is educated. The ministry receives a worthy and valued
brother. The world is greatly benefited as the result of his
ministry.
Here is an instance in which the father's desire is in every
way commendable. The results to both the son and the world
are, in themselves, desirable and beneficent. But the method
by which those results were accomplished is not only inde-
fensibly wrong, immoral and injurious, but criminal to the
last degree.
It will be observed that the primary result sought in this
case, namely, the son's education, constitutes but a part of
the aggregate results which flowed from the method and the
process by which it was accomplished. Herein lies the mys-
tery. There were other results, and these are they that stamp
the process as injurious and wrong.
2. A scientist desires to obtain certain geological data
from a cave which he has reason to believe is inhabited by
venomous reptiles and ravenous beasts. He is afraid to enter
the cave himself. He therefore sends his innocent and trust-
ing child in the hope that he may perhaps be able to bring
back the desired information. At his command the child en-
ters the cave and is stung by a venomous serpent. He brings
back the desired information but dies as a result.
208 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
The desire for knowledge in this case may have been en-
tirely commendable. The knowledge obtained may have been
of special value to the world. But the method or process
by which it was obtained was cruel, inhuman, cowardly and
criminally unjust.
3. A physician desires to know the physiological action
of a certain drug. He therefore feeds it to his innocent child.
The child dies. The physician thereby obtains the desired
knowledge. This knowledge, in itself, is both desirable and
commendable. It may be of great value to the rest of hu-
manity. It may result in a beneficent discovery. But whc
shall say that the method or process by which it was ob-
tained is right?
4. A psychologist desires to obtain definite knowledge
concerning the great problem of a life beyond the grave. He
nas already learned from the professional observations of
physicians that those who slowly bleed to death almost in-
variably fall into a psychic state during the closing moments
of life in which they often see, hear and talk with those who
are known to have passed to the other shore of life.
For the purpose of obtaining more light upon this most
fascinating of all subjects, he takes one after the other of the
members of his own family into his laboratory and there
slowly bleeds them to death in order that he may hear their
last words and question them concerning those whom they
see and hear and speak with as they descend into the valley
of the shadow. Through this method he obtains authentic
messages from his own mother, perhaps, and from other rela-
tives and friends who have gone before, and he is thereby
satisfied that death does not end all.
The knowledge he has thus acquired is that which all the
world is seeking. It is the knowledge which would bring
comfort and strength and courage and hope to many a trou-
bled soul.
But what shall we say of the method or process by which
he obtained this knowledge? What of the instruments by
and through which he accomplished his purpose ? These were
his "mediums." These he sacrificed for his own selfish pur-
MEDIUMSHIP DESTRUCTIVE 209
poses. Every impulse of the human soul protests against
such a sacrifice. Every element of justice condemns the pro-
cess as indefensibly wrong, immoral and unjust. Far better
to have left the problem unsolved than to have obtained his
knowledge at such a sacrifice.
These illustrations furnish a complete and unequivocal
answer to the question under consideration. It will now be
seen that it is quite possible for a given result which, in it-
self, may be desirable and beneficent, to follow as the natural
sequence of a method or process which is indefensibly wrong,
immoral and injurious. Not only is this possible, but it is
one of the commonest facts of Nature and confronts us at al-
most every turn in the pathway of life.
There are two well defined reasons for this, viz. :
1. A complex process often produces mixed results.
2. Whenever a given process produces mixed results
some of these results may be good while others may be bad.
In all such instances it is impossible to determine the real
merit or demerit of the method or process without taking into
account all the known results which it produces. When this
is done, and only then, is it possible to determine with cer-
tainty the exacx nature and quality of the process.
A study of the foregoing illustrations will develop the fur-
ther fact that the desired result in each instance might have
been achieved by other methods than those employed. This
suggests the further important fact that from the standpoint
of the individual almost every desired result may be accom-
plished by at least two different methods or processes, one of
which is ethically right and the other wrong.
And so it is with the great question of another life. We
all admit that knowledge concerning this great and profound
problem is desirable. To most men and women it would seem
to be an inexpressible comfort, joy and benefit. There are at
least two distinct and radically different methods or processes
by which the individual may obtain that definite and specific
knowledge. One of these is ethically right and the other is
ethically wrong. One is subjective. The other is indepen-
210 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
dent. One is constructive in its effects upon the individual.
The other is destructive.
One of the processes is known to the world as "Spiritual
mediumship." Is it the right one, or the wrong one? Is it
constructive, or destructive?
The correct answer to these questions will be found only
through a careful study of all the known results of the me-
diumistic process.
In the analysis of this subject there are two general classes
of results which must be taken into account, viz. :
1. Those which affect the medium.
2. Those which do not affect the medium.
Those results of the mediumistic process which do not af-
fect the medium may, for convenience, be subdivided as fol-
lows:
(a) Those results which affect such of the sitters, in a
spiritualistic seance or circle, as are not in the least medium-
istic.
For the sake of avoiding all questions of controversy it
will be admitted that a fair proportionate number of this class
have been convinced by mediumistic phenomena that there is
a life after physical death. These have come to believe that
through mediumship it is possible to communicate with and
receive communications from those on the spiritual side of
life. Thus they are given a belief, and their faith is es-
tablished.
The nature of the messages received and the phenomena
witnessed, however, has produced upon them very different
results. On the one hand, where the communications have
been intelligent and of a sufficiently high moral tone, the re-
sults have been, to all appearances, of a beneficial character.
They have, at least, brought to the recipients a certain amount
of hope and a comforting assurance that death does not end
all.
On the other hand, in quite as many instances, the nature
of the messages received and the character of the phenomena
witnessed have been so entirely devoid of intellectual merit,
moral quality and common honesty as to convey the impres-
MEDIUMSHIP DESTRUCTIVE 211
sion that the spiritual world is exclusively inhabited by im-
beciles, fools, liars and knaves. In all such instances the re-
sults have been of the most unfortunate character. They
have brought neither comfort nor hope nor an inspiration to
better living.
Then again, many of this class have spent years investigat-
ing the subject only to turn from it all, weary and heart-sick
and disgusted, with the firm and unalterable conviction that
it is all a fraud from beginning to end. If skeptical at the
beginning, their skepticism has been thereby many times in-
tensified. If religiously inclined, their faith in both God and
man has been completely shattered. Their hope of a future
life and their inspiration to higher ideals have been taken from
them. To all such as these mediumship has brought nothing
but disappointment and direct personal injury.
(b) The results of mediumship which affect those sitters
who are not yet mediums, but who are of the negative types
and more or less susceptible to spiritual influences.
With comparatively few exceptions, the result is that in-
dividuals of this class are ultimately overwhelmed by the spir-
itual influences and either become mediums of the various
forms and in the varying degrees hereinbefore outlined, or
they are adjudged insane and committed to the various insti-
tutions for the insane throughout the country.
(c) The results of the mediumistic process upon the spir-
itual controls who participate in the work of developing me-
diums.
Inasmuch as this branch of the subject will be fully con-
sidered in Part III, of this volume, it is only necessary at this
time to state that the results upon this class are, without ex-
ception, of the most harmful and destructive character.
This brings us to a consideration of the results of medium-
ship which affect the medium himself. This is by far the most
important branch of the subject under consideration. It
therefore demands the most careful study and analysis from
the standpoint of the accumulated and verified facts of science.
A critical study of mediumship from the standpoint of the
medium himself involves three distinct and separate lines of
212 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
inquiry by which to determine the possible merits or demerits
of the mediumistic process, viz. :
I. Its physical effects upon the medium.
II. Its mental effects upon the medium.
III. Its moral effects upon the medium.
In the order named our present inquiry is concerned with :
I. The purely physical effects of the mediumistic process
upon the medium himself.
A complete exposition of this subject would demand an
exhaustive inquiry into the physiology and pathology of me-
diumship. But in all their essential features these are iden-
tical with those of hypnotism. The physiology and pathology
of hypnotism, however, have been sufficiently outlined in Part
I, Chapter VIII, of this volume, to which the reader is re-
ferred for the specific data necessary to a complete under-
standing of the subject here under consideration. It would
seem but needless repetition to cover the same subject again
in this connection. A brief summary of the most salient facts
there presented would appear to be all that is necessary at this
time.
These naturally divide themselves into two general classes,
viz.:
1. Immediate results.
2. Subsequent results.
The immediate physical results of the mediumistic process
upon the medium may be briefly summarized as follows:
(a) The mediumistic process acts directly upon the
physical brain of the medium in the reverse order of its evo-
lutionary development.
(b) Its primary physiological action, therefore, is upon
the objective and perceptive organs of the brain which lie
immediately above and back of the eyes.
(c) Thence, as the subjective state deepens, its effects
sweep backward through the intellectual brain, downward
through the middle brain, and in its most profound state of
catalepsy or lethargic, trance control, it acts upon the primary
brain.
(d) The direct and specific effect of the mediumistic
MEDIUMSHIP DESTRUCTIVE 213
process, from its inception to its conclusion, is paralysis of
the physical brain and physical sensory organism of the
medium.
(e) The degree of paralysis at any given stage of the
process is measured by the degree of mediumistic control
attained.
(f) The varying degrees of paralysis, therefore, range
all the way from the first faint mediumistic impulse of sub-
jection through all its deepening stages to the state of com-
plete catalepsy or lethargic, trance control.
The subsequent results of the mediumistic process upon
the physical organism of the medium, briefly summarized, are
as follows:
(a) As the mediumistic state or condition is developed
through a series of sittings the nervous organism of the me-
dium becomes more and more acutely sensitive to the pressure
of its environment. This at first manifests itself in what is
often defined as simple nervousness. As the process of me-
diumistic subjection progresses this state of nervous sensi-
bility to environment usually leads to insomnia and thence to
intense nervous irritability.
(b) Long continued or oft repeated subjection of the
medium to the mediumistic process almost invariably results
in complete nervous prostration.
(c) If the process be carried far enough the physical
brain tissues become impaired, from which condition brain
diseases of various kinds and degrees follow as a natural con-
sequence.
(d) Wherever mediumistic control becomes continuous
insanity follows as a natural result. This subject will be more
fully considered in a subsequent chapter.
(e) The very nature of the mediumistic process is such
that in the production of mediumistic phenomena it is neces-
sary for the spiritual controls to appropriate and expend the
medium's animal magetism and vital energy as rapidly as the
same are generated by his physical organism.
This is illustrated by the fact that wherever the medium
voluntarily submits to control (under the mutual agreement
214 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
that the spiritual intelligences are to have the use of the me-
dium's physical organism at stated intervals without opposi-
tion), they seldom hold the medium under complete and con-
tinuous subjection longer than from one to two hours at any
one time.
Mediums themselves invariably recognize this condition
of magnetic and vital depletion after each mediumistic sub-
jection. Oftentimes it is so marked as to result in complete
physical exhaustion.
(f) The amount of magnetic and vital energy thus ap-
propriated and expended by the controls depends somewhat
on the form of mediumship employed.
For instance, it is a fact well known to every one who has
given the subject consideration that the process of material-
ization calls for the largest expenditure of magnetic and vital
energy within a given period of time. Other forms of com-
plete trance control follow next in regular order, and so on
down through all the other forms of partial control.
(g) It is found that this depletion of magnetic and vital
energy is, with very rare exceptions, commensurate with the
degree and continuity of the control exercised.
(h) The power possessed by every human, physical or-
ganism to resist the encroachments of disease is measured
by the volume of its magnetic and vital energy in stock at
any given time. The literal truth of this statement is known
to every practicing physician throughout the country. It will
therefore be observed that the inevitable depletion which fol-
lows from the mediumistic process leaves the physical organ-
ism of the medium, for the time being, practically defenseless
against the arch enemy of mankind in the form of physical
disease.
This is also fully verified by the most recent and reliable
statistics, which show that the average life of the medium,
dating from the development of the mediumistic condition,
is only a fraction over seven years. This includes mediums
of both sexes and all ages who have given themselves up to
the practice of mediumship either regularly or as a business.
It is true that there are a few very remarkable exceptions
MEDIUMSHIP DESTRUCTIVE 215
where mediumistic subjection has followed with reasonable
regularity over a period of years. These cases, however, are
the rare exceptions and only serve to prove more fully the
general rule. It is found that in every such exception there
is a specific cause, which only serves to verify more fully the
principle above stated.
For illustration: A certain well known medium of inter-
national reputation has been giving public seances and deliv-
ering public sermons under complete trance control for some-
thing like twenty-five years, and possibly longer. The ques-
tion very naturally arises as to how this is possible, when the
mediumistic process, under all ordinary conditions, is known
to be so extremely enervating and paralyzing to the physical
organism of the medium.
It is known that in this particular instance the magnetic
and vital energies of the medium, appropriated by her con-
trols, are immediately resupplied to her from the negative
and mediumistic members of her audience. In this event
the largest ultimate draft is upon the audience instead of the
medium. The audience, therefore, is the sufferer in this in-
stance without knowing it. Certain members of her regular
audience are so completely enervated by this draft upon them
that for hours after each regular service they are seriously
affected. They have not yet located the cause. If they will
hereafter carefully note the effects they will be able to fully
verify the statements here made.
Let this same medium be subjected to the same character
of control under conditions which preclude the possibility of
such draft upon her audience and she will break under the
strain in a very short time.
II. This brings us to the second general line of inquiry
as to the results of the mediumistic process upon the mental
condition of the medium.
These, in like manner, naturally, divide themselves into
two distinct classes, viz. :
1. Immediate and more or less transitory results.
2. Subsequent and more enduring results.
The immediate and more or less transitory results of the
216 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
mediumistic process upon the mind of the medium are as
follows :
(a) During the continuance of the mediumistic process
the will, voluntary powers and sensory organism of the me-
dium are under the domination and control of spiritual intelli-
gences to the exact degree that the mediumistic relation is
established.
(b) In proportion to the degree of mediumistic control
established, at any given time, the medium is deprived of the
independent power to exercise his own will.
(c) In the same proportion he loses his independent
control of the voluntary organs of his own physical body.
(d) In exactly the same proportion his physical sensory
organism fails to report to his own consciousness accurate im-
pressions as to passing events upon the physical plane.
(e) To the extent that the mediumistic process inter-
feres with the normal action of his physical sensory organism
the medium's judgment concerning the ordinary affairs of life
is impaired.
(f) In proportion as the medium loses the power of in-
dependent volition under the mediumistic process his will
becomes an automatic instrument under the domination of his
controls.
(g) In all forms of trance mediumship the medium is
deprived of the independent exercise of all his mental facul-
ties, capacities and powers, during the continuance of the
mediumistic process.
(h) In all the lighter forms of mediumship his loss of
the independent power of self-control is exactly commen-
surate with the degree of mediumistic control to which he
is thereby subjected.
These results upon the mind of the medium are all imme-
diate. They are also of a more or less transitory nature, ex-
cept to the extent that injury follows therefrom.
The subsequent and more enduring results of the medi-
umistic process upon the mind of the medium are, in part, as
follows :
(a) As the process of mediumistic subjugation pro-
MEDIUMSHIP DESTRUCTIVE 217
grasses the dominating spiritual intelligences obtain a con-
stantly increasing power and control over all the mental facul-
ties, capacities and powers of the medium. As a natural
result at each succeeding sitting the complete subjection of
the medium becomes less and less difficult for them. This
is a progressive and permanent condition.
(b) The natural corollary of this demonstrated proposi-
tion is equally true. That is to say, in exact proportion as
the spiritual intelligences attain ease and facility in the pro-
cess of obtaining control of the medium, the medium himself
loses the independent power of resistance. This condition,
therefore, also involves a progressive and permanent loss to
the medium.
(c) The mediumistic process involves no independent,
self-conscious and rational activity on the part of the medium.
On the other hand, it calls for the exact reverse of this. That
is to say, to the exact degree that the mediumistic relation
obtains, the mind of the medium is in a negative or passive
condition, and therefore inactive.
A high state of mediumistic development, therefore, means
a correspondingly low state of mental activity on the part of
the medium. Continuous mediumistic practice means con-
tinuous mental inaction or stagnation on the part of the
medium. This means a corresponding inactivity of the phys-
ical brain through which his mind operates.
But it is an immutable law of physical nature, with which
medical science is already thoroughly familiar, that the inac-
tion of any organ of the physical body soon results in its
atrophy and decay, in the loss of its natural powers and the
suspension of its natural functions. This is a fact of Nature,
the complete verification and demonstration of which is with-
in the power of every individual who desires to test it.
For illustration: Let him completely suspend the mus-
cular activity of the arm. In a very short time its muscles
become flabby and soft and its powers wane in exact propor-
tion to its atrophied condition. To the same degree its nat-
ural functions are suspended.
The passive condition of the mind in mediumship and the
218 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
consequent inactivity of the physical brain, through which th
mind operates, soon result in atrophy of the brain tissues, de-
generacy of the mental powers and suspension of the mental
functions.
No fact of Nature is more conclusively demonstrated than
is this particular result of the mediumistic process. It is the
common experience of every medium who has ever reached
the degree of mediumistic subjection here referred to. To a
proportionate degree it is the experience of every other me-
dium, whether he is able to measure it or not. It is a con-
dition which may be observed by every individual who is in
position to study the effects of mediumship upon the mental
powers of a medium.
An instance or two out of the many that have come under
the personal observation of the writer will be sufficient to
fully illustrate the principle under consideration. For in-
stance :
i. In 1895 the writer, through a business transaction,
came into a personal acquaintance with a Mr. W., of Chicago,
a gentleman of exceptional mental powers and qualifications,
and the highest type of intellectual and moral manhood. This
gentleman was, at that time, at the zenith of his mental vigor
and intellectual power, and a man whom it was a rare pleas-
ure to know and to hold as a personal friend.
It so happened, however, that just prior to the inception
of the acquaintance he had become interested in the subject
of mediumship and had commenced the developing process.
During the first year of his mediumistic development the
writer saw him frequently, and often endeavored to dissuade
him from his mediumistic pursuits, but without avail.
In less than two years he had become an old man, broken
in both body and mind, and but a pitiful suggestion of the
splendid and manly intelligence of two short years before.
The operations of his mind, when not under control, were a
complete index of the atrophied condition of the brain tissues.
He was a complete mental wreck, the utter ruin of a splendid
intelligence.
2.. Mrs. L., one of the brightest journalists of the coun-
MEDIUMSHIP DESTRUCTIVE 219
try at one time, and the widow of a well-known newspaper
correspondent, became interested in mediumship. She sat for
development and soon became a very remarkable trance-
speaking medium.
From the day she became fully convinced that she was
under the guidance and direction of spiritual intelligences she
appeared to surrender herself, body and soul, to the domina-
tion and control of her "spiritual band."
In less than two years she passed from a state of splendid
mental equipment, intellectual power and womanly grace to
that of a maundering, mental wreck, more pitiful than lan-
guage can picture.
It would be manifestly unfair and equally untrue to assert
that this is the inevitable fate of every medium, for it is not.
But it is a fact beyond dispute that in exact proportion as a
medium surrenders his power of self-control and becomes an
instrument under the domination and control of spiritual in-
telligences, he just that far approaches the mental condition
here indicated.
Every student of mediumistic phenomena who will put
himself in position to observe the results of the subjective
process upon the mind of a medium will be able to note some,
and oftentimes all, of the following significant peculiarities
and symptoms:
1. One of the invariable signs of a subjective, mental
state on the part of a medium is a certain far-away, hazy,
abstract, introspective or glassy stare of the eyes.
2. A gradual and progressive loss of memory of things
present.
3. A growing inability to hold the mind intently, for
any length of time, upon any subject which demands thought-
ful study.
4. A growing inability to think consecutively or logi-
cally upon any subject which calls for analytical thought.
5. A growing inability to give undivided attention to an
ordinary conversation.
6. An increasing tendency to lapse into a state of mental
abstraction and introspection.
220 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
7. A gradual and progressive loss of will power and
energy to perform hard mental labor of any kind.
8. A growing suspicion concerning the motives and in-
tentions of those with whom he comes in contact.
9. An increasing sensitiveness to unimportant things.
10. A growing irritability of temperament.
11. Increasing nervousness.
12. A growing childishness and vanity concerning little
things.
13. Increasing egotism and selfishness in almost every-
thing that concerns the individual.
14. And finally, a gradual decrease of the purely intel-
lectual activities of the mind, accompanied by a correspond-
ing increase of emotionalism and of the physical appetites,
passions and desires.
MEDIUMSHIP AND MORALITY 221
CHAPTER X.
MEDIUMSHIP AND MORALITY.
III. The third general line of inquiry brings us to a
consideration of the moral results of mediumship upon the
medium himself.
The discoveries and demonstrations of Natural Science in
this particular field of inquiry are of the most significant
character and the most vital importance. They should com-
mand the instant attention and the most thoughtful considera-
tion of every intelligent individual who has at heart either his
own personal interests or the well-being of society. To no
individual or class of individuals are the known facts of
science of such transcendent importance as to the medium
himself, and to those who are liable to become such.
But herein serious difficulties arise. Human nature is so
curiously and wonderfully made that the particular knowl-
edge each individual most needs is very often that which he
does not appreciate, does not want, or does not care for. Even
when we recognize our need of definite knowledge we often
refuse to accept it unless it comes to us from exactly the
source we expect it and in the identical manner and form we
demand it.
For illustration : A minister of the gospel is apt to as-
sume that he knows more about theology than a blacksmith
does, and sometimes he is correct. For this reason he refuses
to accept theological suggestions from such a source. It is
just possible, however, that the blacksmith may know the
very thing the minister most needs and desires to know, but
he will never be able to convey his knowledge for the simple
reason that the minister will not receive it. The presump-
tion of ignorance, in this case, is against the blacksmith.
On the other hand, the blacksmith would very likely feel
the same way toward the minister if the conditions were re-
versed. However much he might be in need of definite
knowledge concerning the welding of metals, he would never
receive it from the minister, even though the latter possessed
222 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
it and were perfectly willing to impart it. In this case the
presumption of ignorance is against the minister.
Then again, suppose a learned scientist should offer to
instruct the minister in the field of theology. The same pre-
sumption would bar his way. But in this case there is yet
another difficulty to be met and overcome. By reason of the
relation which has existed between them in the past, theology
has come to look upon science rather as an enemy than a
friend. Men do not, as a general rule, accept favors from
those whom they regard as their enemies. Here, then, the
additional presumption of hostility or enmity would also bar
the way of the scientist, no matter how profound a theologian
he may be.
Mediumship is not only a profession, but an experience,
to the full measure of the medium's wakeful consciousness.
To the same extent it is a deeply personal matter with every
medium. It enters into his life as a vital and essential factor.
It gives form and color to his entire world of thought, feeling
and action. He therefore assumes to know more about it
than anyone else. In this case the presumption of ignorance
is against whomsoever shall venture to cross the threshold of
his own convictions.
Not only this. His mediumship is the one thing which
distinguishes the medium from ordinary mortals. It leads
many of his fellows to regard him with a certain degree of
awe or reverence as a mysterious being quite out of the ordi-
nary. Many even come to look upon him as an oracle of
wonderful wisdom. This flatters him. It naturally increases
his estimate of himself and his own importance, and corre-
spondingly stimulates his pride in his mediumship. It devel-
ops, in many instances, the honest though unfortunate con-
viction that the balance of humanity are intellectual infants
in comparison with himself. In all such instances pride of
intelligence also bars the way of every one whomsoever hav-
ing definite knowledge to impart.
Then again, in proportion as mediumship brings to the
medium fame, notoriety or money, it becomes to him a thing
of value. It is natural that he should prize it accordingly.
MEDIUMSHIP AND MORALITY 223
It could not well be otherwise, for it is a part of human
nature to prize whatever gratifies our vanities or our selfish
desires. Whatever would come between us and the thing
we value is, to us, an enemy and not a friend.
These, then, are the chief obstacles which stand between
the medium and the definite knowledge he most needs:
1. The presumption in his mind that he alone, of all
men, knows most about mediumship and the mediumistic
process.
2. The presumption in his own mind that any one and
every one who is not a medium is necessarily, by reason of
that fact alone, ignorant concerning the principle and the
process involved.
3. The pride of intelligence which prevents him from
mentally stooping to those whom he conscientiously believes
to be his intellectual inferiors.
4. The honest conviction that those who would condemn
his mediumship, for any cause whatsoever, thereby necessarily
condemn him also.
The sincere desire and earnest hope of the writer is that
his work may reach the intelligence and win the confidence
of every medium or student of mediumship who shall honor
.this volume with a careful and critical reading. Then, and
then only, will it be possible to lay before him, in acceptable
form, the demonstrated facts of science touching the moral
phases of mediumship and the mediumistic process.
To that end the following brief statement may, perhaps,
be of value:
The writer holds himself to be the friend of every honest
medium, spiritualist and student of psychic phenomena, no
matter what his attitude toward this particular work may
be. For more than thirty years he has been a close student
of psychic phenomena in all their various phases, under the
most favorable conditions possible for the acquisition of ex-
act and definite knowledge; and as such, during that time,
he has personally witnessed perhaps every important phase
of both mediumship and hypnotism, as well as many other
224 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
psychic manifestations and phenomena which are entirely in-
dependent of these processes.
His study of the subject has been pursued in the spirit
of sympathy and good faith. His mind has at all times been
as free from prejudice or bias as possible to one whose cen-
tral motive has been the acquisition of exact and definite
knowledge concerning the most fascinating and absorbing
problems of human life.
Most of his immediate relatives and many of his most in-
timate personal friends are known as active and leading spir-
itualists within the circle of their acquaintance. Some of
them are mediums through whom a wide range of medium-
istic phenomena has been produced. Not one of these, how-
ever, so far as he knows, has ever given public seances or
practiced mediumship for money or for any other valuable
consideration.
Their motives and purposes are in every respect above
suspicion or reproach, and their perfect integrity and good
faith are beyond all possible question among those who know
them. The same, it is believed, can be said with equal truth
concerning a very large number of earnest and conscientious
believers in mediumship and spiritualism all over the world.
For these and other good and sufficient reasons, the writer
accords to all such the most friendly and courteous considera-
tion. He only asks in return that his present message, which
is largely intended for mediums, spiritualists and students of
psychic phenomena, be received by them in the same spirit
of friendly courtesy and freedom from prejudice or hostility.
With this personal pledge of sympathy and good faith, let
us proceed at once to the subject under consideration.
Individual responsibility is the basis of morality. This is
a fact that is universally recognized among civilized people.
It is acknowledged by men and women of all schools, cults,
philosophies, creeds and religions. It is the fundamental
principle at the basis of every form of government. It is at
the foundation of every social and moral structure. It is the
central principle about which cluster all our laws and codes,
civil and criminal, as well as moral.
MEDIUMSHIP AND MORALITY 225
So long as man is held to be a responsible, individual in-
telligence, he is accountable to his fellow-man and to society
for all his acts, influence and conduct which in any way affect
them. Just so long he is held accountable to the moral law.
Just so long he has a moral status.
The moment he becomes an irresponsible, individual in-
telligence, no matter from what cause or by what process,
his accountability to his fellow-man and to society, as well
as to the moral law, ceases. He is at all times accountable to
the degree of his individual responsibility only. He is exempt
only to the degree of his individual irresponsibility. Man's
entire value as a member of society, in fact, depends upon the
extent to which he is held to be a responsible, individual in-
telligence.
But when, or under what conditions, is an individual re-
sponsible? When, or under what conditions, is he not re-
sponsible? In other words, upon what does individual re-
sponsibility depend?
This is one of the most important questions ever pro-
pounded to mankind. Its full and complete analysis will be
found in Part III of this volume. To avoid repetition, there-
fore, the simple answer will be given at this point without
elaboration.
Individual responsibility depends at all times upon the
ability of the individual to exercise his volition independ-
ently, self-consciously and rationally.
That is to say, every individual is morally responsible for
such of his acts and such only as he performs independently
(i. e., of his own free will and accord), self-consciously (i. e.,
knowingly and intentionally), and rationally (i. e., anticipat-
ing the results).
The several elements, therefore, upon which individual
responsibility depends are:
1. Self-consciousness.
2. Independent choice.
3. Reason.
4. Volition.
The degree to which the individual is in possession of all
226 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
these faculties, capacities and powers marks the degree of his
individual responsibility at any given time. The degree to
which he is not in possession of any or all these, marks the
degree of his irresponsibility at any given time.
It now becomes possible for us to understand and appre-
ciate the moral status of the medium. It is well known that
the mediumistic process deprives the medium of his ability to
exercise each and every one of these faculties, capacities and
powers, to the exact degree that the mediumistic relation is
established.
Mediumship, it will be remembered, is a subjective, psychic
process. It is, in fact, that process by and through which
spiritual intelligences obtain, hold and exercise control of the
will, voluntary powers and sensory organism of a medium.
To the degree that mediumship exists at any given time
it deprives the medium of the use and exercise of his own
sensory organism. But his sensory organism includes all the
channels through which his consciousness may be reached and
impressed. He is therefore robbed of his self-consciousness
in just so far as he is deprived of the use of his sensory or-
ganism. That is to say, he sacrifices his self-consciousness
to exactly the degree that he surrenders himself to medium-
istic control.
Again, his will or power of volition, passes from his own
control in exact proportion and to the exact degree that he
becomes a subject of mediumistic control. But his ability to
reason is also dependent upon his power of will or volition.
Therefore, in just so far as he is at any time a subject of
mediumistic control he is deprived of the power of reason.
And again, the power of independent choice is also de-
pendent upon his will, or volition. This, therefore, also passes
from him in exactly the same ratio.
It now becomes possible to clearly state the following
demonstrated facts of Natural Science which bear directly
upon the question under consideration :
i. In just so far as mediumship exists, at any given time,
it deprives the medium of the ability to exercise each and
MEDIUMSHIP AND MORALITY 227
every one of the faculties, capacities and powers of the mind
and soul upon which his individual responsibility depends.
2. In proportion as he forfeits his individual responsi-
bility, he violates the moral law, and thereby becomes a
menace to society.
3. His moral status of accountability is at all times com-
mensurate with the degree of his individual responsibility.
4. At no time does his moral status as an individual in-
telligence rise above the level of his individual responsibility.
5. His individual, moral nature may, and often does,
sink very far below that level.
6. Mediumship, inasmuch as it divests the medium of his
individual responsibility, is a direct violation of the moral law,
and to the same degree and for the same reason is inimical
to the rights and interests of both the individual and society.
Up to this point we have considered the subject from the
standpoint of the moral principle alone which is involved in
the mediumistic process. We have clearly defined the moral
status of mediumship and the degree to which the medium
is at all times morally accountable.
It now becomes necessary to examine the subject from the
standpoint of the actual results of mediumship as they trans-
late themselves into the inspirations, emotions, impulses, de-
sires, appetites, passions, actions and life of the medium him-
self. This is both a delicate and a difficult task and demands
the utmost care in order to avoid the possibility of misunder-
standing, misinterpretation or offense.
The chief psychological distinction between man and the
animal is in the fundamental fact that the animal does not rise
to the level of moral accountability, while man does. In
other words, the animal has no moral status, while man has.
The animal, therefore, is exempt from the obligations of indi-
vidual responsibility, while man is not.
But why is the animal not a responsible, individual intelli-
gence? Why has he not risen to the level of moral account-
ability?
There is but one answer. It is because the animal nature
and development are devoid of the soul attributes those fac-
228 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
ulties, capacities and powers upon which individual respon-
sibility depends. If the animal possessed these attributes of
the soul he would be both individually responsible and mor-
ally accountable under the law of his being. Without them,
however, he is neither individually responsible nor morally
accountable.
Indeed, it would almost appear that in the stupendous
scheme of evolution Nature, or Universal Intelligence, has
been engaged in a process of evolving an order of intelligence
upon which it could shift the burden of individual responsi-
bility for its acts and conduct beyond that point. In man it
has achieved that end.
In other words, at man's evolutionary estate it would
appear that Nature, or Universal Intelligence, weans the indi-
vidual, as it were, and then, putting into his hands the key
to his own destiny, charges him with the burden of individ-
ual responsibility and thereby confers upon him a moral
status. That is to say, man, as a responsible individual, is
charged with the burden of self-control. The animal is not.
Man possesses those peculiar attributes of the soul self-
consciousness, independent choice, reason and volition
which, acting together, give him dominion and power over
that part of his nature we differentiate as animal, and, ac-
cordingly, he is thereby charged with the individual responsi-
bility of regulating and controlling all his animal appetites,
passions, emotions, desires and propensities. By such self-
control, and such alone, he lifts himself forever higher and
higher above the level of animal life and nature.
The animal, on the other hand, being devoid of those attri-
butes of the soul which charge it with the duty of self-con-
trol, lives out its animal nature without check or hindrance.
Living thus upon the plane of physical nature, it lives only
in the physical appetites, passions, impulses, emotions and de-
sires, and lives solely to gratify them to the fullest extent
possible under its environment.
The man who continually fails, neglects or refuses to dis-
charge his individual responsibility by the exercise of self-
control of all the elements of his nature, inevitablv sinks to
MEDIUMSHIP AND MORALITY
the level of animal life. There is no other destiny for him.
And in exact proportion as he fails, neglects or refuses to
discharge this duty or obligation which God or Nature has
fixed upon him, just because he is a man, in like proportion
he approaches the level of animal nature. There is no escape
from this result.
Mediumship deprives the medium of the ability to exer-
cise each and every one of those attributes of the soul upon
which his individual responsibility depends, in just so far as
he is affected by the mediumistic process at any given time.
In equal measure, therefore, as this becomes a fixed and per-
manent result of mediumship, the medium is deprived of the
power of self-control, and necessarily sinks toward the level
of his animal nature. This is the law of spiritual gravity.
In exact proportion as the individual loses the power of
self-control, or voluntarily suspends its exercise, the check
upon his animal nature is relaxed and the restraint upon his
animal appetites, passions, emotions, desires and propensities
is removed. This is inevitable. Every man and every woman
living has no doubt demonstrated a thousand times over the
operation of this law of Nature.
Harsh and unlovely and revolting as the thought may be
when set out in cold, unsympathetic type, it is nevertheless a
fact which we must all face, whether we be mediums or not,
and from which there is no escape.
Inasmuch as mediumship slowly but surely destroys the
individual power of self-control, its inevitable tendency is
toward animalism. The law is inexorable.
This is neither an idle fancy, an unhappy theory nor a
troubled dream which waking intelligence may dispel or dis-
prove. It is an uncompromising fact of Nature, as patent as
that an apple severed from the limb on which it grows will
fall to the ground. The force which carries the apple down
we name gravity.
When its natural sustaining power, the power of self-con-
trol, is neutralized, suspended or destroyed, the gravity of the
soul, like that of the apple, carries it downward toward the
plane of the earthly animal.
230 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
It needs but an intimate acquaintance with the daily lives
and practices of those who follow mediumship as a profession
or business to find the unanswerable demonstration of this
melancholy fact.
It will be observed that this statement has special refer-
ence to professional mediums only. There are very definite
reasons for this particular limitation, viz.:
i. There are thousands of non-professional mediums all
over the world, known only among their friends and acquain-
tances as such, who devote little or no time, thought or atten-
tion to the mediumistic process. Their development, there-
fore, has not been carried to a point where its results may
be clearly and unmistakably formulated and defined with ac-
curacy.
2,. The professional medium, with sufficiently rare excep-
tions to clearly establish the rule, devotes enough of his time
and energy to the active practice of mediumship to reach, in
time, a state of more or less complete psychic subjectivity.
The effects of the process upon his life and character are ob-
servable in proportion as he yields himself to its domination
and control.
But what of the statistical facts? Do they verify or dis-
prove the principle here declared? Let us see.
From the class of mediums whose development has been
sufficient to establish definite and unqualified results, science
has gathered and is able to formulate and present the follow-
ing verified results of the mediumistic process upon the me-
dium, viz.:
1. Seventy-three per cent, of the professional mediums
referred to sooner or later develop abnormally increased and
uncontrollable sexual passions, while as high as ninety-two
per cent, show marked increase of the sexual appetite or de-
sire.
2. A fraction over sixty per cent, develop hysterical or
ungovernable temper, while as high as eighty-five Der cent,
show marked increase of nervous irritability.
3. Fifty-eight per cent, develop dishonesty and fraud f
MEDIUMSHIP AND MORALITY 231
while ninety-five per cent, show lack of moral discrimination
and courage.
4. A fraction over seventy per cent, develop inordinate
vanity, while ninety-two per cent, become more or less ego-
tistical.
5. As high as ninety-eight per cent, develop some discov-
erable form of selfishness, sensuous desire, emotional weak-
ness or degrading physical appetite.
6. In no instance does the process develop marked indi-
vidual improvement from a moral standpoint.
In order that no injustice may be done the individual me-
dium, it is proper to explain that the results here given arise
from two distinct and separate causes, viz. :
1. Natural degeneracy of the medium as a direct result
of the mediumistic process.
2. The direct and overwhelming domination of vicious
controls.
No attempt has been made to determine the percentage
of results separately due to each of these causes. In fact, it
has not been deemed necessary, inasmuch as both classes of
results are directly referable to the mediumistic process, and
both find their expression in the life and conduct of the
medium.
From whatever point these facts may be viewed, their
meaning is perfectly plain. They speak for themselves in
tones which should be heard by all the children of earth,
both now and throughout all the generations yet to come.
They clearly and unmistakably identify the principle back of
the mediumistic process as The Destructive Principle of
Nature in Individual Life.
RECAPITULATION.
Briefly recapitulating the last two chapters, there are two
general classes of results which flow from the mediumistic
process, viz.:
I. Those which do not affect the medium. These are:
i. Those which affect such of the sitters as are not in
232 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the least mediumistically inclined. Three classes fall under
this head, viz. :
(a) Those whose faith in another life is thereby estab-
lished, and who appear to be happier therefor. Results, seem-
ingly good.
(b) Those who are convinced of another life, but who
are wholly misled as to the character of intelligence which
inhabits the spiritual world. Results, bad.
(c) Those who are convinced that the whole thing is a
fraud from beginning to end. Results, bad.
2. Results of the mediumistic process which affect those
sitters who are not developed mediums, but who are more or
less sensitive to mediumistic influence. Results, very bad.
3. Those which affect the spiritual controls who partici-
pate in the mediumistic process. Results, all bad.
II. Those results of the mediumistic process upon the
medium himself. These divide themselves into three distinct
classes, as follows:
1. The purely physical results, which are:
(a) Immediate. All bad.
(b) Subsequent. All bad.
2. The purely mental results, which are:
(a) Immediate. All bad.
(b) Subsequent. All bad.
3. The purely moral results. All bad.
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 233
CHAPTER XI.
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM.
Mediumship is a martyrdom. Moreover, it is a martyr-
dom which is both cruel and unnecessary. The cause which
it is supposed to represent neither needs nor demands martyr-
dom of anyone.
Perhaps among all the varied classes and conditions of
society no individual man or woman upon the physical plane
of life is more cruelly imposed upon than is the honest and
conscientious medium.
Indeed, the pitiless deceptions and relentless brutalities
practiced upon these honest, simple-minded and credulous
souls by unscrupulous, selfish and vicious spiritual controls,
in order to insure their willing and continued submission to
the mediumistic process, should command the generous sym-
pathy and unfeigned pity of every honest lover of fair play.
It should also stimulate an indignant protest in the mind of
every one who has even the most limited appreciation of what
we know as common decency and honor.
In order to understand and appreciate this phase of the
subject as it deserves, it is necessary to call specific attention
to the following facts of spiritual nature which have been
demonstrated by Natural Science. Some of these facts are
also fully verified by spiritualists and mediums themselves
as well as by the spiritual intelligences who speak through
them:
i. The mere putting off or dispensing with the physical
body at physical death does not in the least alter the essen-
tial nature or character of the individual himself. He is ex-
actly the same, minus the encumbrance of the physical body.
He is neither essentially better nor essentially worse. He is
neither wiser nor more honest. He enters that life precisely
as he leaves this. His moral status is neither higher nor
lower. He carries with him into that life all the predominat-
ing habits, appetites, passions, desires, propensities and ambi-
tions which have governed him in this.
234 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
2,. There are known to be thirteen distinct spheres or con-
ditions of life connected with this planet, through which the
individual man and woman must pass in their evolutionary
flight from the lowest to the highest. These different states
or conditions of life have come to be known, through spirit-
ualistic philosophy and terminology, as "spheres." The term
is perhaps as appropriate as any that could be employed, and
because of its familiarity to most students will be used in
this connection.
3. These spheres represent definite locality in their rela-
tion to the planet, as well as a definite state of being in rela-
tion to those who inhabit them.
That is to say, denominating this present physical environ-
ment, condition and state of being as the first sphere, the
second immediately surrounds and encloses the first, the third
encloses the second, the fourth encloses the third, and so on
through to the thirteenth, which in like manner encloses the
other twelve. Thus, in point of relative location, an ascent of
the individual from the first sphere to the thirteenth takes
him with each advance further and further outward (or up-
ward, as we are accustomed to say) from the earth's surface.
These spheres, in like manner, represent an ever increas-
ing degree of material refinement and vibratory activity, as
well as an intellectual achievement, a spiritual refinement, a
mental attainment and a moral power.
4. The first seven spheres of life are known to Natural
Science as "Terrestrial Spheres," and the remaining six
(numbering from the eighth to the thirteenth, inclusive) are
known as "Celestial Spheres."
The specific reason for this distinction is most interesting
and important, but not within the scope and purpose of this
volume. It is sufficient to note the fact at this point that
through mediumship spiritualists have learned to accept, in
a vague and indefinite way, the fact that there are at least
seven spheres of life connected with this planet. The informa-
tion filtered through the mediumistic process concerning them,
however, has been so meager, uncertain and contradictory
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 235
as to convey but a dim and indistinct impression as to their
real existence, their nature, their relation or their meaning.
It is undoubtedly true, however, that the seven spheres
of spiritualism represent a very incomplete and imperfect
conception of the seven terrestrial spheres of Natural Science.
A vast store of exact and definite knowledge concerning
these several spheres of life and activity has been accumu-
lated. The subject is also one of absorbing interest and of
the most vital importance, but inasmuch as it does not fall
within the limitations of this work, it must be reserved for
another volume of this series.
5. The individual man or woman who attains to these
several spheres does so by and through his or her individual
effort, and in accordance with the natural law of individual
development and evolutionary progress. There is absolutely
no other means or method of advancement. It is the law of
life. Nature, in this respect at least, appears to have no
favorites. Individual advancement means always and every-
where individual effort in right lines. Individual laziness or
indolence, as well as individual effort in wrong directions,
means retrogression, always. There are no exceptions.
This would seem to indicate that our individual faculties,
capacities and powers were given us for a very specific and
definite purpose. If we would reach the mountain top we
must climb. We cannot ride upon the shoulders of our fel-
lows. We cannot furnish a proxy to do the climbing while
we use the field glass and enjoy the scenery.
Each of these several spheres of life, therefore, may be
said to measure very accurately the amount of individual
effort necessary to achieve that particular level of progressive
development. It is needless to say that the attainment of each
successive sphere of life brings to the individual its own
peculiar reward. God, or Nature, seems to have made each
particular sphere of life a treasure-house to which each indi-
vidual is given a key at entrance.
Each sphere, therefore, is inhabited by those and those
only who, by individual effort, have climbed to its level and
earned the right to enter and share its rewards. Thus, under
236 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the natural law of spiritual gravity, each individual of the
spiritual world inevitably finds the exact level to which his
particular development corresponds.
6. Under this law of spiritual gravity the first spirit-
ural sphere (the first beyond the physical) is the natural
abiding place of those who represent the lowest degrees of
spiritual development. This does not necessarily mean the
lowest in point of intelligence. The distinction here suggested
is of the utmost importance, and would seem to justify the
following brief explanation:
Spiritual development does not consist of intellectual de-
velopment alone, although intelligence is a primary and funda-
mental element of it. Neither does it consist of moral devel-
opment alone, although morality is a basic and necessary prin-
ciple involved in it. Nor does it consist in the acquisition of
knowledge alone, although knowledge is an important and
indispensable ingredient of it.
The fact is that it involves all these elements with some-
thing added. The spiritual development of an individual is,
in truth, measured by the intelligence with which he applies
his knowledge to the accomplishment of moral purposes.
An individual may, therefore, possess a wealth of knowl-
edge which he does not intelligently apply to any purpose
whatever. Or he may possess the same knowledge and in-
telligently apply but a mere fraction of it to the accomplish-
ment of moral purposes. He may, in like manner, possess
vast knowledge and intelligently apply the whole o-f it to the
accomplishment of vicious and immoral purposes. In each of
these cases, even though he possesses great knowledge and
fine intelligence, he would nevertheless represent a low order
of spiritual development, and would gravitate to the spiritual
sphere corresponding thereto.
Thus, it will be seen that while intelligence, morality and
knowledge are all essential elements of spiritual growth and
development, it requires the three in relative combination in
the life of an individual to determine his spiritual gravity.
This will explain why it is that powerful intelligences,
through the degrading influence of vicious habits and evil
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 237
practices, may and often do gravitate to the lowest plane of
spiritual life. It will also suggest why it is that ignorance on
the one hand and indolence on the other serve as "sinkers" to
prevent many an otherwise qualified individual from rising
to higher and more exalted planes of spiritual life and being.
We are now in position to understand and appreciate the
fact above stated that the first sphere beyond that of the
physical is the natural and inevitable abiding place of the
ignorant, the indolent, the selfishly ambitious, the immoral,
the vicious and the depraved who have passed from this life.
But this, it will be remembered, is the sphere which lies
closest to earth and therefore nearest the plane of physical
life. This is a most important fact, for it means that in point
of locality, at least, man in the physical body is more closely
in touch with the spiritual world of ignorance, indolence, im-
morality and vice than he is with that of wisdom, virtue and
truth.
This is the great fundamental fact which mediums and
spiritualists generally appear to overlook and ignore. And
yet, it is the one fact of all facts which should stand as a
perpetual warning to all mankind against the practice of hyp-
notism, mediumship and all other subjective psychic pro-
cesses.
The experience of mediums themselves and the observa-
tions of every honest and intelligent student and investigator
of mediumistic phenomena all bear eloquent testimony con-
cerning the intellectual and moral status or level of the aver-
age spiritual control.
Indeed, the question has often been asked by intelligent
students of psychic phenomena why it is that the "departed
spirits" of American Indians constitute so large and impor-
tant a percentage of mediumistic controls. Neither mediums
nor spiritualists generally have thus far returned a satisfac-
tory answer. The problem, however, is a simple one to those
who understand the law of spiritual gravity above referred to.
The American Indian is essentially a "child of earth."
His intelligence, habits of life and standard of morality are
such that when he passes to the "Happy Hunting-Ground"
238 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the law of spiritual gravity binds him very closely to the
plane of physical nature. He finds himself among that vast
and innumerable multitude known to science as "earth-bound"
souls. He is thus, by the very law of his being, brought into
close touch and intimate relationship with men and women
upon the physical side of life.
He enters the spiritual life just as he leaves this life. He
is neither better nor worse for the change. He is neither wiser
nor more honest. He carries with him the same habits of
life, the same appetites, passions, desires, impulses, emotions,
ambitions and proclivities, with the same unrestrained will
to indulge them. Many of these he finds himself unable to
gratify upon the spiritual plane, because he is deprived of the
physical organism to which they were related and to which
alone they respond.
But he is not slow in learning the important fact that
through the power of hypnotism he may, by the exercise of
his indomitable will, gain control of the physical organism of
some physically embodied individual and through this as an
instrument find the means of partially gratifying the grosser
appetites, passions and desires of his nature. He therefore
finds him a "medium," to whom he attaches himself, and by
the power of his imperious will subjects to his domination
and control. Through the physical organism of his medium
he thus finds the channels through which to partially gratify
his lower nature. By means of a subtle fiction he appoints
himself as his medium's "spiritual guardian," and thus estab-
lishes a relation which is satisfactory to him, only in so far
as it enables him to gratify his own personal desires.
Again, the question is often asked by intelligent students,
why it is that the standard of intelligence and morality among
mediumistic controls is, on the average, so much lower than
that of the medium, and why they practice so much wilful
deception and deliberate dishonesty.
The answer (usually given by the controls themselves
through the lips of their mediums) is to the effect that they
are unable to use the organism of the medium with perfect
facility. Thus, they claim that the mind of the medium often
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 239
asserts itself, to a certain degree, and says things, or causes
them to say things, which they do not intend to say.
While this would appear to have an element of plausibility
in it, and seems to be acceptable to spiritualists generally,
it is nevertheless an ingenious falsehood invented for the ex-
press purpose of covering a deliberate fraud which the me-
dium would not tolerate if he knew it.
A significant fact bearing upon this phase of the subject
is that the controls never attempt to correct these falsehoods
of their own accord. They invariably wait until they are
caught in them and then attempt to shift the blame upon the
innocent and helpless medium who is entirely irresponsible.
This is both cowardly and unjust.
The correct answer to these important and searching ques-
tions is doubtless already anticipated. The coarse, the vulgar,
the licentious, the dishonest, the ignorant, the vicious, the
vainly ambitious and the immoral in general who pass from
this life, under the operation of the law of spiritual gravity,
find their immediate abiding place in the first spiritual sphere.
They are therefore .closely bound to the plane of physical
nature for the time being.
They find themselves still possessed of the same appetites,
passions, desires, habits, selfish ambitions and propensities in
which they were most intently absorbed while in the physical
body. Many of these they are unable to gratify from spirit-
ual nature alone. They find, however, that through the hyp-
notic process they are able to attach themselves to those yet
in the flesh. By so doing they are able to obtain partial grat-
ification of their evil passions and vicious habits through the
physical organisms of their subjects. For this purpose, and
this alone, they adopt the profession of spiritual controls.
They then proceed to locate mediums whom they can control,
and through these they educate others. By the aid of the
mediumistic process they are able to find partial gratification
of their grosser appetites, passions and desires.
But in order that they shall not unwittingly disclose their
real designs and thereby incur the hostility of their mediums,
they adopt the cunning pretense of unselfish devotion to the
240 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
cause of spiritualism. By this means they beguile their me-
diums into a willing submission and a ready co-operation. It
is not infrequently the case that more than one hundred spir-
itual controls thus use the same medium regularly to obtain
gratification of their various evil passions and selfish desires.
The world in general knows nothing whatever of this phase
of mediumship, save as the results are registered upon the
life of the medium. Even the medium himself is often de-
ceived as to the purpose, though fully aware of the harmful
results to himself. Like the patient martyr that he is, he ac-
cepts his degradation as a duty in the mistaken belief that
it is for the benefit of humanity.
A definite illustration will serve to develop the principle
more clearly:
A few years ago there lived in one of our western cities
a man well known to the writer, whom we will designate as
Col. B. He was a confirmed drunkard and likewise afflicted
with nearly all the vices that usually accompany that particu-
lar habit. He died, and the medical certificate read, "Chronic
Alcoholism."
At the time of his death, and for some years thereafter,
there lived in the same town a rising young merchant, who
will be designated as Mr. H. The latter knew Col. B. well
during his lifetime and had a great sympathy for him in his
depravity, although up to that time Mr. H. had never tasted
liquor in his life. Neither of these men knew anything about
mediumship and had no interest whatever in the lines of
psychical inquiry.
About three months after Col. B.'s death Mr. H. started
out from his place of business one morning, went directly to
one of the leading saloons of the city and began drinking and
carousing like a man who had been addicted to the habit for
years. After three days of debauchery he appeared at his
store and took up the line of his duties as if nothing had hap-
pened.
His friends who expostulated with him found, to their
great surprise, that he had no remembrance of the incident
whatever. The only thing he could recall was the fact that
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 241
while he stood behind the counter of his store on the morning
of his alleged fall, there suddenly appeared before him the
form of Col. B., whom he knew to be dead.
A few days later he started out in the same manner and
repeated his former three days* carouse. During this time the
writer saw him a number of times and questioned him closely.
He declared that he was not Mr. H. at all, but was Col. B.,
and that he was back among the boys having a good time, and
did not care to be bothered with silly questions.
These periodical relapses continued for several months,
during which time the writer obtained the following statement,
in substance, from Col. B. concerning his experiences upon the
spiritual side of life:
When he first wakened upon the spiritual plane he did not
know what had happened. He could not understand that he
was in another world. It took him some time to realize that
he was a spirit instead of a human being. This was all the
more difficult because he felt all the old appetites, passions
and desires of the flesh as keenly as before the transition.
When he came to know that there is no process by which
these purely physical demands can be satisfied by purely spir-
itual means, he began his search for some other method by
which to accomplish that result. He visited saloon after
saloon and there mingled as closely as possible with those who
were drinking and carousing. He found that the atmosphere
and magnetic conditions of the saloon and the drunkard had
a satisfying effect upon his condition. The more closely he
could approach the drunken man in the flesh the more di-
rectly he was able to absorb from him the stimulating effect
of the liquor he had drank.
This fact led him to the study and practice of mediumistic
control, in order that he might thereby be able to approach
more closely the plane of physical nature and obtain more
directly the desired results.
He then began his search for some one whom he could
control and use as an instrument through which to gratify
his insatiable craving for drink. Mr. H. proved to be that in-
dividual. He had compelled him to drink in order that
242 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
through the channels of his physical organism he might ab-
sorb some of the effects of liquor and thereby obtain partial
satisfaction of his craving appetite. He thus used him as
long as his physical organism would stand the strain. When
he had reached the limit of physical endurance he would re-
lease his victim for a time in order that he might regain his
physical vigor and thus be able again to undergo the same
ordeal.
Through a course of education and medical treatment both
parties were made to understand the principle involved and
the chain of relationship was ultimately broken. This was a
case of periodical obsession. Although an extreme case of
its kind, it nevertheless represents the principle and the pro-
cess involved in the largest number of cases of periodical
drunkenness. Such cases can be cured very readily when
properly understood. The treatment, however, is not cov-
ered by the materia medica of the recognized schools of medi-
cine.
In the largest number of instances the individual is at no
time so far controlled as to become entirely unconscious of
his environment or of his own acts. He is simply impelled
by a power which he cannot resist.
Whenever this semi-condition obtains it is just so much
more difficult for the spiritual intelligences to command the
forces necessary to effect the desired result.
Unless a medium is in full sympathy with the purposes
of his controls it becomes necessary for them to invent a cun-
ning fiction of some kind which shall overcome all opposition
on the part of the medium and if possible win his active co-
operation. The artfulness with which this is often accom-
plished is suggested by the following incident which came
under the writer's personal observation:
In 1892 a personal acquaintance of the writer, a Mr. W.,
was a successful business man of Chicago. He was a man
of fine intelligence, finished education, unimpeachable moral
character and a devoutly religious nature. Through the prac-
tice of asceticism and the introspective tendencies of an emo-
tional religious devotion, he gradually fell into a negative
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 243
condition of both mind and body. As a result he became ex-
tremely sensitive to his spiritual environment.
As often occurs under similar conditions, he at length be-
gan to hear a voice "from out the silence." It spoke to him,
called him by name, and told him that the voice he heard was
indeed the voice of the Son of God, the Lord Jesus Christ.
To him who had prayed to the Master daily for many years,
this seemed the most natural thing in the world. It came
as if it were a direct answer to prayer. It appealed to his
religious sense and satisfied his emotional desires.
But after the voice of the "Master" came other voices.
Those of Moses, Aaron, Elijah, Paul, Peter, John, Thomas,
Luke, Matthew, Mark, Joshua and many others of the proph-
ets, apostles, disciples and wise men of religious history be-
came familiar to him and conversed with him daily.
This all appealed to his sense of the "eternal fitness of
things," and was therefore accepted by him with absolute sin-
cerity and good faith as the truth and nothing but the truth.
He was thus taught to believe with all his heart that he was
the specially chosen instrument of God the Omnipotent for
the re-establishment of His kingdom upon earth.
He therefore left his business, gave up everything else
and submitted himself in perfect faith to the guidance of the
"Master," as he verily believed. Day and night he spent in
what to him was sacred communion with the mighty men of
old, as well as with God Himself. They told him many won-
derful things (concerning matters and things which were
quite beyond the possibility of his verification or disproof).
They unrolled to him the scroll of the heavens, as it were,
named the stars and the inhabited planets and gave him the
names of all the planetary rulers of the universe, with all of
which he became as familiar as with the names of his near-
est earthly friends and acquaintances. They opened to his
fevered imagination the great book of divine mysteries, and
thus kept his attention riveted and his interest transfixed.
But at length the strain began to tell upon him. He grew
physically weak and nervous and debilitated. He realized
that he was breaking under the continued tension. This was
244: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the moment for which his controls had patiently waited.
They told him the work they had for him to do was more
than his physical body could endure without stimulants. He
must therefore have liquor. He must drink and drink freely
in order that he might be able to endure the strain of the
mighty work before him. In the name of the "Master" he
was commanded to drink, but with the assurance that it was
only a sacramental service required of him in order that he
might do his appointed work, and thereby become worthy to
receive still more important secrets from the great storehouse
of universal wisdom. To him this was law. He began the
use of liquors as a sacramental stimulant. For three years
he did nothing but drink "to the glory of God" and listen to
the wonderful teachings of the "Master" and His chosen
people.
At the end of this time he was as pitiful an object as
human eyes ever beheld. Bloated to almost double his nor-
mal size, skin parched and fiery red with the fever of alcoholic
fire, eyes bloodshot, bleared and wild with an unnatural
agony, and yet with a faith unshaken and a soul ready for
the tortures of even a more terrible hell, if but the voice of
the "Master" should demand it.
Was this man insane? No. He was as far from insanity
as is the average physical scientist who denies the existence
of another life, or who, admitting the possibility of another
life, denies that the establishment of such a relation is a pos-
sibility. He was simply deceived as to the identity of the in-
telligences with whom he had come into personal communi-
cation, just as the scientist is deceived as to the possibility of
such an experience, or as the unsophisticated farmer is de-
ceived by the confidence man.
But why are this intelligent man and the physical scientist
both deceived concerning that which lies beyond the veil of
physical nature? Merely because neither is able to see behind
that veil. The spiritual sense of sight would enable both to
apprehend the truth and thus avoid deceptions.
But what of the eternal justice of all this? Why is an
innocent individual not protected against such horrible im-
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 245
positions? Are there not forces for good sufficiently potent
to prevent such seeming fraud and injustice?
There are perfectly consistent and scientific answers to all
these questions, as well as to all others which arise out of
the same subject matter. To enter upon their consideration
here, however, would take us far out of the line of this spe-
cific volume and only tend to obscure its vital purpose. This
is a subject, therefore, which is reserved for future consid-
eration.
Particular attention is called to the following special
points in this most interesting and pitiful case:
1. It will be observed that his controls approached him
through the spiritual sense of hearing alone. They did not
develop his spiritual sense of sight. Why? Because this
would have enabled him to detect the fraud they desired to
practice upon him. Those who are sufficiently interested in
the subject to follow the suggestion will find that this is one
of the most common as well as the most cunning tricks em-
ployed by mediumistic controls to deceive the medium and
avoid detection.
Had Mr. W. been able to see his controls, as the writer
was able to see them, he would have known at once that the
voice of the "Master" was, in fact, but the voice of an ex-
drunkard, who upon the physical plane of life had been a
prominent and brilliant lawyer, but who had fallen a victim to
the habit of drink, and had died in a delirium of drunkenness.
In the voice of "St. John" he would in like manner have
recognized that of an ex-physician of some note who had
died from the same cause. And the various prophets, apos-
tles, disciples and wise men would have been disclosed to
him as so many other like individuals who had passed to the
spirit life burdened with the weight of evil passions, appe-
tites, desires, habits, ambitions and propensities which they
had permitted to control them during their earthly lives. For
this reason the spiritual eyes of their victim were kept care-
fully and securely closed.
2. It will also be noted that they approached him along
the lines of least resistance, namely, his religious convictions
246 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
and personal vanity. Why? Because they understood the
overwhelming force of these elements of his nature. They
knew that if, through the subtle power of credulity, they
could impress him with the conviction that he was the spe-
cially chosen instrument of God for the accomplishment of
some great and exalted work, they could hold his interest and
command his willing and continued co-operation. Through
this course they could make him a willing instead of an un-
willing sacrifice. And their judgment was correct.
Nature, however, has her own peculiar way of redressing
the wrongs of the innocent and meting out condign punish-
ment to the guilty.
What has been said concerning the habit of drink may be
said with equal truth concerning every pernicious physical
appetite, passion, desire, habit, ambition and unrestrained in-
clination of human nature. To the exact extent they become
fixed and permanent demands upon the soul and govern the
lives and conduct of men in the physical body they are car-
ried into the spiritual life at physical death and must be con-
quered from that side of life if at all. Their satisfactions and
gratifications are sought from the spiritual plane in the man-
ner and for the purposes hereinbefore indicated. And thus
the sins of the father are, in truth, visited upon the children
to the third and fourth generations, and even beyond.
Numerous instances have come under the personal obser-
vation of the writer wherein the efforts of vicious and de-
graded spiritual intelligences, to gratify their licentious pas-
sions and animal desires, through the mediumistic process,
have resulted in the complete downfall of the medium. The
methods employed by spiritual controls along this particular
line are such as would horrify the most degraded and aban-
doned profligate of earth if he could but witness them. There
are no words in which to portray the hideous picture.
A simple suggestion, however, may not be deemed out of
place in this connection. It is a fact which has been fully
demonstrated by Natural Science, and may be easily verified
by physical science whenever it shall turn its attention to the
subject, that a very large percentage of prostitution, among
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 247
both men and women, is due to the pernicious interposition
of outside, spiritual intelligences. It is true that in every
instance the undeveloped possibilities are in the individual
himself. But if left alone to contend with them he might be
able to control his vicious tendencies and hold in check the
lawless impulses of his baser nature.
This, however, is subject matter in itself for an entire
volume. It is only suggested at this time as a fruitful field
which will amply reward the honest investigator and repay
the scientist and the psychologist alike for any labor they may
see fit to bestow in an honest effort to determine the facts and
discover a remedy.
It must not be inferred from the foregoing that medium-
ship is an institution established and maintained exclusively
by vicious spiritual intelligences for the sole purpose of en-
abling them to satiate their unconquered and unsatisfied appe-
tites, passions and desires of the flesh which they have car-
ried with them into the spiritual life. Neither must it be un-
derstood that all spiritual controls are criminally vicious and
wilfully dishonest. On the other hand, there are undoubtedly
spiritual intelligences who honestly believe they are doing a
great work and rendering to the world a valuable service
through the exercise of mediumistic control.
There are religious zealots and enthusiasts upon the spir-
itual side of life as well as here. They recognize the desir-
ability of educating the great world of humanity upon the
physical plane to a knowledge of the fact that physical death
is but the beginning of another life. Just so the great Chris-
tian Ministry of earth recognize the same thing and devote
their efforts to its accomplishment.
Mediumship opens a comparatively easy method of bring-
ing the two worlds within speaking distance of each other.
Spiritual controls who have this purpose only in view do not
consider that the mere matter of method is of vital signifi-
cance or importance. Mediumship is the easiest and in most
instances the only method or process known to those who
employ it. Many of these understand and fully recognize
248 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the destructive nature of the mediumistic process, but they
do not understand the remedy for it.
Moreover, to them the sacrifice of a few thousand mediums
annually seems a small thing as compared with the supposed
benefits to accrue to humanity in general therefrom. They
know that thousands of missionaries of earth are annually
suffering martyrdom to carry the cross of Christ into heathen-
dom. Why, then, should anyone seriously object if they add
a few more individuals to the number of candidates for can-
onization? This reasoning isn't bad. It is, in fact, fully up
to the logical level of much of the philosophy and religion
by which mankind is governed to-day all over the world. But
it is nevertheless all wrong just the same.
The unreasonableness of the medium's position will be
apparent if the matter is presented in a slightly different form.
Suppose, for instance, a band of Sioux Indians were liv-
ing upon a near-by reservation where they were perfectly free
to give expression to all the savagery and depravity of their
Indian natures. And suppose they were all professional hyp-
notists, how many of the men and women who are to-day
practicing mediumship would be willing to submit them-
selves to the domination and control of such a band, or of any
single member of it? It is safe to say, not one. Why? Be-
cause they understand enough of human nature to know that
any individual is in a much safer, healthier and altogether
better and more respectable condition and state of being while
in his own right mind and in the rightful possession of his
natural faculties, capacities and powers than he could pos-
sibly hope to be in the hands and under the absolute mental
domination and control of the wisest and best Indian on
earth.
But an Indian upon the spiritual plane is only an ex-human
Indian. He is identically the same intelligence, neither better
nor worse, neither wiser nor more honest. Why, then, should
we permit him to control us from the spiritual plane when we
would only run from such a proposition on earth?
Again, suppose an adjacent room is filled with people,
MEDIUMSHIP AND MARTYRDOM 249
some of whom are known to be of the most depraved and
vicious character. The proposition comes from the room in
a general way that among the number therein are several
individuals who will undertake to hypnotize anyone who will
submit himself to them for that purpose. How many people
now living would accept the invitation without first knowing
something of the character of the individual who is to do the
hypnotizing? It would be strange if one sane individual
in all the world could be found.
And yet this is precisely what every individual does who
sits for mediumistic development. He knows absolutely
nothing concerning the character, individuality, knowledge,
virtue, honesty, morality or purpose of a single intelligence
to whom he is submitting himself as a subject. He is offer-
ing himself, body and soul, to the veriest strangers without
even so much as an introduction, an inquiry or a credential
of any kind. And the most degrading part of it all is in the
fact that perhaps ninety-nine out of every one hundred of
those who would control him, if they could, are those with
whom upon earth he would have deemed it a lasting disgrace
to associate upon terms of equality, to say nothing of be-
coming their pliant and willing subject and tool.
It would seem almost inexplicable that this phase of me-
diumship, which is so apparent to every one who thinks,
should have made so slight and so indifferent an impression
upon the minds of those who are in position to understand
something of the nature of the mediumistic process and of
the subjective principle involved.
It may be accepted as an axiom of spiritual life that no
spiritual intelligence, to whatever sphere he may have at-
tained, from the first to the thirteenth, who has learned the
meaning and the results of the mediumistic process, and who
is honest, will ever subject any individual of earth to the
blighting influence of mediumistic control.
Whoever does so thereby convicts himself of either gross
ignorance, deliberate dishonesty or unconscionable immorality.
For whoever understands the true character of the medium-
250 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
istic process and the nature of its inevitable results knows
that it is but an expression of The Destructive Principle of
Nature in Individual Life, and that it leads ever and always to
THE WAY OF DEATH.
MEDIUMSHIP AND " AFFINITY " 251
CHAPTER XII.
MEDIUMSHIP AND "AFFINITY/*
Almost from the foundation of modern Spiritualism the
organization has been placed under the ban of suspicion be-
cause of its alleged or supposed advocacy of the doctrine of
"Freelove."
However unjust this charge may be when broadly applied
to the strict intent of the spiritualistic philosophy or to the
practices of those who represent the best intelligence among
progressive spiritualists, there is nevertheless a logical cause
for this cloud upon the moral status of spiritualism.
In the higher science and philosophy of life it is known
that there is a principle in Nature which impels every entity
to seek vibratory correspondence with another like entity of
opposite polarity. This principle has been known and recog-
nized under many different names. For instance, it is known
as the Law of Motion and Number, the Law of Vibration,
the Law of Polarity, the Law of Correspondences, the Law
of Natural Selection, the Law of Affinity, etc.
In Volume I of this Series, entitled "Harmonics of Evo-
lution," this principle of Nature is fully developed. It is
there traced from its lowest form of expression in the chem-
ical affinities of inorganic matter through the involuntary and
non-intelligent affinities of the vegetable kingdom upward
through the natural selections of the animal kingdom to the
Law of Individual Completion in the human kingdom. From
the atom to man it runs like an unbroken thread of purest gold
through all the evolutionary ascent of Nature. In the king-
dom of man it finds its highest and most perfect expression
in the indissoluble monogamic union of man and woman in
the perfect marriage relation.
This indissoluble monogamic union of man and woman
is at the farthest possible point of difference from the prin-
ciple involved in "Freelove." The two, in fact, represent as
diametrically opposite principles of life and conduct as it is
possible for the human mind to conceive. It would therefore
252 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
seem impossible that the one should ever be mistaken for the
other, or that human intelligence should be led into confusion
or uncertainty concerning their respective meanings. Such,
however, is the case.
Among the most powerful intelligences of the first spir-
itual sphere who are bound to earth by the weight of their
evil appetites, passions and desires, the law of affinity is
known far more generally than it is upon the physical plane.
Through the mouths of their innocent mediums so much of
the law is declared and so much of it suppressed or misrep-
resented as may be necessary to serve their evil purposes.
And thus the most sacred and beautiful law of life is often
tortured into a cunning and cruel sophistry which translates
itself to the world as moral laxity, promiscuity or "Freelove."
Why? In order that the medium may be thereby furnished a
reason and a motive for overruling his conscience and sur-
rendering his physical body to the lustful demands of his
controls.
The following illustration will serve to make the applica-
tion more apparent :
Some years ago an acquaintance of the writer, a lady of
unquestioned intelligence and moral character, became inter-
ested in the study of spiritualism. She was finally developed
into an excellent trance-speaking medium. Her controls, how-
ever, encouraged her to believe that under their domination
she might become a world-renowned "magnetic healer." They
held up before her the two most powerful motives or in-
centives possible in her case the love of humanity and the
gratification of vanity. She was led to believe that in the
capacity of a great "healer" she would be a blessing to hu-
manity and at the same time be able to gratify her vanity
through the lavish expenditure of unlimited wealth.
These proved sufficient motives and inspirations to com-
mand her willing and active co-operation. She advertised
herself to the world of suffering humanity according to the
usual methods, and soon succeeded in the establishment of a
large and lucrative practice. At first both men and women
were her patients, among whom a number of remarkable
MEDIUMSHIP AND " AFFINITY " 253
cures were soon reported. It shortly developed, however,
that her methods of treatment were offensive to her lady
patients. This became so pronounced that under the guid-
ance of her controls she ultimately confined her practice to
"gentlemen only." This was but the prelude to her complete
ruin.
Step by step she was led onward and downward by her
controls until her "magnetic treatments" became only an-
other name for the indulgence of the most depraved passions
of human nature. While under complete trance control she
delivered learned lectures to her patients on the subject of the
great law of "magnetic exchange," which her controls al-
leged was at the basis of all therapeutic processes.
Cunningly and with consummate skill it was developed
that the patient needed and must have the magnetism of his
medium, and the medium in turn needed and must have the
magnetism of the patient to sustain her in her work. This
was but an even exchange, and was demanded by the great
law of the "equilibrium of forces." Thence it was but a
natural step to develop the sophistry that the sex relation
was God's divinely appointed institution by and through
which to effect this "magnetic exchange."
As might be anticipated, the natural sequel of all this was
an abandoned exemplification of the doctrine of "Freelove."
By both precept and practice this medium, under the domi-
nation of her controls, became an exponent of that blighting
and destroying fallacy. As a perfectly natural result, spir-
itualism in general and spiritualists in particular were com-
pelled to share the burden of moral turpitude for which her
depraved and degenerate controls alone were responsible.
Leading spiritualists defended themselves against the
charge of "Freelove" upon the ground that the entire or-
ganization of spiritualism could not justly be held respon-
sible for the sophistries or the deliberate wickedness and de-
pravity of a few "bad mediums." Here again the innocent
and defenseless medium is made the scapegoat to carry the
sins of her false and vicious controls into the wilderness.
But there are all shades and degrees of control, and
254 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
therefore all shades and degrees of individual responsibility
and moral accountability on the part of the medium. It will
not be difficult, therefore, to understand that there are many
instances wherein the medium is particeps criminis and should
be held equally accountable with those who exert an influ-
ence upon him from the spiritual plane.
This is usually the case wherever the medium is consti-
tutionally of a strongly preponderating physical nature. In
proportion as this is true he surrenders himself to the medi-
umistic process, more especially to its degrading suggestions,
with diminished reluctance. In like proportion he loses not
only the power of self-control, but the desire to exercise it,
and as a result sinks to the level of his animal nature. The
check upon his physical appetites, passions and desires is re-
laxed. His unbridled physical nature is thus permitted to run
riot, and as a result spiritualism is made to carry the burden of
his moral obliquity.
The natural tendency of the mediumistic process is toward
animalism. A considerable number of the more intelligent
advocates of modern spiritualism already recognize this fact.
Inasmuch, however, as they are unable to suggest a remedy,
they have become more or less inclined to accept the fact
as a "necessary evil."
The large amount of attention given by spiritualists to the
idea and the theme of "affinities" is the most natural thing
in the world. Love and the individual love relation of man
and woman are, after all, the very basis of life and living.
They are fundamental principles of Nature. They are of uni-
versal interest. The individual relation of man and woman
is, in fact, the secret spring of individual action. It is the
very foundation of individual happiness as well as of indi-
vidual misery.
Very naturally, then, among the first results of "spirit
communication" are inquiry on one side and explanations
from the other concerning this most important relation and
principle. Very naturally, also, those who are alone, un-
happy, mismated and miserable seek for some hope of ulti-
mate release and ultimate satisfaction. It is therefore but
MEDIUMSHIP AND "AFFINITY" 255
natural that the dissatisfied and the unhappy, as well as the
weak, the foolish and the vicious, are misled by the confused
reports and deliberate misrepresentations of their "spirit
guides." Under all the conditions which obtain the matter
of surprise is not that so many but rather that so few have
been thus misled.
So long as spiritualism gives its sanction to the medium-
istic process as the corner-stone of its superstructure, just so
long will it be compelled to defend itself against the charge
of promiscuity, moral laxity and "Freelove."
Whenever, if at all, it shall abandon the subjective process
of mediumship and plant itself squarely, firmly and unequivo-
cally upon the fundamental principle of independent, spiritual
self-development, the day of its trials shall cease, but not be-
fore.
Have leading spiritualists the intelligence and the cour-
age to take this step and the perseverance to maintain it?
256 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER XIII.
MEDIUMSHIP AND EMOTIONALISM.
Emotionalism is an open door to mediumship.
Intense emotion produces paralysis of the will.
Paralysis of the will, from whatever cause, involves a
psychically negative state or condition of the intelligence.
Whatever produces in the individual a psychically nega-
tive state or condition opens the door to mediumistic control.
The rationale of this proposition is easily understood in
the light of our present knowledge of the nature and results
of the mediumistic process and the operations of our emo-
tional natures.
For the sake of clearness, however, it may be well to un-
derstand in advance what is an emotion and what are the
principal elements of which it is composed.
Webster defines the term as "A state of excited feeling
of any kind," or "The excited action of some inward suscep-
tibility or feeling."
While these definitions do not give us a final analysis of
the metaphysical process involved, they are nevertheless suf-
ficiently accurate and lucid, as far as they go, to develop the
central principle with which we are chiefly concerned at this
time.
As indicated by the authority quoted, the fundamental
basis of all emotion is "feeling." That is to say, the emotion
itself is in no sense an intellectual process, although experi-
enced by an intelligent being. We unconsciously recognize
the truth of this by the manner in which we verbally express
our emotions. For instance, it is perfectly natural as well as
accurate to say, "I feel angry. I feel sorry. I feel happy. I
feel glad. I feel a sense of fear or dread," etc.
That is to say, we feel all these various emotions. They
translate themselves to our intelligence as feeling and not as
intellection. And thus it is that the emotional nature of man
is within the realm of individual feeling. Emotionalism is
therefore confined entirely to the sensuous plane of individual
MEDIUMSHIP AND EMOTIONALISM 257
life. It lies upon a plane entirely distinct from that of the
purely intellectual or rational processes.
We feel things whether we will or not. In other words,
our emotional natures act quite independently of our intelli-
gence or reason. It is true that after an emotion has been
excited or set in motion we may by the exercise of will con-
trol it, but the exciting cause is entirely involuntary. When
an emotion has been once brought into existence it is then a
contest between it and the intelligent will of the individual
for supremacy. If the will succeeds in controlling the emo-
tion the intelligence maintains its positive status or condi-
tion. If the emotion controls the will the intelligence thereby
falls into a negative or passive state. The extent to which
our emotions control us at any given time determines the
measure to which they produce in us a psychically negative
or passive condition.
An illustration will serve to bring the principle more
clearly to view. Let us suppose, for instance, that a mother
is informed of the death of her child. Instantly the emotion
of deepest sorrow takes possession of her. If she but yield
to its power it will overcome and completely master her. If,
on the other hand, she exercise her power of will upon it,
she may control its violence and ultimately master it.
In this instance it is clear that the excitant or cause of her
emotion is wholly involuntary on her part. The emotion of
sorrow takes possession of her without even so much as con-
sulting her intelligence, will or desire. But after it has come
into active existence within her emotional nature, it is then
possible for her to apply to it the power of her will and in-
telligence and thus control it. On the other hand, she may
fail or refuse to exercise her will upon it, in which event the
emotion will completely master her.
It is a frequent occurrence in medical practice to find an
individual in a state of hysteria as the result of unrestrained
or uncontrolled emotions. It may be the result of sorrow, or
anger, or fear, or excessive joy. It matters not what the par-
ticular emotion may be, whether of the most exalting or the
most debasing character, if the individual but yield to its in-
258 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
fluence it will ultimately control every faculty, capacity and
power of the soul, including the power of will.
On the other hand, we have all seen both men and women
in the midst of deepest sorrow and affliction who, by the in-
telligent exercise of the power of will alone, have passed
through the trying ordeal with a self-control which never
fails to command our unlimited admiration and respect.
In the latter case the individual controls his emotions; in
the former he is controlled by them.
It is now possible to understand that while an emotion is
the result of an active state of feeling, it does not necessarily
mean an active state of intelligence. Indeed, it is possible
to understand that it may involve an inactive or passive con-
dition of the mind or intelligence. This is suggested by the
well-known fact that animals experience all the simple emo-
tions common to mankind.
In its final analysis emotionalism is the result of sensu-
ous activity and intellectual passivity. The intensity of the
emotion measures the degree of sensuous activity. In pro-
portion as the sensuous activity increases the intelligence be-
comes passive.
It is a fact of Natural Science which every individual has
already demonstrated many times and may do so again as
often as he so desires, that in proportion as we permit our
emotions to control us we thereby surrender the power of self-
control. And, on the other hand, in proportion as we con-
trol our emotions we preserve intact the power of self-control.
The specific point of first importance to be observed and
held in mind is the fact that emotionalism paralyzes the will
and thereby the power of self-control. Emotionalism there-
fore removes from the pathway of both the hypnotist and the
spiritual control the one most important obstacle in the way
of their success, namely, the active and intelligent power of
will. By so doing it opens the way to either hypnotic or me-
diumistic control.
Inasmuch as the power of self-control is at the basis of
individual responsibility, it is of the most serious importance
to understand and appreciate the fact that in proportion as
MEDIUMSHIP AND EMOTIONALISM 259
we are under the control of our emotional natures at any
given time we are to that extent in a state or condition of
irresponsibility.
But individual responsibility is the basis of morality.
That which deprives us of our individual responsibility is
therefore inimical to the moral status of both the individual
and society. It follows with irresistible logic that emotion-
alism is not only a question of science, but that it is an ethical
problem as well.
This brings us naturally to the specific subject of religious
emotionalism. Almost from the time of John Wesley, the
founder of what is known as Wesleyan Methodism, this has
been a mooted question within the body of the Methodist
Episcopal Church. With comparatively few exceptions, other
religious organizations, especially those denominated Chris-
tian, seem to recognize the fact that ultra emotionalism in re-
ligious work and service is inimical to the best interests of
both the individual and the church.
It is true that their reasons do not always appear to be
very well or clearly defined. In many instances, in fact, the
opposition to ultra religious emotionalism appears to be much
more a matter of intuition than that of reason. To such, how-
ever, as view the subject from this standpoint it may be of
interest and possible value to know that science fully sustains
their objections to that form of emotionalism in religious
service specifically covered by the term "Revivalism."
Lest there be some whose understanding of this term dif-
fers from the meaning here attached to it, the following brief
account of a "religious revival" will serve to more clearly
define the term as it is here employed.
Some years ago the writer attended a revival service of
the character here referred to. It was conducted by one of
the most eloquent and enthusiastic revivalists of the country.
From the results of his work it would appear that he pos-
sessed the ability to play upon all the strings of emotional
human nature at will. His stock of pathetic stories seemed
inexhaustible, and the manner in which he employed them as
260 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
fuel to warm up the emotional sympathies of his hearers was
both dramatic and artistic as well as highly entertaining.
A "mourners' bench" was provided in the foreground,
where "sinsick" souls were urged to go and kneel for prayer.
Those who went were supposed to be "under conviction."
These constituted the specific storm center of interest and
effort. The special purpose was to carry them to the point
of "conversion." This was the goal toward which all effort
tended.
A choir of sympathetic voices sang and chanted pathetic
hymns, and all things combined to excite religious enthusiasm
and emotional fervor.
The revivalist preached, then prayed, then exhorted, then
told pathetic stories. The choir sang. Then followed more
preaching, praying and exhortation, with more pathetic sto-
ries and songs. This continued with an ever-increasing en-
thusiasm, until the atmosphere seemed to vibrate with intense
emotion.
Gradually men and women began to give way to their
emotions. One after another they found their way to the
"mourners' bench," where they knelt to pray and mourn over
their sins. In the midst of prayers and songs and exhorta-
tions and agonizing groans and ecstatic shouts they worked
themselves and each other, and were worked, into a state of
emotional frenzy.
When, through the effects of emotional subjectivity, an
individual felt himself distinctly in touch with the spiritual
plane of intelligence, he sprang to his feet and proclaimed
in ecstatic shouts that he was "saved." Or, in some instances,
the individual fell prostrate upon the floor in a condition of
trance. In this event he was removed and cared for by those
whose intelligence was still intact.
Through the process of emotional subjectivity many were
thus brought into direct contact with the spiritual plane.
They were thus conscious of definite spiritual experiences.
For the time being they felt that they were in the atmosphere
of another world, and so they were. This to them meant
"salvation." All their effort had been to receive some "sign"
MEDIUMSHIP AND EMOTIONALISM 261
which should be to them a token that their sins had been for-
given. This touch with the spiritual world answered to them
as the "sign" for which they had labored and suffered. It
therefore had but one meaning. It was the tangible and there-
fore unmistakable evidence of "salvation." It could mean
nothing else. And thus, "many were brought to Christ," and
the revival was deemed a great success.
Those who assume to assert that the experiences of these
good people are but the results of imagination are grievously
mistaken. Their experiences are genuine. Not only this, they
are spiritual experiences. The fact that they are interpreted
by the individuals as direct communications from God is not
to be wondered at. This is precisely what anyone else would
do under the same conditions. Many are thus "converted,"
and many more receive what to them is "sanctification" or the
"second blessing."
Now and then during these emotional cataclysms an indi-
vidual is subjected to complete trance control. Such cases,
however, are usually pronounced "emotional insanity" or "re-
ligious insanity" or "religious mania," and the individual is
sent to an asylum for the insane. It is a matter of astonish-
ment to those who have followed the subject to know how
few of this class ever fully recover.
Within the last few months an authentic instance is re-
ported from a neighboring state where almost an entire com-
munity was thrown into a state of emotional religious frenzy
as a result of just such a revival as above referred to. Three of
the leaders were officially pronounced insane and committed
to the asylum, while many others were temporarily non
compos.
A contemporaneous report also comes from a neighboring
country to the effect that an entire colony, numbering into
the thousands, has very recently fallen under the spell of a
peculiar religious emotionalism which has resulted in a prac-
tical dethronement of reason.
Religious revivalism of the character here referred to is
but an Americanized version of the Indian Sun Dance. Those
who participate in this religious dance pursue but a slightly
262 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
different method of reaching the same result. They follow
their own peculiar method of working themselves into a state
of emotional subjectivity. While in this state many a savage
Indian has come into direct and conscious touch with the
great braves of the tribe who have gone to the "Happy Hunt-
ing Ground." To such it is a spiritual reunion. It means
to them all that the religious revival means to those who par-
ticipate in it.
The dance of the Dervishes is but the same thing in a still
more primitive and barbaric form. This dance only illustrates
their own peculiar method of reaching the same state of emo-
tional subjectivity.
It was the writer's privilege recently to spend a week in
the company of a prominent Methodist revivalist of the East,
who is well-known from one end of the country to the other
as a man who possesses "the power" to an unusual degree.
During the course of the acquaintance, in response to a line
of inquiry, he stated that he seldom made any definite or
special preparation for his meetings. He had found that he
seemed to do better work when he trusted entirely to "the
inspiration of the moment." It was his custom to enter upon
a revival meeting with just one central purpose, and that was
to "Work 'em up, work 'em up, and keep right on working
'em up," until he got them to "climbing over each other to
get to the mourners' bench."
With much enjoyable enthusiasm he recounted an instance
wherein he succeeded in rousing his hearers to such a pitch
of emotional enthusiasm that as many as twenty or more
fell in convulsions during a single service and had to be re-
moved from the room. With the light of a splendid enthus-
iasm burning in his eyes, as he recalled the incident, and his
face aglow with the memory of it, he washed his hands in
imaginary water and repeated over and over : "My, but it was
fun !"
Upon being asked what was the most difficult problem
with which he had to deal in his religious work, he replied,
with a twinkle of humor, "To make 'em stick." He aftei*
ward explained the meaning of this quaint phrase by stating
MEDIUMSHIP AND EMOTIONALISM 263
that soon after the close of each revival season even the most
ardent religious enthusiasts began to grow cold and indiffer-
ent, and within a few weeks were in the same lethargic state
of religious coma as before. When the revival season came
on again and he returned to them, he found it necessary to
begin all over again and "work 'em up" from the beginning.
It seemed a marvelous and inexplicable thing to him that
he could not "make 'em stick." Many of them had even com-
plained to him that they had never been able to feel the
"power" except in the midst of the revival services. From
the hour the meeting closed they could no longer feel the
wonderful "thrill" of the "Divine Presence." It was to them
just as if God had left when the minister departed.
To one who is able at will to view a revival service from
the spiritual plane as well as from the physical, these per-
plexing questions are all fully and rationally answered.
There are within the first spiritual sphere vast multitudes
of spiritual intelligences who actively participate from the
spiritual plane in these revival services. Many of these are
religious fanatics who have carried their religious enthusiasm
with them into the spiritual life. After the natural period of
adjustment to the new condition of things they take up the
lines of religious work there with the same enthusiasm as
here. They find a character of sensuous satisfaction in the
magnetic conditions which result from these revival services.
From the spiritual plane they supplement the work of the
minister as far as possible. Whenever and wherever they
find it possible to do so they bring to those who are upon the
earth plane definite psychical experiences. It is these and
such as these who furnish the "power" which is so distinctly
felt by many of the most emotional workers from the physical
plane.
Then again, in addition to these religious devotees upon
the spiritual plane there are also vast multitudes of "earth-
bound" spirits who find a wholly different and much less
worthy character of satisfaction in these revival meetings.
Through the negative condition of intense emotionalism
these often find it possible to ride into the consciousness of
THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the sinner "under conviction," as it were, and take complete
control of all his intelligent faculties, capacities and powers.
In such instances the unfortunate individual is generally pro-
nounced insane and sent to an insane asylum, from which
statistics show that comparatively few escape.
When the meeting closes and the revivalist goes to another
field of labor his spiritual helpers accompany him. And thus*
it is that their influence is no longer felt by those who are
left behind. This is why it is that to many an earnest soul
it appears that God leaves when the revivalist goes away.
This is why it is that the revivalist finds it impossible to
"make 'em stick." This is the solution of the mystery of
"backsliding." This is the reason it becomes necessary to
"work 'em up" each time from the beginning. This also ex-
plains why it is that many a troubled soul is unable to feel
the "thrill" of the "Divine Presence" except when the revival
is on. To feel good is one thing. To be good or do good
is quite another.
It not infrequently occurs that those upon the earth plane
who have been most successful in reaching a state of emo-
tional subjectivity are left unprotected upon the spiritual
plane when the revivalist and his helpers pass to other fields of
labor. In such instances it almost invariably follows that evil
spirits take the place of the helpers and gradually obtain com-
plete control of the individual. The result is some form of
insanity or religious mania, often ending in murder, suicide,
or a formal commitment to an insane asylum.
The magnetic conditions which accompany the religious
revival closely resemble those of the spiritualistic seance.
They are such as to enable the spiritual workers to approach
very closely the plane of physical nature and exert their in-
fluence with more or less directness upon those in the physical
body. There is, however, one essential difference. In the
spiritual seance those upon the physical plane understand with
some degree of accuracy the specific purpose of the meeting.
They therefore more or less intelligently supplement the soir-
itual intelligences in their efforts to develop mediumistic con-
trol.
MEDIUMSHIP AND EMOTIONALISM 265
In the religious revival this is not true to the same ex-
tent. Few, if any, of the members of the church know that
the "power" they feel and recognize is the result of spiritual
intelligences working upon them by and through the magnetic
conditions which surround them. Most, if not all of them,
attribute the "power" to nothing else than God himself.
Few, if any of them, understand that intense emo-
tionalism produces paralysis of the will and thereby
a psychically negative condition. They work upon
each other's emotional natures without definite pur-
pose. They only know that this, in course of time and
persistent effort, will produce a condition of emotional ecstasy
which, during the period of its transcendency, puts them in
touch with the spiritual world. To them this spiritual touch
is the "Divine Presence." This is the religion of feeling.
A few years ago the writer attended a series of revival
services under the direction of the Rev. Dr. D., at that time
a prominent and successful revivalist. One evening in the
midst of the service the writer very unexpectedly found him-
self the central object of a most earnest exhortation by the
minister ably supplemented by a number of his leading co-
workers. After an hour of most interesting and pleasant
discussion the Rev. Dr. closed the incident with an invitation
to call upon him the following afternoon at his study to listen
to the narration of what he evidently regarded as a most
unusual and wonderful personal experience. The invitation
was cordially accepted and at the appointed hour the writer
found himself closeted with the good man alone in his study.
In the course of the talk which followed the minister
narrated the following experience which he evidently hoped
and expected would carry conviction with it and win for him
a new convert to the Faith.
It was his custom before each regular service to spend half
an hour alone in his study in silent prayer. It had recently
come to be that whenever he thus knelt in prayer the room
would soon be filled with "angels" who gathered about him
in solemn service and gave him their benediction. Follow-
ing this, when he entered the pulpit and began to preach, he
266 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
had come to be fully conscious of the personal presence of
Christ, who always stood just back of him and slightly to his
right.
In reply to questions concerning these experiences he
stated that on one or two occasions he had been able to see
the "angels" very distinctly as they gathered about him and at
times could even hear their words. But he had never looked
into their faces for the reason that the experience was to him
too sacred to admit of any exhibition of curiosity on his part.
He had been able to note the fact, however, that, so far as he
had observed, they appeared to be much like men and women
upon the physical plane, except that they were always in white
robes and seemed to bring with them a luminous atmosphere.
During his sermons and exhortations, while fully con-
scious of the presence of Christ, he had never seen him dis-
tinctly for the reason that the "Master" always stood some-
what back of him. He had, however, on a number of occa-
sions seen the folds of his flowing white robe and had dis-
tinctly felt the touch of his hand upon his shoulder. On a
number of occasions he had also found himself preaching
upon a topic wholly foreign to his intentions and repeating
words which were impressed upon him by the "Master," as
if they were his own.
When the subject had been carried to a point where it
seemed possible and expedient to do so, the writer confessed
that he too had seen the "angels" even during the course of
their then conversation, and that during the services of the
preceding evening he had distinctly seen the spiritual indi-
vidual who stood back of him in the pulpit, and that from his
own personal observation he was fully convinced that the
white-robed individuals who came to him in prayer were only
ex-human beings, some of whom the minister had known upon
the earth plane in other days as relatives and friends.
The writer further stated that the individual whom the
Rev. Dr. had supposed to be Christ was none other than an
ex-human minister of the Gospel whom the Dr. had at one
time known upon the physical plane. It was then suggested
that he might be able to verify these statements by a personal
MEDIUMSHIP AND EMOTIONALISM 267
inspection, if he cared to do so, and deemed it a matter of
sufficient importance to command his attention.
It would seem that this suggestion had left its impression,
for the following afternoon when the writer again called upon
him by appointment he found the good Dr. deeply troubled.
He had looked into the faces of his "angel" friends and had
found that one of them was his own father, another his
brother, and that among the number were other relatives and
former friends whom he had known during their sojourn
upon earth. He had also turned from his pulpit and suddenly
looked into the face of the "Master" and had found to his
amazement that he too was only an ex-human friend of other
years.
This particular incident has its value in that it illustrates,
among other things, the following specific points of interest:
1. Every religious devotee who has come into conscious
touch with the world of spiritual nature, regardless of sect,
creed or denomination, naturally endeavors to fit his psychic
experiences to his then existing religious beliefs and convic-
tions.
2. His preconceived religious ideas, therefore, unwittingly
color all his psychic experiences with the peculiar tinge of his
particular religious faith.
3. To the extent that this is true he is not in position to
accurately understand or interpret the meaning of his reli-
gious experiences.
4. It is a fact well known to Natural Science that there
are psychics in various degrees of development among all the
different religious organizations.
5. The earnest and enthusiastic revivalist, through the
process of emotional subjectivity, not infrequently comes
into conscious touch with the spiritual plane.
6. Unless his spiritual experiences are of an unusually
vivid and definite character he is able without difficulty to so
interpret them as to conform with his preconceived ideas and
religious beliefs.
An interesting and fruitful study of emotionalism is also
to be found in the negro race. It is a fact known to science
268 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
and fully recognized by the world in general, that among all
the different races the negro represents the most emotional
type of human nature. His life, habits, customs and char-
acter all combine to express emotional feeling. He lives al-
most entirely upon the plane of the senses. Naturally, there-
fore, the negro in his native element is the intellectual infant
of humanity.
Nothing, perhaps, more peculiarly illustrates these pre-
dominating characteristics of the race than the old fashioned
negro revival. They throw themselves into these services
with an emotional abandon which carries everything before
it. They appear to fairly revel in the sensuous pleasure it
affords them. Their religion is to them very largely a mat-
ter of feeling. Even the music which best expresses their
character and state of being is a sort of religious "rag-time,"
having a rhythm and a swing which act as a powerful emo-
tional excitant.
It is a matter of interest in this connection to note the
characteristic difference between the negro and the Ameri-
can Indian. The ruling characteristic of the negro is emo-
tionalism. He has never tried to control it. It is everywhere
and at all times at the very surface of his nature and ready
to demand expression. For this reason the negro finds it not
only easy but perfectly natural to fall into a state of emotional
subjectivity. An hour of religious emotionalism is sufficient
to carry an entire negro camp meeting to the verge of hys-
teria, if not to a state of complete trance.
The ruling characteristic of the American Indian, on the
other hand, is his indomitable will. He has cultivated this
with even greater care and persistence than the negro has cul-
tivated emotionalism. His own emotional nature is under the
absolute control of his will. As might be expected, he finds
it much more difficult to produce in himself the condition of
subjectivity necessary to reach the plane of psychic experi-
ences. His religious dance is a complete verification of this
fact. He usually prepares for it with fasting and solitude. He
proceeds to the task deliberately and methodically. He begins
with slow and measured tread and for hours, often days,
MEDIUMSHIP AND EMOTIONALISM 269
without ceasing goes on and on with an ever ascending scale
of enthusiasm until at last physical nature is completely ex-
hausted and he finds himself in touch with the spiritual plane,
whereupon he falls into a state of trance. Then it is that he
communes with the spirit braves of his tribe.
In perfect harmony with their characteristic natures it is
found that the negro race is the most susceptible to the hyp-
notic process while the Indian is among the least so.
With perfect consistency it is also found that the animal
which has not yet risen to the plane of intellectuality is nev-
ertheless an intensely emotional being. He lives entirely upon
the plane of the senses. In his emotional nature he approaches
very closely the level of human nature. He experiences with
intensity the emotions of jealousy, affection, anger, fear, joy,
and sorrow, and he gives instant and unrestrained expression
to his emotional nature only because he does not possess the
power of reason.
There is never a time when men and women so much re-
semble the animal as when they give unrestrained expression
to ultra emotionalism. Why? Because then it is that they
manifest the least reason and the most feeling. In propor-
tion as an individual lives upon the plane of his sensuous na-
ture he gives expression to his animal nature. In proportion
as he lives upon the plane of his intelligence he manifests his
distinctively human nature.
It is therefore a fact of Nature that unrestrained emotion-
alism, like mediumship and hypnotism and for the same rea-
son tends toward animalism. This is a scientific fact from
which there is no escape.
Nota bene.
270 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER XIV.
MEDIUMS AND THEIR MOTIVES.
From the standpoint of the actor the moral quality of
every act of an intelligent individual must be measured by the
motive which prompts it.
Measuring the subject of mediumship from the standpoint
of the medium, therefore, it is only fair that each individual
medium should be given credit for whatever worthy motives
inspire him in his mediumship and charged with only those
which are manifestly unworthy.
Measured by their motives and intentions alone mediums
naturally divide themselves into three distinct and separate
classes, as follows :
1. Those whose motives and intentions are good.
2. Those whose motives and intentions are indifferent.
3. Those whose motives and intentions are bad.
Let it be remembered that the actual results accomplished
do not necessarily correspond with the motives and inten-
tions of the medium in any case. Results, therefore, cannot
be taken as an index of the motives which inspire them. It is
especially necessary to bear this in mind so that the ethics of
the subject may not be lost sight of.
Among those mediums whose motives and intentions are
admittedly good, are:
1. The religious medium.
2. The melancholy medium.
3. The student medium.
4. The healing medium.
The religious medium, like the religious minister, verily
believes that he is divinely called to do an important work
among men. His mission is to preach and teach the gospel
of truth as he sees it and understands it. His confidence in
the integrity and the wisdom of his spiritual guides and con-
trols is as implicit as that of the minister in his God. and, as
a general rule, far more definite and intelligent.
If he receives money for his ministrations he does no more
MEDIUMS AND THEIR MOTIVES 271
than the teachers of other religions. Even the most humble
and devout minister of Christ, the Master whose personal ex-
ample would condemn such a practice, preaches and teaches
for money. He does this upon the theory that "The laborer
is worthy of his hire." He must live. He cannot devote his
life to preaching the gospel, even the gospel of Christ, if he
must in other ways earn the money necessary to provide for
his physical necessities.
The same is literally true with the medium, but with added
emphasis. His mediumship absorbs his time. It saps his
physical and mental vitality. It unfits him in every way for
earning by other methods the means which his physical ne-
cessities demand. The fact, therefore, that he receives a money
consideration for the labor he bestows upon the world must
not be counted against him any more than it is counted against
the Christian minister. The two stand upon precisely the
same ethical platform in this regard. If it is admissible under
any conditions or circumstances whatever to receive material
dollars in return for spiritual dogmas and doctrines, then it
is as proper for the medium to do so, as it is for the minister.
The melancholy medium has but one motive. He desires
to be reunited with the loved ones who have descended ahead
of him into the valley of the shadow and have passed from his
physical vision. The impelling motive is love, the highest and
noblest activity of the soul. It is the one motive of all mo-
tives which commends itself to every intelligent man and wo-
man. Inspired by the hope of bridging the dark gulf which
separates the average mortal from the absent loved ones, many
an honest man and woman have submitted to the mediumistic
process with no thought of its possible danger or harmful-
ness or immorality.
The student medium is in search of knowledge. He de-
votes himself to the practice of mediumship in order that he
may acquire it. There is not so much of the altruistic in his
motives and intentions as there is in those of the religious me-
dium. But we all recognize the value of knowledge, even
though the purpose which inspires the search for it may be
more or less tinged with selfishness.
272 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
The student medium honestly believes that he is pursuing
a legitimate and proper method of acquiring the knowledge
he most desires. He believes that he is justly entitled to
whatever he can thus obtain. He therefore stands upon the
ethical platform with the physical scientist who delves into the
mysteries of nature solely for the satisfaction it af-
fords him individually. His position, however, is per-
haps more nearly identical with that of the metaphysi-
cal student. Both of these are in search of spirit-
ual truth. Each pursues his own particular method of
obtaining it, but the object sought is the same, knowledge.
No one thinks of condemning the metaphysical student, be-
cause it is known that he is in search of knowledge. But so
is the student medium. If we are to judge men solely by
their motives and intentions why should we condemn the one
and not the other? This is a question for the metaphysi-
cian.
The healing medium occupies a somewhat different posi-
tion. He is led by his controls to believe that he possesses
great healing powers which he is under obligation to devote
to the interests of humanity. By a sort of compact between
him and his controls he surrenders himself as an instrument
in their hands for healing purposes in return for the services
they render him in a financial way. It is a species of bar-
gain and sale which is recognized by most men and women as
entirely legitimate. From the standpoint of motive alone,
quite aside from the question of the principle and the process
involved, we are therefore not in position to condemn the heal-
ing medium any more than we are the Christian Scientist or
the metaphysical healer.
It must not be forgotten, however, that in all these in-
stances we are always compelled to consider the results to both
the individual and society. Therefore, in the final analysis
of mediumship and the mediumistic process we cannot stop
with the motives and intentions of the medium any more than
we can with those of the anarchist who assassinates the presi-
dent of a great nation under the mistaken conviction that he is
thereby rendering a great and valuable service to society. The
MEDIUMS AND THEIR MOTIVES 273
final tribunal to which all these questions must be submitted
for ethical judgment must take into account not only the mo-
tives and intentions of the individual, but his rights, duties
and obligations as well, both to himself and to society of which
he is an integral part.
Among those mediums whose motives and intentions are
neither good nor bad, but more properly designated as in-
different, the following classes are most conspicuous:
1. The curiosity seeker.
2. The entertainer.
There are a good many mediums who become such solely
because of their desire to satisfy their sense of curiosity con-
cerning mediumistic phenomena. After this has been sat-
isfied their interest in the subject ceases. They have in their
minds neither good nor evil, and think little or nothing of the
results to either themselves or others.
There are many others who submit themselves to the me-
diumistic process solely for the pleasure it affords their friends.
By this method they become successful entertainers and
thereby gratify a certain sense of vanity which is not at all un-
common among both men and women. The motive, therefore,
is more or less complex in its essential nature, but when an-
alyzed carefully, defines itself as neither essentially good nor
essentially bad.
Since there is little, if anything, to condemn and practi-
cally nothing to commend in the motives of these two classes
of mediums, it seems both consistent and proper to classify
them among those whose motives and intentions are indif-
ferent.
Those mediums whose motives and intentions are unques-
tionably bad naturally group themselves as follows:
i. The business medium.
2,. The ambitious medium.
3. The vicious medium.
4. The fakir medium.
In the first and fourth classes here mentioned the impelling
motive is money, in the second power and popularity, and in
the third self -gratification and conquest. The first and fourth,
274 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
therefore, stand for the gratification of greed, the second for
the gratification of vanity, and the third for the gratification
of all the baser appetites, evil passions and criminal desires
of degenerate human nature.
Those who are at all familiar with the subject will be able
to identify among their mediumistic acquaintances one or
more representatives of these various classes.
The business medium flourishes in great abundance in all
the large cities of the country. His advertisements are found
in all the leading metropolitan journals. They are, for the
most part, as false as it is possible to frame falsehoods in hu-
man language. The following extracts taken at random from
one of the leading Chicago journals will give some slight im-
pression of the depths of moral turpitude to which the aver-
age professional business medium is ready to descend in his
greed for money.
"Hundreds turned away! Doubters awe-stricken! Your life an
open book! Wonderful gifts! Extraordinary clairvoyant powers com-
bined with superior knowledge of occult forces. Tells you names of
your friends and enemies, who is true and who is false. Who you
are, your name, age, occupation, where you live, the number of your
house, and street you live on. Settles lovers' quarrels, reunites the sep-
arated. Causes a speedy and happy marriage with the one of your
choice. The earth reveals to him her hidden treasures. He locates
mines, removes evil influences, locates buried treasures, settles old es-
tates that time has placed beyond the lawyers' shrewdness, makes you
successful in business, restores lost affections, locates lost friends.
Pretenders copy his advertisements! Beware of FRAUDS! Consult
ONLY THE BEST! $5 READINGS FOR $i ! !"
The great marvel of it all lies in the fact that such un-
masked and manifest perfidy should be able to find sufficient
credulity among the average human intelligence to pay the
advertiser for his time, trouble and advertising.
Every man and woman with sufficient intelligence to seek
shelter when it rains knows that if any one of these wonder-
workers were able to discover "the hidden treasures of earth,"
or could successfully "locate mines," he would be selling $i
shares of mining stock at $5 each, instead of $5 readings at
$i each. It would require the location of but just one good
gold, silver, copper, iron, or even coal mine to make a multi-
millionaire of any one of these exalted seers and seeresses to
MEDIUMS AND THEIR MOTIVES 275
whom God has turned over the keys which unlock the doors
to the most profound secrets of Nature.
The falsehood is so glaringly patent it would seem utterly
impossible that anyone should fail to see it and note it and
profit by it. And yet, there are supposedly intelligent men
and women in all the varied walks and stations of life whose
patronage makes it possible for such charlatans to thrive.
Many of these advertisers are mediums in fact. That is
to say, they have been regularly "developed" as such, and
might be able to demonstrate some degree of reliability within
certain fixed limitations. But they are not satisfied with their
limitations. The great speculative world that gambles in
spiritualistic stocks demands something more occult and more
wonderful than they are able to furnish. In other words,
there is not sufficient merit in their mediumship to command
the money they so much covet. They, therefore, supply the
deficiency by falsehood and fraudulent promises in their ad-
vertisements, never intending to fulfill them.
It is safe to say that there is not a professional business
medium before the public today who advertises himself strictly
within the lines of truth when stating his claims to the world.
The fakir medium differs from the ordinary business me-
dium only in the fact that he does not stop at simply advertis-
ing more than he can perform. He resorts to deliberate leg-
erdemain. What he is unable to accomplish honestly and le-
gitimately he attempts to cover by sleight-of-hand. By a spe-
cies of artifice, jugglery and fraudulent pretense he attempts,
at the risk of exposure, to satisfy his patrons with deception
and purchase their confidence with trickery. It is astonishing
how many of these succeed and how well they manage to
avoid detection.
This phase of the subject, it would appear, now and then
makes its impress upon the minds of spiritualists themselves,
as shown by the following quotation from the current issue of
a leading spiritualistic journal. The author says:
"Is it the law of the survival of the fittest, or is it merely the fault
of spiritualism that only the most impudent quacks and impostors of
all kinds should flourish and fatten under its banner?
"Having for many years traveled in England, France, Germany,
276 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Australia, New Zealand, and America, and throughout the best part
of twenty years taken an intelligent interest in spiritualism and its
adherents, the above query is the result."
There are many other honest spiritualists who have made
the same inquiry.
The ambitious medium is the "politician" of his cult. He
is forever "playing for place." It is not so much money as
popularity, or even notoriety he seeks. He employs his me-
diumistic arts, "gifts" and "powers" to attract the attention
and command the homage of the world to him as a sort of
"superior being" or "special creation." This flatters him and
satisfies his vanity. The motive is almost as base as that
which inspires the business medium and the fakir.
The vicious medium belongs to a class by himself. His
central purpose is to gratify as far as possible the baser appe-
tites, evil passions and criminal desires of a perverse and de-
generate nature. He lives entirely upon the plane of the
senses. His mediumship represents a voluntary alliance be-
tween degenerate spiritual intelligences on the one side and
a depraved human intelligence on the other. The purpose is
mutual sensuous gratification.
It is a well known fact of Natural Science that between the
licentious of earth and the licentious of the spiritual world
the sex appetites, passions and desires constitute a powerful
magnetic bond. It is known that through the mediumistic
process these libidinous appetites, passions and desires may
be gratified, to a considerable extent. It is also known that in
many instances this abnormal and illegitimate relation be-
tween medium and control is substituted for the normal rela-
tion upon the plane of physical nature.
The fact that prostitution of this lascivious character is a
possibility will come to many an honest soul with a shock of
horror and profound disgust. The extent to which it is ac-
tually practiced would seem to those who are not acquainted
with the facts to be an utter impossibility.
For instance : One of the best known and most prominent
mediums of the United States, whose mediumistic work has
favorably impressed many of those who have known her, has
MEDIUMS AND THEIR MOTIVES 277
confessed to her friends that she sustains such a relation to
a spiritual lover who is her chief control, and that she has
done so for many years.
This subject is one upon which the world in general needs
exact and definite information. The time is coming when
this will be demanded. At the present time, however, it would
seem impossible to so state the simplest facts without offend-
ing those who most need to understand the principle and the
process upon which such a relation depends.
This is the legitimate field of the medical profession. Thus
far it has been ignored by that profession. It cannot be
longer. In the name of humanity the demand is made. To
humanity the answer must be given.
278 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER XV.
MEDIUMSHIP AND INSANITY.
In one of the largest western institutions for the insane in
the United States, six hundred diagnoses have been made
showing with absolute certainty that in fifty-eight per cent
of the cases thus examined the sole immediate cause of insanity
was mediumistic subjection. That is to say, these diagnoses
showed that fifty-eight per cent of those examined were at
the time under the domination and control of outside, spir-
itual intelligences.
It is a well known fact that climatic conditions have some-
thing to do in determining the percentage of insanity to pop-
ulation. Local conditions, therefore, must be taken into ac-
count in arriving at the exact figures for any larger or dif-
ferent territory than that covered by the institution in which
these examinations were made.
Making ample allowance for local variations, however,
it is reasonably certain that more than fifty per cent of all the
insanity of the United States is the direct result of the me-
diumistic process. There is every reason to believe that the
same percentage will hold good for all European countries.
It is due to spiritualists and the friends of spiritualism in
general, however, to carefully explain that by no means all of
this insanity is due to the specific work of those who are known
to the world as "mediums." In fact, a very considerable per-
centage of it is found to exist among men and women who
have never sat for mediumistic development and who know
practically nothing of the mediumistic process or of the phil-
osophy of modern spiritualism.
Many of these have unwittingly fallen into a negative con-
dition of both mind and body as a result of a wide variety of
causes which are in no wise due to what is popularly known
as "mediumship."
The point of specific importance, however, to be noted in
this connection is the fact that whether the world or the in-
dividual himself knows it or not, his insanity is the result of
MEDIUMSHIP AND INSANITY 279
the same process by and through which mediumship is de-
veloped, namely, the subjective, psychic process which forms
the subject matter of this volume.
There are many different methods of developing the nega-
tive state or condition necessary to place a man or woman
subjectively in touch with the world of spiritual intelligence,
without regularly sitting for mediumistic development. When
this state or condition is once developed, by any of the differ-
ent methods known to science, it exposes the individual to me-
diumistic control just the same as if he had acquired it
through the regular methods known and practiced by mediums
and spiritualists. The only difference lies in the simple fact
that the acknowledged medium goes about it intelligently and
purposefully, while those who are ignorant of spiritualistic
methods stumble into the condition without knowing it or
intending to do so. These latter are pronounced "insane"
and promptly locked up in the various insane asy-
lums throughout the country while the regular medium is
permitted to run at large merely because he calls himself a
"medium." This "distinction without a difference" has lodged
many a man and woman in the insane asylum, who is no
more "insane" than the average medium.
There are various different and specific causes which lead
men and women into the negative state or condition which
opens the door to mediumistic control. Among the most im-
portant are the following:
1. Heredity and prenatal conditions.
2. Diet.
3. Solitude.
4. Darkness.
5. Introspection.
6. Emotionalism.
7. Self-indulgence.
8. Fasting.
Cases almost without number might be cited showing the
effects of heredity and prenatal conditions upon children. The
following, for which the writer can personally vouch, will be
sufficient to illustrate the principle involved:
280 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Mrs. W. was, in her essential nature, of the negative type
of physical organism and intelligence. In addition to this
natural condition, however, she became interested in the sub-
ject of spiritualism and was ultimately developed as a me-
dium. After this, for some time, she devoted the larger part
of her time and energies to her mediumistic work. During
the entire year immediately preceding the birth of her daugh-
ter she was the principal medium for a group of scientific in-
vestigators of psychic phenomena. The daughter was born
under these conditions.
From the time she was old enough to express herself this
child was what is often termed a "natural psychic." She saw
clairvoyantly and heard clairaudiently without the necessity
for any effort on her part. Until she was six years old she
spent the greater portion of her waking hours playing with
her "invisible" playmates from the spiritual world. At the
age of seven she was regularly developed as a trance medium,
and so far as the writer knows has never recovered from that
condition.
This instance clearly shows the effects ot heredity as well
as those of prenatal conditions upon the development of chil-
dren.
Those who reach the negative condition of mediumship
through the process of dietetics alone represent a very consid-
erable number of those who afterwards become known either
as mediums or as insane. Diet has its most direct and positive
effects upon the purely physical organism of the individual.
It is a fact of science, well known to most physicians, and es-
pecially to those who are known to the world as dietetists,
that foods as well as medicines naturally divide themselves
into two great general classes which are known and designated
as "positive" and "negative."
Positive foods and medicines have the general effect of
producing positive magnetic conditions within the physical
organism. Negative foods, on the other hand, as well as neg-
ative medicines, produce the opposite or negative condition of
the physical organism.
Generally speaking, a strictly vegetable diet of any kind
MEDIUMSHIP AND INSANITY 281
is, comparatively, a magnetically negative diet. While this
is a scientific fact, it is also true that vegetables differ very
widely in the degree of their positive and negative properties,
qualities and effects.
For instance: As a general proposition, all vegetables
which develop under the soil (such as the potato, the turnip,
the radish, the carrot and the beet) are the most positive (or
least negative) vegetable foods known. Those which grow
upon endogenous plants, generally speaking, are second in
order. Those which grow upon exogenous trees, with some
exceptions, are third in order, while those which grow on
vines take rank among the most negative foods. There are
exceptions among all these various classes.
A strictly meat diet is the most positive magnetic diet
known. While the meats of different animals possess radi-
cally different degrees of positive force and magnetic energy,
it is nevertheless true that, generaly speaking, meats of all
kinds are more positive than vegetables. The meats of wild
animals are, for the most part, more positive than those of
domestic animals. Meats of carnivorous animals are more
positive than the meats of herbivorous animals. The meats
of animals that live under ground are more positive than the
meats of animals that live above ground. Meats of all ani-
mals that live upon the surface of the earth are more positive
than those of birds that fly above the earth.
With the simple principle of food values in mind it will
not be difficult to understand that diet is a most important fac-
tor in the development of the positive or negative magnetic
condition of the physical organism. In like measure it has
its effects upon the relation of the individual to his spiritual
environment.
It often occurs that a man or woman is physically positive
and mentally negative at the same time. In all such instances
a negative diet alone would be sufficient to open wide the door
to mediumistic control. It is not necessary for such an indi-
vidual to sit in a circle for mediumistic development. All
he needs is to live for a time on a negative vegetable diet.
Spiritual intelligences will do the rest.
282 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Solitude has the effect of producing a mentally negative
condition. This is because of the natural tendency to mental
abstraction which follows from solitude. Man upon the phys-
ical plane is eminently a social being. If deprived of the
society of his kind his mind involuntarily seeks companion-
ship in the realms of thought. This habit of contemplation
without definite purpose produces a psychically negative
condition. The developed medium is able to demonstrate the
truth of this proposition at any time. The presence of his
friends occupies his mind upon the plane of his physical en-
vironment and he accordingly finds it difficult to surrender
himself to the mediumistic process in their presence. But
a few moments of solitude produces the negative condition
necessary and he falls into subjection without effort.
Darkness is a negative physical condition. It has upon
man, however, a double negative effect. It produces natural
relaxation of the physical organism and at the same time an
introspective condition of the mind. Both of these are nega-
tive in effect. Darkness, therefore, is most favorable to me-
diumistic control. This has been fully demonstrated by me-
diums themselves very often. This is the secret of the dark
circle. It is the principle at the foundation of the dark cabi-
net and the dark materializing seance.
Introspection means "looking within," or, "inspection of
the within." As a metaphysical proposition it is a condition
of consciousness in which the objective faculties of the mind
are inactive. The mind takes no note or account of the things
that are at the time occurring upon the physical plane. It is
concerned with those things only which lie within the con-
scious soul of the individual himself. It is occupied with the
internal plane of conscious intelligence. In this condition the
physical body is always in a negative or passive state. In
this condition the active, dominating intelligence from without
may ride into the very center of individual consciousness and,
unless opposed, may assume control of all the faculties, capac-
ities and powers of the soul.
Introspection is therefore conducive to mediumistic sub-
jection.
MEDIUMSHIP AND INSANITY 283
Emotionalism and Self-Indulgence have been sufficiently
considered in previous chapters and therefore do not require
further exposition in this connection.
.Fasting is, primarily, a purely physical process, although
it has a strong reflex action upon the mind also. When the
stomach is supplied with food all the organs of the physical
body related to the processes of digestion, distribution, assim-
ilation and secretion are in a state of involuntary activity.
The physical organism is then busy with the renovating and re-
newing processes. When, through the process of fasting, all
the nutriment supplied to the system has been disposed of, the
physical organism has nothing more to do in its own behalf
but wait for more food. During this period of waiting the in-
ternal organism of the physical body is in a negative or pass-
ive condition. It then becomes a magnet which strongly at-
tracts those upon the spiritual plane, and (unless the mind is
properly schooled and on guard) opens the door to medium-
istic control.
No more powerful sermon could be preached to the great
world of intelligent humanity than that which is contained in
the simple but vital suggestion that something like 58 per cent
of all the insanity of the country is the result of the medium-
istic process. This fact alone is a commentary in itself which
should convey to the mind of every intelligent man and woman
throughout the land and throughout all the nations of earth,
the fundamental fact that there is something radically wrong
and fatally destructive in the subjective process of medium-
ship.
It is not the intention of this work to offer to the world a
scientific classification of insanity upon the principle of pri-
mary causation. Such an effort could not be deemed other
than grossly presumptuous. Medical science has been, for
many years, actively engaged in this great work in the cause
of humanity. The progress made would seem to justify the
hope that its ultimate and successful completion will be ac-
complished within the comparatively near future. Up to the
present time, however, there is a wide and prolific field of in-
284: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
sanity which the medical fraternity find it necessary to class-
ify under the general heading of "Causes Unknown."
In this great class, generally speaking, will be found at the
present time, for the most part, the various forms of Hyster-
ical Insanity, Religious Insanity, Religious Mania, Emotional
Insanity, and so-called "Delusional Insanity" of all kinds and
degrees. These, however, might all be included in one gen-
eral class and properly designated as "Mediumistic Insanity"
or "Subjective Insanity."
There is material here for an entire volume upon this sub-
ject alone. The importance of the theme will be suggested
when it is known that, with very few exceptions, all these vari-
ous forms of insanity last above mentioned are due to the in-
terposition of outside, spiritual intelligences. They, therefore,
only represent certain specific and definite degrees of medium-
istic subjection.
With these simple and easily demonstrable facts of nature
admitted and intelligently understood, the medical profes-
sion has the key in its own possession by which it may open
the door to this seeming mystery and lay bare to medical
science and to the world The Destructive Principle of Nature
in Individual Life, which is at the foundation of THE
GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME.
OK Great psychological Crime
Partm
Retributive Justice
CHAPTER I.
THE GENESIS OF "HELL."
("The Wages of Sin Is Death.")
As far as we are able to trace the authentic history of
mankind human intelligence has intuitively sensed a great fun-
damental law of Equity, Justice and Right which runs
throughout all the manifestations of Nature.
The application of this great law to the ethics of human
life constitutes the basis of all religious and philosophic sys-
tems of the past and likewise of the present.
The limitations of human intelligence in its efforts to grasp
and comprehend this law in its entirety and apply it as a rule
and guide of conduct in the daily lives of men, are responsi-
ble for all the sectarianism of both religion and philosophy,
as well as of all the variations in governmental systems and
policies throughout all the nations of earth.
Although the law itself is a unit in essence, it manifests
itself to human intelligence in its twofold aspect as one of
the most stupendous and comprehensive dualities of all Na-
ture, the duality of Construction and Destruction.
In its constructive aspect we recognize it as the Law of
285
286 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Compensation, or Compensatory Justice, in acordance with the
Harmonics of Evolution.
In its destructive aspect we recognize it as the Law of
Retribution, or Retributive Justice, in accordance with the
Discords of Devolution.
To the constructive side of this great Law of Justice is
referable all that there is of individual growth, development,
progress, strength, health, energy, life, love and happiness,
both here and hereafter. This is the domain of Nature's com-
pensatory rewards to individual intelligence for obedience to
Nature's Evolutionary Principle.
The ultimate goal of individual achievement under and
in accordance with the operation of Nature's Constructive
Principle is, so far as science knows, Individual Immortality
and perfect Happiness, in "the fulfilling of the law." This
is the achievement which opens to the soul the "Gates of Par-
adise." And this is THE WAY OF LIFE.
To the destructive side of this same great Law of Justice
is referable all that there is of individual atrophy, weakness,
enervation, sickness, suffering, sorrow, hate, fear, disease,
dissolution, disintegration, decay, unhappiness and death.
This, indeed, is the domain of Nature's Retributive Pun-
ishments to individual intelligence for disobedience of Na-
ture's Evolutionary Principle.
The ultimate destiny of individual intelligence under and
in accordance with Nature's Destructive Principle is, so far
as science knows, Spiritual Death, "The Second Death," Total
Individual Extinction, and a resolution of the individual En-
tity back into Nature's Elements from which it came.
And this is THE WAY OF DEATH and THE GENESIS OF
THE WAY OF DEATH
287
CHAPTER II.
THE WAY OF DEATH.
Duality is expressed in every department of Nature. Hu-
man intelligence recognizes the principle everywhere. In the
following expressions we endeavor to clothe it in human lan-
guage :
Finite and infinite.
Time and eternity.
Beginning and ending.
Light and darkness.
Day and night.
Transparent and opaque.
White and black.
Heat and cold.
Summer and winter.
Wet and dry.
Hard and soft.
Heavy and light.
Large and small.
Fine and coarse.
Much and little.
Many and few.
Length and breadth.
Height and depth.
Up and down.
In and out.
Back and forth.
Tall and short.
Straight and crooked.
Motion and inertia.
Expansion and contraction.
Mind and matter.
Sound and silence.
Harmony and discord.
Labor and rest.
Wealth and poverty.
Health and sickness.
Strength and weakness.
Male and female.
Man and woman.
Waking and sleeping.
Active and passive.
Positive and negative.
Sweet and bitter.
Joy and sorrow.
Pleasure and pain.
Hope and despair.
Faith and distrust.
Belief and skepticism.
Good and evil.
Right and wrong.
Truth and falsehood.
Sincerity and deceit.
Knowledge and ignorance.
Wisdom and folly.
Humility and pride.
Generosity and selfishness.
Kindness and cruelty.
Love and hate.
Receiving and giving.
Consciousness and unconscious-
ness.
Voluntary and involuntary.
Self-control and subjection.
Independence and dependence.
Freedom and slavery.
288 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Responsibility and irresponsi- Progress and retrogression.
bility. Construction and destruction.
Sanity and insanity. Immortality and mortality.
Evolution and involution. Life and death.
Integration and disintegration. Heaven and Hell.
Growth and decay.
A study of the foregoing will disclose to the careful analyst
that in whatever sphere or department of Nature the principle
of duality manifests itself, it is an expression of either simple
contrast or extreme opposites.
As an example, heat and cold constitute a duality which
expresses a mere contrast in degrees of temperature with that
of the individual. Heat merely expresses a higher degree of
temperature than cold. Both, however, express temperature.
So also, the terms large and small, fine and coarse, heavy
and light, express qualities of contrast only. They represent
merely a difference in the degree of a single quality or prop-
erty of physical Nature.
On the other hand, the terms truth and falsehood consti-
tute a duality which represents two distinct and separate prin-
ciples diametrically opposite in their essential natures. In
like manner love and hate, integration and disintegration, life
and death, are dual terms which express extreme opposite?
in Nature.
There is a principle in Nature which, in all its operations
and manifestations, is creative, formative, integrating, devel-
oping, organizing and evolutionary in its nature and tenden-
cies. It is known to science as "Nature's Constructive Prin-
ciple." As such it constitutes an equal part of a most stu-
pendous duality in Nature, the other half of which is known
as "Nature's Destructive Principle."
"Construction" and "Destruction." These terms give ex-
pression to a duality of extreme opposites. They define two
of the most important, extensive, conflicting and antagonistic
processes of all Nature. They represent the two great funda-
mental and essential opposites in Nature which are known and
recognized by scientific thinkers and investigators everywhere.
Nature's Destructive Principle is that half of the great
THE WAY OF DEATH 289
duality which is under consideration in this chapter, and may
be deemed the basic principle which furnishes the text of this
particular volume.
It is hoped and believed that a fair and unbiased con-
sideration of this principle alone will establish in the mind
of every honest and earnest student a clear and unmistakable
line of differentiation which runs throughout all the objective
manifestations of Nature. It is also believed that this principle
once clearly defined and understood, will indicate more clearly
and forcibly than all things else the subtle fallacies which are
involved in what is known as "development" through hypnotic
and mediumistic processes.
When the gigantic boulder which has been formed by
and through the operation of Nature's Constructive Principle
is lifted from its native bed and exposed to the summer's heat,
the winter's cold, the dry winds and the beating rain, its outer
surface soon begins to disintegrate and crumble away. In this
we observe the first effects of Nature's Destructive Principle
in operation.
The Electro-Magnetic Life Element of the great giant is
being withdrawn and death is setting his seal where life has
once reigned supreme.
The summers and the winters come and go. The summer
sun continues to burn and the winter cold to bite. The
wind's dry breath continues to blow and the rains to beat.
Slowly but surely the work of desolation and destruction goes
on. The giant boulder shrinks and shrivels away beneath
the continued play of Nature's hostile forces until at last noth-
ing remains of its once gigantic form. Where it once rested
nothing but common earth remains. The life element which
once sustained it has been dissipated and its existence as an
individual entity is destroyed. Its original particles, both
physical and spiritual, are scattered to the ends of the earth.
Its vital principle being withdrawn, under the operation of
Nature's Destructive Principle the once great boulder as an
individual entity has been disorganized, disintegrated, scat-
tered and resolved back into Nature's elements from which it
came, and the work of destruction is completed.
290 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Ascending one round higher in the scale of Nature into
the realm of the vegetable kingdom we find the same princi-
ple in operation.
The splendid oak which, under the power of Nature's Con-
structive Principle, operating through the Electro-Magnetic
Life Element of mineral Nature and the Vito-Chemical Life
Element of vegetable Nature, has grown from the tiny acorn
to its full and majestic maturity, stands a veritable "Monarch
of the Forest." But the storm comes. The lightning flashes.
The great monarch is torn from the earth. Its huge body lies
prostrate upon the ground.
Soon the green leaves begin to fade. Then they wither
and fall from the branches. The corpse of the dead monarch
lies bare upon the earth. Its naked body and bare limbs glis-
ten in the sunlight.
The waters come and cover it over. The soil of the earth
is washed around and over it. At last, after many ages, it
lies buried deep within its earthly grave. The centuries come
and go. Other great trees have grown to maturity above it.
The once mighty monarch has become a bed of coal. At last
the waters recede. Man comes with his pick and shovel.
The bed of coal is lifted to the earth's surface. Thence it is
carried into many homes and there burned to ashes. These
ashes are scattered to the four winds, and where is the once
stately oak?
With the lightning's stroke began the dominant play of Na-
ture's Destructive Forces. When the great tree lay prostrate
upon the ground and its roots glistened in the sunlight the
channel of Nature's Constructive Energy was broken. The
Vito-Chemical Life Element of vegetable Nature, the highest
Life Element upon which the oak was integrated, escaped
from the body, branches and leaves and was dissipated.
When the waters came and buried its great form deep
down beneath the surface of the earth the chemical action of
Nature's elements transmuted it into the bed of coal. In this
transition we note another step in the destruction of its in-
dividuality as a tree. When man with his pick and shovel
uncovered the bed of coal, lifted it to the earth's surface and
THE WAY OF DEATH 291
carried it into the many homes, this marked another step in
the process of disintegration. Then it was consumed as fuel
and converted into heat and ashes. This marked yet another
step in the process of dissolution. When these ashes were
scattered and lost and the heat was diffused into space the
operation of Nature's Destructive Principle was completed.
The splendid oak, the monarch of the forest, typifying
vitality, strength, organization and constructive energy, under
the operation of Nature's Destructive Principle has been both
physically and spiritually disorganized, disintegrated, scat-
tered and resolved back into Nature's elements from which it
came. Its individuality on both planes of life as an organic
entity is destroyed. And thus is acomplished its complete
individual extinction.
But what is the primary cause of this wonderful change?
Only this. The organizing, integrating, developing and re-
newing processes of vegetation depend upon the active prin-
ciple of the Electro-Magnetic and Vito-Chemical Life Ele-
ments of Nature. The supply of these Life Elements has been
cut off and the process of growth has ceased. At the point
where growth ceases decay inevitably begins. The ultimate
end of this destructive principle in operation is complete indi-
vidual extinction.
Let us now go one round higher in the scale of organic
Nature to the plane of the animal kingdom.
Under Nature's Constructive Principle operating through
the two lower Life Elements of the mineral and vegetable
kingdoms and the Spiritual Life Element of animal Nature
the single, nucleated life cell germinates, grows, multiplies and
develops into aggregates which form themselves into defi-
nite organs. These organs constitute the structural basis
upon which the physical and spiritual bodies of the infant
lion are integrated.
The baby lion is born. It grows and develops from in-
fancy to full maturity. It becomes another veritable "Mon-
arch of the Forest." At the zenith of its individual strength
and animal development the hunter's bullet pierces its heart.
The physical lion lies prostrate in death.
292 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
The process of physical dissolution immediately begins.
The flesh is torn from the bones and devoured by other ani-
mals . Its constituent physical parts enter into the texture and
organic structures of many animals and plants. The bones
bleach in the sun. They crumble and disintegrate. Their
individual particles are scattered over the earth and enter into
other chemical, vegetable and animal combinations and are
lost. The work of physical dissolution and disintegration is
complete.
Under the operation of Nature's Destructive Principle
the physical organism of the mighty monarch is disorganized,
disintegrated, scattered and resolved back into Nature's ele-
ments from which it came.
Its individuality as an organic physical entity is destroyed,
and thus is accomplished its individual extinction upon the
physical plane of its being.
But what of the finer spiritual organism ? Is this also dis-
integrated and dissolved? No, not yet.
When the hunter's bullet pierced the lion's heart the
chain of vital relationship, which bound the two organisms
together in one individual animate entity, was broken. The
two bodies immediately separated. Had he possessed the in-
dependent power of spiritual vision, the hunter might have
witnessed with perfect distinctness and absolute certainty the
separation of the two bodies at the moment of physical death.
With his physical eyes he would have seen the dead phy-
sical form and with his spiritual vison he would have seen
the live and active spiritual body a perfect duplicate of the
physical, except that the one is dead and the other is alive.
These observations would have put him in possession of
the facts of Nature stated in a previous chapter, viz. :
1. That the physical death of an animal does not imme-
diately result in the total and complete individual extinction
of the entire animal entity.
2. That the animating principle accompanies (or is ac-
companied by) the spiritual body at the point of physical
death.
3. That the spiritual animal appears to possess all the
THE WAY OF DEATH 293
natural faculties and intelligent capacities and powers which
were manifest in the physical animal.
If the intelligent student should, perchance, be interested
in pursuing the subject further, he would most naturally de-
sire to know something concerning the destiny of the spirit-
ual animal; whether it persists upon the spiritual plane
of animal life forever; if not, how long it so con-
tinues to persist ; whether it retains the same form indefinitely,
or undergoes a metamorphosis after a time and takes on a
different form; whether it develops and improves as an ani-
mal entity until it passes to higher spiritual planes ; or, whether
it disappears entirely from the spiritual plane of animal life
and reappears upon the physical ; if so, whether it appears as
an animal of the same species, or transmigrates to a different
species; if not, then, whether its disappearance is in reality
its second death and means individual extinction.
All these suggestions and many more would naturally be
of interest to the student of science. In other words, he would
find himself in the midst of a problem of Nature which has
defied the best intelligence of the ages, and still occupies a
position of absorbing interest in the field of Natural Science.
Many of these questions, however, have been settled with
definite, scientific certainty.
For instance: It is found that the animal does not per-
sist upon the spiritual plane of animal life forever. It does
not take on a different form during the period of its persis-
tence on the spiritual plane. The period of its persistence
upon the spiritual plane varies in time somewhat as it does
upon the physical plane. It does not pass upward to higher
planes of spiritual life, etc.
It is found that in the course of the years the animal upon
the spiritual plane of animal life undergoes what appears to
be a second death. The animating principle is withdrawn
from the spiritual organism or is dissipated with it and the
spiritual body is dissolved, disintegrated, and resolved back
into Nature's elements in a manner somewhat analogous to the
dissolution and disappearance of the physical body at physi-
cal death.
294: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
The lion, therefore, in the course of the years, reaches this
second climax which we may, without confusion or misunder-
standing, designate as "spiritual death/' or the "Second
Death."
But what is the exact scientific meaning of this spiritual
or second death?
Leaving this great problem unsolved for the present, let
us now proceed to the next higher round of individual life
and in the kingdom of man see how far we may be able to
trace the same principle of Nature in operation.
Under Nature's Constructive Principle, operating through
the three lower Life Elements of Nature and the Soul Element
of human life, the human infant is born upon the physical
plane of its being. As a physical organism it grows and de-
velops from infancy through childhood and youth to full
maturity.
Up to this time the constructive forces of its physical being
have been in the ascendency. But there comes a time when
physical maturity is fully reached. At this point the construc-
tive forces of the physical body begin to wane and the des-
tructive forces begin to augment. This transition continues
until the meridian line of physical life is reached. From this
point we mark the declining years of old age. When Nature's
Destructive Principle reaches its climax upon the physical
plane man's physical death ensues.
At this point, as in the case of the animal, the physical
body and the spiritual body separate. One who possesses
the power of independent, spiritual vision is able to observe
this transition with perfect distinctness and absolute scientific
certainty.
In this observation he is able to demonstrate those addi-
tional facts of Natural Science previously stated, viz. :
1. That this separation of the two material bodies of man
at the point of physical death corresponds, to all appearances,
with the same process in the animal.
2. That the vital or animating principle of the double
organic entity either follows (or is followed by) the spirit-
THE WAY OF DEATH 295
ual body only, and that in this respect it corresponds, to all
appearances, with the same process in the animal.
3. That the spiritual man appears to possess all the nat-
ural faculties and intelligent capacities and powers with which
he was invested at, or prior to, the time of physical death.
The establishment of these facts brings us at once to the
most difficult and at the same time the most absorbing problem
of Natural Science, the stupendous problem of man's ultimate
individual destiny, the destiny of the soul.
Once in its presence we are no longer so deeply absorbed
with the lesser problems of physical evolution, except in so
far as they may throw light upon the greater question.
Whether man upon the physical plane is but an ape evolved,
or is a distinct creation without a physical progenitor, is a
question which loses much of its interest in the presence of
the greater problem >f his ultimate individual destiny.
Man, to sustain himself upon the higher rounds of spir-
itual life, must find occupation in more beneficent pursuits
than that of reveling in the memories of the past. To him
the past becomes but a storehouse of experiences to which he
returns only when in need of the materials it can furnish him
for the solution of the more vital problems of the present and
the future.
It is true that the most advanced student of Natural
Science seeks knowledge upon all the planes of individual life
and being. He finds it all along the way, from the lowest
round of physical Nature to the highest plane of spiritual life
to which he has attained. But his desire for the accumulation
of knowledge is inspired by his appreciation of the possibil-
ities which lie above and yet beyond.
If he delves into the problems of physical life and physi-
cal evolution it is only in order that he may, perchance, find
there a key with which to unlock the door to a more exalted
knowledge of spiritual life and spiritual unfoldment. With
this key at his command he may then be permitted to open
the door of the higher life to others who are seeking for the
light of truth.
296 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
It is in this spirit that Natural Science has delved into the
mysteries of Nature in search of the magical key of knowledge
and power with which to unlock the secrets of ultimate indi-
vidual being.
From this scientific point of view the course of individual
life upon the spiritual planes has been observed, its various
phases noted and a considerable amount of scientific data ac-
cumulated and classified. A few of the most conspicuous and
significant "facts demonstrated" have been carefully stated in
a previous chapter.
The present purpose is to amplify to some extent such of
those facts as will serve to bring out more clearly man's rela-
tive position as an individualized intelligence upon the spir-
itual planes of life. With this in view it is especially impor-
tant to note what appears to be a well defined principle of dif-
ferentiation which gives to man upon the spiritual planes, as
well as upon the physical, a status which is unique and at the
same time deeply interesting and seemingly of scientific sig-
nificance and value.
FIRST.
It is observed that the dissolution of a physical mineral
carries with it almost instantly the dissolution of its ethereal
or spiritual duplicate. This almost simultaneous or synchro-
nal dissolution of the two bodies appears to be significant from
a scientific point of view, in that it would appear to establish
with a reasonable degree of scientific certainty the following
deductions :
1. That the constructive process or growth of the spirit-
ual duplicate of a mineral ceases when its physical growth or
integrating process is arrested, and vice versa^
2. That the relation between the physical and spiritual
bodies of the mineral is of such a character as to establish
what appears to be their absolute interdependence.
3. The integrating process in this case, therefore, appears
to be but a single process manifesting upon duplicate planes
of mineral existence.
THE WAY OF DEATH 297
SECOND.
In the vegetable kingdom just one important variation from
the mineral process appears, namely: The dissolution of the
two bodies of a plant is by no means so nearly simultaneous
or synchronal as in the case of the mineral. The length of
time intervening is very much increased. In other words, the
spiritual organism of a plant appears to possess the power of
individual persistence after physical dissolution to such an
extent as to plainly suggest a possible design of Nature, which
design would seem to become more clearly defined as we as-
cend to higher planes of organic life.
But a study of vegetation on both its planes of life appears
to establish with a reasonable degree of certainty the follow-
ing deductions, viz. :
1. That the spiritual organism of a tree or plant ceases
to grow or develop whenever physical development is arrested.
That is to say, its spiritual dissolution actually begins at the
point of physical death just as appears to be the case with the
mineral.
2. In so far as the principle of growth or accretion is con-
cerned there seems to be the same general interdependence of
the two bodies in the vegetable kingdom as in the mineral.
3. Here also integration appears to be but a single process
manifesting upon two planes of material existence.
THIRD.
In the animal kingdom some important variations or modi-
fications appear, among which the following are most impor-
tant:
1. The length of time a spiritual animal persists as an in-
dividualized entity, after its physical dissolution, is many times
greater than that during which the spiritual vegetable persists
after its forced physical dissolution.
2. The spiritual growth and development of an animal
does not necessarily stop at the point of physical death. At
the death of infant animals, spiritual growth, in most in-
stances, appears to cease immediately and spiritual death fol-
lows within a comparatively short time.
298 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
On the other hand, if the period of animal infancy is past
before physical death occurs and the process of physical devel-
opment and growth is well under way, the spiritual organism
continues to develop until it reaches what appears to be full
maturity upon the spiritual plane.
3. In this latter case spiritual disintegration does not
begin at the point of physical death, nor until long thereafter.
In this respect the animal differs very radically and essentially
from the mineral and the vegetable.
4. Here also the principle of growth does not appear to
bind the two organisms together in an indissoluble bond of
interdependence. Indeed, the dependence appears to be al-
most entirely on the part of the physical.
5. Another important distinction or variation is here
noted, in that the integrating process appears to be a
double process instead of a single one, as in the two lower
kingdoms of Nature. Or, if it be not a double process, then
at the point of physical death that which produces growth is
detached from the physical and unites with the spiritual.
FOURTH.
In the kingdom of man these variations or modifications
appear with even greater distinctness. They stand out in
such vivid contrast with the conditions which obtain in the
lower kingdoms of Nature that the mind almost involun-
tarily forecasts a possible design which the great Universal
Intelligence appears to be working out.
The variations and modifications here to be specially noted
are:
I. However young the human infant may be when its
physical death occurs, if it has once co-ordinated with the
Soul Element of Nature and "breathed the breath of life,"
its status as an individualized intelligence is determined.
In this case its physical death does not appear in the least
degree to suspend, retard or check the growth and develop-
ment of the spiritual organism. The human infant upon
the spiritual planes passes through all the phases and stages
of spiritual growth and organic development to its full spir-
THE WAY OF DEATH 299
itual maturity, in a manner closely analogous to its growth
and development upon the physical plane.
2. Man appears to be inherently invested with the power
and ability to perpetuate his own organic individual existence
upon the spiritual planes of life indefinitely. This is accom-
plished by his personal knowledge and right application of
the laws, principles, forces, activities and processes of Nature
which govern the conservation of his spiritual life and ener-
gies.
3. By the right application of his knowledge and the
right use of all his acquired powers he comes into full co-
operation with Nature's Constructive Principle. He thus
adds to the great upward evolutionary impulse of Universal
Intelligence the impetus of his own individual powers. He
becomes an active, independent, self-conscious, rational and
voluntary factor and power in his own individual evolution.
By and through this voluntary and rational co-operation with
the great Universal Intelligence he severs the last destructive
tie of his individual being and rides upon the current of
Nature's constructive, sustaining, renewing and living forces
onward and upward through the realms of spiritual light and
life until he passes beyond the limit of all our present knowl-
edge.
4. Another significant variation or modification is found
in the fact that, although man is unquestionably invested with
the power and ability to perpetuate his individual existence
upon the spiritual planes of life indefinitely, yet he does not
always elect to do so.
This suggestion brings us to what appears to be another
interesting fact of spiritual Nature, namely, that man is in-
vested with the power of individual choice in the spiritual
life as well as in the physical. This, in fact, appears to be
one of the inalienable rights of every responsible individual
intelligence.
It is a well-known fact that in this physical life man may
defy every principle of Nature which makes for his own up-
building. In other words, he may defy Nature's Constructive
Principle. This is true as to every phase of his being. He
300 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
may destroy his own physical life by any one of the numerous
methods employed by the suicide. Or, he may wreck his
physical health and strength by overindulgence of any or all
of his physical appetites, passions, emotions or desires, and
thus reach the same physical end through a slower and more
gradual process.
He may defy every moral principle of equity, justice and
right, and in a similar manner accomplish his moral suicide
or death.
In the same absolute and definite manner the power of
individual choice obtains upon the spiritual planes of life. By
the wrong application of his knowledge and the abuse of his
acquired powers man in that life, as in this, can, if he so elect,
come into full co-operation with Nature's Destructive Prin-
ciple. In this event he becomes an active, independent, self-
conscious, rational and voluntary factor and power in his
own devolution and spiritual retrogression.
By and through this voluntary and intentional violation
of the constructive, sustaining, renewing and living principle
of individual continuity, he may, of his own choice, ride upon
the strong current of Nature's Destructive Forces backward
and downward into the realm of spiritual darkness, to disinte-
gration, dissolution, individual extinction and a final resolu-
tion back into Nature's elements to a point beyond the limits
of all our present knowledge.
And THIS IS THE WAY OF DEATH.
IN PERSPECTIVE 301
CHAPTER III.
IN PERSPECTIVE.
A clear and comprehensive understanding of Nature's De-
structive Principle is of such transcendent importance that a
brief perspective view of the preceding chapter may be of
value. The specific purpose of such a view is to fix indelibly
in the mind an accurate conception of one fundamental de-
duction of Natural Science which gives to man a unique and
distinctive place in Nature.
(I.) LIFE ELEMENTS.
In order that all phases of the subject may be observed
in true perspective it is necessary to view it from as many
different points of vision as possible. With this suggestion
in mind, let us first proceed to the plane of the mineral king-
dom and from that level look upward over the two interme-
diate kingdoms of the vegetable and the animal to the plane
of human life. From this point of vision let us study the
evolutionary ascent from the lowest and simplest form of
life to the highest and most complex, as it is indicated in the
Life Elements of Nature themselves. Viewed from this point
we are able to note the following significant facts of Natural
Science :
1. In the mineral kingdom the constructive or integrat-
ing principle of Nature operates through the Electro-Magnetic
Life Element alone. Upon this single Life Element, therefore,
the integration and growth of minerals depend.
2. In the vegetable kingdom the constructive, integrating
and organic principle operates through two Life Elements
instead of one. That is to say, it operates through the Electro-
Magnetic and the Vito-Chemical Life Elements.
Of these two Life Elements the Vito-Chemical is the dom-
inant one in the vegetable organic process. It controls that
higher function of Nature known to science as the organic
principle or process in vegetation, as this process is distin-
guished from that of mineral integration.
802 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
3. In the animal kingdom there is yet a higher, third
Life Element through which the constructive principle oper-
ates. This third Life Element is the spiritual Life Element
of Nature. It is the dominant factor in the organic process
of animal Nature. It is that element which lifts the animal
to a plane above the vegetable and gives to it those added
characteristics which so clearly manifest themselves in the
faculty or capacity of consciousness and the power of volun-
tary action.
4. In the kingdom of man the fourth Life Element of
Nature the Soul Element is the principal factor in the con-
structive process. Here we have the constructive principle of
Nature operating through four Life Elements in harmony
instead of through one alone. Of these four the Soul Ele-
ment is the dominant one in the human organism and gives
to man those added characteristics of self-consciousness, in-
dependent choice, reason and the power of independent, self-
conscious and rational will or volition.
From the foregoing it will be observed that in the mineral
kingdom Nature's Destructive Principle, in order to prevail,
must overcome the integrating power of but a single Life
Element. In the vegetable kingdom it has to contend against
the combined integrating and organizing forces of two Life
Elements of Nature. In the animal kingdom it must oppose
the combined integrating, organizing and sustaining forces
of three, and in the human it is pitted against the combined
forces and energies of all four of Nature's Life Elements
working in harmony.
In this view of the subject it is not difficult for the mind
to anticipate what would appear to be a perfectly natural re-
sult, namely, that the higher we proceed in the evolutionary
process and the further we get away from the plane of the
mineral kingdom the more powerful become the forces of
Nature which we recognize as constructive, and the more
difficult becomes the task set for Nature's Destructive Prin-
ciple.
From this point of vision, therefore, the mind is able to
note what appears to be a far-reaching design of Universal
IN PERSPECTIVE 303
Intelligence, namely, to ultimately evolve an order of being
which shall possess withvn itself the power and ability to
transcend the operation /i Nature's Destructive Principle.
(II.) GROWTH.
In order to obtain a more perfect view of the subject, let
us now return to the plane of the mineral kingdom, and, look-
ing upward from another point of vision, study the evolu-
tionary ascent of Nature as it is indicated in the principle of
growth or accretion. And in this examination let us view
the subject from both the spiritual and the physical planes of
life at the same time.
1. It will be remembered that in the mineral kingdom
growth of the spiritual body ceases when the growth of the
physical is arrested.
2. In the vegetable kingdom this appears to be the case
also, but there are some well defined indications which sug-
gest that this may be only an appearance and not a fact.
3. In the animal kingdom all uncertainty is dispelled.
Here it is determined with absolute certainty that, in the case
of infant animals, growth of the spiritual body appears to
cease soon after physical death. This, however, is not true
of those animals which pass the stage of infancy before phys-
ical death occurs. In this latter case the spiritual body con-
tinues to grow after physical death, and in most instances
more especially among what we term the higher animals
spiritual growth continues until the spiritual organism reaches
what appears to be spiritual maturity.
4. In the kingdom of man, again, this evolutionary phase
of life reaches its climax. Here it is observed that however
young the infant man may be, if it has reached co-ordination
with the Soul Element of Nature and breathed the breath
of its higher life, the death of the physical body appears to
have no effect whatever upon the continued growth of the
spiritual. It proceeds to grow and develop without inter-
ruption or lapse of any kind until it reaches what appears
to be full spiritual maturity.
Indeed, in this field of observation growth appears to be
304 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
much more exclusively a spiritual process, with an inci-
dental manifestation upon the physical plane. It is moved
primarily by a spiritual impulse ratrr.r than by a physical, as
indicated in the fact that physical death does not affect the
process of growth in the spiritual organism in any way.
From this second view point the mind seems to see with
added clearness the possible design of Universal Intelligence
as it appears to manifest itself in the wonderful scheme of
evolution. We are able to clearly note the unfaltering march
of development toward the consummation of what appears
to be a fixed and steady purpose, the evolvement of an indi-
dividual organism which shall be able to transcend the lim-
ited possibilities of Nature's Destructive Principle.
(III.) PSYCHICAL.
Once more let us stand upon the level of the mineral king-
dom and from yet another point of vision view the subject.
In this observation let us study the evolutionary rise of the
individual entity in its purely psychical aspect.
i. It is clear to the scientific observer that in the mineral
world the constructive or integrating process is one in which
the mineral entity itself, as such, has no intelligent or con-
scious part. The integrating power of the mineral world, to
every appearance, is automatic and involuntary so far as the
mineral itself is concerned. The mineral, in fact, appears to
grow and decay, integrate and dissolve, in neither a conscious
nor voluntary manner, but rather in obedience to the opera-
tion of the great law of Universal Intelligence.
In the mineral, therefore, we are unable to discover any-
thing which suggests to our minds an individualized intelli-
gence. Whatever manifestations we are able to observe which
might suggest consciousness, volition or intelligence, appear
to reside in the individual, chemical particles of which chem-
ical aggregates are composed, and not in the aggregate as a
distinct and separate entity or individuality.
For illustration : The energy or impulse which unites the
particles of gold or silver into one common mass manifests
itself in the individual particles of which the mass is com-
IN PERSPECTIVE 305
posed, and not in the mass as a whole. For this reason we
are able to assert with seeming scientific certainty that the
stone, or the crystal, or the boulder, or the nugget, or any
other mineral aggregate, as an individual entity, has neither
consciousness, volition, intuition nor intellectuality in any of
its individual manifestations.
2. In the vegetable world we seem to cross a distinct
line of differentiation which suggests at least a different char-
acter or grade of intelligence. Here the manifestations of
intelligence do not appear so exclusively in the individual par-
ticles of which the various aggregates are composed.
For illustration : The sunflower turns its face to the sun.
In the morning it looks to the east. During the day it fol-
lows the course of the sun in its flight across the heavens from
east to west and at night bows its head to the west.
The sensitive plant shrinks at the touch of the human
hand as if it were conscious of possible danger.
The little "Fly-Trap" opens its cup-like flower as if to
await the coming of the unsuspecting insect. When the busy
bee comes and enters in search of honey, or the fly in search
of food or drink, the little flower quickly closes its door-like
lid or mouth, and the insect is a hopeless and helpless pris-
oner. Here it is securely held until death comes to its relief.
Then its decaying body is absorbed and assimilated by the
plant as food.
The wild morning-glory vine of rapid growth reaches the
limit of its support and gropes about in search of something
new upon which to support itself. Place another support
within a few inches of the end of the vine, but slightly to
one side, and then watch the result. Within a few hours you
will observe that the vine is reaching out to the new support.
Then shift the object to the other side and in a short time
you will see that the vine has turned about and is reaching
for it in the opposite direction.
In all these instances, and many more which might be
mentioned in connection with the vegetable world, there ap-
pears to be a very low grade of instinct or semi-consciousness
as well as volition, which resides in the plant itself as an indi-
306 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
vidual entity, and not alone in the particles of which it is com-
posed.
It is true that science is not able to assert with certainty
that any plant actually possesses individual consciousness, in-
stinct or volition, but it is compelled to note the fact that in
the evolution of vegetable life Universal Intelligence has
taken a long step in the direction of an individualized intelli-
gence and seems to be anticipating that ultimate result.
3. In the animal kingdom we cross another distinct line
of differentiation in psychic conditions and development. Con-
sciousness is here well defined as a faculty or capacity of the
individual animal. Volition is also a well defined power of
the individual entity, and not wholly an automatic result of
general laws operating through the individual particles of
which the individual animal is composed.
Here we also note for the first time that the individual en-
tity possesses the power of independent locomotion. It is
also invested with appetites, passions, emotions and desires,
and, excepting in so far as the vital processes are concerned,
the individual animal has full control of its muscular or-
ganism.
Here also we observe for the first time in the upward
march of evolution what we have defined as animal instinct.
So closely does it seem to approach the limit of the purely
intellectual that wise men of all the ages have differed in
their judgments concerning the ability of the animal to reason
from cause to effect. Certain it is that if the animal does
not rise to the level of the purely intellectual, its individuality
most clearly and unmistakably foreshadows such a possible
development in the yet higher kingdom of man.
4. In the human kingdom we find the full realization of
all that is foreshadowed in the lower kingdoms of Nature.
Man possesses all that the animal does and something more.
Added to the consciousness of the animal is the self-conscious-
ness which is distinctively a human faculty or capacity. Ani-
mal instinct assumes the higher form of intuition in man. The
volition which in the animal is apparently but a reflex of
IN PERSPECTIVE 307
animal appetites, passions, emotions and desires, in man be-
comes an independent, self-conscious and rational power.
In other words, in his intellectual activities, processes, ca-
pacities and powers man rises to a plane of life and being
unknown to and untouched by all the rounds of individual life
which lie below the level of the Soul Element of Nature.
(IV.) PERSISTENCE.
One more view of the subject from the plane of the min-
eral will enable us to complete the picture. This time our
task is to note the upward movement of evolution as it is in-
dicated in the persistence of the spiritual body beyond the
point of physical death.
1. It will be remembered that in the mineral kingdom
the dissolution of the two bodies is almost simultaneous or
synchronal. The spiritual body persists but a comparatively
brief period of time after physical dissolution, even where the
process of physical dissolution is forced and instantaneous.
2. In the vegetable kingdom the length of time the spir-
itual body persists after physical death or dissolution is many
times longer than in the case of minerals.
3. In the animal kingdom this progression goes on.
4. And in the kingdom of man we again reach a natural
and sequential climax. Here we find that Nature, or the
great Universal Intelligence, appears to have shifted the bur-
den of responsibility to man himself. As a result man pos-
sesses the power within himself to determine or to extend the
period of persistence of the spiritual body beyond the point
of physical death indefinitely. In a much more exact and
literal sense, therefore, than is generally understood, man
appears to be "the arbiter of his own destiny."
As clearly and as explicitly as may be expressed in the
language of Nature's evolutionary processes, man appears to
hold the key of individual immortality in his own hands. He
may, if he so choose, ally himself with Nature's Constructive
Principle in all its majesty, power and glory, and in so doing
seemingly defy the powers of darkness, death and destruction
forever.
308 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
In this he chooses THE WAY OF LIFE.
On the other hand, he may elect to co-operate with Na-
ture's Destructive Principle, if he so desires. If so, and he
persist in this election, his inevitable destiny, so far as known
to science, is what we have designated as "Spiritual Death,"
or "The Second Death."
The exact scientific significance or meaning of this spir-
itual or second death is not yet known with absolute certainty.
But it is known that whosoever chooses this road travels
THE WAY OF DEATH.
A brief summary which presents the subject in its full
and complete perspective is as follows:
MINERAL.
1. One Life Element.
2. Spiritual growth ceases at physical death.
3. Spiritual and physical death practically synchronal.
4. Without individual consciousness, instinct or volition.
5. Death of both bodies ultimately inevitable to all ap-
pearances.
VEGETABLE.
1. Two Life Elements.
2. Spiritual growth appears to cease at physical death,
but there are some indications to the contrary.
3. Spiritual and physical death clearly not synchronal.
4. Some indications or shadowings of individual con-
sciousness, instinct and volition.
5. Death, both physical and spiritual, ultimately inevi-
table to all appearances.
ANIMAL.
1. Three Life Elements.
2. Spiritual growth continues after physical death.
3. Spiritual life continues long after physical dissolution.
4. Individual consciousness, instinct, volition, appetites,
passions, emotions and desires, with strong suggestions or
shadowings of developing intellectual activities, faculties, ca-
pacities and powers.
IN PERSPECTIVE 309
5. Death, both physical and spiritual, ultimately inevitable
to all appearances.
MAN.
1. Four Life Elements.
2. Spiritual growth not interrupted nor in any manner
retarded or interfered with by physical death.
3. Persistence of spiritual life after physical death under
the control and within the power of the individual and de-
pendent on his individual choice.
4. Individual self-consciousness, intuition, appetites, pas-
sions, emotions and desires; independent, self-conscious and
rational volition, and all intellectual faculties, capacities and
powers fully defined.
5. Spiritual death not necessarily inevitable, but under
control of the individual. Individual Immortality a possibil-
ity to all appearances,
310 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER IV.
INDIVIDUAL IMMORTALITY.
What is Immortality?
The answer to this important question must depend en-
tirely upon the view point from which we examine the subject.
For illustration, the lexicographer tells us with every evi-
dence of assurance that immortality is:
1. "Exemption from death and annihilation."
2. "Unending existence."
3. "Life eternal."
The metaphysician and the theologian generally accept
these as consistent and satisfactory definitions of the word,
and we are not disposed to find fault with them for the reason
that they are looking at the subject from a particular stand-
point.
But the scientist who is compelled to view the subject
from the standpoint of knowledge alone, says that so far as
we know there is no such thing as "Unending existence" or
"Life eternal." Our actual knowledge is limited to matters
which lie within the range of our own personal experiences.
These matters, it will no doubt be admitted, all lie a long
way this side of eternity, or never-ending time, if, indeed,
there be such a time, place, condition or state of being.
Therefore, from the standpoint of science there may or
may not be immortality in the sense expressed by the lexi-
cographer and the theologian. No one, so far as men of
science know, has, up to this time, lived out an "eternity" or
an "unending existence," and therefore, so far as we know,
the question of eternity is yet one of the unsolved problems.
From the standpoint of this work, therefore, the meaning
of immortality is quite a different thing from that expressed
by any of the definitions above quoted.
Viewed from this standpoint, Individual Immortality
means nothing more and nothing less than a condition or
state of being wherein the individual possesses the knowledge
INDIVIDUAL IMMORTALITY 811
and the power to come into full co-operation with Nature's
Constructive Principle.
From the standpoint of this work, therefore, we are not
concerned with the question as to whether this may or may
not mean "Life eternal" or "Unending existence," any more
than the astronomer who first accurately determined the pre-
cession of the equinoxes was, at the time, concerned with the
question as to how many such cycles of time it would require
to constitute an "eternity."
The coming into possession of such knowledge and such
power may mean "Life eternal." It may mean an "Unending
existence." If so, then science and theology quite agree. If
not, then science occupies the stronger ground by withhold-
ing its judgment upon a question of the ultimate, which, of
necessity, lies far beyond the limitations of its power of judg-
ment.
To make this distinction entirely clear, our astronomers
are to-day able to calculate the distances, relative locations,
lines of motion and velocity of the planets with such mathe-
matical exactness as to determine within a very few seconds
the time of an eclipse of the sun, or of the transit of Venus.
All of their calculations, however, are based upon a very
broad hypothesis, namely, that the planets will continue to
move in the future just as they have done in the past.
But no astronomer would be rash enough to guarantee
that the sun will even be in existence at the time fixed for
the next eclipse, or that Venus will not have exploded long
before the time set for its next transit of the sun. These 'are
questions he at once recognizes as beyond the limits of his
jurisdiction.
The most he can truthfully say is that, inasmuch as his-
tory informs us that these planets have been in existence many
hundreds of years, during which time their movements have
been observed and calculated with comparative certainty, we
have the scientific right to assume, for the purposes of these
calculations, that they will go on in the same way for some
time to come. But we have no scientific license to declare
812 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
that they are absolutely unchangeable, or that in their indi-
vidual capacity they are necessarily "eternal."
And so, when Natural Science comes to know that man
upon the spiritual planes of life is invested with the power
to come into full co-operation with what we have designated
as Nature's Constructive Principle, it can only declare that
fact and nothing more. But it can without impropriety sug-
gest that man thus appears to possess the power of indefinite
individual persistence. It can also point out that to all ap-
pearances this would seem to indicate "Eternal life" or "Un-
ending existence." But it dares not dogmatize concerning
ultimates.
And therefore wherever the term "immortality" is em-
ployed in this work or in subsequent volumes of this Series,
it must be understood in the limited and scientific sense above
suggested.
ON WHAT IT DEPENDS 313
CHAPTER V.
ON WHAT IT DEPENDS.
By reference back to Part II, Chapter IV, Paragraph 23,
it will be observed that in the spiritual life man's ability to
persist and to advance from lower to higher spheres of spir-
itual existence is commensurate with his independent control
of all his individual faculties, capacities and powers, and is in
response to his independent, self-conscious and rational voli-
tion and desire to so persist and advance.
In this fundamental fact we strike what appears to be the
keynote of Nature's harmonic principle. Here it is we find
what appears to be a rational and scientific answer to the great
problem of evolution.
If the student has followed the subject closely to this point
he cannot fail to be impressed with what appears to be a far-
reaching design of Universal Intelligence as it expresses itself
in the ever onward and upward movement of evolution.
From the lowest round of physical Nature to the highest
plane of spiritual life we have been able to note the steady,
unfaltering, upward march of Nature toward the consumma-
tion of what appears to be a fixed and definite purpose.
Out of the seeming chaos of inorganic conditions we have
noted the slow but inevitable rise of individual life. We have
observed that from the time of its first appearance upon the
plane of physical life each evolutionary round has invested
the individual entity with higher, stronger and more enduring
individual characteristics.
We have seen this individual entity at each higher round
in the ascent of life develop new capacities and added powers,
and each step has been in the direction of individual independ-
ence, emancipation and supremacy.
From the individual crystal to the individual man there
has been and is a steady and seemingly intelligent and pur-
poseful graduation from lower to higher rounds of individ-
ualized existence.
And what, in all this, is the one most conspicuous, signifi-
314 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
cant and salient fact which impresses the mind as of para-
mount value and importance?
It is this, that out of all the struggles of Nature, out of
all the seemingly uncertain conditions of individual existence,
out of all the play of Nature's laws, principles, forces, activi-
ties and processes, out of all the mystery which surrounds
the ultimate destiny of individual life, there has at last
emerged an individualized, intelligent entity which possesses
the inherent power of indefinite persistence, as an individual-
ized intelligence upon the spiritual planes of existence, by and
through co-operation with Nature's Constructive Principle.
In other words, out of all the complex operations of the
seemingly automatic and mechanical processes of lower Na-
ture has at last been evolved an individualized, intelligent en-
tity, possessing the one transcendent power of Individual
Immortality.
Man is that individualized, intelligent entity. He stands
solitary and alone upon the summit of that splendid ascent
of individual life, a fitting expression of the consummation
of Nature's stupendous scheme of evolution.
As he stands thus majestically upon the pinnacle of the
ascent of individualized life and intelligence, he presents to
the mind a splendid picture in evidence of Nature's evolution-
ary triumph.
As we study the picture in all its outlines, the mind turns
with an irresistible impulse to a search for the hidden springs
of that subtle, sustaining power by and through which man
is able to rise superior to the operation of Nature's Destruc-
tive Principle and achieve that final triumph which Nature
has placed within his possibilities, the triumph of Individual
Immortality.
Here in this fertile field of spiritual life, which physical
science dogmatically placards "The Unknowable," and which
speculative philosophy generously concedes to be "The Un-
known," Natural Science and true religion find a common
ground of sympathy in their search for truth.
Here in this apparently unlimited field of research and ex-
periment is again illustrated the process by which science has
ON WHAT IT DEPENDS 315
so often worked out its verifications of the soul's intuitions
and its unanswerable demonstrations of the fallacies of unen-
lightened dogmatism.
With seemingly unanswerable logic Natural Science pro-
ceeds to the solution of the great problem of Individual Im-
mortality, and in that scientific solution the following facts
have a special value:
1. It has been demonstrated that death, both physical and
spiritual, is the inevitable heritage of all forms of individual
life below the level of man.
2. It is found that man possesses the power, if he will
but use it, to rise superior to the operation of Nature's De-
structive Principle. By the exercise of this power he may
perpetuate his individual life upon the spiritual planes indefi-
nitely. He may advance from lower to higher planes of
spiritual life by an ever increasing acquisition of individual
power, until he passes to realms above and beyond the range
of all our present knowledge.
In other words, he possesses that wonderful and myste-
rious acquisition which we may designate as the power of
individual persistence upon the spiritual planes of life. He
is likewise the only individualized, intelligent entity of which
we have personal and definite knowledge, who is capable of
rising to this transcendent state of Individual Immortality.
3. It is found that man possesses certain well defined
capacities, faculties and powers not found to exist in any of
the rounds of individual life which lie below him in the scale
of evolution.
That is to say, he possesses all that is found in the world
of individual life below him, with something added. He
therefore possesses something which is distinctively and ex-
clusively his own, something not possessed by animal Nature.
And it is this distinctive and exclusive possession which, in
fact, makes him man.
To these superior endowments of Nature, which are ex-
clusively his own and distinguish him as an individualized
intelligence from all that lies below him, Natural Science turns
in its search for that which lifts him to his higher round of
316 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
individualized existence. To these it looks for the secret
which gives to him his distinctive place in Nature. To these
and these alone it turns for the key which unlocks to him
the door of Individual Immortality.
WHAT ARE THEY?
It is found that among those specific and individual capaci-
ties, faculties and powers which are distinctively and ex-
clusively human are:
1. SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS, as distinguished from mere
Consciousness.
2. REASON, as distinguished from mere Intelligence.
3. INDEPENDENT CHOICE, as distinguished from automatic
or involuntary Selection.
4. INDEPENDENT, SELF-CONSCIOUS and RATIONAL WILL,
OR VOLITION.
These are the inherent, essential and distinctive elements
which are exclusively related to and constitute the background
of human character. To these, therefore, and to these alone
must of necessity be related whatever distinctive and exclusive
powers man may possess over and above the animal.
But the one exclusive power of this character man pos-
sesses which transcends all others in value and importance
to himself is that which enables him to intelligently co-operate
with Nature's Constructive Principle, rise above the operation
of Nature's Destructive Principle, persist indefinitely upon
the spiritual planes of life, and thereby achieve Individual Im-
mortality.
Therefore, in the above named distinctive and exclusive
elements of human character, namely, Self-Consciousness,
Reason, Independent Choice and an Independent, Self-Con-
scious and Rational Volition, we have laid out before us the
subject matter for an intelligent and scientific study of the
great problem of Individual Immortality.
With this thought clearly in mind, it is hoped that the
following pages may contain something of special interest and
possible value to every student of the higher lines of thought
and inquiry. It is therefore assumed that any apology for
ON WHAT IT DEPENDS 317
the time and space consumed in an effort to simplify the sub-
ject and bring it within the easy understanding of the student
would be out of place.
Without further explanation, therefore, let us turn our
attention to a study of the great problem before us.
SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS.
In all the varied forms of animal life we are forced to
recognize evidences of a certain character, degree or quality
of consciousness. However low down the scale of animal
life we may choose to go, we fail to reach a point where this
faculty or capacity appears to be wholly wanting. This would
appear to establish with reasonable certainty the fact that con-
sciousness is a primary faculty or capacity of the individual,
animal entity.
Consciousness is, indeed, that faculty or capacity of the
individual intelligence, ego, soul or entity, by and through
which it becomes aware of the existence of a world outside
itself as well as a world of demands within. Through this
faculty or capacity the appetites, passions, desires, impulses,
affections, emotions, instincts and intuitions make their im-
pression upon the individual entity and command recognition.
Through this faculty or capacity alone are the five physical
senses able to convey their messages to the entity itself and
have them recorded.
But in all the realm of animal life there appear to be such
fixed limitations upon this faculty or capacity as to mark a
distinct line of differentiation between the animal conscious-
ness and the consciousness of man. This fact would seem to
indicate that the Soul Element of Nature, which is individual-
ized in man alone, has undoubtedly added to animal conscious-
ness something which is distinctively and exclusively human
in its character, degree or quality.
To distinguish between the character, degree or quality of
consciousness in animals and men we designate animal con-
sciousness as simple "consciousness" and human conscious-
ness as "Self-Consciousness."
318 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Self-Consciousness is that character, degree or quality of
consciousness which enables us to know and understand our-
selves. It is that which enables us to perform our acts know-
ingly and intentionally. It involves the consciousness of the
relations which exist between this self and those other selves.
It is that consciousness which is able to recognize the self as
a responsible, individual intelligence. It is, indeed, one of
the primary, fundamental and essential elements of human
character upon which individual responsibility is based and
upon which it depends.
REASON.
As with consciousness, so with reason. Whatever may
be said concerning the intelligence of animals, however closely
they border the realm of the human, there is a subtle dividing
line, which is not easily mistaken, running between the two
kingdoms of Nature.
We recognize our intimate relationship to the animal king-
dom in the appetites, passions, emotions, desires, instincts and
impulses which we experience in common with the animal.
Even our motives, when judged by our actions, are often such
as to suggest the animal rather than the man.
But when we enter the realm of the purely psychical and
ethical we at once become aware that we are in a field unoccu-
pied by the animal, a field which appears to be reserved to
man alone. In other words, it is in the realm of the soul
that man rises to a distinct and exclusive level above and
beyond the limitations of the animal.
This is not intended to deny nor in the least degree mini-
mize the intelligence of animals. On the other hand, it will
be conceded by every intelligent student of natural history
that the animal displays many unmistakable evidences of a
nascent or dawning intelligence. A careful investigation and
study of these evidences, however, would seem to establish
certain fixed and definite limitations within which the opera-
tions of animal intelligence are circumscribed.
To a considerable extent, indeed, the animal intelligence
ON WHAT IT DEPENDS 319
appears to operate as a natural reflex of the purely physical
motives of animal Nature. It is, to all appearances, con-
cerned with an exclusive interest in its physical life and en-
vironment. The struggle for nutrition, for individual life,
for self -protection, for the gratification of the purely physical
appetites, passions, affections, emotions and desires, the in-
stinct of reproduction, the mother's care of her young, all
combine to make up the little world within which animal in-
telligence finds the limits of its achievements.
But not so in the larger domain of human intelligence.
Here we have most clearly defined those higher, sustained
activities of the analytic and synthetic mind which we desig-
nate as "Reason."
This power of inductive and deductive reasoning which
appears to be almost, if not entirely, wanting in the animal,
rises in man to a development apparently without fixed limita-
tions. Man reasons analytically, synthetically, inductively
and deductively on all the affairs of his own life as well as
on the lives of his fellow-men. He reasons upon his physical
body, his appetites, passions, impulses, desires and functions.
He reasons upon this life and the life to come. He reasons
upon the spirit and likewise upon the soul. He reasons upon
what he is, what he has been, and what he may yet become.
He reasons upon himself as an individual intelligence and as
a part of the great aggregate of Universal Intelligence. He
reasons upon things finite and things which appear to him to
be infinite. He reasons upon God and Nature, finite intelli-
gence and infinite intelligence. He reasons upon reason itself,
and in all his reasoning he is seldom content to stop short of
the ultimate.
It is upon this power of reason that he depends to guard
himself from the errors, mistakes and accidents of life. This
is the power which enables him to anticipate the natural and
logical results of his own actions.
Reason, in truth, is another of the primary, fundamental
and essential elements of human character at the basis of in-
dividual responsibility.
320 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
INDEPENDENT CHOICE.
A further study and comparison of animals and men dis-
covers another marked distinction between them, namely, in
the power of independent choice. The distinction here, as in
the case of consciousness and reason, is undoubtedly of a
psychic nature and referable to the Soul Element of Nature,
which is individualized in man alone.
The power of individual choice in the animal is so nearly
a reflex of the physical appetites, passions, affections, emo-
tions, desires and instincts that it apparently loses the element
of independence to a very large extent. In the elections and
selections of the animal we seldom discover anything to indi-
cate a clear and unqualified act of reason overthrowing the
appetites, passions, affections, desires, emotions and instincts.
But a careful analysis of the act and its motive seems to es-
tablish a natural concurrence of whatever reason is mani-
fested, with the physical and spiritual demands above enu-
merated. In other words, the moral element appears to be
wanting in the motives which govern animal life and action.
But in man this power of independent choice rises to the
highest level of his ethical nature. To the extent only that
man may, in truth, be said to be a creature of environment
would his power of individual choice appear to lack the ele-
ment of independence.
However much we may endeavor to excuse ourselves from
the natural penalties of our own mistakes, derelictions and
transgressions upon the theory that we are but "creatures of
circumstances," we know that our fellow men almost unani-
mously deal with us upon the assumption that we really do
possess the power of independent choice. Nor do we even
protest against such an assumption. On the contrary, we en-
courage it. Indeed, our pride of intelligence would be most
deeply offended if our friends and fellows should presume to
doubt or question our perfect independence. We therefore
accept the common judgment of our fellow men and in return
we hold them to the same standard of accountability.
In this power of independent and rational election, selec-
ON WHAT IT DEPENDS 321
tion and choice we recognize another of the primary, funda-
mental and essential elements of human character at the foun-
dation of individual responsibility.
INDEPENDENT, SELF-CONSCIOUS AND RATIONAL VOLITION.
Those who have given the subject any considerable amount
of thought and consideration have already discovered that an
independent, self-conscious and rational act is never performed
without an impulse of the will to set in motion the processes
by and through which the act is to be accomplished. This
impulse of the will we call "Volition."
This power of volition is possessed by animals as well as
by men. But here again we find a distinct line of differentia-
tion manifest. The animal volition responds in what appears
to be a semi-automatic manner to the animal impulses. It is
apparently little more than a reflex of the animal appetites,
passions, affections, emotions, desires and instincts.
To a marked degree, therefore, it lacks in one or more of
the elements of independence, self-consciousness and reason.
To the same degree it lacks the moral elements at the founda-
tion of individual responsibility.
A brief study of human nature is sufficient to make clear
the distinction which it is important to emphasize at this
point. Man in his normal physical and mental state of being
possesses the power to act independently. This means that
he is able to act unaided and uninfluenced by his fellow men.
He also possesses the power to act self-consciously. This
means that he is able to act knowingly and intentionally. And
finally, he has the power to act rationally. This means that
he is able to anticipate the natural and logical results of his
own acts within the scope of his acquired knowledge.
For the purpose of presenting this subject more vividly
to the mind of the analytical student the following brief dia-
gram is suggested as a valuable object lesson :
322 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
VOLITION
{Unaided
and
Uninfluenced
{Knowingly
and
Intentionally
{Anticipating
the
Results
RESPONSIBILITY
This simple diagram carries its own explanation. Whether
we admit it or not, the elements therein suggested are those
upon which we must and do depend in determining the ques-
tion of individual responsibility.
The unqualified truth of this statement will become per-
fectly apparent to every intelligent thinker who will take the
trouble to familiarize himself with the fundamental principles
underlying the criminal jurisprudence of our country. Upon
this subject the ablest minds of all the ages have been em-
ployed in an effort to work out a system or standard by which
to try and determine the motives and the actions of men with
perfect equity, justice and right.
Should he turn to the official record of any important crim-
inal trial he will find abundant confirmation of the foregoing
statements.
From the "indictment," which is the first legal document
containing the criminal charges, through all the evidence, the
testimony of witnesses, the objections of counsel, the rulings
of the court, the charge to the jury, the finding of the ver-
dict and the final judgment of the court upon the verdict,
there is but one general purpose. That purpose is to deter-
mine the guilt or innocence of the accused.
The first thing to be determined is whether the act charged
in the indictment was actually committed. If this be proved,
the second step is to determine whether the accused is the
person who committed the act so charged. If this also be
ON WHAT IT DEPENDS 323
proved, then the third step is to determine whether he did it
of his own volition. If it can be shown that he committed
the act charged, and did it voluntarily, then the inquiry is
narrowed to three simple questions, viz.:
1. Even though he committed the act charged and did it
of his own volition, did he act entirely independently? In
other words, was he aided or influenced by any one else? If
so, by whom and to what extent ?
2. Did he commit the act entirely self-consciously? That
is to say, did he act knowingly and intentionally?
3. Was he in the full possession of his reason at the time
the act was committed? Or, differently stated, was the act
his own rational act ? And this means, was he at the time able
to anticipate the logical and natural results of his act?
If all these conditions can be shown to have existed at the
time the act was committed, then the jury has nothing to do
but return a verdict of "Guilty as charged in the indictment"
(unless the element of self-defense enters into the case) and
the accused must suffer the full penalty of the law.
But if it can be shown that he did not act independently,
then it is the business of the court and jury to ascertain to
what extent he was aided or influenced by others, and by
whom. In just so far as it can be determined that he was
aided or influenced by others to commit the act, to that extent
it is the intent of the law to condone the offense. To that
extent also he is relieved of responsibility. To the same ex-
tent the responsibility for his act is fixed upon those who are
found to have aided or influenced him to commit it, and it
becomes the duty of the court to see that they are adequately
punished, if this be possible.
Again, if it can be shown that at the time of the commis-
sion of the act complained of he was not entirely self-con-
scious; in other words, if in any measure the act was com-
mitted without knowledge or intent on his part, then it is nec-
essary and proper to ascertain to what extent this was the case.
When it is determined to what extent the element of self-
consciousness was lacking at the time the act was committed,
to that extent he must be held not responsible. In the verdict
324: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
of the jury and the final judgment of the court upon the ver-
dict and in the sentence pronounced by the court the effort
will be made to give him the benefit to whatever extent he is
found to be not responsible.
And finally, the question of his sanity must be deter-
mined. If it can be shown that at the time of the commission
of the act he was not in full possession of his reason, it be-
comes the duty of the court and jury to ascertain to what ex-
tent he was unable to exercise his rational faculties, capacities
and powers. To what extent was he at the time unable to
rationally anticipate the logical and natural results of his act?
When this question is determined it is the intent of the law
to condone the offense to a degree commensurate with his lack
of rational understanding.
In other words, in just so far as it can be determined that
he was, at the time of the commission of the act, not in pos-
session of all his rational faculties, capacities and powers, to
that extent he is relieved from responsibility for the act so
committed. To that extent he is held to be excused from the
consequences of his act, and to the same extent his sentence
will be mitigated.
It is equally true that if it can be shown that he was de-
prived of the use of any of his natural faculties, capacities or
powers through the independent, self-conscious and rational
volition of another party, then he is not only relieved from re-
sponsibility but the responsibility for his act is transferred to
such third party, who must suffer the law's penalty therefor.
Thus it is found, and universally admitted, that the pri-
mary, fundamental and essential elements of individual respon-
sibility are:
1. SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS.
2. INDEPENDENT CHOICE.
3. REASON.
4. INDEPENDENT, SELF-CONSCIOUS AND RATIONAL VOLI-
TION.
Upon the basis of these elements of human character and
by the standard which they establish we judge our fellow men,
whether we admit it or not, and upon the same basis and by
ON WHAT IT DEPENDS 325
the same standard we are judged by them, whether we will it
or not.
But by reference to the introductory pages of this chapter
it will be observed that these elements of individual responsi-
bility are identical with those faculties, capacities and powers
of the Soul which are found to be distinctively and exclusively
human. These, it will be remembered, are the faculties, ca-
pacities and powers which distinguish man from all the rounds
of animal life which lie below him in the scale of evolution.
Animals do not possess them. Man does, and they belong to
man alone.
To these distinctive and exclusive, human possessions,
therefore, science is compelled to turn for the key which un-
locks to man the door of Individual Immortality.
It is found :
i. That man possesses the power of Individual Immor-
tality.
2. That he is the only individualized intelligent entity
which does possess it.
3. That he is the only entity within the range of scientific
knowledge in which are present all the elements of character
upon which individual responsibility depends.
4. That these elements of human character which consti-
tute the basis of individual responsibility are identical with
those distinctive and exclusive faculties, capacities and powers
which distinguish him from the animal, and on which he must
therefore depend in his struggle for Individual Immortality.
In other words, Universal Intelligence has invested man
with certain intelligent faculties, capacities and powers which
make him individually responsible under the law of his be-
ing. By the proper exercise and use of these intelligent facul-
ties, capacities and powers he discharges his individual respon-
sibility and at the same time achieves Nature's just reward
therefor, which is Individual Immortality.
By the surrender or abuse of these intelligent faculties, ca-
pacities and powers he violates the constructive law of his
being, invokes upon himself the operation of Nature's De-
structive Principle, and enters upon the downward path of life,
THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the ultimate destination of which appears to be individual
extinction, dissolution and a resolution back into Nature's
elements from which he came.
From the foregoing facts and analysis we are brought face
to face with the following irresistible and irrefutable conclu-
sions, viz.:
i. Whatever in Nature shall interfere with the free and
independent exercise and use of those primary, fundamental
and essential faculties, capacities and powers which form the
basis of man's individual responsibility, must inevitably ob-
struct his pathway toward Individual Immortality.
2. Whatsoever, or whosoever shall divest or deprive man
of the free exercise and use of those faculties, capacities and
powers upon which his individual responsibility depends at-
tacks the very essence of his being and invokes upon him the
operation of Nature's Destructive Principle.
3. Whosoever attacks those distinctive and exclusive fac-
ulties, capacities and powers by and through the free and in-
dependent exercise and use of which man asserts and maintains
his position as a responsible individual intelligence and upon
which he must depend for the achievement of Individual Im-
mortality, is a menace to society, an obstruction to individual
progress and an enemy of mankind. For,
THIS IS THE WAY OF DEATH.
SELF-CONTROL, THE APPLICATION 327
CHAPTER VI.
SELF-CONTROL, THE APPLICATION.
The following brief recapitulation will make clear the ap-
plication of the principle under consideration :
i. There are two great fundamental principles of Nature
which are forever contending for supremacy in the life of
every intelligent soul.
2,. One of these is known to science as the Constructive
Principle of Nature in Individual Life.
3. The other is known and designated as The Destructive
Principle of Nature in Individual Life.
4. Man possesses the power to conform his life to either
of these fundamental principles at will.
5. By conforming his life to Nature's Constructive Prin-
ciple he discharges his individual responsibility to himself, to
his fellow man and to Nature, or Universal Intelligence.
6. By this discharge of his individual responsibility he
earns Nature's reward therefor, which is Individual Immortal-
ity, Self-Completion and perfect Happiness both here and
hereafter.
7. By the achievement of Individual Immortality the in-
dividual rises superior to the Destructive Principle of Nature,
and triumphs over all things whatsoever that obstruct his
pathway toward the ultimate evolutionary goal of individual
life and intelligence.
8. By conforming his life to Nature's Destructive Prin-
ciple he fails in the discharge of his individual responsibility
to himself, to his fellow man and to Nature, or Universal In-
telligence.
9. By such failure or refusal to discharge his individual
responsibility he thereby enters upon the pathway of Death.
He must inevitably suffer Nature's penalties therefor. These
penalties, so far as known to science, are individual unhappi-
ness and loss both here and hereafter, leading with unerring
certainty to ultimate dissolution, disintegration, individual ex-
328 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
tinction and a resolution back into Nature's elements from
which he came.
10. Man possesses certain well defined attributes of indi-
vidual nature which are distinctively and exclusively human.
11. These are the attributes of the Soul.
12. They are Self -Consciousness, Reason, Independent
Choice, and Independent, Self-Conscious and Rational Voli-
tion.
13. Upon his own free and independent control and exer-
cise of these individual attributes of the soul man must depend
for his ability to co-operate with Nature's Constructive Prin-
ciple, discharge his individual responsibility, achieve Indi-
vidual Immortality and Self-Completion, and attain Happi-
ness both here and hereafter.
14. Whatever deprives him of his own free, independent
and voluntary control and exercise of these fundamental at-
tributes of the soul thereby robs him of his power to co-oper-
ate with Nature's Constructive Principle, discharge his indi-
vidual responsibility or achieve Individual Immortality and
Self -Completion, and destroys the possibility of his happiness
both here and hereafter.
THE APPLICATION.
Hypnotism is a subjective, psychic process.
In so far as it exists at any given time it paralyzes the
will and voluntary powers of the subject.
To exactly this extent it deprives him of his own free and
independent control and exercise of all those attributes of the
soul upon which he must depend for his ability to co-operate
with Nature's Constructive Principle, discharge his individual
responsibility, achieve Individual Immortality and Self-Com-
pletion, as well as Happiness either here or hereafter.
Mediumship, like hypnotism, is a subjective, psychic pro-
cess.
Like hypnotism, also, in just so far as it exists at any given
time it paralyzes the will and voluntary powers of the me-
dium.
Tc whatever extent this condition obtains at any given time
SELF-CONTROL, THE APPLICATION
it deprives the medium of his own free and independent con-
trol and exercise of all those attributes of the soul upon which
he must depend for the achievement of Individual Immortal-
ity, Self-Completion, and happiness both here and hereafter.
Hypnotism and Mediumship, therefore, are manifestations
of Nature's Destructive Principle in operation in Individual
Life.
In just so far as they exist, the process involved violates
every constructive principle of Nature in Individual Life,
trespasses upon every inalienable right, privilege and pos-
session of the soul, and invokes the immediate operation of
the Destructive Principle of Nature in Individual Life.
The individual who makes this election and consistently
adheres to it thereby places himself upon the broad highway
to unhappiness here and hereafter, the ultimate destination of
which, so far as science knows, is ultimate dissolution, dis-
integration, total individual extinction and a resolution of the
individual entity, physically, spiritually and psychically, back
into the original elements from which it came.
This is "The Second Death."
This is "Spiritual Death."
This is Psychical Death, "The Death of the Soul."
And this is THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME.
330 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
CHAPTER VII.
THE LINE OF DESPAIR AND THE POWERS OF DARKNESS.
"Who enters here leaves Hope behind."
Hypnotism and Mediumship are not the only psychologi-
cal crimes possible to individual intelligence. Indeed, they
exemplify but two of the many methods or processes by and
through which man may subject his fellow man or be sub-
jected to the operation of Nature's Destructive Principle in
such manner as to invoke the penalties which Nature pre-
scribes therefor.
The scope and purpose of this volume, however, are such
as to preclude the consideration of other subjects and limit us
to an examination of Nature's Destructive Principle in Indi-
vidual Life as it exemplifies itself in these particular processes
of psychic subjectivity and psychic control.
Notwithstanding these limitations it would seem proper to
call attention at this point to the important fact that while
there are many different methods and processes by and through
which Nature's Destructive Principle may be invoked, yet
the fundamental principle itself is always the same. It in-
volves the relationship of activity to passivity, positive to nega-
tive, energy to inertia, strength to weakness, aggression to
suppression, domination to submission, Control to Subjection.
It may also be said, for it so appears from all the known
facts of science, that all crime is referable to these relationships.
The powerful, energetic, ambitious, positive, active, aggres-
sive, dominating and controlling intelligence in the gratifica-
tion of selfishness and vanity is guilty of the crimes and sins
of commission. The weak, timid, credulous, inert, negative,
passive, submissive, yielding and surrendering intelligence is
responsible for the crimes and sins of omission. Acting to-
gether they accomplish all the crimes and sins known to the
calendar of Nature.
In order that the subject may not be dismissed from the
mind and consciousness with an imperfect conception or a de-
THE LINE OF DESPAIR 331
fective understanding of the principle involved in Hypnotism
and Mediumship, it is necessary to know something definitely
of the manner in which the law exemplifies itself upon the
spiritual planes of life.
To accomplish this result repetition, to some extent, is un-
avoidable. The importance of the subject, however, is such
as to clearly justify whatever restatement of data may be-
come necessary in this connection.
It is not the province of science to speculate nor dogma-
tize concerning ultimates. Natural Science does not claim nor
assume to have solved the great problem of the soul's ultimate
destiny. So far as it has gone, however, in its accumulation
of scientific data bearing upon this subject, there appear to be
three distinct psychological states of being that are suggestive
of ultimate evolutionary possibilities. These may be dimly
suggested by the terms, "good, indifferent and bad;" or by
"improvement, uncertainty and degeneracy ;" or by "progress,
stagnation and retrogression."
In the first and highest of these three states the individual
has reached an evolutionary altitude where truth for its own
sake is more attractive to him than falsehood with all its al-
luring promises of selfish advantage. Light is more attractive
to him than darkness. It is more agreeable and pleasant to
do right for the sake of principle than to do wrong for selfish
gain. It is easier to rise to higher levels of life and action than
sink to lower planes of existence. In this state reason has
finally triumphed over all the debasing influences of the appe-
tites, passions, emotions, impulses and desires. Harmony and
co-operation are established between the self-consciousness,
reason, independent choice and volition of man, and the self-
control for which he has striven is now an established fact.
He is liberated from all the forces, activities and processes of
Nature, both within and without, which would enslave the
soul. He is emancipated from all subjective conditions and
processes and all the predominating tendencies of the soul set
toward light and life and the attainment of Individual Immor-
tality.
The line which marks the level of this evolutionary devel-
332 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
opment and individual triumph may well be known as "The
Line of Victory." It marks the plane of the greatest victory
of individual life, the final victory over self in the achievement
of individual self-control.
The second or middle psychological state of being lies im-
mediately below the first. It is the battle ground of individual
life. It is here that every individual intelligence must fight the
crucial battle of self. Here it is that he is subject to the active
play of all the opposing and contending forces of Nature.
His intelligence, reason, intuitions and aspirations all exert
their buoyant effect upon his life and tend to lift him upward
into the light of a higher knowledge and a higher life. His
evil appetites, passions, emotions, impulses and desires all tend
to drag him downward.
His environment and associations exert the same double
influence upon him. Those who are above him in point of
knowledge, development and power give him courage and
hope and inspiration to rise with them into the light. Those
who are yet below him exert their influence with equal persist-
ence to drag him downward to their level and into the dark-
ness.
And so it is that here in this middle ground his intelli-
gence, reason, conscience, intuitions and aspirations and all the
powers of light are pitted against the evil tendencies of his
individual nature and all the powers of darkness. This, there-
fore, is the realm of vacillation, and uncertainty. Today the
soul sets toward the light. Tomorrow it seeks the world of
darkness. Today the good triumphs. Tomorrow the evil
tendencies predominate. The ultimate issue is yet undeter-
mined. The soul is being weighed in the balance.
This is the psychological state of evolutionary develop-
ment where and in which future possibilities are determined.
In this middle state the spiritual gravity of the individual
is naturally downward, except for the power he possesses to
lift himself by his own efforts. The following analogy will
serve to make this condition more clearly understood :
For instance: The weight of an eagle's body is many
times greater than that of the air in which it flies. It there-
THE LINE OF DESPAIR 333
fore naturally gravitates toward the earth. Under the law of
its gravity, if left alone, it would fall to the ground never to
rise again. But this monarch of the air has the power within
itself and of its own right to overcome the force of gravity
and rise at will to realms beyond the clouds and the shadows
of earth into the clear sunlight of heaven.
Thus it is with man in this second psychological state or
condition. When left alone to the mercy of the elements and
the play of Nature's forces his spiritual gravity carries him
downward toward the realms of darkness and death. But
he has within himself and of his own right the power to over-
come the downward tendencies of his spiritual gravity and
rise at will into the realms of light and life and Individual Im-
mortality.
It is but a question of whether he will or not. As it is
with the eagle so it is with man himself. If he would rise and
soar above the shadowland of earth he must do so by the self-
control and exercise of those individual faculties, capacities
and powers of the soul through which he is enabled to dis-
charge his individual responsibility and at the same time earn
Nature's reward therefor, which is Individual Immortality.
From the standpoint of science it would appear that these are
the wings which God or Nature has given him with which to
rise in triumph above all the opposing forces of Nature.
At the lower level of this second or middle psychological
state of man runs another line, a fixed and immutable line of
Nature. From its portentous and appalling significance the
Masters of Natural Science have aptly named it "The Line of
Despair."
Below the level of this line of psychic condition lies the
realm of spiritual darkness and spiritual death. Those who in
their downward flight cross this line "leave hope behind."
This is the bourne whence neither man nor woman ever re-
turns. This line of despair marks the level at which the De-
structive Principle of Nature in Individual Life becomes
triumphant. It marks that point in the devolution of man-
kind where all the elements of individual being, spiritual, men-
tal and moral, set toward darkness and death.
334: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Let it be remembered that so long as there remains one as-
piration for good, one desire for light, one cry of conscience,
one prayer for help, Nature responds and sends her messen-
gers. But when man in his downward flight crosses this Line
of Despair he passes beyond the reach of those who would
or could help him to rise again. Those attributes of the soul
which distinguish him from the animal no longer respond to
the power of will. At the crossing of this line, therefore, he
sinks to the level of animal nature. Like the animal he lives
for a time in this world of progressive degeneracy and then
goes down to spiritual death.
What the scientific significance of this second or spiritual
death may be is, as yet, the great unsolved problem of Nature.
So far as science knows, this means the death of the soul, or
total individual extinction and a resolution of the individual
entity in all its essential nature back into the elements from
which it came. And
THIS is "HELL."
THE LAW OF SPIRITUAL GRAVITY 335
CHAPTER VIII.
THE LAW OF SPIRITUAL GRAVITY.
The Law of Spiritual Gravity is Nature's gravimeter by
which to try and determine the evolutionary status of the souls
of men and women in this life as well as in the life to come.
It is therefore in essence a psychic law. Inasmuch, how-
ever, as it manifests itself upon the spiritual planes of life in
terms of spiritual conditions according to the status of the
spiritual body, it has come to be known as the Law of Spirit-
ual Gravity. For the sake of simplicity and to avoid confusion
it will be so designated in this work.
Under and by virtue of this Law of Spiritual Gravity each
one of us at physical death either rises or sinks as the case
may be to a level of spiritual life and evolution exactly com-
mensurate with his life and development immediately prior
thereto.
That is to say, in our essential being the transition called
death does not affect us. We are neither essentially wiser nor
essentially better upon our entry into that life than we are
upon our exit from this, save and except in just so far as the
experience of making the transit itself is concerned.
In just so far as we have been subjects of or slaves to our
evil appetites, passions, desires and propensities here we re-
main so there until by the power of self-control we lift our-
selves above them to higher levels of spiritual life. In so
far as we have been subjects of hypnotism and mediumship
here we remain so there until we are liberated through the
development of the latent power of self-control.
Thus, under the operation of the Law of Spiritual Gravity
this physical life is fraught with momentous significance and
unlimited possibilities. It is, in fact, the training ground from
which we pass to a higher conflict. The life we live here de-
termines the level to which we gravitate there.
We may, if we will, so avail ourselves of the opportunities
of this life as to lift the soul at physical death above the Line
of Victory into the realms of light and life and Individual Im-
336 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
mortality. Or, we may by our indifference to the possibilities
of another life develop a Spiritual Gravity which at physical
death will carry us into that great middle psychological state
which lies below the Line of Victory and above the Line of
Despair, but still within the midst of the great battle of life.
In like manner, by complete surrender to the destructive
power of our evil appetites, passions, desires, impulses, emo-
tions and propensities, or by the deliberate and intentional
abuse of the knowledge we possess and the forces we command
we may destroy the powers by which it is possible for us to as-
cend the scale of evolutionary development. By the intentional
abuse of knowledge and the deliberate misuse of power we may
establish a Spiritual Gravity which at physical death will carry
us at once below the level of the Line of Despair into the
realm of spiritual darkness and spiritual death.
These are not the poetic imaginings of a Dante nor a Mil-
ton. They are not the charming mysticism of a Balzac nor a
Corelli. They are not the metaphysical misconceptions of any
creed or religion. On the other hand, they are the deter-
mined results of a definite science.
The thoughtful student will not fail to note the fact that the
Catholic doctrine and dogma of Hell, Purgatory and Paradise,
is not entirely without foundation in the Law of Spiritual
Gravity. It is evident to those who have followed the history
of that organization that the dogmatists of that church have
sensed the existence of this great law. In its "Indulgences"
and "Absolutions/' however, it violates the fundamental law of
Nature which underlies the development of individual life and
thereby entirely nullifies the value of its near approach to this
great fundamental truth.
If at this point the student should ask concerning the effect
of the Law of Spiritual Gravity upon the doctrine of reincar-
nation, it is only necessary to state :
1. The subject of reincarnation is not under consideration
in this work.
2. Even if it were an established fact, it could not in the
least degree mitigate nor modify the law of individual life here
outlined. The Law of Spiritual Gravity has been scientifically
THE LAW OF SPIRITUAL GRAVITY 337
determined as far as it is possible for finite intelligence to de-
termine any law, and to whatever extent the doctrine of rein-
carnation or any other doctrine proves to be true, it cannot
conflict with an established law of Nature.
Under the Law of Spiritual Gravity in its relation to the
evolution of individual intelligence, Individual Immortality
is an achievement of the Soul and not an arbitrary imposition
of God or Nature upon all mankind without regard to indi-
vidual choice. It is a reward guaranteed by Nature to each
individual man and woman for the right application of ac-
quired knowledge and the right use of developed powers.
In its evolutionary ascent under the paternal dominion
and guidance of God, or Nature, or Universal Intelligence
(whichever term may best express the intelligence which mani-
fests itself in all the forces, activities and processes of Nature)
the individualized, intelligent entity reaches its "majority," so
to speak, at the estate of man.
At this evolutionary point the Great Intelligence invests the
individual entity with the soul attributes of Self-Conscious-
ness, Reason, Independent Choice, and an independent, self-
conscious and rational Volition necessary to its self-preserva-
tion and independent action; then severs the tie which makes
it a "Child of Nature" and emancipates it from all paternal
dominion and control.
The individual, by virtue of the Soul attributes with which
he is thus invested, comes to his "majority" with a full and
complete understanding and recognition of his emancipation
from paternal authority, and voluntarily assumes the duties,
obligations and responsibilities which his freedom imposes.
This is why he calls himself a "free moral agent" and a "re-
sponsible individual intelligence."
The young man who reaches the period of his majority
under the civil law thereby, without further act, process or
formality, becomes an independent citizen of the state. He
attains this status by the simple processes of Nature over
which he has no control whatever. And yet, he knows that
from the moment or the instant he reaches this point in the
338 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
process of his individual unfoldment he occupies a wholly dif-
ferent position before the law.
He can no longer demand nor claim paternal protection.
Neither is he bound by filial obligations and responsibilities,
save and except such as he voluntarily assumes. He is now a
responsible individual intelligence before the law. He is a
citizen of the state, with all the rights, privileges, duties, ob-
ligations and responsibilities which are the natural concomi-
tants of such a citizenship. He occupies a status quite differ-
ent from that prior to his majority. During his minority he
had neither rights, privileges, duties, obligations nor respon-
sibilities, save such as were his by virtue of his infancy.
So it appears that under the evolutionary process the in-
dividual entity, without further act, process or formality,
reaches its majority at the estate of man. From the instant
he emerges from the infancy of animal nature into the estate
of man he can no longer hold Nature or the Great Intelligence
responsible for his own individual life or conduct. He can
no longer demand or claim paternal protection as an inalien-
able right, save and except as he earns it. He is no longer
bound by filial duties, obligations or responsibilities, save such
as he voluntarily assumes.
But he is now a citizen of the great world, entitled to all
the rights and privileges and bound by all the duties, obliga-
tions and responsibilities which are the natural concomitants
of such a citizenship. He is therefore still within the juris-
diction of both law and order.
But like the citizen of the state, he may either obey the
law or violate it at will. Neither God nor Nature assumes to
compel obedience to nor prevent violations of the law. This
is a matter which the individual alone must determine. Na-
ture assumes only to reward obedience to and punish violations
and infractions of her laws.
If by his own free will and independent choice he elects
to acknowledge and respect the majesty of the law he thereby
earns the rewards and benefits which the law guarantees. If,
on the other hand, he elects to violate or disregard the duties
THE LAW OF SPIRITUAL GRAVITY 339
and obligations which the law imposes he must suffer the in-
evitable penalties which the law prescribes therefor.
But in the realm of this higher citizenship of the Soul
there is but one law, the great Law of Justice.
By obedience to this law we discharge our individual re-
sponsibility and thereby earn Nature's reward therefor, which
is Individual Immortality. And this, to us, is Compensatory
Justice.
By our violation of this same great law we incur the pen-
alty which Nature prescribes therefor, which, according to the
terminology of Natural Science, is Spiritual Death, the Second
Death, or total Individual Extinction. And this, to us, is
Retributive Justice.
Thus, in its final analysis the Law of Justice, as it is known
and exemplified in the realm of the soul's citizenship, is the
law of individual Life and Death. Under the operation of
this law the right of individual and independent choice is an
inalienable and inviolable right of every individual man and
woman.
In accordance therewith man is, in the most exact and lit-
eral sense, the arbiter of his own destiny. He goes to that
destiny, whether it be in the realm of light and life and Im-
mortality, or in that of darkness, disintegration and Death,
because he and he alone has so elected. And this is the scien-
tific "Doctrine of Election."
A more comprehensive understanding of the Law of Spir-
itual Gravity may be obtained by noting the interesting manner
in which it exemplifies itself in the daily lives of men and wo-
men upon the plane of this present physical life.
Humanity everywhere, in a large and general sense, groups
itself in accordance with this law.
For illustration, men whose lives are dominated by politi-
cal ambitions, political motives or political interests, in gen-
eral, are drawn together by this same Law of Spiritual Grav-
ity and they form themselves into political clubs. They nat-
urally gravitate to the common level of "politics."
Men and women who are attracted by the same ethical or
religious creeds, principles and purposes gravitate together by
340 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
virtue of the same law and form themselves into churches or
societies. They meet upon the common level of the creed or
ethical standard they adopt and the work in which they en-
gage.
Men and women whose lives are dominated by the glitter
and the license of wealth are drawn together by the common
bonds of estheticism, vanity and licentiousness and form
themselves into exclusive social sets. Under the operation of
the same law they gravitate to the so-called fashionable sec-
tions of all the great cities of the world. Here they build
themselves mansions and castles and surround themselves with
all the beauty, luxury and license that wealth can buy.
Men and women who are ruled by the lusts of the flesh,
but without the wealth to purchase social and legal amenities,
gravitate together upon the common level of the brothel and
the house of prostitution. By the same law they are found
grouped together in the slums of all the great cities. In rec-
ognition of the moral and spiritual level to which they natur-
ally gravitate the women of this class have come to be known
with singular significance as the "demi monde," or the under
world of society.
And so it is with those who are moved to action by the
nobler inspirations of life.
The Salvation Army, than which perhaps no single agency
has accomplished greater good in its chosen field of labor, is
drawn together by the same general law and does its work
upon the common level of the public street.
It may be incidentally remarked in passing that the work
of these earnest enthusiasts is effective because of their ability
to carry their active sympathies with them down to the spir-
itual as well as the physical level of those whose emancipation
constitutes the burden of their common labors. This is be-
cause they themselves have come up out of the same condi-
tions and therefore fully understand them.
Thus the Law of Spiritual Gravity obtains upon all the
planes and in all the conditions of life both here and here-
after, as far as it has been possible to follow its operations.
THE LAW OF SPIRITUAL GRAVITY 341
It exemplifies itself in all the departments of Nature and upon
all the levels of individual life, so far as we know them.
With this primary and vital law of Nature, therefore,
clearly in mind it is now possible for us to pass at once to
an intelligent consideration of the post mortem effects of hyp-
notism and mediumship upon both the subject and the opera-
tor.
The law which binds a physically disembodied subject of
hypnotism to its physically embodied hypnotist has been suffi-
ciently considered in Part I of this volume. It now remains
to note the results after the hypnotist also shall have passed
through the gates of physical death and shall once more stand
consciously face to face with his subjects upon the planes of
spiritual life. Then it is that he obtains, perhaps, his first
comprehensive understanding of the fundamental Law of
Justice in its twofold aspect of Compensation and Retribution.
Under the Compensatory side of this law every unselfish
act done in behalf of one's fellow man brings to the benefactor
a definite soul reward. It lightens the Gravity of the Spirit
and permits the Soul to rise in obedience to the law of its es-
sential being to realms of greater light and fuller life.
Under the Retributive side of this same law every act of
this life or the life to come, so far as we know, which pur-
posely deprives a fellow man of that which of right is his
brings to the wrongdoer a definite soul retribution. It in-
creases and intensifies his Spiritual Gravity and in obedience
to the law of his essential being he sinks toward the realm of
darkness and spiritual death.
Under its Compensatory side every unselfish act which
brings comfort, aid, joy, happiness or good to another carries
with it the obligation upon the one so receiving to give in
equal measure to those who need.
Under its Retributive side every act of this life or of the
life to come, so far as known, which purposely deprives a fel-
low man of that which of right is his thereby fixes upon the
wrongdoer the individual responsibility of righting the wrong
himself if it be within his power, otherwise of rendering an
equivalent service to those who need that which he can give.
342 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Under the twofold aspect and operation of this great law
the individual who knowingly and intentionally surrenders
an inalienable right of the soul can never entirely recover it
by his own individual effort alone. He must seek for and ob-
tain the help of those who are able to give that which by such
a surrender he has permitted to pass beyond the limits of his
own individual powers.
When the hypnotist, therefore, emerges from the valley of
the shadow of death freed from the encumbrance of a physi-
cal body he realizes that the demands of his subjects have
long since matured. He finds those whose inalienable rights
he has sequestered (and who have not yet been able by the
help of others to regain them) awaiting his coming.
Their demands, being duly presented and verified in ac-
cordance with the "Statutes of Nature/' are scheduled in the
inventory of his fixed liabilities. Not only this, every such
demand is a "preferred claim" under the law of its creation.
It is therefore not subject to "discount." It cannot be com-
promised nor "prorated." It must be paid "in full."
The hypnotist, therefore, finds himself a spiritual mendi-
cant, a pauper, a defaulting debtor. He is an insolvent, a
bankrupt, without the benefit or advantage of an insolvency
or bankrupt law or proceeding under which to relieve himself
by scaling his liabilities. What, then, can he do?
There is but one alternative. He must either repudiate
his liabilities and suffer the penalties which the law prescribes,
or he must throw himself upon the mercy of the court and
ask for time and opportunity to "work them out."
Fortunately, Nature is never impatient with those who hon-
estly and humbly seek to discharge their just liabilities under
her laws. She never demands more from her citizens than
they are able to perform. To the hypnotist, therefore, she
would seem to say : "These are your obligations. You alone
are responsible for their creation. You, therefore, must liqui-
date them. While it may not be possible for you to meet
them all at once, you can at least begin now. If you in good
faith honor the law's demands you shall have whatever time
the full limit of your abilities may require to make restitu-
THE LAW OF SPIRITUAL GRAVITY 343
tion. Go, therefore, and in the order of their maturity repay
the debts you owe. By your individual service you may work
them out, rendering to each and every creditor in rightful turn
the full measure of his just demands."
Thus it is that under the Law of Retributive Justice the
man who enslaves the souls of his fellow men, by the same act
forges about his own neck the iron collar of servitude. In
the realm of the soul the tyrant master becomes the slave of
his own tyranny. Nor can he escape from this self-imposed
bondage save by the narrow and steep pathway of servitude.
He cannot claim emancipation for himself until the Law of
Retributive Justice is fully satisfied.
A leading hypnotist of this country is reported to have re-
cently fixed the number of his subjects at something like two
thousand. He thus confesses judgment in advance in favor
of each and every one of these individuals when he shall stand
with them upon the common level of spiritual life. To what-
ever extent he has deprived each one of these two thousand
subjects of the inalienable right and power of self-control to
that extent he has irrevocably fixed upon himself the burden
of retribution. In the same measure he has invoked upon
himself the operation of the Law of Spiritual Gravity. Un-
der its immutable provisions he must sink to the level of the
law's demands.
Precisely the same law governs the relation of the spiritual
control to its medium. The spiritual intelligence who de-
prives a medium of the power of self-control thereby, to the
same extent, forges the chains of servitude upon himself. In
obedience to the same law he must repair the injury thus
wrought, if it be within his power, and if not, then he must
render an equivalent service to those who need the help which
he can give. There is absolutely no escape if he would rise
to higher levels of life and achievement upon the spiritual
planes.
The following, within the personal knowledge of the writer,
will serve to more fully illustrate the meaning and the prac-
tical application and operation of the law:
Some years ago one of the leading physicians and sur-
344 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
geons of the middle west died. If his name were here men-
tioned there are still many of his old-time friends in the flesh
who would be glad to acknowledge their indebtedness to his
kindness and medical and surgical skill. A few months after
his death a lady, who during his lifetime had been one of his
patients, was visiting at the home of a friend who had become
somewhat interested in the planchette. Out of curiosity and
partly in reply to a banter from her friend she put her hand
upon the instrument. To her great astonishment it imme-
diately spelled out the name of the eminent physician.
Naturally this initial experience led to further experimenta-
tion, and in a short time messages of undoubted authenticity
were received from the doctor to various friends and relatives
whom he had left behind. This was followed by the organiza-
tion of a "developing circle" at which the lady was soon de-
veloped as a trance speaking medium with the eminent doctor
as her chief control.
Things moved along smoothly for some time until a great
many of the doctor's former friends and associates became
deeply interested in the developments. But in course of
time, as it so often transpires, evil intelligences forced them-
selves into the environment.
The doctor then, for the first time, appeared to realize his
mistake. He found, to his unspeakable horror and regret,
that he had opened the door of control to the entire spiritual
world, or to as many of that world as chose to exercise their
power to that end. He then saw and understood the destruc-
tive nature of the process employed. He was forced to ob-
serve that it was not only sapping her physical vitality, but
that she was being psychically destroyed as well.
Recognizing his own responsibility in the matter, and be-
ing a man of the keenest sense of justice, he undertook the
task of protecting her from the domination of these vicious in-
fluences until such time as she could be educated in the power
of self-control beyond the range of their malevolent influence.
This task of education and reinvestment has thus far proved
to be beyond the limits of the good doctor's powers. His
subject is still a tractable instrument to whatever spiritual in-
THE LAW OF SPIRITUAL GRAVITY 345
telligences desire to control her. The eminent doctor, there-
fore, is now obliged to devote all his time and effort to her
protection. Although he has learned the destructive char-
acter of the mediumistic process, it nevertheless often occurs
that the only method by which he can prevent her from falling
under the control of the most vicious and dangerous spir-
itual intelligences, is to control her himself. Although he has
now learned that every time he controls her he violates the very
fundamental law of her being, nevertheless he is placed in the
unhappy position of being compelled to choose between two
evils.
At the present time this innocent victim of mediumistic
control would be pronounced by all regular physicians who do
not understand the nature of her case to be a fit subject for
the insane asylum. She would undoubtedly be sent to such
an institution if it were not for the fact that the members of
her own household understand, in some measure, the real cause
of her condition.
While it is not at all likely, under all the circumstances,
that she will live but a few years or possibly months more,
yet however long her physical life may be prolonged, the
doctor is bound to a most humiliating servitude from which
there is no escape under the law of individual responsibility.
But this is not all. When she also shall have crossed the
troubled waters, he must still protect her and educate her
and aid her until she is once more invested with the power of
self-control.
Many pertinent questions are likely to present themselves
to the mind of the student in this connection.
For instance: Did the learned doctor understand the law
and its penalties at the time he first controlled this medium?
Why did he control her at all? Do these evil spirits who are
always ready to rush in wherever the door is opened under-
stand the law? Do they know that by this same process they
not only destroy the medium but at the same time bind them-
selves to further servitude? Do they know the effect this has
upon their Spiritual Gravity? If so, why do they do it?
etc., etc.
346 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Briefly answering these questions:
1. The doctor in this particular instance did not fully un-
derstand the nature or results of the mediumistic process at
the beginning of his experiment. Had he known that it was
destructive in its effects, there is every reason for believing
from his known reputation for honesty and morality, that he
never would have entered into the relation. His ignorance of
the law, however, could not in the least mitigate its results
in so far as the medium herself is concerned. Fire burns just
the same whether one falls into it by accident or is thrust into
it by design. The effects upon the doctor himself, however,
present quite another question. The lack of evil intent would
be in his favor and would somewhat modify the results.
2. His desire to communicate with his friends in the
flesh was doubtless very strong. It would seem that this is
equally true of the very large majority of those who pass into
that life. Nor should we be surprised that this is so when
we remember how strong is our own desire to hear from those
who have gone before us into that country. This simple de-
sire to keep in touch with his former friends and relatives was
doubtless the motive which prompted him to seek that method
of communication. Nor can we find aught in such a motive
to condemn. In this instance nothing but the process em-
ployed is subject to condemnation.
3. Some of these evil spirits understand the law very fully
while others do not.
4. Those who have been in that life long enough to have
learned the law, fully understand its effects upon themselves
and the obligations they assume thereunder.
5. They defy the law, however, and invoke its penalties
for the same reasons that men in the flesh do the same thing.
To an inhabitant of another planet where knowledge is never
abused (if there be any such) it would doubtless appear
strange that men will deliberately go on drinking liquor to ex-
cess when they know full well that it is only killing them.
To one who has never experienced the effects of morphine,
opium or cocaine it might also appear strange that any intelli-
gent individual would ever become addicted to their use. But
THE LAW OF SPIRITUAL GRAVITY 347
these are phenomena with which we are all so familiar that
we think but little or nothing of them. And yet, they fully
explain why it is that spiritual intelligences will defy the laws
of their being even though death be the result. It is because
in the gratification of selfish ambitions and desires men often
prefer to defy the law and suffer its penalties rather than
obey it and earn its rewards. It is simply a matter of indi-
vidual choice.
It must be remembered that the power of independent
choice is an inalienable right of the soul. It is as absolute
and indefeasible upon the spiritual planes as it is upon the
physical. Men are therefore no more compelled to obey the
law of life there than they are here. It is there, as it is here,
a matter of individual choice. We all know that food is nec-
essary to sustain physical life. Not one of us, however, is
compelled to take it. We all likewise know that too much
food is almost as dangerous to physical life and health as too
little, but we are not compelled to stop eating when the law
of health has been complied with. These are matters of indi-
vidual choice. While we all know the law fully and under-
stand the exact meaning of its penalties, we are nevertheless
able to defy it if we so elect. But we cannot evade nor avoid
its penalties.
There is, however, an important distinction between the
position of the hypnotist and that of the spiritual control
which might be overlooked if attention were not called to it
in this connection.
The hypnotic process and the mediumistic process are in
essence the same thing as far as they go. This has been fully
developed in a previous chapter. But it must be remembered
that the hypnotist is on the same plane with his subjects while
the spiritual control is not. For this reason the hypnotist has
an immense advantage in point of facility. He is therefore
in position to accomplish vastly more harm upon the physical
plane to both himself and others.
For instance : One professional hypnotist alone who is
devoting his time and effort to his profession may, perhaps,
within the period of a very few years acomplish the complete
348 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
subjection and control of a thousand different subjects. One
spiritual control, however, very rarely accomplishes the devel-
opment of more than a dozen mediums within the period of
an average physical lifetime. After a medium is once fully
developed and the condition of psychic subjectivity completely
established it is then possible for a thousand spiritual controls
to operate successfully through the one instrument during a
single year.
Thus, a single hypnotist, under the Law of Retributive
Justice, may easily bind himself in the bonds of servitude to
a thousand subjects, while a thousand spiritual controls may be
able to divide among themselves the responsibility for the
subjection of a single medium.
From this view of the subject it will be easily understood
and appreciated that in proportion to numbers the hypnotist
is by far the more dangerous factor in society.
It is also true that under the Law of Retributive Justice
and Spiritual Gravity he is also the greater sufferer in exactly
the same proportion upon the spiritual planes of life.
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 349
CHAPTER IX.
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS.
I.
To THE HYPNOTIST.
In accordance with the facts discovered and the principles
demonstrated Natural Science is in position to declare with
scientific certainty, and does so declare:
Hypnotism is a subjective, psychic process.
It is the process by and through which you obtain, hold
and exercise control of the will, voluntary powers and sen-
sory organism of your subjects.
By your own testimony, as well as that of every honest
hypnotist who has ever testified upon the subject, you stand
convicted of teaching and practicing a process which deprives
your subjects of the inalienable right and power of individual
self-control.
In exact proportion as you establish hypnotic control of
your subject's will, voluntary powers ?..id sensory organism
you thereby and at the same time deprive him of the power of
self-control.
In proportion as you deprive him of the power of self-
control you thereby and at the same time deprive him of that
upon which his individual responsibility and moral status
depend.
In proportion as you deprive him of the free and indepen-
dent control and exercise of those attributes and powers of the
soul upon which his individual responsibility and moral status
depend you thereby and at the same time rob him of those
powers upon which he must depend for the achievement of
Individual Immortality.
In proportion as you deprive him of the powers upon which
he must depend for the achievement of Individual Immortality
you thereby and at the same time condemn him to Spiritual
Darkness, Disintegration and Death.
In the same proportion you, by the same act and at the
350 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
same time, invoke upon him the operation of the Destructive
Principle of Nature in Individual Life.
In proportion as you deprive him of the free and inde-
pendent control and exercise of any or all of the inalienable
rights, faculties, capacities and powers of the soul you thereby
and at the same time assume individual responsibility under
the law of life for all that it otherwise holds him responsible.
In proportion as you divest him of the free and independent
exercise of his own independent, self-conscious and rational
volition you thereby and at the same time forge upon your
own soul the chains of spiritual servitude to him, under the
Law of Retributive Justice.
With all the power, authority and emphasis of universal
language, Nature invests the individual human intelligence,
ego, soul or entity, with the power of self-control and fixes
upon him the primary duty of himself alone exercising that
individual right and power, and discharging that duty.
The right and duty of each individual to at all times exer-
cise the power of self-control involves in equal measure the
concomitant obligation upon you and all mankind to respect
that right and duty.
By your violation of this fundamental obligation and your
infraction of Nature's law in relation thereto you deprive the
soul of your fellow man of the one transcendent power upon
which its Individual Immortality depends and stand convicted
before the bar of Nature and the judgments of men, of THE
GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME.
You thereby and at the same time invoke upon yourself the
irrevocable penalty which Nature prescribes therefor. You
cannot evade it. You cannot avoid it. You can neither miti-
gate nor modify it. Alone you must walk the path of life and
alone you must expiate this Crime against the fundamental
Law of Justice and against the life and liberty of your fellow
man.
II.
To THE HYPNOTIC SUBJECT.
As the crowning achievement of evolutionary development
Nature has invested you, as a man, with certain distinctive and
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 351
exclusive attributes and characteristics which distinguish you
from the animal.
These are:
1. SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS, as distinguished from the sim-
ple consciousness of animal life and nature.
2. REASON, as distinguished from the simple intelligence
of the animal.
3. INDEPENDENT CHOICE, as distinguished from the in-
stinctive selections of animal nature.
4. Independent, self-conscious and rational VOLITION,
as distinguished from the irrational, impulsive and instinctive
volition of all forms of animal life.
Upon these distinctive and exclusive attributes and char-
acteristics of your nature you must depend for all that enables
you to rise above the level of animal life and animal nature.
Upon these alone you must also depend for all that makes
you a responsible, individual intelligence.
Upon these and these alone you must depend for all that
gives you a moral status among your fellow men.
Upon these and these alone you must depend for all your
ability to achieve Individual Immortality.
The degree to which you are in undisputed possession
and control of all these attributes of the soul at any given
time determines with unerring accuracy the degree to which
you are then a responsible, individual intelligence.
To the same degree and for the same reason you are then
morally accountable to your fellow men.
The degree to which you are now in undisputed possession
and independent control of your self-consciousness, reason,
independent choice and volition, determines with unerring
accuracy the distance to which you have risen above the plane
of animal life and animal nature.
Whatever in any degree divests or deprives you of your
own natural dominion and control over all or any of these
distinctively human attributes of the soul, thereby at the same
time and in exactly the same degree, robs you of your life,
your liberty, your individual responsibility, your moral char-
352 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
acter and accountability, and the power upon which you must
depend for the achievement of Individual Immortality.
Whatever in the least possible measure divests you of
your independent control over these distinctively human attri-
butes, capacities and powers of the soul, thereby at the same
time and in precisely the same degree, reduces you toward the
level of animal nature.
It is determined with absolute scientific certainty that
hypnotism, in just so far as you become a subject of it, divests
you of your power of independent choice and your power of
will or volition.
To the exact degree, therefore, that you become a subject
of the hypnotic process it divests you of your own independent
control of each and every one of those distinctive and exclu-
sive attributes and powers of the soul which lift you above
the level of animal life and animal nature.
It takes from you your individual responsibility. It de-
prives you of your moral accountability. It dispossesses you
of your power of self-control. It divests you of the powers
upon which you must depend for the achievement of Individ-
ual Immortality. In just so far as it exists it robs you of the
soul attributes which distinguish you as a human being, and
reduces you to the level of your animal nature.
It makes of you a negative quantity, a nullity, a nonentity
in the great world of activity, of thought, of accomplishment
and achievement.
It destroys in you everything you possess that commands
the admiration, the confidence and the respect of your fellow
men.
It makes of you a mere plaything for the entertainment
of those of your fellows who desire to amuse themselves at
your expense.
Worst of all, it makes of you a dependent, a mere servant,
a slave, a menial, a puppet, a serf.
It binds you to a base, an ignoble and a humiliating servi-
tude both here and hereafter. With these facts thus plainly
before you, to whatever extent you invite it, permit it, or
knowingly and intentionally become a party to it, you thereby
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 353
and at the same time become also an ACCESSORY TO THE GREAT
PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME.
As such, you invoke upon yourself the operation of The
Destructive Principle of Nature in Individual Life. As such,
you must, in addition, suffer the penalty which Nature pre-
scribes therefor.
There is no vicarious atonement possible to those who de-
liberately participate in the commission of this vital offense
against the law of individual life.
To the full measure of your own conscious and intentional
part in it the crime is yours. To this extent you and you
alone must expiate it.
III.
To THE GENUINE MEDIUM.
All that has been said by way of admonition or sugges-
tion to the hypnotic subject applies with equal relevancy, ma-
teriality, logic and force to you. But in order that you may
not suffer injustice, by inference, in relation to matters therein
considered, it is necessary that something be added.
The motives which inspire you are fully understood and
appreciated. In just so far as you are moved by a sense of
religious duty, or by a desire to relieve the sufferings and the
ills of your fellow men and women, or by sympathy for the
sorrowing, or by the importunities of friends and seekers after
truth, or by your own honest desire for exact and definite
knowledge of another life, or by the conviction that your me-
diumship is a "Gift" or a "Power" which you are in duty
bound to dedicate to the world, your motives are fully re-
spected and your intentions heartily commended.
Most unfortunately for you, however, it is not a question
of motives nor intentions at all. It is the vastly more im-
portant question of results and results only.
No true religion ever has demanded nor in the very nature
of things ever will demand of you the surrender of your in-
dividual responsibility, nor your moral accountability, nor
your power of self-control, nor any of the faculties, capacities
and powers upon which you must depend for the achievement
of your Individual Immortality.
354 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
However desirable it may be under right conditions to ob-
tain definite knowledge of a life beyond the grave, this cannot
be justly nor rightfully nor lawfully done by any process or
means which involves the sacrifice of individual life, or the
surrender or suppression of any of the individual and in-
alienable rights and powers of the soul.
The law of Life is the law of Individual Development.
The law of Death is the law of Individual Subjection and
Surrender.
You know full well that the men and women who to-day
command the admiration, the confidence and the respect of
their fellow men and women are not those who are under the
domination and control of other intelligences.
Those who achieve individual success are those who em-
ploy their own intelligence and their own reason, those who
exercise their own independent powers and rely upon their
own independent judgments in all the affairs of life. This
is the law of individual being both here and hereafter. In
the realm of the soul itself science finds no exceptions.
If you have been flattered by the assurances of your con-
trols, or have comforted yourself in the belief that your me-
diumship is a "gift" or a "power" conferred upon you by
the gods as a badge of honor or a token of preferment, be
not deceived longer, for such is not the case.
To whatever extent your mediumship has served to single
you out from among the great general average of men and
women, it stands for nothing so much as it does your own in-
dividual weakness and subjection.
To whatever extent it has given you a place in the seance,
the circle, the cabinet or the pulpit is due to nothing over
which you in your own right have dominion and control.
Neither is it due to any knowledge or power which you in
your own right possess. On the other hand, it is because of
your lack of knowledge, your want of independence and your
surrender of individual powers.
It is neither a "gift" nor a "power" of your own that
paralyzes your will and makes of you a pliant and help-
less tool to do the bidding of oftentimes selfish and irre-
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 355
sponsible controls. It is neither a "gift" nor a "power" of
your own that drags you bodily before a curious and
oftentimes trifling, frivolous and deprecating audience and
there compels you automatically to say and do that which
your own intelligence would condemn and your own self-re-
spect forbid if you but knew it.
The "power" that robs you of all you possess, which lifts
you to a plane above the level of the animal, is not a "power"
to be sought nor to be proud of. The "gift" that wrests from
you the one transcendent power of the soul, the power of
Self-Control, is not a "gift" to be prized nor one to command
honest admiration.
You know full well that among the dearest possessions of
the soul is the sovereign, independent power to command in
your own right the confidence, the approval, the trust, the
respect, the appreciation and the personal affection of your
fellow men and women.
You also know, if you have studied the lives and expe-
riences of other mediums, possibly you may know it from a
personal experience, that in exact proportion as it becomes
known that you are subject to the domination and control
of spiritual intelligences your own reputation for stability of
character, integrity, reliability, judgment and discretion in-
evitably suffers.
In your capacity as a mediumistic instrument you reflect
to those upon the physical plane whatever degree of intelli-
gence, honesty, wisdom or morality your controls desire to
exhibit through you. Most of those who thus observe you
are unable to differentiate between you and your controls.
When your controls are lofty in expression and exalted
in thought you as their instrument lend yourself to the har-
mony of thought and expression. It is then that you appear
to greatest advantage. When your controls are frivolous,
coarse or vulgar, their spirit and intent reflect themselves
through you, and it is then that you appear to great dis-
advantage.
And so it is that you are made the innocent victim of
356 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
those upon whom you thus rely for guidance, direction, pro-
tection and inspiration to life and action.
If you would be strong in your own right, either here or
in the life to come, you must declare your independence from
all subjection and from all subjective processes. You must
assert your sovereign dominion over the faculties, capacities
and powers of the soul upon which your individual responsi-
bility depends. You must rise to the dignity and the majesty
of self-reliance and Self-Control.
IV.
To THE "SENSITIVE."
Perhaps there is no individual in society to-day who needs
more to understand the laws of spiritual development than
you. Certain it is that there is no member of society in
greater danger of being misled by the subtle and seductive
fallacies which are everywhere masquerading under the names
of "Hypnotism," "Mediumship," "Occultism," "Mysticism"
and "Spiritual Development."
If you have never carefully analyzed what it is to be a
"sensitive," you may derive great value from a rational study
of this subject. In that connection the following suggestions
may be of service to you :
1. A "sensitive" is one who is more than ordinarily sus-
ceptible to the influences of his environment.
2. As the term is employed by spiritualists and occultists
generally, however, it means one who is more than ordinarily
susceptible to the influence of his spiritual environment.
3. In this latter meaning of the term it implies a negative
or passive condition of the individual sufficient to make him
or her receptive to the influences of the more positive intelli-
gences on the spiritual planes of life.
4. It is found that by far the larger number of genuine
"sensitives" are women. This is because of their generally
finer and more highly attuned physical and nervous organ-
isms. Hence it is that women, as a class, are more intuitive
than men. For this reason they very often get things "out
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 357
of the air," while men are compelled to depend upon the more
laborious and less expeditious process of reason.
5. It often occurs that the genuine sensitive is dimly con-
scious of spiritual presences about him. He is also con-
scious that he receives thoughts and ideas that are projected
upon him from the spiritual side of life. In the semi-con-
scious hours of sleep it not infrequently occurs that such an
individual has visions. These often prove to be full of sig-
nificance for the peculiar intelligence they convey concerning
matters and things not at the time understood.
6. This condition of sensitiveness may be the result of:
(a) Heredity.
(b) Prenatal conditions.
(c) Conditions for which the individual himself is
wholly responsible; such, for instance, as a negative diet,
introspective habits of thought, insufficient nourishment, the
use of opiates, narcotics, sedatives, etc.
(d) The gradual refinement of the individual, physically,
spiritually and psychically as a result of the evolutionary pro-
cesses carried on by both the individual and Nature. It now
and then occurs that under this process of evolution an indi-
vidual is brought very close to the border line of conditions
between physical Nature and the world of spiritual things.
(e) Any two or more of these conditions combined may
serve to produce the same result.
7. Regardless of the exact method or process by and
through which you have come to be a "sensitive," it is of vital
importance for you to know that as such you have reached a
state and condition fraught with the most momentous conse-
quences, possibilities and responsibilities that can rest upon
any individual, either here or hereafter.
For illustration: If you follow the negative or passive
impulse of your nature under these conditions (which most of
you do), or listen to the suggestions and advice of those who
approve or practice the subjective methods or processes of
mediumship, you will, without the least conscious effort on
your part, fall into a subjective state or condition and ulti-
mately become a medium.
358 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Under this process you gradually lose the power of self-
control. The process itself is so fascinating, so insidious and
so gradually progressive that you do not discover this impor-
tant fact until it is too late for you to retrace your steps alone.
As a result, in the natural course of events, you begin to "see
things" or "hear things," as the case may be. To your friends
and relatives, as well as to every one else who does not under-
stand such experiences, you are promptly pronounced "queer."
In the largest number of instances this is but the beginning
of the end. From this point the road is both broad and
straight that leads to the insane asylum and thence to an igno-
minious death.
If, perchance, there should be any doubt as to the absolute
truth of this statement, it may be fully verified by an examina-
tion into the lives and experiences of the insane in our asy-
lums everywhere throughout the land. It will be found from
a study of the individual history of these various cases that
many of them were only simple "sensitives" in the beginning.
The experience was both fascinating and pleasant. They
yielded to the passive or negative impulses or tendencies of
their natures, or perhaps to insidious suggestions from the
spiritual planes, as is often the case. As a natural result, they
soon began to "see things." It will be found, however, that
in the larger number of instances they first began to "hear
voices," or feel the touch of invisible hands or invisible pres-
ences.
With these experiences came also the irresistible desire
to tell them to their relatives and friends. These, being
ignorant of the true cause, became alarmed. The family
physician was called in. An examination followed, with the
usual result that the case was pronounced "delusional insan-
ity." All such cases thus far have been sent to the insane
asylums as the only institutions of the several states equipped
with facilities for properly caring for those who are looked
upon as mentally unbalanced or mentally irresponsible. It
would astonish any intelligent individual who is not already
familiar with the facts to know how many of these unfortu-
nate individuals go on "seeing things" or "hearing things"
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 359
or "feeling things," as the case may be, until death mercifully
comes to their relief.
There is but one way for you who have not yet passed the
point of mere "sensitiveness" to successfully guard yourselves
from the unhappy results here suggested. If you would do
this you must proceed at once to exercise your indi-
vidual intelligence. You must assert your absolute independ-
ence of all subjective processes and conditions. You must
maintain at all times the active, wakeful consciousness, and
in the largest measure possible develop the power of individual
self-control.
By following the lines here indicated you will gradually
but surely rise above every tendency to subjection. When
this has been once fully accomplished it is then possible for
you, in course of time and conscientious work, under the per-
sonal instruction and direction of one who knows the law
and the process, to become a natural and independent psychic
without injury to yourself or harm to anyone.
But here again you are likely to encounter grave difficul-
ties. You will find many self-advertised instructors who will
not hesitate, for a valuable consideration, to undertake the
hazardous task of guiding you over the dangerous road to
the desired destination. With rare exceptions, however, they
are entirely ignorant of the formula or process of independent
spiritual self-development. As an inevitable result their in-
struction or guidance would serve only to lead you back
again into the wilderness of "mysticism," where so many inno-
cent, credulous and trusting souls are to-day wandering in
darkness and despair.
But there are Masters who are able to guide you in per-
fect safety to the goal of independent, spiritual self-illumina-
tion. True, they are few in number. But even so, and not-
withstanding they receive no fee for their services, alas, they
are not overwhelmed with students who possess the Intelli-
gence to take the instruction, the Courage to do the work,
and the Perseverance to accomplish the tasks which such an
instruction imposes.
It is, indeed, quite possible that if the course of study and
360 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the character, quality and scope of the work were laid out
before you and you were then asked if you were ready to
enter upon the task, you would hesitate to undertake it. And
well you might, for a rational, spiritual self-development is
the work of years, while mediumistic subjection and control,
to one who is already a "sensitive" come almost immediately
and without effort.
But even though you may not be prepared to undertake
the process of independent development, it is nevertheless
possible for you to avoid the pitfalls of subjection. In order
that you may not fall a victim to the seductive charms of
negation and self-surrender, it is of the most vital importance
that you have clearly and distinctly in mind the difference
between subjective and independent methods and processes.
Then and then only will you be able to avoid the dangers
which menace every "sensitive."
If, therefore, you would guard yourself from the blighting
effects of mediumistic subjection, and preserve your independ-
ence and your powers as a sovereign, individual intelligence,
you must assert your individuality. You must use your rea-
son. You must maintain the highest possible measure of self-
control over all the faculties, capacities and powers of your
own individual being.
As a "sensitive" you stand at the parting of the ways.
One of these leads onward and upward along the pathway of
individual growth, development, acquisition, power, self-re-
spect and the respect of your fellow-man. The other leads
downward along the pathway of individual weakness, nega-
tion, inertia, self-surrender, degeneracy, self-condemnation
and the condemnation of your fellow-man.
The one is THE WAY OF LIFE.
The other is THE WAY OF DEATH.
V.
To THE SPIRITUALIST.
If you have followed the subject consistently and consci-
entiously to this point it will be perfectly clear to you that
no attempt has been made to evade, avoid, ignore nor min-
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 361
imize any of the established facts upon which your accept-
ance of spiritualism is based. No effort has been made to
disturb you in any manner whatsoever concerning the phe-
nomena of mediumship nor the interpretations you have
placed upon them. There is no desire to deprive you of the
smallest grain of comfort to be derived from the great fact
that there is a life after physical death, and that such a life is
scientifically demonstrable. There is no wish to discredit
the fact that mediumship embodies one of the methods and
processes by and through which communication may be estab-
lished and maintained between the two worlds of matter, life
and intelligence.
While all this is true, it has nevertheless been conclu-
sively demonstrated by the methods of exact science that the
mediumistic process involves a violation of natural law. It
is to this fundamental fact and this alone that you are asked
in all sincerity and candor to apply your intelligence, your
reason and your conscience. In this central and vital fact
lurk the most insidious, subtle and fascinating dangers to
"Life, Liberty and the Pursuit of Happiness."
It is a fact well known that the great body constituting
the rank and file of Spiritualism are made up of those of you
who are not mediums and who perhaps never will be. The
largest majority of your number do not wish to become
mediums. Many of you have been and are sufficiently close
students and observers to have discovered for yourselves the
destructive nature and effects of the mediumistic process.
Many others of your number have intuitively sensed the dan-
ger in time to avoid it.
Even your leading journals, in recent years, have sounded
the note of warning times almost without number. But in
almost every such instance it is assumed, or is left by infer-
ence to so appear, that the dangers and the destructive results
are all due entirely to the malicious work of evil spirits, who
deliberately and intentionally destroy their mediums, and not
to the mediumistic process itself.
Indeed, it does not appear to have thus far occurred to
your leading thinkers and writers that the dangers and the
362 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
destructive results are primarily due entirely to the medium-
istic process itself and not to the spiritual intelligences who
employ it or set it in motion. This, however, is the vital dis-
tinction. It is herein also that the remedy must be found.
The wisest physician on earth cannot paralyze the heart
action of his patient without at the same time and by the same
process destroying the patient's life. The doctor himself may
be a seer or a saint, or he may be a villain and an outlaw. It
matters not. If he employs a process which paralyzes the
heart the inevitable consequence is death. Nor does his mo-
tive or intent have anything to do with it. It is the process
employed which produces the destructive results, and not the
character, motive or intent of the doctor who applies it.
Just so with mediumship. The destructive results are due
primarily to the process itself and not to the personal char-
acter nor the motives nor the wisdom nor the folly nor the
evil intent of those who apply it.
Whatever process paralyzes the will and voluntary powers
of any individual is destructive in its nature and effects. It
matters not who applies it. It matters not what name we give
it. We may even name it "The Great Restorer" if you like,
but this will in no wise change its action. We may call it
hypnotism, or statuvolism, or mesmerism, or psychratism, or
mediumship, or the Communion of Saints. This does not
change its nature, its action nor its results. The mere adop-
tion of a name cannot convert a destructive process into a
constructive process, nor transmute death into life.
The dangers and the misfortunes and the desolations
which follow in the pathway of mediumship are all due, pri-
marily, to the great fundamental fact that mediumship is a
subjective, psychic process. As such it paralyzes the will and
voluntary powers of its subjects in just so far as it exists at
any given time. Paralysis of the will, by whatever method
or means accomplished, is a destructive process.
Nor does it in the least degree change the character of the
process nor minimize its destructive results if, perchance, the
subject of it should thereby become clairvoyant or clairaudi-
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 363
ent and as an incidental result thereof demonstrate thereby
the existence of another life.
It is a fact well known to science that persons who slowly
bleed to death, or those who starve, very often become both
clairvoyant and clairaudient just before the transition we call
death. This, however, does not sanctify the process of star-
vation nor glorify the practice of hemorrhage, nor in the least
alter the destructive nature of either.
Quite aside from the rigid practices of the ancient ascetics
or the diabolical and inhuman castigations of the barbaric
religious devotees of primitive civilizations, it has been dem-
onstrated that in this day and age of our race spiritual illu-
mination does not necessarily involve ultra means or methods
of any kind.
The time has come, in fact, when the same character of
rational discrimination with which we examine other ques-
tions of science must be applied to the mediumistic process.
However sorely we may be tempted to do so, we cannot afford
to shut our eyes to the principle involved merely because we
are interested in the phenomena of mediumship. We cannot
afford to blindly indorse or approve this particular process or
any other merely because it happens to afford us entertain-
ment or amusement or even some degree of comfort and satis-
faction. To do so would be to put ourselves upon a moral
level with Nero, who is said to have accounted all things
good which pleased him and all things evil which failed to
do so.
If Spiritualism is to become a permanent, living factor in
the moral and spiritual evolution of our race, you who repre-
sent its best brains, wisest thoughts and highest morals must
come to the front and assert your independence. You must
look beyond the mere phenomena of mediumship and recog-
nize the demonstrated fact of science that the process back
of them is destructive in its essential nature.
However radical the departure may be from the past and
present position of your people upon this particular subject,
you must insist upon the entire abandonment of every phase,
form and degree of mediumship. You must turn your backs
364 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
upon every process and practice which involves the subjec-
tion of one intelligence (or any of the faculties, capacities or
powers thereof) to the domination and control of another.
You must set the stamp of your uncompromising disapproval
upon any and every process or practice which deprives the
individual of the free and independent exercise of any one
or more of the attributes of the soul upon which his indi-
vidual responsibility depends.
Doubtless the question has already occurred to you : "How
is it possible for Spiritualists to repudiate mediumship with-
out thereby and at the same time renouncing Spiritualism it-
self?" This is indeed a searching question. Nor can it be
answered in a single sentence. The following suggestions,
however, may prove to be of possible value in that connec-
tion:
1. Spiritualism involves two distinct and separate phases
of the same general subject.
2. One of these relates entirely to what is known as the
phenomena of Spiritualism.
3. The other is confined exclusively to what is known
as the ethics, or the philosophy, or the religion of Spirit-
ualism.
4. The phenomena of Spiritualism are related wholly and
exclusively to the various phases and forms of mediumship.
They all, therefore, depend upon the mediumistic process for
their production. This constitutes what may very properly
be termed the purely mechanical side of Spiritualism.
5. But phenomena, of themselves, do not and cannot
constitute a religion, nor a philosophy, nor a moral code, nor
an ethical system by which to live a life. They simply con-
stitute data from which a religious creed or a philosophical
system or an ethical code may be formulated.
6. There is a process, however, wholly different from
that of mediumship, by and through which all the data of
mediumship and vastly more may be acquired by those who
possess the Intelligence, Courage and Perseverance to prop-
erly fit themselves for its reception and school themselves to
its proper use.
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 365
7. This process involves the acquisition of exact knowl-
edge, the accomplishment of a specific work, and the living of
a definite life. It is an independent, self-conscious and ra-
tional process. It is a wide-awake, a normal and an intelli-
gent process. It is a process under which the individual at
all times and under all conditions must maintain a normal
and healthful control of all his intelligent faculties, capaci-
ties and powers. It is a process which enables the individual
to see for himself, hear for himself and sense for himself the
spiritual data and obtain for himself definite knowledge of
another life. It is a process which demands Self-Control in-
stead of self-surrender, and independence of volition instead
of subjection to the will of others. In other words, it is in
every respect a Constructive process. It develops a Master
instead of a Medium.
As this volume is limited to the consideration of Nature's
Destructive Principle, the process referred to must be re-
served for another volume of this Series.
VI.
To THE MINISTER.
T@ you, more than to almost any other individual in the
community, society in general looks for its inspirations to
higher ideals and more exalted achievements, as well as the
development of a higher standard of morality and life.
To the extent that this is true your individual responsi-
bility is increased and your obligation to society intensified.
You stand in the position of not only a preacher of the word,
an expounder of the law and an exemplifier of the life, but
also in that of a voluntary, self-appointed, spiritual coun-
selor and personal guide to those who are seeking knowledge
of a life beyond the grave.
The very foundation upon which your profession and
your life's work depend is the doctrine of another life. All
your educational training has centered about this one funda-
mental tenet. The central purpose of all your schooling and
all your study and all your preparation has been to fit you
366 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
for the great life work of teaching this fundamental doctrine
to your fellow-man.
All over our beautiful land schools, colleges, theological
seminaries and universities have been erected and at an enor-
mous outlay of time, energy and money are maintained for
the sole purpose of equipping you for the proper discharge
of your duties and responsibilities in the field of your chosen
profession.
Notwithstanding all this, it would appear, from the un-
qualified statements of some of your most prominent and re-
spected representatives, that there are those among you who
do not yet know that there is a life after physical dissolu-
tion.
The following authentic incident of very recent occurrence
cannot fail to command your intelligent interest and respect-
ful consideration in this connection :
A meeting of select and intelligent gentlemen was re-
cently held in the city of Chicago for the express purpose of
listening to an address from one who has never, as yet,
achieved the honorable distinction of ordination. On the
other hand, it so happens that he is not even a communicant
of any church nor a professor of any religious creed as the
term "religious" is generally employed and understood.
Nevertheless, it so transpired that during the course of
his address he spoke at some length concerning the existence
of another life. More than this, he spoke "as one having
authority." Those who heard him were impressed with the
conviction that he was neither speculating nor guessing, but
that he spoke from the standpoint of one who has had a defi-
nite personal experience.
Among his audience there seems to have been a most in-
teresting exception in the person of one of the leading mem-
bers of your profession. The gentleman here referred to is
a prominent minister of the Methodist Episcopal Church.
More than this, he is in good standing, and so far as known
his orthodoxy has never been questioned by his superiors.
He was at the time and is now the honored pastor of one
of Chicago's conspicuous and prosperous churches.
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 367
After the conclusion of the regular address of the even-
ing an opportunity was given to a number of the most prom-
inent gentlemen present to express themselves upon various
topics appropriate to the occasion. Among the number called
upon was the reverend gentleman above referred to.
He arose, and to the astonishment of every other indi-
vidual present delivered himself of a severe and almost bitter
arraignment of the principal speaker of the evening for pre-
suming to speak with assurance concerning the fact of a life
after physical death and the possibility of its actual demon-
stration.
To the utter amazement of those who heard him, he de-
clared without equivocation or mental reservation, so far as
his words would imply, that the existence of a life beyond
the grave is a subject entirely beyond the limitations of all
human knowledge.
He declared, without exceptions or qualifications of any
kind whatsoever, that no man ever has known and no man
ever will know whether there is such a life until he has solved
the great problem by the process of death itself.
In the same spirit of unqualified dogmatism he assured
his audience that in the very nature of things it is absolutely
impossible for one in the physical body to know aught of any
life above or beyond the physical.
Perhaps the most impressive phase of this remarkable in-
cident is the fact that the reverend gentleman did not appear
to realize that his words were freighted with nothing but self-
accusation and self-condemnation.
For perhaps a quarter of a century or more this same
minister of the gospel has been preaching that there is a life
beyond the grave. From many pulpits he has preached it to
the multitudes. In the Sunday School he has unhesitat-
ingly taught it to the children, the youth, the mature and the
aged. At the hearthstones of his people, where he has gained
admittance upon the basis of his personal integrity, he has
repeatedly declared it. By reason of his assumed or supposed
personal knowledge of it as a definite fact he has been able
to comfort the living and allay the fears of the dying. With
368 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the unqualified assurance of a definite personal knowledge
which none has dared to question, he has proclaimed it in tri-
umph over the graves of the dead. Upon the solemn pledge
of his own integrity and the good faith of his religion wherein
it is embodied, he has drawn his salary as a duly ordained
and active minister of the gospel and has thereby maintained
both himself and his family during all these years.
But now, moved by a sudden impulse to rebuke the al-
leged assumption of one who dares in his presence to give
expression to truths with which the reverend gentleman is not
yet familiar, he unintentionally lets fall the mask of many
years, and without knowing it publicly acknowledges his own
duplicity and thereby pronounces his own condemnation.
This incident tells its own story. It needs no explanation.
It embodies a most powerful sermon "To Ministers Only,"
and should commend itself to your earnest and thoughtful
consideration.
In this day and age of scientific investigation and demon-
stration, when the limitations of human knowledge are being
constantly extended, you cannot afford to dogmatize concern-
ing the possibilities of human knowledge or human under-
standing. You cannot afford to thus put yourself on record
among those who would prescribe arbitrary metes and bounds
for the "knowable" and the "unknowable," or fix unalterable
limitations about the "known" and the "unknown."
Do not mistake the purpose nor the meaning of these
words. It is not intended to here impugn the value of Faith
nor the necessity of Beliefs. Both are fully recognized and
admitted.
But if you would command the continued confidence and
respect of your fellow-men you must carefully differentiate
between knowledge and faith, between the things you "know"
and those you merely "believe." More than this, you must
make the distinction so plain and so conspicuous at all times
that your own people cannot possibly mistake the one for the
other.
If you would maintain the commanding position you have
so long held of healthful and beneficent influence among your
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 369
own people and the community in general, you must not only
believe and have faith, but you must do more than this.
There are some things you must know.
And if perchance members of your own congregation
should consult you concerning experiences which lie beyond
the range of your own personal knowledge, you must pos-
sess the humility, the grace and the common honesty to con-
fess your limitations rather than dogmatize with them con-
cerning things you do not know.
It often occurs in these days of spiritual unfoldment that
individual members of all the various churches come into
definite and conscious touch and relation with their spiritual
environment. Since this is a fact which has been verified
times almost without number, it follows that any arbitrary
denial of it on your part must, sooner or later, lead to your
humiliation and discomfort as well as destroy your influence
for good wherever your limitations subsequently become
known.
Not long since one of your number who is widely known
as an able pulpit orator and disputant, engaged in joint public
discussion with a prominent Spiritualist upon the claims of
Spiritualism.
Unfortunately for your representative, he permitted him-
self to be drawn into a discussion of mediumship as a fact.
He took the broad position that all so-called mediumistic phe-
nomena are nothing more than legerdemain, and that there is
no such thing as genuine spiritual communication through
mediumistic processes.
As every well-informed student of the subject would an-
ticipate, the decision was overwhelmingly against your posi-
tion. So strongly was this fact impressed upon those of your
number who followed the controversy through to its con-
clusion that at a meeting of ministers soon thereafter it was
wisely decided that joint discussions of this nature do not
tend to advance the cause of religion and should therefore be
discouraged.
The fatal error in this instance was that of denying the
existence of a fact which has been conclusively demonstrated
370 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
thousands of times over, namely, the fact that there is such
a thing as genuine mediumship. The failure to successfully
combat this one fact placed you at a disadvantage from which
it was impossible to recover. The decision therefore went
against you, and justly so. As a natural result of your fail-
ure in this instance, Spiritualism has gained an almost irre-
sistible impulse at your expense, for all of which you are en-
tirely responsible.
It is impossible for you or anyone else to successfully
deny the fact of mediumship. It is equally impossible for you
to successfully deny its phenomena. Neither can you suc-
cessfully dispute the fact that by and through this process
spiritual intelligences can and do often communicate with
those yet in the flesh.
If you would successfully meet the Spiritualist you must
meet him on his own ground. You must be prepared to
admit all the material facts upon which he bases his claims
and then stand upon the principle which lies back of these
facts.
To admit that mediumship is a fact does not admit that it
is right, any more than to admit the existence of murder is an
admission that murder is right. To admit that there are gen-
uine spiritual communications through mediums is by no
means an admission that the process employed should be com-
mended or approved, any more than to admit a forgery is
equivalent to a declaration that forgery is right.
With a proper understanding of the destructive nature of
the mediumistic process you are in position to fully and fairly
meet every proposition which can be advanced in favor of
any school or philosophy or religion which depends upon a
subjective, psychic process as its substantial basis.
One additional suggestion may not be deemed out of place
in this connection. If you have taken fhe time to familiarize
yourself with the array of data already presented you cannot
fail to be impressed with the position here taken upon the
subject of ultra religious emotionalism. It has been estab-
lished beyond all question that ultra emotionalism of any kind
involves a subjective process. It is therefore destructive. It
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 371
opens the door to complete psychic subjection and control.
In the very largest number of instances where this occurs the
result is so-called "delusional insanity."
Your attention is specially called to the demonstrated
facts and to the principle which underlies them. These can-
not fail to furnish you much material for serious reflection
and earnest consideration. If they shall in any measure serve
to furnish a motive and an inspiration which shall help you
to lift your religious services and ceremonials from the plane
of emotionalism to that of rationalism the purpose of this
work will have been in part accomplished.
With the facts at your command there is no body of men
in existence in position to accomplish greater good for pres-
ent and future generations than you can do by an intelligent
exposition of the Destructive Principle of Nature in Indi-
vidual Life as it manifests itself in the subjective psychic pro-
cesses of Mediumship and Hypnotism.
There is no field of educational work where the harvest
is so abundant and ripe and the laborers are so few.
VII.
To THE BENCH AND BAR.
There is, perhaps, no tribunal in existence to-day better
prepared to pass intelligently upon the merits of any ques-
tion involving legal or equitable considerations than the
American Bench and Bar.
There is, without exception, no tribunal of the people to
which the writer would more cheerfully or more readily sub-
mit a psychological problem involving fine legal discrimina-
tion and the application of a just and comprehensive ethical
standard.
It has, indeed, been his long cherished hope that the occa-
sion would naturally present itself whereupon he might have
the honor of presenting to you, gentlemen, in a more direct
and personal form, a number of the more important legal
phases of the general subject covered by this volume.
Under the existing circumstances, however, nothing more
will be attempted here than to respectfully call your attention
372 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
in the briefest possible manner to a few of the important prop-
ositions upon which, in the nature of things, you will be
called to pass legal judgment in the comparatively near
future.
Perhaps no psychological proposition was ever more con-
sistently or conclusively established as a principle of law than
is that of "undue influence." Although a purely psychologi-
cal problem, it is nevertheless a subject of which the courts
have unhesitatingly taken judicial cognizance. More than
this, so important has it appeared to you, and so persistently
has it obtruded itself upon your attention, that to-day there
is no question among you as to the absolute correctness of
the central proposition involved.
In other words, it is now universally recognized as a fact
that it is possible for the mentally strong to unduly influence
the mentally weak under certain conditions and circumstances.
Just what in law constitutes "undue influence" has been
passed upon so often and from so many different standpoints,
and has been defined with such exactness and perspicuity, that
even the youngest and least experienced of your number has
in mind a well defined and comprehensive understanding of
the fundamental principle involved.
Notwithstanding this fact, however, it still remains for
you to rationally and intelligently apply this exact and well
defined principle of law to the specific subject of hypnotic
control in all its varied forms and phases. In other words,
hypnotism and mediumship exemplify a character and degree
of subjection far beyond that known to you in law as "undue
influence," even in its most definite, positive, unqualified and
concrete form. And yet, with rare exceptions, the courts
have not, as yet, taken judicial notice of either.
But the time is rapidly approaching and is, in fact, prac-
tically at hand, when your best intelligence must be applied
to the just solution of numerous legal problems of importance
growing out of the practice of these subjective, psychic pro-
cesses.
In anticipation of this fact, it will not be deemed an im-
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 373
pertinence to suggest that the following demonstrated facts
may serve to somewhat facilitate your laudable undertaking.
1. By evidence which it is impossible to controvert it is
established as a fact of science that to the exact extent hyp-
nosis exists at any given time the hypnotist controls the will
and voluntary powers of his subject.
2. Hypnotic control may be, and often is, established by
and with the knowledge, consent and co-operation of the sub-
ject.
3. But where the hypnotist understands the process suf-
ficiently well, and is strong enough, he may obtain such con-
trol without either the knowledge or consent of his subject.
4. Once the hypnotic relation is established, the individual
thus subjected becomes the helpless instrument of his hyp-
notist. As such he executes the will of his hypnotist with ab-
solute fidelity.
5. By the same unanswerable evidence it is established
that a hypnotic subject under control may be compelled to
commit any crime whatsoever that a criminal hypnotist may
conceive and command, provided its execution be within the
possibility of the subject's powers.
6. This is equally true whether hypnosis be induced
forcibly or with the knowledge and consent of the subject.
7. Quite regardless of theories, both wise and otherwise,
to the contrary, it is a fact to which your attention is specially
called, that a considerable percentage of the crime of our own
country in particular is, at the present time, inspired by hyp-
notic and mediumistic processes and practices.
8. Wherever this fact obtains justice universally miscar-
ries to a very large extent. This is true for the reason that
the subject alone is made to suffer the penalties of the law,
while the real culprit, the hypnotist, goes entirely unpunished.
And yet there are serious legal difficulties to be consid-
ered in this connection. As soon as the courts have taken
judicial cognizance of hypnotism and the hypnotic process
as established facts, it must be expected that every criminal
in the country will endeavor to profit by such a finding. It
is not only possible but probable that criminals of every class
374 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
will endeavor to excuse their crimes upon the ground that
they were committed at the hypnotic "suggestion" of some
one else.
This is, indeed, a phase of the subject that is sure to pre-
sent itself. More than this, it is one that will call for the ex-
ercise of your best intelligence and finest discrimination. It is
not impossible or even improbable that in the development of
this subject as a legal proposition a few of the guilty may
thus escape the just penalties of the law. But when necessity
has made both Bench and Bar familiar with the principle and
the process involved your intelligence can be safely relied
upon to provide a complete remedy for such a contingency.
Furthermore, as an ethical proposition, it is far better that
a few of the guilty should escape as a result of humane cau-
tion than that one innocent victim should suffer an unjust pen-
alty as a result of carelessness.
9. Not only is a large percentage of the crime of to-day
due to hypnotism and mediumship in their various forms and
degrees, but by the hypnotic process civil wrongs are also ac-
complished with ease and facility, and the mentally passive
or weak made the prey of the mentally strong. Your intelli-
gence, unaided by further suggestions, will forecast the many
possibilities which lie in this direction.
10. Your attention is especially called to the advertise-
ments of the leading hypnotists and hypnotic schools, colleges
and institutes in all the large cities of the central and eastern
states. You will find them in many of the leading metro-
politan dailies, weeklies and periodicals throughout the coun-
try. The nature and contents of these advertisements, as
you will observe, fully sustain every statement here made, and
vastly more.
11. Your perfect familiarity with the nature, meaning
and scope of contracts, your experience in determining the mo-
tives of men from the nature and contents of their own delib-
erate, formulated utterances, and your perfect knowledge of
ethical standards which fall within the line of "public policy,"
will enable you to quickly determine the status of the indi-
viduals and institutions here referred to.
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 375
12. If they do what they advertise and guarantee to do,
then they stand before the community as self-confessed crim-
inals of the most vicious and reprehensible character. As
such, they are a perpetual menace to society and morals. In
the event of such a finding, your appreciation of the respon-
sibility resting upon you as guardians of public decency and
the general welfare must impel you to the prompt application
of every honorable means, method and power at your com-
mand looking to their immediate and permanent suppression.
13. On the other hand, if you shall find that they are
unable to invest their prospective students with the knowl-
edge or the powers they advertise and guarantee, then your
trained intelligence will quickly grasp the salient fact that
these advertisements are but a cunning means to an illegiti-
mate end. They constitute an important link in the chain of
evidence, establishing the fact that these individuals and insti-
tutions are but so many individual and corporate criminals
engaged in the unlawful business of obtaining money by false
and fraudulent pretenses.
In this event every such advertisement sent through the
United States Mails constitutes evidence of a criminal offense
against the United States Government. The law and the ma-
chinery for its enforcement are both entirely adequate to pun-
ish all such criminals and suppress their evil practices, as soon
as the facts have been legally established.
Certainly no body of men in existence is so well equipped
to deal fairly and intelligently with this subject and the prob-
lems it involves as the American Bench and Bar. In the
spirit of the most profound reverence and respect your atten-
tion is called to it in the hope that this brief and concrete
presentation of the subject may, perhaps, suggest to you a
line of duty and responsibility hitherto unobserved.
Another interesting line of thought which is in a way
kindred to the subject under consideration is that which bears
upon a class of crimes with which you are already familiar.
It is a fact which the criminal statistics of the country will
fully support, that drunkenness is the most prolific single
cause of crime among our people.
376 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
But what is drunkenness as a psychological proposition?
It is the subjection of the intelligence to the effects of a phys-
ical stimulant.
While this definition is one which you might be disposed
to question at first view, its accuracy is well established by
the position which you, in your legal capacity, assume toward
the drunkard.
In those states and jurisdictions where drunkenness in it-
self is a crime, the drunkard is punished as a criminal for the
act of getting drunk. This is upon the perfectly rational
ground that even the drunkard (when sober) knows that it is
a crime to get drunk. In the face of this knowledge, how-
ever, he goes and drinks himself into a state of drunkenness,
well knowing the penalty therefor. Having knowingly and
intentionally violated the law, he is punished accordingly.
But wherever a drunkard commits other crimes which are
inspired by the influence of liquor over his intelligence and
volition, you apply a wholly different rule. In this case you
hold that to whatever extent the crime was inspired by the
influence of liquor over him, to that extent he should be re-
lieved from responsibility. This is upon the theory that he
did not act of his own free and rational volition. And the
rule is unquestionably correct.
The interesting phase of this proposition is in the fact that
in the case of drunkenness you recognize the principle of
domination and control, while in the case of hypnotism you
do not. In the one case it is a subjection of the intelligence
and volition of the individual to a physical stimulant. In the
other it is the subjection of the same intelligence to the domi-
nation and control of another intelligence. The only differ-
ence, so far as the process is concerned, is that in the one case
the dominating power proceeds from the physical plane, and
in the other it proceeds from the psychical plane.
In the one case, where the admitted cause of the crime is
an irresponsible, non-intelligent, physical substance called
liquor, you excuse the subject (drunkard) upon the ground
that the crime was inspired by the liquor and not by his own
intent. In the other, where the inspiring cause of the crime
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 377
is another intelligence, you refuse to excuse the subject upon
the assumption that he alone was guilty.
But, reduced to its simplest expression, what is the prin-
ciple involved? It is merely a matter of Self-Control, noth-
ing more, nothing less.
When the drunkard absorbs enough alcohol it takes pos-
session of his intelligence. In other words, it controls him.
In proportion as he is controlled by the stimulant he loses his
power of self-control. Just so with the hypnotic subject. In
proportion as he falls under the control of an outside intelli-
gence he also loses the power of self-control.
In proportion as the drunkard loses his power of self-con-
trol he also loses his sense of moral accountability and sinks
to the level of the animal. He becomes the plaything of his
own appetites, passions and desires, and is more a beast than
a man. The same thing, in a slightly modified form, is true
of the hypnotic subject.
This is why the principle of temperance (quite aside from
the question of expediency) is, in essence, superior to that
of prohibition. The man who is able to walk in the midst of
temptations and has reached that degree of self-control where
he is strong enough in his own right to live a clean life, is a
greater soul in every way than he who must depend upon
statutes to banish from his sight and reach the temptations of
life.
There are many palliatives for drunkenness, but there is
only one cure. That is the development of self-control suf-
ficient to withstand by his own efforts the allurements and
enticements of drink.
There is but one cure for hypnotic subjection. That is
likewise in the cultivation of the power of self-control suf-
ficient to withstand the assaults of all the hypnotists in the
world.
Whatever view of this subject you may obtain, it is one
which should command your immediate attention and enlist
your most earnest and intelligent consideration.
While the hypnotic subject, in the largest number of in-
stances, is a fit and proper object of commiseration and pity,
378 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
it must be remembered that he is but the logical and natural
result of professional hypnotism.
Although the criminal hypnotist who practices his insid-
ious art in secret and under cover of darkness is a menace to
society and a destructive agency more dangerous than pesti-
lence or famine, it must not be forgotten that he also is a
legitimate and sequential product of professional hypnotism.
Whilst the one is deserving of pity and the other of con-
demnation, neither must be held responsible for the initial
evil. They are both but the results of an educational training
received from the professional hypnotist or from the schools,
colleges and institutes whose advertisements carry the nox-
ious virus of moral leprosy into thousands of homes daily.
And these destructive results will continue to abide with us
so long as the cause which produces them the professional
hypnotist remains unabated.
Whatever legal solution of this great psychological prob-
lem you may, in the plenitude of your wisdom, hereafter for-
mulate, must of necessity be remedial and not merely pallia-
tive. To achieve permanent ethical results it must go to the
primary cause, the fountain head of the evil stream, if it
would check the ever swelling tide of infectious results.
And all this is entirely possible. Moreover, it may be done
without in the least infringing upon the rights or natural pre-
rogatives of individuals, or laying arbitrary and burdensome
restrictions upon those who are devoted to the cause of science
or to the conservation of the health or happiness of the people.
To you, gentlemen, naturally and rightfully belong the
honor and the labor of formulating a legal remedy which shall
successfully guard the present and future generations of our
beloved people against the destructive power of the most
seductive and insidious crime in the calendar of Nature, THE
GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME.
VIII.
To THE PHYSICIAN.
For more than six hundred years the wisest and best men
of the most progressive nations of earth have given their
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 379
lives and their energies to the development of medical science.
As a result they have evolved an empirical system which
should command the respect as well as the admiration of all
intelligent and unprejudiced students of science and patrons
of progressive education.
The crystallized results of all this noble work are but im-
perfectly shown in the materia medica of to-day with which
you are familiar and in accordance with which you have
wrought many beneficent results.
No one but the fanatic, the deliberately vicious or the ex-
ceedingly ignorant will ever condemn you for entertaining a
natural and modest pride in the merits of your profession
and in the exact knowledge upon which it is founded.
But materia medica, as the average member of your school
and profession knows and applies it, represents but one side
of the great three-sided problem of Therapeutics in general.
To such as these the existence of disease, as well as its cure,
is a purely physical proposition. It is therefore perfectly
natural and entirely consistent for them to limit their profes-
sional efforts to the purely physical aspect of the subject. In
truth, they recognize no other.
To those who understand the great problem in its three-
fold aspect the comparatively meager results obtained by the
strictly materialistic physician along purely conventional lines
are entirely consistent with the limited view-point from which
he proceeds.
But it is a matter of profound satisfaction to the School
of Natural Science that the brightest, most intelligent, stu-
dious and progressive members of your profession are be-
ginning to recognize both the spirituality and the psychology
of medicine. Some of you (not many, it is true) have not
only recognized the psychological aspect of disease and its
cure, but you have gone further and inquired into the funda-
mental principle which underlies the entire subject of Thera-
peutics. Some of you have gone far enough along these lines
to have demonstrated a number of interesting propositions not
heretofore known or recognized by the acknowledged "Regu-
lar" schools of medicine.
380 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
It is true that for reasons which appear entirely adequate
to you, those of your fellows who represent the conventional
average have not, as yet, been admitted to your confidence.
There are, perhaps, few men of the present generation in posi-
tion to so fully understand and appreciate, as does the writer,
the considerations which prompt you to silence concerning the
results of your researches. More than twenty years of unre-
mitting effort and personal experience, however, have taught
him the humiliating lesson from which your greater discretion
and sense of self-preservation have spared you.
But the hour is coming and is, in truth, now at hand, when
you must overstep the conventional barriers and limitations
of your profession far enough to come forward, shoulder your
own burden of individual responsibility and take your rightful
place in the ranks of the world's independent and courageous
workers and share with them both the labor and the honor, as
well as the criticism, if need be, of enlightening our brothers
who yet walk in darkness.
There is no individual living whose line of approach to
the homes and the confidence of his fellows is so direct and
so free from obstacles as yours. Your opportunities for good
are therefore paramount. For this reason your irresistible
influence is felt in every home throughout the land. For this
reason also you occupy a front rank among educators and
molders of public thought all over the civilized world. For
the same reason your profession, your position and your prac-
tice lay upon you a burden of individual responsibility far
greater than that which rests upon the average member of
society.
In view of these facts, with which you are already familiar,
you cannot afford to dogmatize. You cannot afford to set
conventional limitations upon the possibilities of human
achievement and human knowledge. You cannot afford to
stultify your own intelligence by fixing arbitrary limitations
for the operation of all human intelligence. Neither can you
afford to set yourself in opposition to a demonstrated fact of
science merely because it may not be recognized as such by
the particular school you happen to represent. To do so is
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 381
only to plant yourself squarely in front of the wheels of prog-
ress. You know the inevitable penalty for such indiscretion.
If not, it will require but a very brief reading of history to
disclose to you the fate of those who throughout the past have
thus attempted to stop the onward movement of civilization.
By reason of the peculiar relation of professional and per-
sonal confidence you sustain to your fellow men and women
it is your bounden duty to know whatever there is to be known
bearing upon the great problems of disease, death, health and
life. To do this you must not only be a representative of
your own particular school, but you must be as broad and as
comprehensive as all the schools of medicine and therapeutics
combined.
While the acknowledged intent of your profession and the
purpose of your individual life and work are constructive in
their nature, yet it is necessary for you to know with equal
exactness and certainty the Destructive Principle of Nature
in Individual Life. Your knowledge of the one implies also
your knowledge of the other. This is necessarily true in order
that you may be able to properly differentiate between de-
structive and constructive processes and agencies.
This fact is everywhere patent in the practice of your pro-
fession. It is admitted on every page of your acknowledged
medical authorities. In your study of medicines you find it as
necessary to know what drugs are destructive in their effects
as to know those that are remedial. Otherwise you are as
likely to administer a poison as a panacea, as liable to kill
as to cure.
The time is at hand when you must know the psychology
of your profession as well as its physiology. You must know
the destructive psychological process of Nature as well as the
constructive. You must know both in order that you may be
able to clearly and accurately differentiate between them.
This is an absolute necessity in order that you shall make no
mistakes in your application of them.
With this end in view, it is proper for you to know and
appreciate the fact that the designing hypnotist, in the name
of "science," has already abused the confidence you have re-
882 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
posed in him. By his subtle abuse of one of your most harm
less, familiar and appropriate scientific terms, the term "sug-
gestion," he has accomplished at least two false and fraudu-
lent ends, both of which reflect discredit upon your intelli-
gence as well as your integrity, and place you in a wholly false
position before the world.
1. By his subtle misapplication of the word "suggestion"
he would lead, and has actually led, the public to believe that
the thousands of wonderful cures wrought by you through
the natural and legitimate processes of normal, independent
suggestion are, in fact, all due entirely to hypnotism and the
processes of so-called hypnotic "suggestion."
This, as you well know, is as false as it is subtle. It is a
fallacy you cannot afford to tolerate if you prize your future
reputation for professional honor and personal integrity, for
the time is at hand when the truth must and will be known.
2. By his artful abuse of this same innocent and respect-
able word he makes it appear that every member of your pro-
fession who employs normal, independent suggestion in his
practice is a professional hypnotist engaged in the active prac-
tice of hypnotism.
He would convey to the innocent public (and has already
done so with telling effect) the impression that every simple
and normal suggestion employed by you to inspire in the
minds of your patients a therapeutic faith, is but another
phase of the black art by which he paralyzes the will and vol-
untary powers of his hypnotic subjects and makes them help-
less instruments of his dominant will and questionable desires.
He has even gone so far as to impress the thought upon the
minds of the unsophisticated that the healthful, spiritual and
physical magnetism which every advanced physician of to-day
carries into the sick room as a healthful influence, is but an-
other form of hypnotism or hypnotic "suggestion."
If you are not already familiar with these facts the inter-
ests of your profession as well as your individual interests
demand that you become so at once. The time has come when
they will meet you at every turn of your professional path-
way. They will be thrust upon your attention whether you
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 383
will it or not. In exact proportion as you come into posses-
sion of the facts and understand their meaning you will recog-
nize the equivocal position in which you and your profession
have been placed relative to the subjective, psychic process of
hypnotism.
In view of the facts here presented, together with such as
you may easily obtain independently, it may not be deemed
presumptuous to suggest the natural and proper remedy. It
is this : In all your public and private utterances, both pub-
lished and unpublished, set yourself the task and charge your-
self with the duty of hereafter clearly, explicitly and unmis-
takably differentiating at al! times between normal, inde-
pendent suggestion, which is at the basis of all therapeutic
faith, and hypnotism, which is under all conditions and cir-
cumstances a subjective, psychic process of the most destruc-
tive character. Make it clear that so-called hypnotic "sug-
gestion" is a misnomer and a libel and is at all times equiva-
lent to an "irresistible impulse or command."
Set yourself and your profession squarely and unequivo-
cally before the world as unalterably opposed to all subjec-
tive, psychic processes and practices, for the reason that they
are destructive in their essential nature and as such deprive
their subjects of the power of self-control as well as the abil-
ity to exercise those faculties, capacities and powers of the
soul upon which their individual responsibility depends.
If you have followed the text of this volume from the
beginning and have been impressed with its honesty and sin-
cerity, it is fair to assume that the subject of insanity presents
itself to you in a somewhat different aspect from that in which
your profession, generally speaking, has heretofore viewed it.
Although it is conceded that the view here presented may
not be, to you, professionally orthodox, nevertheless it is ear-
nestly hoped that the facts recorded will be deemed sufficient
to warrant at least a non-professional inquiry on your part
along the lines indicated.
If such should be the case, then for your especial benefit
in this connection it is here stated, for what it may be worth
to you, that under and in accordance with the exact methods
384 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
of Natural Science six hundred examinations have been made
of an equal number of so-called insane inmates of one of the
leading insane asylums of the country. Of the number thus
examined 349 were found to be in a subjective, psychic con-
dition, under the hypnotic domination and control of outside
spiritual intelligences. These were treated according to the
diagnoses in conformity with the methods of Natural Science.
The results show 349 cures. In other words, out of the entire
number treated not a single failure resulted.
This record speaks for itself. Indeed, it speaks more elo-
quently than all the theories, speculations, suppositions and
assumptions combined, which constitute so large a part of the
medical literature pertaining to the great general subject of
insanity. This statement is made without prejudice, for the
difficulties which surround and have accompanied the develop-
ment of this particular branch of medical science are fully un-
derstood and appreciated. As far as your specialists have
gone their wor has been most creditable in every particular.
In view of the record, however, it would appear to the
writer that whatever views you may entertain concerning the
causes of insanity in the 349 cases above referred to, the
record in itself is worthy of your thoughtful consideration.
The simple fact that all these cases were treated upon the
theory of hypnotic control by outside spiritual intelligences,
and the treatment prescribed was successful in every instance,
should be sufficient to establish in your professional mind the
reasonable presumption that the diagnoses were correct. Oth-
erwise the logic of facts is without meaning or value.
IX.
To MASTER MASONS.
What makes you a Mason?
The true Masonic answer to this crucial question indelibly
impresses itself upon the mind, memory and moral conscious-
ness of every just and upright Mason.
You who have pondered well its scope and its meaning
and have heeded the timely admonition of the Master, know
full well the responsibilities you assumed before God and man
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 385
and your own conscience when you voluntarily took upon
yourself the solemn and binding obligation of a Master
Mason.
But why should the writer of this particular volume thus
publicly approach you upon the level of your Masonic pro-
fession? By what right or benefit does he expect to gain ad-
mittance to your confidence or hope to enlist your active in-
terest, sympathy and co-operation in the noblest cause that
ever inspired the illumined soul of a Master Mason? Let
the sequel answer
From the dawn of civilization to the present moment, two
active and opposing forces have been engaged in deadly con-
flict over the destiny of human intelligence.
One of these has ever been the unfaltering, courageous and
consistent champion of individual life, individual liberty, and
individual happiness. The other has, with equal consistency
and persistency, sought to dominate and control the life, intel-
ligence and conscience of the individual and subject him to
intellectual bondage and servitude.
The one has openly fostered the spirit of freedom and in-
dependence as a basic principle of individual and organic
human life. The other has covertly sought to reduce the in-
dividual to the status of a mere instrument in the hands and
under the domination and control of an aggregate organic will
and design.
The one has dignified and emphasized the individual intel-
ligence and appreciated its value to both itself and society.
The other has persistently ignored the great fundamental fact
of Nature, that the individual in his own right, as such, is
invested with certain indefeasible attributes and certain in-
alienable rights, privileges and benefits which must be re-
spected.
The one has recognized the fact that man's value to him-
self as an individual is the only sure and true measure of his
value as an active, living factor in the social organism of
which he is a part. The other has proceeded as if upon the
assumption that man has but one value, namely, his value to
the great aggregate body of which he is a part, and that his
886 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
value, even in that capacity, is measured by the degree to
which his individual will, intelligence and conscience are sub-
ject to the domination and control of that aggregate body.
The one develops individual Intelligence, Courage and
Perseverance and a sense of Individual Responsibility through
the power and process of a broad and liberal education. The
other commands obedience and subjection through the power
of Ignorance, Superstition and Fear.
At the very cradle of humanity these two forces arrayed
themselves in an irrepressible conflict. At that point the
struggle began. From that point forward throughout all the
subsequent ages, even to the present time, it has continued
unabated. At no time within the limits of authentic history
has the conflict reached a more critical stage than in this, the
dawning of the twentieth Christian century.
And who are the contending parties to this vital conflict?
Broadly and abstractly speaking, they are Light and Dark-
ness, Truth and Falsehood, Construction and Destruction,
Life and Death, the Widow's Son and the Ruffians. But more
specifically and concretely, they are the two most powerful
organic bodies of intelligence upon earth, together with the
individual intelligences who have voluntarily arrayed them-
selves upon opposite sides of the two great principles involved
in the struggle.
But to what great organic bodies is reference here made?
It is sufficient at this time to state that one is the great organic
body of Masonry, together with the parent organization from
which it received its noble inspirations to Life, Liberty and
Happiness.
What, then, is your place in this conflict? Where do you
as an individual belong? Every just and upright Mason
knows the answer. Every true and loyal Brother knows his
place. Those whose privilege it is to walk within the sublime
radiance of the Three Great Lights can never become the
champions of Darkness, Falsehood, Death, Destruction or the
Ruffians. Your place is in the serried columns of Light,
Truth and Life, and beneath the radiant and glorious banner
of the Son.
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 387
In common with all your Brother Masons, you revere the
Order and the institution of Masonry, among other things,
for its great antiquity. But do you know the real origin of
this ancient Brotherhood? Perhaps not. Even the most
learned historians of the Order to-day confess their inability
to mark either the time or the place of its birth.
And yet the origin and the history of Masonry are known.
More than this, they are matters of record. The record is
authentic and unbroken. It is definite and certain. It runs
like a thread of golden light backward to the very infancy of
the human race.
Every Master Mason who has given the subject serious
thought, although unable to fix the date or the location of
its origin, has reached an unalterable conclusion. He has
become impressed with the strange and almost startling con-
sciousness that Masonry, in its present organic form, is but
a continuation, transformation or metamorphosis from a
more ancient organization whose records and history far an-
tedate all that is known today as exoteric.
No more perfect illustration of what we term "intuitive
knowledge" could be presented than this strange conscious-
ness concerning the origin and history of Masonry. For
it is indeed a fact that this mysterious intuition is but the
conscious recognition of a sublime truth whose radiance
has illumined the pathway of human liberty and human prog-
ress throughout the ages.
The Spirit of Masonry at every point in the journey of
human life has spread its beneficent influence, like a protect-
ing mantle, over the rights, duties, privileges, obligations and
liberties of mankind.
No more striking illustration of this sublime truth is
known to history than the spirit which everywhere manifests
itself in the familiar records upon which our own beloved
country depends for its organic national existence.
It was the Spirit of Freemasonry, as well as the Soul of
a great Mason, that injected into our Declaration of Inde-
pendence this sublime and living sentiment:
"We hold these truths to be self-evident: That all men
388 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
are created equal, that they are endowed by their Greater
with certain- unalienable Rights, that among these are Life.
Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness; that to secure thes*
rights Governments are instituted among men, deriving their
just powers from the consent of the governed ; that whenever
any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends
it is the Right of the People to alter or abolish it, and to in-
stitute new Government, laying its foundation on such prin
ciples, and organizing its powers in such form, as to there
shall seem most likely to effect their Safety and Happiness.''
It was the same Spirit, and a kindred intelligence, that
formulated these profoundly significant words constituting the
preamble of our National Constitution :
"We, the People of the United States, in Order to form a
more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tran-
quillity, provide for the common Defense, promote the gen-
eral Welfare and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves
and our Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution
for the United States of America."
It was the spirit of Freemasonry that unanimously
selected a great Mason as the first President to inaugurate
our government upon the time-honored Masonic principles of
Equity, Justice and Right, for the preservation and perpetu-
ation of individual human liberty.
At every point in the onward and upward progress of
our national evolution it has been the same broad, gracious
but uncompromising Spirit of Individual Liberty, together
with its unfaltering love of Human Freedom and its un-
quenchable thirst for Knowledge and Education, that has thus
far defeated the subtle and persistent efforts of opposing
forces to subvert and subordinate the power, the dignity and
the vitality of the State to ecclesiastical authority and control.
It has been and is the Spirit of Masonry, under the guid-
ing intelligence of a great Mason, aided and supported by a
devoted Craft, that for more than a quarter of a century has
held aloft the sacred ensign of Human Liberty over the homes
the people of our sister republic of Mexico.
Tn the same exalted Spirit from which the sublime Order
ADMONITIONS AND SUGGESTIONS 389
of Masonry has received its noble inspirations, and to the
unselfish devotion of those who are able to rise to the level
of this fundamental principle of Individual Liberty, present
and future generations of our beloved people must look for
the preservation and perpetuation of those inalienable rights
upon which the government of a free and enlightened people
must ever depend.
The body of this work has been devoted to an exposition
of the Great Psychological Crime, as it is exemplified in in-
dividual life by the subjective, psychic processes of Hypnot-
ism and Mediumship. The one specific purpose has been to
present to the reader as graphically as possible a definite out-
line of the Destructive Principle of Nature in Individual Life.
Of necessity, therefore, the subject has been limited almost
entirely to its aspect as an individual problem of human life.
Let it be distinctly understood, however, that the same
Destructive Principle of Nature by which one individual in-
telligence paralyzes the will and voluntary powers of another
may, in a more general form, be invoked by organic bodies of
individuals, if the purpose and intent be present and the aggre-
gate will to execute them be sufficient.
This great fact has been profoundly demonstrated through-
out the ages. It is written in letters of blood upon every page
of human history. It constitutes one of the most fascinating
problems of human life and human interest. It tempts the
willing mind to further and more specific revelations.
But the limitations of this work have been reached. The
task is finished. These prescribed limitations preclude fur-
ther exposition of or reference to the two great Spiritual
Schools, one of which has developed and the other dominated
human intelligence and conscience throughout the ages ; those
two great, silent, powerful and vitally antagonistic currents
which at their intersections have given to the world an Ex-
odus, a Crucifixion, an Inquisition, a Protestation and a Refor-
mation.
To ancient India and to Ancient Egypt clear, unbroken
pathways run, backward to the organized centers of Intellec-
390 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
tual Liberty on the one hand and Intellectual Bondage upon
the other.
The selfish and ambitious misapplication of knowledge and
the abuse of power are the unmistakable due guard and sign
of Egyptian Black Magic.
The applied principles of Fraternity, Equality and Human
Liberty have been and are the perpetual symbols of "The
Wise Men of the East," and the purity of their perfect con-
ception constitutes the spotless Badge of a Master Mason.
PAX VOBISCUM.
Cbeoriesor "Cfte Wise men
Supplementary
The Genesis of Dogma
If our modern scientific thinkers, investigators and writers
could be prevailed upon carefully to tabulate under separate
heads their "facts" and their "theories" and speculations con-
cerning those facts, it would materially simplify the work of
their students and readers and avoid the most prolific source
of confusion which prevails in almost every department of
scientific investigation and thought.
It is not in the spirit of hostility nor unfriendly criticism
that this suggestion is offered, but rather as a friendly ob-
servation from one who has often encountered the perplexing
difficulty referred to.
We all love to theorize and speculate upon the things that
are out beyond the range of our definite personal knowledge.
It is a part of our natures to do so. To many of us it takes
the place of intellectual recreation and entertainment. This is
more especially true among scientists and philosophers.
The scientist discovers what he recognizes as a "fact."
His mind at once demands to know its meaning and value.
If, perchance, it should lie outside the sequential line of those
facts with which he is already familiar, he studies it, reasons
upon it, speculates about it and theorizes over it until he
reaches a conclusion. No matter how remote that conclusion
may chance to be from the truth, if he is for the time being
satisfied with it, he is strongly impelled to give it to the world
along with the fact.
We all possess, to some extent, either consciously or other-
391
392 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
wise, a feeling of admiration for the man who discovers a fact
in Nature and gives it to the world. For this reason we are
much inclined to entertain favorably whatever theories he
may be impelled to present along with it.
Therefore, unless he is exceedingly explicit and thought-
ful of the manner in which he distinguishes his fact from his
theories and speculations concerning it, we who follow him
fail to differentiate between them.
As a natural result of these conditions, the vast body of
what we have been pleased to designate as "Science" is made
up of a comparatively few demonstrated facts, mixed with an
enormous quantity of theories, both wise and otherwise. This
excessive adulteration has produced a compound which defies
analysis and leaves the student in a state of almost hopeless
confusion.
It is the purpose of this work, as far as may be possible,
carefully to differentiate between the facts of science and the
theories of men concerning those facts. For this reason spe-
cial attention is called to the fact that in the preceding chap-
ters will be found only such matter as has been absolutely
demonstrated by Natural Science. The definite statements
and declarations therein contained may, therefore, be ac-
cepted and classified under the head of "Facts Demonstrated,"
upon which the reader is entitled to draw his own conclu-
sions and postulate as many theories as his intelligence may
be able to formulate.
The specific intent of this supplementary chapter is to out-
line as accurately and as carefully as possible a few of the
most important theories which the Wise Men of the ages on
both planes of life have formulated relative to some of the
facts stated in preceding chapters.
In order that there shall be no misapprehension nor un-
certainty in the mind of the reader, these theories will be con-
fined to a supplementary chapter by themselves, carefully
labeled as such at the beginning.
The only reason or excuse for presenting them at all in
connection with this work is that they will doubtless give to
the intelligent student a valuable suggestion as to the specific
lines of inquiry along which the most enlightened scientific
intelligence throughout the ages has been and still is moving.
In Part II, Chapter IV, paragraphs n and 12, it is stated
as an unqualified fact of science that animals, in the course
THE GENESIS OF DOGMA 393
of the years, disappear from the spiritual plane of the animal
kingdom, and that they do not reappear (at least in identical
or distinguishable form) upon any of the planes of spiritual
life which are distinctively related to this particular planet.
The natural inquiry of every intelligent mind is, "What
becomes of them?" The inquiry thus far remains unan-
swered so far as science is concerned. The Wise Men of
both the physical and spiritual planes of life have brought to
bear upon the problem all the knowledge and intelligence they
possess. Thus far, however, the scientific demonstration lies
beyond the limits of their understanding.
With a view to its possible solution, however, the follow-
ing widely different hypotheses have been made the bases of
their study and investigation:
FIRST HYPOTHESIS.
It is assumed that the disappearance is but a transition in
the upward movement of the individual ego, or entity, in its
evolutionary progress toward a higher state of individualized
intelligence and being.
This theory involves the process of metempsychosis or
transmigration, through the operation of which the animal
ego is supposed to be transferred from the spiritual plane to
the physical organism of a higher order of life and intelli-
gence upon the physical plane. Here again it undergoes the
progressive processes of physical growth, development, ma-
turity, decline, old age and death, at which last named point
it returns again to the spiritual plane one round higher in the
evolutionary process.
Again, it is supposed to disappear from the spiritual plane
and reappear in a higher order of physical life, only to go
through the same process of physical growth, development,
maturity, decline, old age, decay and death and reappear-
ance upon the spiritual plane of animal life, each time repre-
senting a higher order of individualized intelligence and
being.
This evolutionary process is supposed to continue until
the highest form of individualized animal intelligence disap-
pears from the spiritual plane of animal life, only to make its
appearance upon the physical plane in the lowest form of
human life and intelligence.
394: THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
At this point in the evolutionary process involuntary
metempsychosis, or transmigration, is supposed to cease and
voluntary "reincarnation" begin.
To the foregoing general theory, or working hypothesis,
the reader will be able to trace a number of the most con-
spicuous and interesting tenets of both theology and science
as well as of ancient philosophies.
For illustration:
1. We have the doctrine of the transmigration of souls.
This doctrine, as it has appeared from time to time upon the
physical plane, is evidently referable to the foregoing theory,
or working hypothesis of the Wise Men, concerning the disap-
pearance of the animal from the spiritual plane of animal
life. But it has also undoubtedly become confused with, or
modified by, that other general theory of the Wise Men con-
cerning the disappearance of man from the lowest plane of
his spiritual life, to which theory reference will be made
further on.
This is suggested as a most natural conclusion for the
reason that the doctrine of transmigration, as it is generally
expounded upon the earth plane, does not stop with the ani-
mal, but also includes man. That is to say, under this par-
ticular form of that doctrine it is generally held that the soul
of man also may, at physical death, enter the physical or-
ganism of an animal, and that such an act is not necessarily
a retrograde movement on the part of the intelligent entity.
A still further corruption of the original theory is found
in the doctrine, or assumption, that transmigration always
occurs at the instant of physical dissolution, and at no other
time.
2. The doctrine of Transubstantiation is doubtless also
referable to the same general source. Under this doctrine the
Catholic Church has formulated the dogma that, in their cele-
bration of the sacrament of the Lord's Supper, the literal sub-
stance of the body and the blood of Christ enters into the
bread and wine used in the sacramental service.
3. The doctrine of "Reincarnation," as it is held and ad-
vocated by the exponents of Theosophy and some of the more
ancient philosophies, is but another phase of the same gen-
eral hypothesis applied to man in his evolutionary progress
upon the spiritual planes of life.
The various exponents of this doctrine have developed a
THE GENESIS OF DOGMA 395
most clever and forcible array of argument, which is both
interesting and instructive, and is not easily avoided by those
who hold to a different theory. It may not be improper to
state in this connection that the analogies of science on both
planes of life seem to support it, and some of the seeming
mysteries of intellectual inequality among men appear to be
accounted for by it.
Indeed, there are intelligences upon the spiritual planes
of life who assert with unqualified assurance that reincarna-
tion is a fact of Nature. There are also a few upon the phys-
ical plane who claim to have fully demonstrated its truth.
But whatever the fact may be, it is at least to the great ma-
jority of our western civilization but a beautiful, in-
genious and interesting theory. And thus it will remain, so
far as this work is concerned.
4. On the purely physical plane the doctrine of the phys-
ical evolution of man from the plane of animal Nature would
seem to be but another expression of the same general hypoth-
esis. The search for the "Missing Link" in the upward
movement of organic, physical evolution has been a search
made upon the theory that man is but an ape evolved.
Upon the structural side of organic, physical life, more
especially, this theory is strongly supported by an array of
scientific data which no student of Nature can afford to ig-
nore. But up to this time even the evolution of man's phys-
ical structure from that of the animal is held, by able expo-
nents of physical science, to be nothing more than a "working
hypothesis."
SECOND HYPOTHESIS.
The second general hypothesis of the Wise Men and of
Natural Science holds that the disappearance of the animal
from the spiritual plane is, indeed, all that it appears to be,
namely, total disintegration, dissolution and a resolution of
the animal entity back into Nature's elements, from which it
came. This, of course, means total extinction of the animal
as a separate, distinct and individualized entity.
At first view this hypothesis would appear to be in direct
conflict with the very essence of the evolutionary principle.
But a further study and analysis of the subject show that
such is not the case, as the following suggestions will clearly
indicate :
The facts of Nature on all the planes of life, so far as
396 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
the Wise Men have been able to observe them, everywhere
suggest to the student of Natural Science the operation of
what appears to be a Universal Intelligence. The forces, ac-
tivities and processes of Nature, as far as we are able to
follow their workings, appear to indicate a conformity to
universal principles. Back of these seemingly universal prin-
ciples the human intelligence searches in vain for the motive
power or intelligence which formulates and operates them.
Notwithstanding our confessed inability to locate, cir-
cumscribe, define or identify the great Universal Intelligence
which inspires and guides the forces, activities and processes
of Nature, our individual intelligence intuitively recognizes
its existence as a fundamental fact.
In so far as we have been able to trace the history of man
there never has been a time when human intelligence has
failed to sense that which to man has meant a Universal In-
telligence. Even the professed disbeliever betrays his intui-
tive recognition of this Universal Intelligence in the very pro-
fanity he employs to emphasize his disbelief.
Although we are unable to locate, circumscribe, define or
identify it, we all, nevertheless, have a name for it. Some call
it "God." Others designate it as the "Father." Some name
it "Law." Others term it "Nature." Some there are who
give it other names. Others of us express our conception of
it more fully in the term "Universal Intelligence."
Under this second general hypothesis, in all this upward
movement of Nature we name "evolution," Universal Intelli-
gence is engaged in the process of individualizing intelligence.
The one object or purpose of this individualizing process, as it
appears, is ultimately to evolve an order of intelligence which
shall possess the knowledge and the power of indefinite self-
perpetuation which is known to science as Individual Immor-
tality.
In the animal organism Nature has not yet reached a point
in the evolutionary process where the entity possesses that
power. As a natural result the animal disappears from the
spiritual plane of animal life in response to the law of its
being, and, if the hypothesis be true, is resolved back into
Nature's elements from which it came.
If this be true, the student is ready to ask, What, then, is
the purpose of all the gradations of animal life, running from
the amoeba to the anthropoid ape ?
THE GENESIS OF DOGMA 397
The answer in brief is, that in all this multiplicity of
animal life, running through all its varied gradations, from
the lowest to the highest, we see only the mechanics of a
stupendous plan by and through which Universal Intelli-
gence refines and raises the vibratory activity of matter on
both planes of life, until it is capable of co-ordination with the
Soul Element of Nature, which is individualized in man alone.
For a full consideration of the principle and process in-
volved in the upward movement of evolution through all the
kingdoms of Nature, the reader is referred to "Harmonics of
Evolution," Vol. I of the Harmonic Series, Chapter VI.
In the chapter referred to, under the heading of "The
Genesis of Physical Life," the facts of Natural Science which
have a direct bearing upon this hypothesis are given with
such clearness and detail that the reader cannot fail to grasp
their significance and appreciate their scientific value.
THIRD HYPOTHESIS.
In Part II of this volume, Chapter IV, paragraphs 19 to
22, inclusive, under the head of "Facts Demonstrated," it is
stated that man disappears from the lowest plane of his spir-
itual life by either one of two different processes, and in re-
sponse to the operation of two different and opposite princi-
ples, viz. :
1. Under the constructive principle and process of evolu-
tion, growth, development and progress, only to appear upon
a higher plane, etc.
2. Under the opposite principle and process of destruc-
tion or devolution he also disappears in a manner which cor-
responds, in every essential particular, with the disappearance
of the animal.
It is also stated that in this second case he does not reap-
pear (at least in identical or distinguishable form), upon
any of the higher planes of spiritual life which are distinc-
tively related to this particular planet.
The question of his destiny as an individual intelligence
in this case is a matter of even more absorbing and vital in-
terest to those who have undertaken its solution, than is the
destiny of the animal.
But here again Nature seems to hold a secret which defies
the detective powers of the wisest intelligences of both planes
398 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
of life. No satisfactory solution of the great problem has
yet been wrought out.
It is true, however, that many facts bearing upon various
phases of the subject are known, and a vast amount of data
has been accumulated. Indeed, it would doubtless be a mat-
ter of interest and profound wonderment to those who are
not already familiar with the subject to follow the lines of in-
vestigation and examine the facts and the data that have been
gathered and classified. The limitations of this work, how-
ever, forbid the opening of so vast a field of speculative in-
terest.
Nevertheless, it is both relevant and proper to note briefly
the fact that here also two working hypotheses or theories
have been formulated, and that the facts and the data above
referred to bear more or less directly upon the one or the
other.
The first of these holds that man may, of his own voli-
tion, pursue a deliberate course of retrogression in conformity
with the Destructive Principle of Nature in Individual Life,
until he reaches that point in the downward path toward spir-
itual darkness, where he disappears as does the animal. But,
according to the theory here under consideration, this fact
does not necessarily involve his individual extinction or dis-
solution as an individual intelligence or entity. On the other
hand, it is held that he simply falls below the point of co-
ordination with the Soul Element of Nature, thereby loses
his independent, self-conscious and rational volition, and re-
verts to the plane of animal life.
Here he begins again the evolutionary struggle under the
guiding wisdom and power of Universal Intelligence, until
once again he reaches the plane of human life. Here he again
co-ordinates with the Soul Element of Nature, is reinvested
with an independent, self-conscious and rational volition and
given another opportunity to choose between the two alterna-
tives of evolutionary progress on the one hand or devolution-
ary retrogression on the other. It is still within his power
to choose the downward path. If so, and he persists in that
choice, he must again descend to the plane of animal life and
begin anew the evolutionary struggle under the guiding direc-
tion of Universal Intelligence.
This process is supposed to be repeated as often as may be
necessary to develop in him the natural desire for the higher
THE GENESIS OF DOGMA
life, after which he proceeds of his own voluntary choice on
the upward course of individual self -development to that celes-
tial destiny of individual attainment and power which lies be-
yond the limits of our present understanding.
FOURTH HYPOTHESIS.
The opposite hypothesis holds that no matter from what
heights man may descend, if he persist in his downward flight
until he loses his independent, self-conscious and rational voli-
tion, under the law of his being he thereby forever forfeits the
power of self -perpetuation and Individual Immortality.
In this case his disappearance from the spiritual plane
means to him precisely what it means to the animal under the
Second Hypothesis, namely, disintegration, dissolution, indi-
vidual extinction and a resolution back into Nature's elements
from which he came.
This fourth general hypothesis of Natural Science is
deeply interesting in itself. But it becomes doubly so when
considered in the light of theological dogmatism concerning
the extreme penalty for sin.
It is well known that theologians widely differ in their
views concerning the ultimate destiny of the persistent sinner.
Their differences hinge, in a general way, upon their various
understandings and conceptions of man's immortality.
Without taking into account the intermediate shadings,
there are two general, theological dogmas concerning the im-
mortality of the Soul, which, briefly stated, are as follows:
1. That man is inherently, intrinsically and essentially
immortal. That he is so created. That immortality is a
primary and essential property or characteristic of his indi-
vidual being. That whether saved or lost, in a religious
sense, he is in either event immortal and therefore can never
die nor lose his individuality.
From this particular conception of the soul's immortality
naturally follows the doctrine of eternal happiness for the
saved, and never ending torture for the damned.
2. On the other hand, it is held that the soul is not in-
herently and essentially immortal, but that it may become so
by conforming to the law of God or Nature upon which
individual immortality depends.
In other words, under this theological conception man's
immortality comes to him as the gift of God. It is the reward
400 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
of his obedience to God's commands. Or, from the phil-
osophic standpoint, it comes to him as the natural result of
his own personal effort. It is the logical and necessary result
of his obedience to the constructive principle of Nature which
is the law of individual life.
From this conception of the soul's immortality it follows
that the man who does not earn it, or who does not receive it
as a gift from God, is necessarily a mere mortal and nothing
more. In this case when death overtakes him he goes down
to the grave, is eaten by the worms of the earth, his spirit as
well as his body is resolved back into Nature's elements, and
he perishes forever.
In this view of the subject, "The Wages of Sin is Death,"
and death in this case means total, individual extinction.
In closing this chapter the reader is once more reminded
that it is a chapter of "theories" only. In it four general
hypotheses have been briefly but carefully stated. They are
presented without comment for what they may be worth. No
attempt has been made to prejudice the mind in favor of
or against any of them. On the contrary, it is suggested that
even those who have at command all the facts and all the data
thus far accumulated bearing upon the subject are still with-
holding judgment.
These four theories are here presented merely as a sug-
gestion concerning the particular lines of thought and inquiry
which have engaged the attention of those students of Natural
Science who have endeavored to solve the great and absorb-
ing problem of the ultimate destiny of animal and degenerate
human life and intelligence.
About these four theories cluster an almost endless num-
ber of religious and philosophic speculations, opinions and
beliefs which have occupied the minds of theologians and
laymen, physical scientists and their students, philosophers
and thinkers all down the ages, so far as we are able to fol-
low the authentic history of civilization.
A few of the more conspicuous of these innumerable opin-
ions and beliefs have also been stated, and their relation to
the fundamental hypotheses of Natural Science suggested.
These, it is hoped, will be of value, in that they may, in some
measure, lead to a clearer understanding and appreciation of
the manner in which a perfectly legitimate scientific hypothe-
THE GENESIS OF DOGMA 401
sis may be made the basis of innumerable religious dogmas
and philosophic speculations which only serve to confuse the
minds and warp the lives of the unscientific and the ignorant.
IN CONCLUSION.
The author desires to say that the central purpose of this
volume has been merely to erect guide-posts at the crossings
and the partings of the ways which lead, upon the one hand,
to Life, Light, Liberty and Immortality, and upon the other
to Bondage, Darkness, Disintegration and Death.
It is intended only as an exposition of that which we
escape by the power and the exercise of an intelligent Self-
Control over the individual life.
Another volume will be given to the more inspiring theme
of individual achievement under and in accordance with the
same principle of Self-Control, the principle of MASTERSHIP
in Individual Life.
END OF VOL. II.
402 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
Editor's Postscript
THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME stands for a definite
knowledge and a definite personal experiment, experience and
demonstration, or it stands for nothing, and is of less value
than its material make-up.
The subject matter of this volume and the ethics involved
have a basis in Nature, in specific fact, in a definite school of
learning and in an exact science, or the work as a whole is but
the play of an unchained imagination and evidence of a de-
ficient moral sense.
When an author passes from the familiar field of mere
theory and speculation into the domain of unqualified state-
ment, he places himself in a new relation to his audience, and
is entitled to a different character of attention and investiga-
tion assuming, of course, that he expresses himself in con-
formity with our common standards of sanity and good litera-
ture.
It is one of the mysteries of the human mind that the world,
generally speaking, treats the theorist with far greater hospi-
tality than it does the demonstrator. This is particularly true
in that field we have come to designate as "Psychical Re-
search." More popular credence has been given to a mere
"working hypothesis" recently formulated by a voluminous
theorist concerning the "Law of Psychic Phenomena" than to
the accumulated and combined statements of thousands of
honest psychics who for many years have proclaimed a per-
sonal demonstration of the continuity of individual life.
The theorist, however, has his place and his mission.
Though he more frequently serves merely as a guide-post to
the wrong direction, it sometimes occurs that the dreamer or
speculator is the forerunner and prophet of the real scientist
and the actual demonstrator.
The world is debtor to whomsoever passes on a really
original idea or concept or plan that appears feasible, but when
a man claims to have conducted a successful experiment, or to
have made a personal demonstration, or to have gained an un-
usual knowledge bearing upon questions vital to human des-
EDITOR'S POSTSCRIPT 403
tiny he is entitled to a critical investigation by the best in-
telligence of his day, by the recognized schools of science and
by the conservators of public morals.
Fifty years ago, when Bulwer's masterpieces, "Zanoni"
and "A Strange Story," appeared, they were accepted at their
face value by his conventional world; that is to say, as weird
fiction, having no higher purpose than to exploit their author's
genius, and no deeper meanings than to furnish entertainment
for mere lovers of romance.
It was neither perceived nor suspected that Bulwer had
received a personal instruction, and had achieved a peculiar
knowledge that inspired his powerful and picturesque pen to
a character of literature that has not ceased to puzzle and
delight his readers.
The real purposes and the real meanings which run
through these works are clearly discernible to another of the
same school. To another of that "August Fraternity" of
whom that scholarly Englishman so reverently wrote, the
common Alma Mater is vividly disclosed by a familiar code
of sign, symbol and principle. Another of the same instruc-
tion knows to a certainty the work of the Entered Apprentice.
As a matter of fact, these two singular romances are care-
fully veiled expositions of the two oldest and most powerful
centers of spiritual knowledge extant. They are, indeed, rev-
elations of the loftiest pursuits and the most malign practices
known to human intelligence.
Were there no other material evidence in existence than
these two volumes themselves, the record of Bulwer's school-
ing is indisputably bound up in his works. To those who
have the key these marvelous romances stand for true spirit-
ual development and for hypnotic subjection, for Light and
for Darkness for India and for Egypt.
After fifty years another attempt is being made, less
guarded, perhaps, but more definite, to throw additional light
upon the same general subject.
While the world of liberal thought has enlarged its bor-
ders since Bulwer wrote, there still remain almost insurmount-
404 THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME
able obstacles in the path of those who have been privileged
to learn and are willing to share their gains with the world.
Fifty years ago a dogmatic theology and the limited data of
physical science barred the way to any rational public con-
sideration of psychic phenomena, or of published personal
experiences and demonstrations in this particular field. At
that time no properly instructed student of Natural Science
could have delivered his message to an Anglo-Saxon audience
except under skilful disguise.
Even to-day, with its broadened outlook, any adequate
published exposition of the knowledge, methods and purposes
of the great Spiritual School must encounter many perplexi-
ties.
While religious intolerance is less, individual skepticism
has increased, and it would almost appear as if the old dog-
matic spirit of theology had transmigrated to the vigorous
and enlarged body of physical science.
Still other conditions shadow this specific educational
movement, conditions which furnish more problems than mere
indifference or skepticism or dogmatism.
When, by concerted effort, the silent, unseen forces set in
motion this New Thought wave, there was at the same time
made the condition and the opportunity for bringing to the
surface all the debris of the deeps. Just as the troubled ocean
casts its driftwood and seaweed to the surface, so this pro-
found psychical impulse has called to the social surface such
a company of "inspired revelators" and "seers" and "proph-
ets" and "Messiahs," and such an array of metaphysical
"cults," "orders" and "movements," as to threaten obscura-
tion of the actual science and philosophy of the real powers
whose directing intelligence gave the initial impulse.
The one imminent and embarrassing possibility that sug-
gests itself with every public utterance or publication of the
School of Natural Science is that its aims and purposes are
likely to be confused with the manifold claims of "inspired"
leaders, or with the unintelligible ecstasies of professional
"mystics," or with the commercial crusades of therapeutical
theologies.
The work in view, of which the Harmonic Series is a part,
is none of these. The gradual development of the science
and philosophy of this series does not rest upon claims of "in-
EDITOR'S POSTSCRIPT 405
spiration." This work is not in the material interests of any
individual or organization. The School of Natural Science
is not conducting an ambitious "movement," nor operating a
commercial cult. It is not soliciting a material support on be-
half of any "advanced" project. It is not selling instruction,
nor seeking any character of personal leadership. It does not
anticipate great popular interest nor an undue share of public
attention and favor.
It has been just twenty years since the inception of this
work in this country, and all this time has been consumed by
the author of this volume in overcoming the perplexities and
prejudices and materialities that have barred the way to a
direct public or published presentation of his individual work.
The Harmonic Series, now in process of publication, is
intended as a bridge between the definite, demonstrated and
recorded data of the historical Spiritual School of Science and
the definite, discovered and published data of the modern
physical school.
When completed this Series will constitute The Philosophy
of Individual Life, as taught to-day by the School of Nat-
ural Science in conformity with all of the demonstrated
knowledge of all the schools.
While the Series, as a whole, will represent a joint literary
task, it is not, however, a work of collaboration, as each vol-
ume of the Series will represent the individuality of its par-
ticular author and maintain its distinction of theme, scope
and literary treatment.
In this particular instance the editor has no other part in
THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME than merely to relieve the
author of all details of publication and preserve the continuity
and relationship of the two published volumes of the Har-
monic Series.
March, 1903. THE EDITOR.
THE HARMONICS OF EVOLUTION
By Florence Huntley
Volume 1. The Harmonic Series
This initial volume of Natural Science covers that uni-
versal principle of the individual Love relation in nature
which operates through the mineral, vegetable, animal
and human kingdoms.
The philosophy taught in this authorized volume
means the dawning of a "New Day" in the intellectual
and ethical evolution of the world.
Mrs. Huntley has sensed the very soul of mankind,
understands its yearnings for whatDrummond names
"the greatest thing in the world, LOVE". She points
out the pitfalls into which so many are continually
falling, and erects guide-posts by the way which, if heeded,
lead safely through the Acre, out into the hereafter.
To those who contemplate taking upon themselves
the responsibilities of married life, as well as to all who
have done so, this book will be a priceless pearl, to read,
re-read, and read again ; then heed, re-heed and heed
again.
"HARMONICS of EVOLUTION" should be a part
of every home where dwells one thought above the
transitory, evanescent, sordid things of this life.
It opens the portals of the soul to a knowledge of the
fact that this [life [has immeasurable possibilities and
endless consequences which do not exist or obtain in
the spiritual spheres.
A study of the philosophy set forth in this volume we
are confident will repay you or anyone else for the time
devoted thereto. It is a book to present to a friend,
to take with you on a journey, to read in the family circle;
in short, it is a "traveling companion" in Book form.
Bound in Interlaken, maroon-colored cloth.
Price $2.00 postpaid.
THE GREAT WORK
By TK
Volume 111. The Harmonic Series
This book is also from the pen of the author of "the
great psychological crime", and is a presentation, analysis
and elucidation of the fundamental principle and working
formulary of the Great School of Natural Science, which
principle and formulary are known to the "Masters of
the Law" and their students and friends as the "con-
structive principle of nature in individual life."
The author of "The Great Work" is the American
Representative of the great school of natural science, a
School which was hoary with age when the foundation of
the great Pyramid was laid; a School which ante-
dates all present authentic history and records; a School
against which the waves of superstition and ignorance
have dashed in vain, because its foundation is the rock
of TRUTH.
To the intelligent freemason as well as the general
reader this book is invaluable, for it puts before him facts
in the history of that Ancient Order which heretofore
have been "buried in the rubbish o) the temple."
"The great work" is unique in that its statements
are verified facts which every reader may prove for him-
self under right guidance if he but have the "Intelligence
to know, the Courage to dare, and the Perseverance to
do." The Philosophy taught in this book appeals to both
Reason and Conscience, and is an inspiration to "live the
life and know the law" Every student realizes that, if he
so wills, he may be an heir to the Wisdom of the Ages.
The Great Work belongs in your Library.
Bound in maroon Interlaken cloth.
Price $2.00 Postpaid.
BRIDGING THE GREAT DIVIDE
between
THE PHYSICAL AND SPIRITUAL WORLDS
By A. Sophomore
A Clergyman, who is also a Psychical Researcher and
Natural Scientist.
This is a very remarkable book to be written by a
Clergyman, who, while "intuitively believing in immor-
tality of the Soul, was not cognizant of any Scientific
possibility that could raise this belief to a demonstrable
certainty."
"Fortunately, however," as he says, he "was saved
from making this humiliating statement, as an ulti-
matum of his researches, when his attention was di-
rected to the volumes of the HARMONIC SERIES,
wherein the bold assertion is made 'Life after Physical
Death is a fact Scientifically Demonstrable.'"
This book should be read by every seeking Soul.
It is beautifully gotten up. Bound in wine colored In-
terlaken Cloth. Gold stamped. Indexed, and contains
262 pages of closely written matter.
Price $1.00 Postpaid.
THE QUESTION BOX
A SERIES OF QUESTIONS IN NATURAL SCIENCE
ANSWERED BY TK
Author of
"THE GREAT PSYCHOLOGICAL CRIME"
"THE GREAT WORK," Etc.
This beautiful Volume is a compilation, in concrete
form, of the many answers to questions propounded by
readers and Students of the Text Books of the Harmonic
Philosophy, and answered by the TK in Life and Action.
We believe it will be appreciated by the Readers,
Friends and Students of the Work everywhere.
The book is beautifully bound in Interlaken cloth.
Gold Stamped. Indexed, and contains 217 pages of
solid reading matter.
Price $1.00 Postpaid.
It gives us pleasure to announce the fact that
we have completed an arrangement with one
whom we believe to be the most artistic book-
binder in Chicago, to be bound in de luxe form,
100 copies of the THREE-IN-ONE, Vols. 1, 11
and 1 1 1 , of the Harmonic Series, under one cover.
These will be bound in genuine PERSIAN
MOROCCO (Oxford Bible Style), the edges
overlapping, to protect the " red -under-gold "
edges of the book.
It will be printed on French Japan paper,
and the HALF-TONES on French Japan plate.
Black-water end sheets, ROUND corners, SILK
head bands and SILK markers, English thread
sewed, Genuine Gold Stamped "PHILOSOPHY
OF NATURAL SCIENCE," and, if desired, the
NAME of the purchaser stamped in GENUINE
GOLD on the cover.
This complete THREE-IN-ONE beautiful
de luxe book will be sent in strong box and
sold for $12.00, post paid.
JBaltrr Walrfj
This is an English publication and sets forth the
various attempts of the Roman Catholic Church to
Romanize the Protestant Episcopal Church and how
far it has succeeded in accomplishing its purpose.
This book is, doubtless, the most exhaustless
treatise on this now vital topic ever written.
It contains ten chapters and 293 pages. It gives
the history of
The Society of the Holy Cross.
The Secrecy of the Ritualistic Confessional.
The Secret History of "The Priest in Absolution."
The Order of Corporate Reunion.
The Confraternity of the Blessed Sacrament.
Ritualistic Sisterhoods.
Some other Ritualistic Societies.
The ROMEWARD Movement, etc., etc., etc.,
The book is bound in cloth and sells for $1.00, post
paid.
THE CRUCIFIXION
By an Eye-Witness
Volume ]]. Supplemental Harmonic Series
No book in recent years, regarding the Life and Work
of the Master, Jesus, has provoked so much comment
and discussion as this little book.
The story of the "crucifixion" is told by a
friend of J esus, an eye-witness to this historic event. The
book is intensely interesting and holds the reader's at-
tention to the end.
Besides giving a succinct account of the Crucifixion,
it reviews the beliefs, duties and aspirations of the
"Order of Essenes" of the childhood and youth of the
Master, his initiation into the Order of which his Father
and his Cousin John were also members.
It sets forth the parentage of Jesus, Joseph's flight into
Egypt with his family; the child's visit to the temple;
how he became lost; and finally, the incidents leading up
to the Crucifixion a marvelous bit of Word-painting;
the resustication of Jesus after being taken from the
cross; his later travels and his final death some six
months after the historic tragedy on Calvary.
This little book ( to us) comes far more nearly giving a
rational and intelligent report of the incidents in the life
of Jesus than does the Bible.
Doubtless there are some discrepancies in the minor
details, because Historians in any age are liable to err;
but in a large general sense it appears to us undoubtedly
true.
It cannot fail to interest you.
Bound in Interlaken cloth. Price $1.00 Postpaid.
PRICE LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF
THE 1NDO-AMER1CAN BOOK COMPANY
5707 West Lake St., Chicago, 111.
. . Harmonics of Evolution Cloth $2.00
*. Harmonics of Evolution Flexible Morocco 3.50
. .The Great Psychological Crime. Cloth 2.00
* The Great Psychological Crime. Flexible Morocco 3.50
. .The Great Work Cloth 2.00
* The Great Work Flexible Morocco 3.50
. .THREE-IN-ONE Morocco, Oxford Style 12.00
. . Questions on Natural Science . . Half leather 2.00
. . Key to Questions on Natural Science Leather . . 1 .00
. . The Genius of Freemasonry . . . .Cloth 1 .00
. .The Crucifixion by an Eyewitness Cloth 1.00
. . Constructive Psychology Cloth 1 .00
. .The Unknown Lifeof Jesus Christ Cloth 1.00
. . Mystic Masonry Cloth 1 .00
..The Reality of Matter Cloth 1.00
. .Modern World Movements . . . .Cloth 1 .00
. .The Bible in India Cloth 2.00
. .A Study of Man Cloth 1.50
. . The Dream Child Gift Edition.Cloth 1 .00
. .The Gay Gnani of Gingalee Cloth 1.00
. .Who Answers Prayer? Cloth 50
. .The Lost Word Found Cloth 50
. THE QUESTION BOX (New) Cloth 1 .00
. . LIFE AND ACTION, subscription, 1 2 numbers . . 1 .00
. . Yols. 1-2-3-4-5 Life and Action, each 1.00
. . Yols. 1 -2-3-4-5, and two years, Sub. to L-A 5.75
. .BRIDGING THE GREAT DIVIDE (New) Cloth 1 .00
. . Zanoni and Zicci Special Edition 1.00
. .A Strange Story Cloth 1.00
. .The New Avatar Cloth 2.00
. .The Soul and Sex in Education Cloth 1 .25
. .HARMONIC BIRTHDAY BOOK Leather 2.00
. .FACING THE 20th CENTURY Cloth 2.00
. .SECRET HISTORY OF THE OXFORD MOIEMENT (New) 1.00
. .The Great Pyramid Jeezeh. . . .Cloth 2.50
*Note These three morocco bound books $10.00
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any
University of California Library
or to the
NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station
University of California
Richmond, CA 94804-4698
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
2-month loans may be renewed by calling
(415)642-6233
1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books
to NRLF
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days
prior to due date
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
VB 22900
.*. ^UNIVERSITY OP CALIFORNIA LIBRARY